HP-LaserJet E825xx, Service Enww PDF

HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560
Service Manual
Copyright and License Trademark Credits
© Copyright 2017 HP Development Company, Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are

L.P. trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP, and

prior written permission is prohibited, except as Windows Vista® are U.S. registered trademarks
allowed under the copyright laws. of Microsoft Corporation.
The information contained herein is subject to ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are
change without notice. registered U.S. marks.
The only warranties for HP products and

services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not
be liable for technical or editorial errors or
omissions contained herein.
Edition 1, 04/2017
Conventions used in this guide
TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.
NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.
CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product.
WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.
ENWW iii
iv Conventions used in this guide ENWW
Table of contents
1 Precautions ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1
Safety warning .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
Caution for safety ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Toxic material ....................................................................................................................................................... 3
Electric shock and fire safety precautions ....................................................................................................... 3
Handling precautions .......................................................................................................................................... 5
Removal and Replacement precautions .......................................................................................................... 5
Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury ........................................................................................ 5
ESD precautions ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7
2 Product specifications and description ................................................................................................................................................. 9

Product overview ................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Specifications .......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
General specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 11
Print specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 13
Scan specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 16
Copy specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 17
Supplies ............................................................................................................................................................... 19
Maintenance parts ............................................................................................................................................. 20
Paper handling specifications .......................................................................................................................... 22
Network and software specifications ............................................................................................................. 28
Network interface ......................................................................................................................... 28
Software and solutions ................................................................................................................ 29
Options ................................................................................................................................................................ 31
Optional configurations ............................................................................................................... 31
Options list ..................................................................................................................................... 32
Option specifications .................................................................................................................... 33
Machine external view ........................................................................................................................................................... 37
Front view ........................................................................................................................................................... 37
Rear view ............................................................................................................................................................ 38
Inner view ............................................................................................................................................................ 39
Feeding system ...................................................................................................................................................................... 40
ENWW v
Feeding system overview ................................................................................................................................ 40
Main components and functions ..................................................................................................................... 41
Rollers ............................................................................................................................................. 41
Sensor, motor, and solenoid ....................................................................................................... 43
Cassette .............................................................................................................................................................. 45
Pickup unit .......................................................................................................................................................... 46
Registration unit ................................................................................................................................................ 46
MP feeder assembly ......................................................................................................................................... 47
Fuser unit ................................................................................................................................................................................. 49
Fuser unit overview ........................................................................................................................................... 49
Fuser unit drive .................................................................................................................................................. 50
Fuser unit temperature control ....................................................................................................................... 50
Loop control ....................................................................................................................................................... 51
Image creation ........................................................................................................................................................................ 53
Printing process overview ................................................................................................................................ 53
Imaging unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 53
Drum unit overview ...................................................................................................................... 53
Drum drive ..................................................................................................................................... 54
Developer unit ............................................................................................................................... 55
Toner cartridge .............................................................................................................................. 56
Paper transfer belt unit ................................................................................................................ 57
Paper transfer belt unit overview .......................................................................... 57
Transfer belt drive .................................................................................................... 58
Cleaning blade .......................................................................................................... 59
Laser scanner assembly ....................................................................................................................................................... 61
Laser scanner assembly overview .................................................................................................................. 61
Laser scanning optical path ............................................................................................................................. 62
Laser synchronizing detectors ........................................................................................................................ 62
Drive system ........................................................................................................................................................................... 64
Pickup and cassette lift drive ........................................................................................................................... 64
Feed drive ........................................................................................................................................................... 65
Registration drive .............................................................................................................................................. 66
Fuser release/output drive ............................................................................................................................... 67
Drive motors ....................................................................................................................................................... 67
Main drive unit motors ...................................................................................................................................... 69
Toner supply drive ............................................................................................................................................. 70
Toner reservoir drive ......................................................................................................................................... 70
Flatbed Scanner System ....................................................................................................................................................... 71
Flatbed scanner system overview .................................................................................................................. 71
Scanning system components ........................................................................................................................ 73
Caution for moving the scanner ...................................................................................................................... 79
vi ENWW
Flow Automatic Document Feeder (Flow ADF) dn/z bundles (GX) ................................................................................. 81
Flow ADF overview ............................................................................................................................................ 81
Sensors ............................................................................................................................................................... 82
Ultra Sonic Multi-feed (USM) ............................................................................................................................ 83
Flow ADF drive system ..................................................................................................................................... 83
Flow ADF document lifting drive system .................................................................................. 84
Flow ADF Scan-In Roller Release Drive System ....................................................................... 84
Flow ADF specification ................................................................................................................. 85
Flow ADF Registration ....................................................................................................................................... 85
Flow ADF Scanning Position ............................................................................................................................. 86
Mixed Size Original (MSO) ................................................................................................................................. 86
Dual sensor cleaning method .......................................................................................................................... 87
Flow ADF z bundles (GX) ................................................................................................................................... 88
Hardware configuration ........................................................................................................................................................ 89
Main controller ................................................................................................................................................... 92
Main controller for previous model ............................................................................................ 92
Main controller ............................................................................................................................... 96
Master system operation key (MSOK) ....................................................................................... 99
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5) ......................................................................................... 100
Fuser drive assembly ..................................................................................................................................... 105
High voltage power supply (HVPS) board ................................................................................................... 106
Eraser PCA ........................................................................................................................................................ 108
Fuser PCA ......................................................................................................................................................... 109
Waste Sensor PCA ........................................................................................................................................... 109
Paper Size sensor PCA ................................................................................................................................... 110
Flow ADF PCA ................................................................................................................................................... 110
Scan joint PCA .................................................................................................................................................. 111
CCDM PCA ......................................................................................................................................................... 112
WLED IF PCA ..................................................................................................................................................... 113
WLED PCA ......................................................................................................................................................... 113
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) ................................................................................................................................................. 114
High capacity input tray (HCI) ............................................................................................................................................. 118
Side high capacity input tray (sHCI) ................................................................................................................................... 122
3 Removal and replacement ................................................................................................................................................................. 127

For additional service and support ................................................................................................................................... 133
Service approach ................................................................................................................................................................. 133
Precautions when replacing parts ................................................................................................................ 133
Precautions when assembling and disassembling ............................................................... 133
ENWW vii
Precautions when handling PCA .............................................................................................. 134
Releasing plastic latches ........................................................................................................... 134
Before performing service ............................................................................................................................. 135
After performing service ................................................................................................................................ 135
Post-service test ............................................................................................................................................. 135
Print-quality test ......................................................................................................................... 135
Copy-quality test ........................................................................................................................ 135
Fax-quality test ........................................................................................................................... 135
Parts removal order ................................................................................................................... 136
Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................................................... 137
Machine cleaning for maintenance .............................................................................................................. 137
Cleaning the paper dust stick ................................................................................................... 137
Cleaning the scan glass ............................................................................................................. 139
Cleaning the flow ADF white bar and CISCleaning the flow document feeder white
bar and CIS ................................................................................................................................... 140
Removal and replacement procedures ............................................................................................................................ 142
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................... 142
Removal and replacement: Trusted platform module ........................................................ 143
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 143
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover .................................................................. 144
Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive ................................................................... 144
Step 3: Remove the trusted platform module (TPM) ....................................... 145
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly ....................................................... 145
Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution ........................................... 147
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 147
Step 1: Unpack the FIH accessory ....................................................................... 148
Step 2: Install the FIH accessory .......................................................................... 148
NFC Kit Installation ..................................................................................................................... 149
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 149
Step 1: Unpack the NFC kit ................................................................................... 151
Step 2: Install the NFC kit ...................................................................................... 151
Replacement of maintenance parts ............................................................................................................ 156
Toner collection unit (TCU) ........................................................................................................ 157
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 157
Step 1: Remove the TCU ....................................................................................... 158
Imaging drum unit ...................................................................................................................... 159
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 159
Step 1: Remove the imaging drum unit ............................................................. 160
Developer unit ............................................................................................................................. 162
viii ENWW
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 162
Step 1: Remove the developer unit .................................................................... 163
Fuser unit ..................................................................................................................................... 166
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 166
Step 1: Remove the fuser unit ............................................................................. 167
Paper transfer belt (PTB) ........................................................................................................... 169
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 169
Step 1: Remove the PTB ....................................................................................... 170
Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers .......................................................................... 174
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 174
Step 1: Remove the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers ................. 175
Multipurpose (MP) tray pickup/reverse/feed roller ............................................................... 178
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 178
Step 1: Remove the MP pickup/reverse/feed roller ......................................... 179
Flow ADF pickup roller assembly ............................................................................................. 183
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 183
Step 1: Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly ..................................... 184
Flow ADF separation roller assembly ...................................................................................... 188
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 188
Step 1: Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly .............................. 189
Formatter cover ................................................................................................................................................................... 192
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 192
Before performing service ........................................................................................................ 192
Required tools ............................................................................................................................. 192
After performing service ........................................................................................................... 192
Post service test ......................................................................................................................... 193
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover ........................................................................................................... 193
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly ................................................................................................ 193
Accelerator board ................................................................................................................................................................ 195
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 195
Required tools ............................................................................................................................. 195
ENWW ix
Step 2: Remove the accelerator board ........................................................................................................ 196
Island of data (IOD) .............................................................................................................................................................. 198
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 198
Required tools ............................................................................................................................. 198
Step 2: Remove the island of data (IOD) ..................................................................................................... 199
Formatter hard disk drive (HDD) ....................................................................................................................................... 201
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 201
Required tools ............................................................................................................................. 201
Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) ................................................................................................. 202
Formatter .............................................................................................................................................................................. 204
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 204
Required tools ............................................................................................................................. 204
Step 2: Remove the accelerator board ........................................................................................................ 205
Step 3: Remove the hard-disk drive ............................................................................................................ 206
Step 4: Remove the formatter PCA .............................................................................................................. 206
Control panel ........................................................................................................................................................................ 208
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 208
Required tools ............................................................................................................................. 208
Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel .................................................................................................... 209
Step 2: Remove the control-panel ............................................................................................................... 209
x ENWW
Keyboard (z bundles) .......................................................................................................................................................... 212
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 212
Required tools ............................................................................................................................. 212
Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel .................................................................................................... 213
Step 2: Remove the control-panel ............................................................................................................... 213
Step 3: Remove the keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 214
Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) ........................................................................................................................ 217
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 217
Required tools ............................................................................................................................. 217
Step 1: Remove the IPTU ............................................................................................................................... 218
Replacing the main SVC part .............................................................................................................................................. 220
Front top inner cover ...................................................................................................................................... 221
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 221
Before performing service ................................................................................... 221
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 221
After performing service ....................................................................................... 221
Post service test ..................................................................................................... 222
Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover .............................................................................. 222
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly ........................................................................... 222
Front power cover ........................................................................................................................................... 223
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 223
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 223
Step 2: Remove the front power cover ................................................................................... 224
Front power switch ......................................................................................................................................... 226
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 226
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 226
ENWW xi
Step 3: Remove the front power switch ................................................................................. 228
Output bin ......................................................................................................................................................... 231
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 231
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 231
Step 2: Remove the output bin ................................................................................................ 232
Top right cover ................................................................................................................................................. 234
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 234
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 234
Step 3: Remove the top right cover ......................................................................................... 236
Left cover .......................................................................................................................................................... 238
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 238
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 238
Step 1: Remove the left cover .................................................................................................. 239
Lower rear cover ............................................................................................................................................. 241
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 241
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 241
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover ....................................................................................... 242
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover ...................................................................................... 242
xii ENWW
Upper rear cover .............................................................................................................................................. 244
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 244
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 244
Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover ..................................................................................... 246
Left rear corner cover ..................................................................................................................................... 248
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 248
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 248
Step 2: Remove the left rear corner cover ............................................................................. 249
Right rear cover ............................................................................................................................................... 251
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 251
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 251
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover ....................................................................................... 252
Right door ......................................................................................................................................................... 254
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 254
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 254
Step 2: Remove the right door ................................................................................................. 255
Paper dust brush ............................................................................................................................................. 259
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 259
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 259
ENWW xiii
Step 1: Remove the toner collection unit ............................................................................... 260
Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush .................................................................................... 260
Front cover ....................................................................................................................................................... 262
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 262
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 262
Step 1: Remove the front cover ............................................................................................... 263
Inner front cover .............................................................................................................................................. 265
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 265
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 265
Step 7: Remove the inner front cover ..................................................................................... 269
Front cover open sensor ................................................................................................................................ 272
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 272
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 272
Step 7: Remove the front cover open sensor ........................................................................ 278
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) cover ...................................................................................................... 279
xiv ENWW
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 279
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 279
Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover ............................................................................................... 281
Laser scanner assembly ................................................................................................................................ 283
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 283
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 283
Step 2: Remove the laser scanner assembly ......................................................................... 284
Developer fan .................................................................................................................................................. 287
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 287
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 287
Step 2: Remove the imaging drum .......................................................................................... 288
Step 3: Remove the developer unit ......................................................................................... 289
Step 7: Remove the developer fan .......................................................................................... 293
High voltage power supply (HVPS) board ................................................................................................... 299
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 299
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 299
Step 3: Remove the HVPS ......................................................................................................... 301
ENWW xv
Main board ........................................................................................................................................................ 303
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 303
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 303
Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage ................................................................................ 306
Step 6: Remove the main board .............................................................................................. 307
Toner supply motor ........................................................................................................................................ 311
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 311
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 311
Step 6: Remove the main board and cage ............................................................................. 315
Step 7: Remove the toner supply motor ................................................................................ 317
CRUM connector .............................................................................................................................................. 319
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 319
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 319
xvi ENWW
Step 9: Remove the CRUM connector ..................................................................................... 326
Step 10: Unpack the replacement assembly ......................................................................... 327
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans ........................................................................................................ 328
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 328
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 328
Step 3: Remove the LVPS fans ................................................................................................. 330
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 1 ................................................................................................. 332
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 332
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 332
Step 4: Remove the LVPS board 1 ........................................................................................... 334
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 336
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 336
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 340
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 340
ENWW xvii
Fuser drive board ............................................................................................................................................ 345
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 345
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 345
Step 4: Remove the fuser drive board .................................................................................... 347
Fuser fan ........................................................................................................................................................... 349
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 349
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 349
Step 4: Remove the LVPS board 3 and cage .......................................................................... 351
Step 5: Remove the fuser fan ................................................................................................... 353
Main drive unit ................................................................................................................................................. 356
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 356
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 356
Step 1: Remove the imaging drum .......................................................................................... 357
Step 5: Remove the main drive unit ........................................................................................ 361
Inductor unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 364
xviii ENWW
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 364
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 364
Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and
cage .............................................................................................................................................. 366
Step 5: Remove the inductor unit ............................................................................................ 367
Auto closing unit .............................................................................................................................................. 369
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 369
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 369
Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and
cage .............................................................................................................................................. 371
Step 5: Remove the auto closing unit ..................................................................................... 372
Fuser/output drive unit ................................................................................................................................... 374
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 374
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 374
Step 6: Remove the fuser/output drive unit ........................................................................... 380
Right door open sensor .................................................................................................................................. 382
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 382
ENWW xix
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 382
Step 7: Remove the right door open sensor .......................................................................... 388
Right door open switch .................................................................................................................................. 390
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 390
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 390
Step 7: Remove the right door open sensor .......................................................................... 396
Step 8: Remove the right door open switch ........................................................................... 397
Pickup drive unit 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 399
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 399
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 399
Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage ................................................ 401
Step 5: Remove the pickup drive unit 1 .................................................................................. 402
Pickup drive unit 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 404
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 404
xx ENWW
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 404
Step 3: Remove the pickup drive unit 2 .................................................................................. 406
Feed/MP drive unit .......................................................................................................................................... 408
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 408
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 408
Step 5: Remove the feed/MP drive unit .................................................................................. 413
Registration drive assembly .......................................................................................................................... 416
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 416
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 416
Step 4: Remove the registration drive assembly .................................................................. 418
Toner collection unit (TCU) sensors .............................................................................................................. 420
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 420
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 421
Step 1: Remove the TCU ............................................................................................................ 421
Step 2: Remove the front cover. ............................................................................................... 421
ENWW xxi
Step 8: Remove the TCU sensors ............................................................................................. 426
Reservoir unit ................................................................................................................................................... 428
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 428
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 428
Step 3: Remove the laser scanner assembly ......................................................................... 432
Step 8: Remove the reservoir unit ........................................................................................... 436
Auto size sensor .............................................................................................................................................. 440
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 440
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 440
Step 1: Remove the auto size sensor ..................................................................................... 441
Fuser out sensor (on the right door) ............................................................................................................ 442
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 442
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 442
Step 3: Remove the fuser out sensor ..................................................................................... 445
Feed 2 sensor (on the right door) ................................................................................................................. 448
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 448
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 448
xxii ENWW
Step 3: Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper ....... 451
Step 4: Remove the feed 2 sensor .......................................................................................... 454
Multi-purpose (MP) unit (on the right door) ................................................................................................ 455
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 455
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 455
Step 4: Remove the MP unit ..................................................................................................... 460
Multi-purpose (MP) empty sensor ................................................................................................................ 466
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 466
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 466
Step 5: Remove the MP empty sensor .................................................................................... 476
Multi-purpose (MP) paper length sensor .................................................................................................... 478
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 478
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 478
Step 5: Remove the MP paper length sensor ........................................................................ 488
ENWW xxiii
Multi-purpose (MP) solenoid ......................................................................................................................... 490
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 490
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 490
Step 5: Remove the MP solenoid ............................................................................................. 500
Output unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 503
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 503
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 503
Step 6: Remove the fuser unit .................................................................................................. 509
Step 7: Remove the output unit ............................................................................................... 510
Return sensor (on the output unit) .............................................................................................................. 512
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 512
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 512
Step 8: Remove the return sensor .......................................................................................... 520
xxiv ENWW
Duplex 1 sensor (on the output unit) ........................................................................................................... 522
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 522
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 522
Step 8: Remove the duplex 1 sensor ...................................................................................... 530
Output 1 bin full sensor (on the output unit) .............................................................................................. 532
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 532
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 532
Step 8: Remove the output 1 bin full sensor ......................................................................... 540
Output gate solenoid (on the output unit) .................................................................................................. 544
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 544
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 544
ENWW xxv
Step 8: Remove the output gate solenoid ............................................................................. 552
Pickup unit 2 .................................................................................................................................................... 554
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 554
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 554
Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2 ................................................................................................... 557
Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 2) ......................................................................................... 561
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 561
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 561
Step 4: Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor ........................................................... 567
Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2) .................................................................................................................. 569
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 569
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 569
Step 4: Remove the prefeed sensor 2 .................................................................................... 575
Pickup unit 1 .................................................................................................................................................... 577
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 577
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 577
xxvi ENWW
Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 1) ......................................................................................... 586
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 586
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 586
Step 5: Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor ........................................................... 594
Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1) .................................................................................................................. 596
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 596
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 596
Step 5: Remove the prefeed sensor 1 .................................................................................... 604
Internal hard disk drive (HDD) ....................................................................................................................... 607
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 607
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 607
Step 3: Remove the HDD ........................................................................................................... 609
ENWW xxvii
Registration assembly .................................................................................................................................... 611
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 611
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 611
Step 4: Remove the registration assembly ............................................................................ 615
Registration sensor assembly ...................................................................................................................... 620
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 620
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 620
Step 4: Remove the registration assembly ............................................................................ 624
Step 5: Remove the registration sensor assembly ............................................................... 628
High voltage terminal ..................................................................................................................................... 631
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 631
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 631
Step 1: Remove the drum unit ................................................................................................. 632
Step 7: Remove the main board and cage ............................................................................. 636
Step 8: Remove the main drive unit ........................................................................................ 638
Step 9: Remove the high voltage terminal ............................................................................. 640
Flow ADF ............................................................................................................................................................................... 643
Flow ADF whole unit ....................................................................................................................................... 643
xxviii ENWW
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 643
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 643
Step 1: Remove the ADF whole unit ........................................................................................ 644
Flow ADF jam access cover ............................................................................................................................ 647
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 647
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 648
Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover ............................................................... 649
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover ................................................................ 649
Step 3: Remove the document feeder jam access cover ..................................................... 650
Flow ADF input tray ......................................................................................................................................... 653
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 653
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 653
Step 3: Remove the dampening unit ....................................................................................... 656
Step 4: Remove the pickup and feed unit ............................................................................... 657
Step 5: Remove the input tray ................................................................................................. 658
Flow ADF contact image sensor (CIS) .......................................................................................................... 660
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 660
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 660
Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly .................................... 663
Step 4: Remove the paper path cover .................................................................................... 664
Step 5: Remove the CIS assembly ........................................................................................... 664
ENWW xxix
Flow ADF front motor ..................................................................................................................................... 667
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 667
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 667
Step 2: Remove the front motor .............................................................................................. 668
Flow ADF rear motors ..................................................................................................................................... 671
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 671
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 671
Step 1: Identify the document feeder motors ....................................................................... 673
Step 3: Remove motors 1 and 2 .............................................................................................. 675
Step 4: Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors ................................................................. 676
Step 5: Remove the exit motor ................................................................................................ 678
Step 6: Remove the feed motor ............................................................................................... 679
Step 7: Remove the REGI motor .............................................................................................. 680
Flow ADF PCA fan ............................................................................................................................................ 681
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 681
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 681
Step 2: Remove the document feeder PCA fan ..................................................................... 682
Flow ADF contact image sensor (CIS) fan .................................................................................................... 684
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 684
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 684
Step 2: Remove the document feeder CIS fan ....................................................................... 685
xxx ENWW
Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA .......................................................................................................... 687
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 687
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 687
Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly .................................... 690
Step 4: Remove the paper path cover .................................................................................... 691
Step 5: Remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA ................................................................... 691
White backing .................................................................................................................................................. 693
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 694
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 694
Step 1: Remove the white backing .......................................................................................... 694
Scanner unit (image scanner unit) .................................................................................................................................... 696
Scanner whole unit ......................................................................................................................................... 696
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 696
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 696
Step 3: Remove the flow ADF whole unit ............................................................................... 698
Step 4: Remove the control panel bezel ................................................................................ 701
Step 5: Remove the control panel ........................................................................................... 701
Step 6: Remove the keyboard (z bundles) ............................................................................. 702
Step 7: Remove the scanner whole unit ................................................................................. 703
Scan glass ......................................................................................................................................................... 708
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 708
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 708
ENWW xxxi
Step 1: Remove the scan glass ................................................................................................ 708
LED lamp module ............................................................................................................................................ 710
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 710
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 710
Step 3: Remove the flow ADF whole unit ............................................................................... 712
Step 4: Remove the scanner glass .......................................................................................... 714
Step 5: Remove the LED lamp module ................................................................................... 716
Scanner imaging unit ...................................................................................................................................... 718
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 718
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 718
Step 2: Remove the scanner imaging unit ............................................................................. 719
Scan joint board ............................................................................................................................................... 722
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 722
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 722
Step 3: Remove the document feeder whole unit ................................................................ 723
Step 4: Remove the scan joint board ...................................................................................... 726
APS sensor ....................................................................................................................................................... 730
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 730
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 730
Step 1: Remove the document feeder whole unit ................................................................ 731
xxxii ENWW
Step 3: Remove the APS sensor .............................................................................................. 734
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door ......................................................................................................... 738
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 738
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 738
Step 1: Remove the printer right rear cover .......................................................................... 738
Step 2: Remove the printer right door .................................................................................... 739
Step 3: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door ................................................. 741
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor ................................................................................................................ 744
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 744
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 744
Step 1: Remove the DCF rear cover ......................................................................................... 744
Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor ........................................................ 745
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor ................................................................................................... 748
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 748
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 748
Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor ........................................... 749
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA .................................................................................................................... 750
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 750
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 750
Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA ............................................................ 751
ENWW xxxiii
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units ...................................................................................................... 753
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 753
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 753
Step 1: Remove the printer right rear cover .......................................................................... 754
Step 2: Remove the printer right door .................................................................................... 754
Step 3: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door ................................................. 756
Step 4: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units ............................................. 758
Bottom high-capacity input (HCI) tray .............................................................................................................................. 761
Bottom HCI tray feed motor .......................................................................................................................... 762
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 762
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 762
Step 1: Remove the bottom HCI rear cover ............................................................................ 762
Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor .................................................................. 763
Bottom HCI tray pickup motor ...................................................................................................................... 765
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 765
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 765
Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor .............................................................. 766
Bottom HCI tray PCA ....................................................................................................................................... 768
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 768
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 768
Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray PCA .............................................................................. 769
Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor ....................................................................................................................... 771
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 771
xxxiv ENWW
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 771
Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor ............................................................... 772
Bottom HCI tray shaft motor ......................................................................................................................... 773
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 773
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 773
Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor ................................................................ 774
Side high capacity input (sHCI) ........................................................................................................................................... 775
Side HCI rear cover .......................................................................................................................................... 776
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 776
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 776
Step 1: Remove the side HCI rear cover .................................................................................. 776
Side HCI feed motor ........................................................................................................................................ 778
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 778
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 778
Step 1: Remove the side HCI right cover ................................................................................. 779
Step 2: Remove the side HCI cable cover ............................................................................... 779
Step 4: Remove the side HCI feed motor ................................................................................ 780
Side HCI pickup motor .................................................................................................................................... 782
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 782
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 782
ENWW xxxv
Step 4: Remove the side HCI pickup motor ............................................................................ 784
Side HCI PCA ..................................................................................................................................................... 785
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 785
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 785
Step 4: Remove the side HCI PCA ............................................................................................. 787
Side HCI lift-up motor ..................................................................................................................................... 788
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 788
Required tools ........................................................................................................ 788
Step 4: Remove the side HCI lift-up motor ............................................................................. 790
4 Parts and diagrams .............................................................................................................................................................................. 791

For additional service and support information ............................................................................................................. 792
Order parts, accessories, and supplies ............................................................................................................................ 793
Ordering ............................................................................................................................................................ 793
Orderable parts ............................................................................................................................................... 793
Related documentation and software ......................................................................................................... 793
How to use the parts list and diagrams ........................................................................................................................... 793
Main parts ............................................................................................................................................................................. 794
Main assembly 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 794
Main assembly 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 796
Output ............................................................................................................................................................... 798
First cassette ................................................................................................................................................... 800
xxxvi ENWW
Second cassette .............................................................................................................................................. 802
Main frame assembly ..................................................................................................................................... 804
Main frame registration .................................................................................................................................. 806
Drive system .................................................................................................................................................... 808
Main frame pickup 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................ 810
Main frame pickup ........................................................................................................................................... 812
Cover ................................................................................................................................................................. 814
Right door ......................................................................................................................................................... 816
MP tray .............................................................................................................................................................. 818
Right door guide .............................................................................................................................................. 820
Right door output and takeaway .................................................................................................................. 822
PTB transfer ..................................................................................................................................................... 824
Flow ADF ........................................................................................................................................................... 826
Flow ADF open cover ...................................................................................................................................... 828
Flow ADF pickup roller assembly .................................................................................................................. 830
Flow ADF stacker ............................................................................................................................................. 832
Flow ADF main ................................................................................................................................................. 834
Flow ADF image scanner ................................................................................................................................ 836
Flow ADF image scanner, lower .................................................................................................................... 838
Reservoir .......................................................................................................................................................... 840
DCF main .......................................................................................................................................................... 842
DCF frame ......................................................................................................................................................... 844
DCF rear frame ................................................................................................................................................ 846
Opt feed drive .................................................................................................................................................. 848
DCF second pickup .......................................................................................................................................... 850
High capacity input tray (HCI) ............................................................................................................................................. 852
HCI main ............................................................................................................................................................ 852
HCI drive ............................................................................................................................................................ 854
HCI cassette ..................................................................................................................................................... 856
HCI frame .......................................................................................................................................................... 858
HCI main pickup ............................................................................................................................................... 860
High capacity input tray side unit (sHCI) ........................................................................................................................... 862
sHCI main 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 862
sHCI main 3 ...................................................................................................................................................... 864
sHCI main 5 ...................................................................................................................................................... 866
sHCI main 6 ...................................................................................................................................................... 868
Pickup cover unit ............................................................................................................................................. 870
sHCI frame ........................................................................................................................................................ 872
Finishers ................................................................................................................................................................................ 874
Booklet finisher ............................................................................................................................................... 874
ENWW xxxvii
Mainline finisher 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 876
Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold output .................................................... 888
Low output, hb motor, and top guide .......................................................................................................... 890
SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide ............................................................................................... 892
Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor .................................................................... 894
Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam ............................................................................................................ 896
FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade ........................................................................................ 898
Fold roller, main blade, and top frame ........................................................................................................ 900
Three fold blade .............................................................................................................................................. 902
Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide ...................................................................................... 904
Entrance guide, mid jam, and main output ................................................................................................. 906
Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor .......................................................... 908
Front alignment (tamper) .............................................................................................................................. 910
Rear alignment (tamper) ............................................................................................................................... 912
Shield ................................................................................................................................................................ 914
PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle .................................................................................................. 916
Finisher sub booklet ....................................................................................................................................... 918
IPTU (bridge) .................................................................................................................................................... 920
Inner finisher ......................................................................................................................................................................... 922
Sub-inner finisher ............................................................................................................................................ 922
Finisher sub 1 ................................................................................................................................................... 924
Finisher sub 7 ................................................................................................................................................... 926
Finisher sub 8 ................................................................................................................................................... 928
Alphabetical parts list ......................................................................................................................................................... 930
Numerical parts list ............................................................................................................................................................. 951
5 Problem solving ................................................................................................................................................................................... 973

Troubleshooting process .................................................................................................................................................... 974
Determine the problem source .................................................................................................................... 974
Power subsystem ....................................................................................................................... 974
Power-on checks ................................................................................................... 974
Control panel checks .................................................................................................................. 978
Control panel diagnostic flowcharts ................................................................... 978
Individual component diagnostics ........................................................................................... 983
Tools for troubleshooting: LED diagnostics ....................................................... 983
Tools for troubleshooting: Engine diagnostics .................................................. 985
xxxviii ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 987
Tools for troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................................... 988
Problem-solving checklist ............................................................................................................................. 988
Step 1: Check that the printer power is on ............................................................................. 988
Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages ............................................................ 988
Step 3: Test print functionality ................................................................................................. 988
Step 4: Test copy functionality ................................................................................................. 989
Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality .............................................................................. 989
Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality ............................................................................ 989
Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer .................................................................. 989
Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality ........................................ 989
Factors that affect printer performance ................................................................................. 989
Print menu map ............................................................................................................................................... 991
Print current settings pages .......................................................................................................................... 991
Print event log ................................................................................................................................................. 991
Pre-boot menu options .................................................................................................................................. 993
Remote Admin .......................................................................................................................... 1002
Required software and network connection ................................................... 1002
Connect a remote connection ........................................................................... 1004
Disconnect a remote connection ...................................................................... 1008
Control panel menus .................................................................................................................................... 1010
Reports menu ........................................................................................................................... 1010
Settings menu .......................................................................................................................... 1013
Copy menu (MFP only) ............................................................................................................ 1057
Scan menu (MFP only) ............................................................................................................. 1062
Fax menu (fax models only) ................................................................................................... 1071
Print menu ................................................................................................................................. 1075
Supplies menu .......................................................................................................................... 1076
Trays menu ............................................................................................................................... 1077
Troubleshooting menu ............................................................................................................ 1078
Maintenance menu .................................................................................................................. 1080
Backup/Restore menu ........................................................................................ 1080
Calibration/Cleaning menu ................................................................................ 1080
USB Firmware Upgrade menu ........................................................................... 1082
Clear paper jams ................................................................................................................................................................ 1083
Clearing original document jams ............................................................................................................... 1083
Clearing paper jams ...................................................................................................................................... 1087
Service mode (tech mode) ............................................................................................................................................... 1096
Entering service mode ................................................................................................................................. 1096
Service mode menu tree ............................................................................................................................. 1097
Information .................................................................................................................................................... 1101
ENWW xxxix
General ....................................................................................................................................... 1101
Supply status ............................................................................................................................ 1101
Software version ...................................................................................................................... 1101
Print reports .............................................................................................................................. 1102
Maintenance counts ..................................................................................................................................... 1102
Part replacement count .......................................................................................................... 1102
Diagnostics .................................................................................................................................................... 1103
Engine diagnostics ................................................................................................................... 1103
Fax diagnostics ......................................................................................................................... 1113
Scanner diagnostics ................................................................................................................. 1118
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................ 1122
Image management ................................................................................................................ 1128
Print test patterns .................................................................................................................... 1128
Service functions .......................................................................................................................................... 1129
Main memory clear .................................................................................................................. 1129
Debug log .................................................................................................................................. 1129
Capture log ................................................................................................................................ 1129
Transfer assembly control mode .......................................................................................... 1130
Envelope rotate ........................................................................................................................ 1130
Print quality troubleshooting guide ................................................................................................................................ 1132
Image quality problems and solutions ...................................................................................................... 1132
Vertical black lines ................................................................................................................... 1135
Vertical light or white lines ..................................................................................................... 1136
Horizontal periodic black lines, dots ..................................................................................... 1137
Horizontal periodic light/dark lines, dots ............................................................................. 1138
Blurred image ........................................................................................................................... 1139
Foggy image ............................................................................................................................. 1140
Light image ............................................................................................................................... 1141
Uneven pitch and jitter image ................................................................................................ 1141
Skewed image .......................................................................................................................... 1143
Poor fusing performance ........................................................................................................ 1143
Stain on the paper back side .................................................................................................. 1144
Setting standard tone ............................................................................................................. 1145
Other errors ................................................................................................................................................... 1148
Image system problem ........................................................................................................... 1148
Fuser problem .......................................................................................................................... 1151
Scanner and Flow ADF problems ........................................................................................... 1153
Drive unit problem ................................................................................................................... 1156
Feeding system problem ........................................................................................................ 1156
Laser scanner assembly problem ......................................................................................... 1158
Electrical circuit problem ........................................................................................................ 1158
xl ENWW
Adjusting the Flow ADF skew .......................................................................................................................................... 1164
6 Diagrams ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1169

Connection Diagram (FUSER/EXIT/DUPLEX/TONER) .................................................................................................. 1170
Connection Diagram (Scanner) ........................................................................................................................................ 1171
Connection Diagram (Laser Scanner Assembly/OPE/USB) ........................................................................................ 1172
Connection Diagram (Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup) ......................................................................................... 1173
Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock) ................................................................................................................... 1174
Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB) ......................................................................................................................... 1175
7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ................................................................................................... 1177

Precautions ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1178
Caution for safety ......................................................................................................................................... 1178
Electric shock and fire safety precautions ........................................................................... 1178
Handling precautions .............................................................................................................. 1179
Removal and replacement precautions ............................................................................... 1180
Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury ............................................................ 1180
ESD precautions ............................................................................................................................................ 1181
Product specification and description ............................................................................................................................ 1182
Finisher system ............................................................................................................................................. 1182
Finisher sectional view ............................................................................................................ 1182
Sensor location .................................................................................................... 1182
Roller location ...................................................................................................... 1183
Jam removal guide .............................................................................................. 1185
Paper path ................................................................................................................................. 1186
Electrical parts layout .............................................................................................................. 1187
Finisher and booklet module ............................................................................. 1187
IPTU ........................................................................................................................ 1191
Punch unit ............................................................................................................. 1191
Each unit functions .................................................................................................................. 1192
PCA connection information ................................................................................................... 1193
Finisher PCA .......................................................................................................... 1193
Switch PCA ............................................................................................................ 1194
Booklet maker PCA ............................................................................................. 1194
Service approach ............................................................................................................................................................... 1195
Precautions when replacing parts ............................................................................................................. 1195
Precautions when assembling and disassembling ............................................................ 1195
Precautions when handling PCA ............................................................................................ 1195
Releasing plastic latches ......................................................................................................... 1196
Before performing service .......................................................................................................................... 1196
After performing service ............................................................................................................................. 1197
ENWW xli
Post-service test ........................................................................................................................................... 1197
Print-quality test ...................................................................................................................... 1197
Order parts, accessories, and supplies ..................................................................................................... 1197
Ordering ..................................................................................................................................... 1197
Orderable parts ........................................................................................................................ 1197
Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) ..................................................... 1198
Top output bin ............................................................................................................................................... 1200
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1200
Before performing service ................................................................................. 1200
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1200
After performing service .................................................................................... 1200
Post service test .................................................................................................. 1201
Step 1: Remove the top output bin ....................................................................................... 1201
Right top cover .............................................................................................................................................. 1202
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1202
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1202
Step 1: Remove the right top cover ...................................................................................... 1203
Top cover ........................................................................................................................................................ 1205
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1205
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1205
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher) ...................................................................... 1206
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher) ............................................................................... 1206
Front door ...................................................................................................................................................... 1209
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1209
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1209
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher) ............................................................................. 1212
xlii ENWW
Rear cover ...................................................................................................................................................... 1216
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1216
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1216
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher) .............................................................................. 1219
Front cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 1221
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1221
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1221
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher) ............................................................................ 1226
Front lower cover .......................................................................................................................................... 1229
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1229
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1229
Step 5: Remove the front lower cover (finisher) ................................................................. 1236
Booklet tray ................................................................................................................................................... 1238
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1238
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1238
Step 1: Remove the booklet tray ........................................................................................... 1239
ENWW xliii
Caster cover ................................................................................................................................................... 1241
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1241
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1241
Step 1: Remove the booklet tray (booklet finishers only) ................................................. 1242
Step 2: Remove the caster cover ........................................................................................... 1243
Lower shield assembly ................................................................................................................................ 1245
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1245
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1246
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher) ........................................................ 1255
Upper shield assembly ................................................................................................................................ 1258
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1258
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1259
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher) ....................................................... 1270
Step 10: Unpack the replacement assembly ....................................................................... 1272
Controller PCA ............................................................................................................................................... 1274
xliv ENWW
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1274
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1274
Step 4: Remove the controller PCA ....................................................................................... 1278
Stapler unit .................................................................................................................................................... 1280
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1280
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1280
Step 6: Remove the staple unit ............................................................................................. 1288
Dummy feed guide ....................................................................................................................................... 1292
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1292
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1292
Step 4: Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher) .............................................................. 1296
Top jam access cover ................................................................................................................................... 1298
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1298
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1298
ENWW xlv
Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor ..................................................................................... 1306
Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover ........................................................................... 1307
Top lower feed assembly ............................................................................................................................ 1309
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1309
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1309
Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor (finisher) .................................................................... 1317
Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover ........................................................................... 1318
Step 8: Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) .................................................... 1318
Ejector unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 1322
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1322
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1323
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher) .......................................................................... 1330
Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher) .......................................................................... 1331
Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher) ......................................................................... 1336
Front tamper unit ......................................................................................................................................... 1347
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1347
xlvi ENWW
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1348
Step 5: Remove the rear cover .............................................................................................. 1354
Step 11: Remove the front tamper unit ............................................................................... 1370
Rear tamper unit ........................................................................................................................................... 1372
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1372
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1373
Step 11: Remove the rear tamper unit ................................................................................. 1395
Feed entrance motor (M1) .......................................................................................................................... 1397
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1397
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1397
ENWW xlvii
Step 4: Remove the feed entrance motor (M1) .................................................................. 1401
Feed exit motor (M2) .................................................................................................................................... 1403
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1403
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1403
Step 4: Remove the feed exit motor (M2) ............................................................................ 1407
Buffer motor, gear, and sensor (M3) ......................................................................................................... 1409
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1409
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1409
Step 4: Remove the buffer motor, gear, and sensor .......................................................... 1413
Front tamper motor (M6) ............................................................................................................................ 1417
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1417
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1418
xlviii ENWW
Step 11: Remove the front tamper (finisher) ...................................................................... 1440
Step 12: Remove the front tamper motor (M7) .................................................................. 1441
Rear tamper motor (M7) .............................................................................................................................. 1443
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1443
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1444
Step 11: Remove the rear tamper (finisher) ........................................................................ 1466
Step 12: Remove the rear tamper motor (M7) .................................................................... 1467
SCU motor (M10) ........................................................................................................................................... 1469
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1469
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1470
Step 10: Remove the SCU motor (M10) ............................................................................... 1483
Main tray moving motor (M11) ................................................................................................................... 1487
ENWW xlix
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1487
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1487
Step 4: Remove the main tray moving motor (M11) .......................................................... 1491
Booklet finisher front cover ......................................................................................................................... 1497
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1497
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1497
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover ................................................................ 1498
Booklet finisher ............................................................................................................................................. 1500
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1500
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1500
Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher ..................................................................................... 1504
Booklet finisher PCA ..................................................................................................................................... 1511
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1511
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1511
Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher ..................................................................................... 1515
Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher PCA ............................................................................ 1520
l ENWW
Booklet finisher fold stopper unit .............................................................................................................. 1523
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1523
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1523
Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield ..................................................... 1528
Step 6: Remove the fold stopper unit ................................................................................... 1529
Booklet feed entrance motor (M13) .......................................................................................................... 1535
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1535
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1535
Step 2: Remove the booklet feed entrance motor (M13) .................................................. 1536
TE presser motor (M14) ............................................................................................................................... 1538
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1538
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1538
Step 2: Remove the TE presser motor (M14) ...................................................................... 1539
Stopper moving motor (M16) ..................................................................................................................... 1541
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1541
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1541
Step 3: Remove the stopper moving motor (M16) ............................................................. 1544
ENWW li
Separate pawl motor (M17) ........................................................................................................................ 1546
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1546
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1546
Step 2: Remove the separate pawl motor (M17) ................................................................ 1547
Folding roller motor (M18) .......................................................................................................................... 1549
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1549
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1549
Step 4: Remove the folding roller motor (M18) .................................................................. 1553
Blade motor (M19) ........................................................................................................................................ 1555
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1555
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1555
Step 3: Remove the blade motor (M19) ............................................................................... 1558
C fold motor (M20) ....................................................................................................................................... 1560
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1560
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1560
Step 2: Remove the C fold motor .......................................................................................... 1561
Problem solving ................................................................................................................................................................. 1567
Control panel message document (CPMD) ............................................................................................... 1568
lii ENWW
Control-panel messages and event log entries .................................................................. 1568
Finisher system diagram .................................................................................................................................................. 1569
8 Inner finisher ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1571

Precautions ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1572
Caution for safety ......................................................................................................................................... 1572
Electric shock and fire safety precautions ........................................................................... 1572
Handling precautions .............................................................................................................. 1573
Removal and replacement precautions ............................................................................... 1574
Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury ............................................................ 1574
ESD precautions ............................................................................................................................................ 1575
Product Specification and Description ........................................................................................................................... 1576
Specification .................................................................................................................................................. 1576
Finisher System ............................................................................................................................................. 1581
Sectional view ........................................................................................................................... 1581
Paper path ................................................................................................................................. 1582
Electrical parts layout .............................................................................................................. 1583
Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................... 1585
PBA Connection Information .................................................................................................. 1585
Service approach ............................................................................................................................................................... 1586
Precautions when replacing parts ............................................................................................................. 1586
Precautions when assembling and disassembling ............................................................ 1586
Precautions when handling PCA ............................................................................................ 1586
Releasing plastic latches ......................................................................................................... 1587
Before performing service .......................................................................................................................... 1587
After performing service ............................................................................................................................. 1587
Post-service test ........................................................................................................................................... 1587
Print-quality test ...................................................................................................................... 1588
Order parts, accessories, and supplies ..................................................................................................... 1588
Ordering ..................................................................................................................................... 1588
Orderable parts ........................................................................................................................ 1588
Removal and replacment (inner finisher) ...................................................................................................................... 1589
Entrance sensor ............................................................................................................................................ 1590
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1590
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1590
Step 1: Remove the entrance sensor ................................................................................... 1591
Entrance motor ............................................................................................................................................. 1594
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1594
ENWW liii
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1594
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers ........................................................................ 1595
Step 2: Remove the entrance motor .................................................................................... 1598
Exit sensor ..................................................................................................................................................... 1600
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1600
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1600
Step 2: Remove the exit sensor ............................................................................................. 1604
Exit motor ...................................................................................................................................................... 1605
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1605
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1605
Step 1: Remove the exit motor .............................................................................................. 1606
Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly ................................................................................................................ 1608
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1608
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1608
Step 1: Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly ......................................................... 1609
Front Jogger Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 1612
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1612
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1612
Step 1: Remove the front jogger motor ............................................................................... 1613
Front Jogger Home Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 1624
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1624
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1624
liv ENWW
Step 1: Remove the front jogger home sensor ................................................................... 1625
Rear Jogger Motor ........................................................................................................................................ 1636
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1636
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1636
Step 1: Remove the rear jogger motor ................................................................................. 1637
Rear Jogger Home Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 1645
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1645
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1645
Step 1: Remove the rear jogger home sensor .................................................................... 1646
Stapler ............................................................................................................................................................ 1651
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1651
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1651
Step 1: Remove the stapler .................................................................................................... 1652
Stapler position sensor assembly .............................................................................................................. 1654
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1654
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1654
Step 2: Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly ......................................................... 1658
Step 3: Remove the staple position sensor assembly ....................................................... 1661
Traverse Motor .............................................................................................................................................. 1665
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1665
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1665
Step 2: Remove the traverse motor ..................................................................................... 1669
Stacker Motor ................................................................................................................................................ 1670
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1670
ENWW lv
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1670
Step 1: Remove the stacker motor ....................................................................................... 1671
Stacker Encoder Sensor ............................................................................................................................... 1677
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1677
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1677
Step 1: Remove the stacker encoder sensor ....................................................................... 1678
Stacker Lower Limit Switch ......................................................................................................................... 1684
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1684
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1684
Step 1: Remove the stacker lower limit switch ................................................................... 1685
Stack Beam Sensor ...................................................................................................................................... 1691
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1691
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1691
Step 1: Remove the stack beam sensor ............................................................................... 1692
Stack Position Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 1696
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1696
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1696
Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor .......................................................................... 1700
Paper Holding Lever Solenoid .................................................................................................................... 1706
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1706
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1706
Step 1: Remove the paper holding lever solenoid ............................................................. 1707
lvi ENWW
Paper Support Motor .................................................................................................................................... 1714
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1714
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1714
Step 2: Remove the paper support motor ........................................................................... 1721
Paper Support Home Sensor ...................................................................................................................... 1723
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1723
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1723
Step 3: Remove the paper support home sensor .............................................................. 1733
Ejector Motor assembly ............................................................................................................................... 1735
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1735
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1735
Step 3: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly .......................................................... 1745
Main Paddle Motor ........................................................................................................................................ 1749
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1749
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1749
Step 1: Remove the main paddle motor .............................................................................. 1750
Main Paddle Home Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 1751
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1751
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1751
Step 1: Remove the main paddle home sensor .................................................................. 1752
Main Paddle ................................................................................................................................................... 1753
ENWW lvii
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1753
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1753
Step 1: Remove the main paddle .......................................................................................... 1754
Ejector assembly .......................................................................................................................................... 1755
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1755
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1755
Step 2: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly .......................................................... 1762
Step 3: Remove the paper ejector assembly ....................................................................... 1766
Punch Dust Full Sensor ................................................................................................................................ 1767
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1767
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1767
Step 2: Remove the punch dust full sensor ......................................................................... 1771
Door Switch ................................................................................................................................................... 1772
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1772
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1772
Step 1: Remove the door switch ........................................................................................... 1773
Top Door Switch ............................................................................................................................................ 1776
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1776
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1776
Step 1: Remove the top door switch ..................................................................................... 1777
End Fence Home Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 1781
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 1781
Required tools ...................................................................................................... 1781
lviii ENWW
Step 1: Remove the end fence home position sensor ....................................................... 1782
Problem solving ................................................................................................................................................................. 1783
Control panel message document (CPMD) ............................................................................................... 1568
Control-panel messages and event log entries .................................................................. 1784
Block Diagram .................................................................................................................................................................... 1785
Appendix A Appendix: Printer specifications .................................................................................................................................... 1787

Printer dimensions ............................................................................................................................................................ 1788
Printer space requirements ............................................................................................................................................. 1789
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ................................................................... 1790
Certificate of Volatility ....................................................................................................................................................... 1791
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1793
Index ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1801
ENWW lix
lx ENWW
List of tables
Table 2-1 General specifications .......................................................................................................................................................... 11

Table 2-2 Print specifications ................................................................................................................................................................ 13
Table 2-3 Scan specifications ................................................................................................................................................................ 16
Table 2-4 Copy specifications ................................................................................................................................................................ 17
Table 2-5 Supplies .................................................................................................................................................................................. 19
Table 2-6 Maintenance table ................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Table 2-7 Paper handling specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 22
Table 2-8 Network interface ................................................................................................................................................................. 28
Table 2-9 Software and solutions ........................................................................................................................................................ 29
Table 2-10 Options list ........................................................................................................................................................................... 32
Table 2-11 Option specifications .......................................................................................................................................................... 33
Table 2-12 Front view ............................................................................................................................................................................ 37
Table 2-13 Printer rear view .................................................................................................................................................................. 38
Table 2-14 Inner view ............................................................................................................................................................................. 39
Table 2-15 Rollers ................................................................................................................................................................................... 41
Table 2-16 Roller period table .............................................................................................................................................................. 42
Table 2-17 Sensor, motor, solenoid .................................................................................................................................................... 43
Table 2-18 Basic cassette ...................................................................................................................................................................... 45
Table 2-19 Paper transfer belt unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 58
Table 2-20 Laser scanner assembly overview ................................................................................................................................... 61
Table 2-21 Laser scanning optical path .............................................................................................................................................. 62
Table 2-22 Pickup and cassette lift drive ............................................................................................................................................ 64
Table 2-23 Feed drive ............................................................................................................................................................................. 65
Table 2-24 Registration drive ................................................................................................................................................................ 66
Table 2-25 Fuser release/output drive ................................................................................................................................................ 67
Table 2-26 Drive motor .......................................................................................................................................................................... 68
Table 2-27 Main drive unit motors ....................................................................................................................................................... 69
Table 2-28 Toner supply drive .............................................................................................................................................................. 70
Table 2-29 Toner reservoir drive .......................................................................................................................................................... 70
Table 2-30 Flow ADF overview ............................................................................................................................................................. 81
Table 2-31 Flow ADF sensors ............................................................................................................................................................... 82
Table 2-32 Connections ......................................................................................................................................................................... 95
ENWW lxi
Table 2-33 Connections ......................................................................................................................................................................... 98
Table 2-34 Connection ........................................................................................................................................................................... 99
Table 2-35 Connections ....................................................................................................................................................................... 100
Table 2-39 HVPS PCA Connections .................................................................................................................................................... 107
Table 2-43 Connection ......................................................................................................................................................................... 112
Table 2-46 DCF paper feeding system .............................................................................................................................................. 114
Table 2-47 DCF electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions .......................................................................................... 116
Table 2-48 DCF PCA connection ......................................................................................................................................................... 117
Table 2-49 HCI paper feeding system ............................................................................................................................................... 118
Table 2-50 HCI electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions ........................................................................................... 120
Table 2-51 HCI PCA connection .......................................................................................................................................................... 121
Table 2-52 sHCI paper feeding system ............................................................................................................................................. 122
Table 2-53 sHCI electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions ......................................................................................... 124
Table 2-54 sHCI PCA connection ........................................................................................................................................................ 125
Table 3-1 Document feeder motors .................................................................................................................................................. 673
Table 4-1 Main assembly ..................................................................................................................................................................... 795
Table 4-2 Main assembly 2 ................................................................................................................................................................. 797
Table 4-3 Output ................................................................................................................................................................................... 799
Table 4-4 First cassette ....................................................................................................................................................................... 801
Table 4-5 Second cassette .................................................................................................................................................................. 803
Table 4-6 Main assembly frame ......................................................................................................................................................... 805
Table 4-7 Main frame registration assembly ................................................................................................................................... 807
Table 4-8 Drive system ........................................................................................................................................................................ 809
Table 4-9 Frame main pickup 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................................... 811
Table 4-10 Frame main pickup ........................................................................................................................................................... 813
Table 4-11 Cover ................................................................................................................................................................................... 815
Table 4-12 Right door .......................................................................................................................................................................... 817
Table 4-13 MP tray ............................................................................................................................................................................... 819
Table 4-14 Right door guide ............................................................................................................................................................... 821
Table 4-15 Right door output and takeaway ................................................................................................................................... 823
Table 4-16 PTB transfer ...................................................................................................................................................................... 825
Table 4-17 Flow ADF ............................................................................................................................................................................ 827
Table 4-18 Flow ADF open cover ....................................................................................................................................................... 829
lxii ENWW
Table 4-19 Flow ADF pickup roller assembly ................................................................................................................................... 831
Table 4-20 Flow ADF stacker .............................................................................................................................................................. 833
Table 4-21 Flow ADF main .................................................................................................................................................................. 835
Table 4-22 Flow ADF image scanner ................................................................................................................................................. 837
Table 4-23 Flow ADF image scanner, lower ..................................................................................................................................... 839
Table 4-24 Reservoir ............................................................................................................................................................................ 841
Table 4-25 DCF main ............................................................................................................................................................................ 843
Table 4-26 DCF frame .......................................................................................................................................................................... 845
Table 4-27 DCF rear frame .................................................................................................................................................................. 847
Table 4-28 Opt feed drive ................................................................................................................................................................... 849
Table 4-29 DCF second pickup ........................................................................................................................................................... 851
Table 4-30 HCI main ............................................................................................................................................................................. 853
Table 4-31 HCI drive ............................................................................................................................................................................. 855
Table 4-32 HCI cassette ....................................................................................................................................................................... 857
Table 4-33 HCI frame ........................................................................................................................................................................... 859
Table 4-34 HCI main pickup ................................................................................................................................................................ 861
Table 4-35 sHCI main 1 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 863
Table 4-36 sHCI main 3 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 865
Table 4-37 sHCI main 5 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 867
Table 4-38 sHCI main 6 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 869
Table 4-39 Pickup cover unit .............................................................................................................................................................. 871
Table 4-40 sHCI frame ......................................................................................................................................................................... 873
Table 4-41 Booklet finisher ................................................................................................................................................................. 875
Table 4-42 Mainline finisher 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 877
Table 4-48 Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold output ...................................................................... 889
Table 4-49 Low output, hb motor, and top guide ........................................................................................................................... 891
Table 4-50 SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide ................................................................................................................ 893
Table 4-51 Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor ..................................................................................... 895
Table 4-52 Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam .............................................................................................................................. 897
Table 4-53 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade ......................................................................................................... 899
Table 4-54 Fold roller, main blade, and top frame ......................................................................................................................... 901
Table 4-55 Three fold blade ............................................................................................................................................................... 903
Table 4-56 Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide ....................................................................................................... 905
Table 4-57 Entrance guide, mid jam, and main output .................................................................................................................. 907
Table 4-58 Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor ............................................................................ 909
Table 4-59 Front alignment (tamper) ............................................................................................................................................... 911
ENWW lxiii
Table 4-60 Rear alignment (tamper) ................................................................................................................................................. 913
Table 4-61 Shield .................................................................................................................................................................................. 915
Table 4-62 PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle .................................................................................................................... 917
Table 4-63 Finisher sub booklet ......................................................................................................................................................... 919
Table 4-64 IPTU (bridge) ...................................................................................................................................................................... 921
Table 4-65 Sub-inner finisher ............................................................................................................................................................. 923
Table 4-66 Finisher sub 1 .................................................................................................................................................................... 925
Table 5-8 Reports menu ................................................................................................................................................................... 1010
Table 5-9 Settings menu ................................................................................................................................................................... 1013
Table 5-10 Copy menu (MFP only) .................................................................................................................................................. 1057
Table 5-11 Scan menu (MFP) ........................................................................................................................................................... 1062
Table 5-12 Fax menu (fax models only) ......................................................................................................................................... 1071
Table 5-13 Print Options menu ........................................................................................................................................................ 1075
Table 5-14 Supplies menu ................................................................................................................................................................ 1076
Table 5-15 Trays menu ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1077
Table 5-16 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................................. 1078
Table 5-17 Backup/Restore menu .................................................................................................................................................. 1080
Table 5-18 Calibrate/Cleaning menu .............................................................................................................................................. 1081
Table 5-19 Information ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1097
Table 5-20 Maintenance counts ....................................................................................................................................................... 1098
Table 5-21 Diagnostics ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1099
Table 5-22 Service functions ............................................................................................................................................................ 1100
Table 5-23 Troubleshooting procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 1135
Table 7-1 Sensor locations ............................................................................................................................................................... 1182
Table 7-2 Roller location ................................................................................................................................................................... 1183
Table 7-3 Jam removal guide ........................................................................................................................................................... 1185
Table 7-4 Paper path ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1186
Table 7-5 Electrical parts layout ...................................................................................................................................................... 1188
Table 7-6 IPTU .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1191
lxiv ENWW
Table 7-7 Punch unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1191
Table 7-8 .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1192
Table 7-9 Finisher PCA ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1193
Table 7-10 Switch PCA ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1194
Table 8-1 Paper Size Specification .................................................................................................................................................. 1576
Table 8-2 Media performance .......................................................................................................................................................... 1579
Table 8-3 Finisher system—sectional view ................................................................................................................................... 1581
Table 8-4 Finisher system—paper path ........................................................................................................................................ 1582
Table 8-5 Finisher system—electrical parts layout ..................................................................................................................... 1583
Table 8-6 Finisher system—PBA connection information .......................................................................................................... 1585
ENWW lxv
lxvi ENWW
List of figures
Figure 2-1 Options .................................................................................................................................................................................. 31

Figure 2-2 Printer front view ................................................................................................................................................................. 37
Figure 2-3 Printer rear view .................................................................................................................................................................. 38
Figure 2-4 Inner view .............................................................................................................................................................................. 39
Figure 2-5 Rollers ................................................................................................................................................................................... 41
Figure 2-6 Sensor, motor, solenoid ..................................................................................................................................................... 43
Figure 2-7 Basic cassette ...................................................................................................................................................................... 45
Figure 2-8 Pickup unit 1 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 46
Figure 2-9 Pickup unit 2 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 46
Figure 2-10 Registration roller ............................................................................................................................................................. 47
Figure 2-11 MP feeder assembly ......................................................................................................................................................... 47
Figure 2-12 Paper separation ............................................................................................................................................................... 48
Figure 2-13 Fuser unit ............................................................................................................................................................................ 49
Figure 2-14 Fuser drive .......................................................................................................................................................................... 50
Figure 2-15 Fuser unit temperature control ...................................................................................................................................... 51
Figure 2-16 Loop control ....................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Figure 2-17 Printing process overview ................................................................................................................................................ 53
Figure 2-18 Drum unit ............................................................................................................................................................................ 54
Figure 2-19 Drum drive .......................................................................................................................................................................... 54
Figure 2-20 Developer unit ................................................................................................................................................................... 55
Figure 2-21 Developer auger ................................................................................................................................................................ 56
Figure 2-22 Toner cartridge .................................................................................................................................................................. 57
Figure 2-23 Paper transfer belt unit .................................................................................................................................................... 58
Figure 2-24 Transfer belt drive ............................................................................................................................................................. 59
Figure 2-25 Cleaning blade ................................................................................................................................................................... 60
Figure 2-26 Laser scanner assembly overview ................................................................................................................................. 61
Figure 2-27 Laser scanning optical path ............................................................................................................................................. 62
Figure 2-28 Laser synchronizing detectors ........................................................................................................................................ 63
Figure 2-29 Pickup and cassette lift drive .......................................................................................................................................... 64
Figure 2-30 Feed drive ........................................................................................................................................................................... 65
Figure 2-31 Registration drive .............................................................................................................................................................. 66
Figure 2-32 Fuser release/output drive .............................................................................................................................................. 67
ENWW lxvii
Figure 2-33 Drive motor ........................................................................................................................................................................ 68
Figure 2-34 Main drive unit motors ..................................................................................................................................................... 69
Figure 2-35 Toner supply drive ............................................................................................................................................................. 70
Figure 2-36 Toner reservoir drive ......................................................................................................................................................... 70
Figure 2-37 Scanner system overview ................................................................................................................................................ 71
Figure 2-38 Scan process ...................................................................................................................................................................... 72
Figure 2-39 Image processing .............................................................................................................................................................. 73
Figure 2-40 Scanning system components ........................................................................................................................................ 74
Figure 2-41 FR carriage ......................................................................................................................................................................... 75
Figure 2-42 HR carriage ......................................................................................................................................................................... 76
Figure 2-43 Imaging unit ....................................................................................................................................................................... 76
Figure 2-44 Wire driving ........................................................................................................................................................................ 77
Figure 2-45 Timing belt ......................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Figure 2-46 Shading sheet .................................................................................................................................................................... 79
Figure 2-47 Remove scan locking screw ............................................................................................................................................ 79
Figure 2-48 Tighten scan locking screw .............................................................................................................................................. 80
Figure 2-49 Flow ADF overview ............................................................................................................................................................ 81
Figure 2-50 Flow ADF sensors .............................................................................................................................................................. 82
Figure 2-51 Flow ADF Ultra Sonic Multifeed ....................................................................................................................................... 83
Figure 2-53 Flow ADF document lifting drive system ....................................................................................................................... 84
Figure 2-54 Flow ADF Scan-In Roller Release Drive System ........................................................................................................... 84
Figure 2-55 Flow ADF Registration ...................................................................................................................................................... 85
Figure 2-56 Flow ADF Scanning Position ............................................................................................................................................ 86
Figure 2-57 MSO 1 .................................................................................................................................................................................. 86
Figure 2-58 MSO 2 .................................................................................................................................................................................. 87
Figure 2-59 MSO 3 .................................................................................................................................................................................. 87
Figure 2-60 Dual sensor cleaning method ......................................................................................................................................... 88
Figure 2-61 Dual sensor cleaning method ......................................................................................................................................... 88
Figure 2-64 Block diagram .................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Figure 2-65 Clock diagram .................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Figure 2-66 Connection information ................................................................................................................................................... 95
Figure 2-67 Block diagram .................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Figure 2-68 Clock diagram .................................................................................................................................................................... 97
Figure 2-69 Connection information ................................................................................................................................................... 98
Figure 2-70 MSOK ................................................................................................................................................................................... 99
Figure 2-71 LVPS PCA (Type 5) ........................................................................................................................................................... 100
Figure 2-74 Fuser drive board ............................................................................................................................................................ 106
Figure 2-75 HVPS PCA ......................................................................................................................................................................... 107
Figure 2-76 Eraser PCA ........................................................................................................................................................................ 109
lxviii ENWW
Figure 2-77 Fuser PCA ......................................................................................................................................................................... 109
Figure 2-78 Waste sensor PCA ........................................................................................................................................................... 110
Figure 2-79 Paper size sensor PCA ................................................................................................................................................... 110
Figure 2-80 Flow ADF PCA .................................................................................................................................................................. 111
Figure 2-81 Scan joint PCA .................................................................................................................................................................. 112
Figure 2-82 CCDM PCA ......................................................................................................................................................................... 112
Figure 2-83 WLED IF PCA .................................................................................................................................................................... 113
Figure 2-84 WLED PCA ........................................................................................................................................................................ 113
Figure 2-85 Paper feeding system .................................................................................................................................................... 114
Figure 2-86 Paper path ....................................................................................................................................................................... 115
Figure 2-87 Electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions ................................................................................................. 116
Figure 2-88 PCA connection and DCF ................................................................................................................................................ 117
Figure 2-90 HCI paper path ................................................................................................................................................................. 119
Figure 2-91 Electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions ................................................................................................. 120
Figure 2-92 HCI PCA connection ........................................................................................................................................................ 121
Figure 2-94 sHCI paper path ............................................................................................................................................................... 123
Figure 2-95 sHCI electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions ........................................................................................ 124
Figure 2-96 sHCI PCA connection ....................................................................................................................................................... 125
Figure 3-1 Open the front door .......................................................................................................................................................... 137
Figure 3-2 Remove the TCU ................................................................................................................................................................ 137
Figure 3-3 Remove paper dust stick ................................................................................................................................................. 138
Figure 3-4 Remove the paper dust .................................................................................................................................................... 138
Figure 3-5 Install the paper dust stick .............................................................................................................................................. 138
Figure 3-6 Install the TCU .................................................................................................................................................................... 139
Figure 3-7 Close the front door .......................................................................................................................................................... 139
Figure 3-8 Clean the scanner glass ................................................................................................................................................... 140
Figure 3-9 Peel back the white backing and release one tab ....................................................................................................... 140
Figure 3-10 Clean flow document feeder white bar ....................................................................................................................... 141
Figure 3-11 Remove the formatter cover ........................................................................................................................................ 144
Figure 3-12 Locate the TPM ............................................................................................................................................................... 145
Figure 3-13 Connect the FIH ............................................................................................................................................................... 148
Figure 3-14 Release the HIP cover .................................................................................................................................................... 151
Figure 3-15 Remove the HIP cover .................................................................................................................................................... 151
Figure 3-16 Identify USB connector .................................................................................................................................................. 152
Figure 3-17 Select USB cable ............................................................................................................................................................. 152
Figure 3-18 Install the USB cable ....................................................................................................................................................... 153
Figure 3-19 Install the white power connector ............................................................................................................................... 153
Figure 3-20 Attach the metal ground connector ............................................................................................................................. 154
Figure 3-21 Position the NFC accessory in the HIP recess ............................................................................................................ 154
ENWW lxix
Figure 3-22 Install the NFC accessory ............................................................................................................................................... 155
Figure 3-23 Remove the TCU ............................................................................................................................................................. 158
Figure 3-24 Loosen one screw ........................................................................................................................................................... 160
Figure 3-25 Remove the drum unit ................................................................................................................................................... 160
Figure 3-26 Remove three screws and disconnect the small, black cable connector .............................................................. 163
Figure 3-27 Remove the developer unit ........................................................................................................................................... 163
Figure 3-28 Open the developer unit ................................................................................................................................................ 164
Figure 3-29 Distribute the developer powder ................................................................................................................................. 164
Figure 3-30 Fuser unit screw locations ............................................................................................................................................. 167
Figure 3-31 Fuser unit removal .......................................................................................................................................................... 167
Figure 3-32 Remove the connector cover ........................................................................................................................................ 170
Figure 3-33 Disconnect one connector ............................................................................................................................................. 170
Figure 3-34 Remove one screw and position the lever ................................................................................................................. 171
Figure 3-35 Remove one screw and position the lever ................................................................................................................. 171
Figure 3-36 Remove the PTB assembly ........................................................................................................................................... 172
Figure 3-37 Remove the two cassettes ............................................................................................................................................ 175
Figure 3-38 Slide the return guide .................................................................................................................................................... 175
Figure 3-39 Remove rollers ................................................................................................................................................................ 176
Figure 3-40 Coupler locations ............................................................................................................................................................ 176
Figure 3-41 Remove cover .................................................................................................................................................................. 179
Figure 3-42 Remove cover .................................................................................................................................................................. 180
Figure 3-43 MP tray flag orientation ................................................................................................................................................. 180
Figure 3-44 Remove the MP pickup/reverse/feed roller ............................................................................................................... 181
Figure 3-45 Remove the pickup roller assembly ............................................................................................................................ 184
Figure 3-46 Remove the pickup roller assembly cover .................................................................................................................. 184
Figure 3-47 Remove the pickup roller components ....................................................................................................................... 185
Figure 3-48 Remove the pickup roller assembly ............................................................................................................................ 186
Figure 3-49 Pickup roller components-disassembled ................................................................................................................... 186
Figure 3-50 Remove the separation roller cover ............................................................................................................................ 189
Figure 3-51 Remove one plastic clip ................................................................................................................................................. 189
Figure 3-52 Remove the separation roller ....................................................................................................................................... 190
Figure 3-53 Remove the separation roller ....................................................................................................................................... 190
Figure 3-59 Remove the document feeder bezel ........................................................................................................................... 209
Figure 3-60 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors ............................................................................... 210
Figure 3-61 Remove the USB interconnect cable ........................................................................................................................... 210
Figure 3-62 Remove the document feeder bezel ........................................................................................................................... 213
lxx ENWW
Figure 3-63 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors ............................................................................... 214
Figure 3-64 Remove the USB interconnect cable ........................................................................................................................... 214
Figure 3-65 Disconnect one FFC ........................................................................................................................................................ 215
Figure 3-66 Remove the control-panel keyboard .......................................................................................................................... 215
Figure 3-67 Remove the IPTU ............................................................................................................................................................ 218
Figure 3-68 Remove the front top inner cover ................................................................................................................................ 222
Figure 3-70 Remove two screws and rotate the cover .................................................................................................................. 224
Figure 3-71 Remove the front power cover ..................................................................................................................................... 225
Figure 3-75 Remove one screw and the power switch board ...................................................................................................... 229
Figure 3-76 Remove two screws and the power switch button ................................................................................................... 229
Figure 3-78 Remove the output bin .................................................................................................................................................. 232
Figure 3-82 Remove the top right cover .......................................................................................................................................... 237
Figure 3-83 Left dummy cover .......................................................................................................................................................... 239
Figure 3-84 Remove the left cover .................................................................................................................................................... 239
Figure 3-86 Remove the lower rear cover ........................................................................................................................................ 242
Figure 3-88 Remove the lower rear cover ........................................................................................................................................ 246
Figure 3-89 Remove the upper rear cover ....................................................................................................................................... 246
Figure 3-91 Remove the left rear corner cover ............................................................................................................................... 249
Figure 3-92 Remove four screws ...................................................................................................................................................... 252
Figure 3-93 Remove the right rear cover ......................................................................................................................................... 252
Figure 3-94 Remove four screws ...................................................................................................................................................... 255
Figure 3-95 Remove the right rear cover ......................................................................................................................................... 255
Figure 3-96 Disconnect one connector ............................................................................................................................................. 256
Figure 3-97 Release the right hinge .................................................................................................................................................. 256
Figure 3-98 Release the left dampener ........................................................................................................................................... 257
Figure 3-99 Remove the right door ................................................................................................................................................... 257
Figure 3-100 Remove the TCU ........................................................................................................................................................... 260
Figure 3-101 Remove the paper dust brush ................................................................................................................................... 260
Figure 3-102 Remove the front cover ............................................................................................................................................... 263
ENWW lxxi
Figure 3-104 Remove the front top inner cover ............................................................................................................................. 267
Figure 3-105 Remove two screws and rotate the cover ................................................................................................................ 267
Figure 3-106 Remove the front power cover .................................................................................................................................. 268
Figure 3-107 Remove the output bin ................................................................................................................................................ 268
Figure 3-110 Screw locations ............................................................................................................................................................. 270
Figure 3-111 Remove two screw caps and two screws ................................................................................................................ 270
Figure 3-112 Remove the inner front cover .................................................................................................................................... 271
Figure 3-119 Remove seven screws ................................................................................................................................................. 276
Figure 3-120 Remove the inner cover .............................................................................................................................................. 277
Figure 3-121 Remove one screw and the cover open sensor ...................................................................................................... 278
Figure 3-122 Remove the formatter cover ...................................................................................................................................... 280
Figure 3-123 Remove the lower rear cover ..................................................................................................................................... 281
Figure 3-124 Remove the LVPS cover .............................................................................................................................................. 281
Figure 3-125 Left dummy cover ........................................................................................................................................................ 284
Figure 3-126 Remove the left cover ................................................................................................................................................. 284
Figure 3-127 Remove two screws ..................................................................................................................................................... 285
Figure 3-128 Remove the laser scanner assembly ........................................................................................................................ 285
Figure 3-130 Loosen one screw ........................................................................................................................................................ 289
Figure 3-131 Remove the drum unit ................................................................................................................................................. 289
Figure 3-132 Remove three screws and disconnect the small, black cable connector ............................................................ 290
Figure 3-133 Remove the developer unit ........................................................................................................................................ 290
Figure 3-134 Open the developer unit .............................................................................................................................................. 291
Figure 3-135 Distribute the developer powder ............................................................................................................................... 291
Figure 3-140 Remove the fan duct ................................................................................................................................................... 294
Figure 3-141 Disconnect one connector .......................................................................................................................................... 294
Figure 3-143 Release one tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 295
Figure 3-144 Remove the developer fan shroud ............................................................................................................................ 296
lxxii ENWW
Figure 3-145 Release six tabs ............................................................................................................................................................ 296
Figure 3-146 Remove the developer fan ......................................................................................................................................... 297
Figure 3-147 Install the developer fan ............................................................................................................................................. 297
Figure 3-151 Remove the HVPS board ............................................................................................................................................. 302
Figure 3-154 Remove the upper rear cover ..................................................................................................................................... 305
Figure 3-155 Remove the left rear corner cover ............................................................................................................................ 306
Figure 3-156 Remove one screw ....................................................................................................................................................... 306
Figure 3-157 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws ......................................................................................................... 307
Figure 3-158 Identify the formatter cables ..................................................................................................................................... 307
Figure 3-160 Remove the main board .............................................................................................................................................. 308
Figure 3-161 Position of MSOK board ............................................................................................................................................... 309
Figure 3-162 Install the MSOK board ................................................................................................................................................ 309
Figure 3-163 Install the flat cable ...................................................................................................................................................... 310
Figure 3-173 Remove five screws ..................................................................................................................................................... 317
Figure 3-175 Remove the toner supply motor ............................................................................................................................... 318
ENWW lxxiii
Figure 3-189 Remove the crum connector ...................................................................................................................................... 327
Figure 3-192 Remove the LVPS fans ................................................................................................................................................ 330
Figure 3-193 Correct installation of LVPS fans ................................................................................................................................ 331
Figure 3-197 Remove LVPS board 1 ................................................................................................................................................. 335
Figure 3-201 LVPS board 2 ................................................................................................................................................................. 339
Figure 3-205 Remove the shield-LVPS sub upper .......................................................................................................................... 343
Figure 3-206 LVPS board 3 ................................................................................................................................................................. 343
Figure 3-210 Fuser drive board ......................................................................................................................................................... 348
Figure 3-214 Disconnect connectors and remove screws ............................................................................................................ 352
Figure 3-216 LVPS connectors installation ...................................................................................................................................... 353
Figure 3-217 Release the harness and remove three screws ...................................................................................................... 353
Figure 3-219 Release five tabs .......................................................................................................................................................... 354
Figure 3-220 Remove the fuser fan .................................................................................................................................................. 354
lxxiv ENWW
Figure 3-229 Disconnect one connector and release two retainers ............................................................................................ 362
Figure 3-230 Remove the main drive unit ....................................................................................................................................... 362
Figure 3-231 Rotate the coupler ....................................................................................................................................................... 363
Figure 3-235 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage ............................................................................................... 367
Figure 3-236 Remove the inductor unit ........................................................................................................................................... 367
Figure 3-241 Remove the CST rail cover .......................................................................................................................................... 372
Figure 3-242 Remove the auto closing unit ..................................................................................................................................... 373
Figure 3-249 Release the cables and remove three screws ......................................................................................................... 378
Figure 3-253 Remove the fuser/output drive unit .......................................................................................................................... 380
Figure 3-265 Remove the side door open sensor .......................................................................................................................... 389
ENWW lxxv
Figure 3-277 Remove the side door open sensor .......................................................................................................................... 397
Figure 3-278 Remove micro-switch .................................................................................................................................................. 397
Figure 3-283 Remove pickup drive unit 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 402
Figure 3-286 Remove pickup drive unit 2 ........................................................................................................................................ 406
Figure 3-289 Remove four screws .................................................................................................................................................... 410
Figure 3-290 Remove the right rear cover ....................................................................................................................................... 411
Figure 3-292 Release the right hinge ............................................................................................................................................... 412
Figure 3-293 Release the left dampener ......................................................................................................................................... 412
Figure 3-294 Remove the right door ................................................................................................................................................ 413
Figure 3-296 Remove the cover ........................................................................................................................................................ 414
Figure 3-297 Remove the feed/MP drive unit ................................................................................................................................. 414
Figure 3-298 Align the gears with the couplers .............................................................................................................................. 415
Figure 3-302 Remove the registration drive assembly ................................................................................................................. 419
lxxvi ENWW
Figure 3-313 Remove the sensor ...................................................................................................................................................... 426
Figure 3-321 Remove the laser scanner assembly ........................................................................................................................ 433
Figure 3-329 Remove the toner guide ............................................................................................................................................. 437
Figure 3-330 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw ................................................................................................. 438
Figure 3-331 Remove the reservoir assembly ................................................................................................................................ 438
Figure 3-332 Remove screws ............................................................................................................................................................ 441
ENWW lxxvii
Figure 3-350 Remove three screws and the lower cable cover ................................................................................................... 452
Figure 3-353 Remove the feed guide take away lower ................................................................................................................. 453
Figure 3-354 Remove the feed guide take away upper ................................................................................................................ 453
Figure 3-355 Disconnect one connector and remove the feed 2 sensor .................................................................................... 454
Figure 3-368 Remove one e-ring and bushing ............................................................................................................................... 461
Figure 3-370 Remove the shaft ......................................................................................................................................................... 461
Figure 3-371 Remove three screws .................................................................................................................................................. 462
Figure 3-372 Remove the guide-duplex lower ............................................................................................................................... 462
Figure 3-377 Release the MP Tray linker ......................................................................................................................................... 464
Figure 3-378 Release the MP unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 464
lxxviii ENWW
Figure 3-402 Remove the MP empty sensor ................................................................................................................................... 476
Figure 3-426 Remove the MP Tray upper ........................................................................................................................................ 488
Figure 3-427 Remove the MP paper length sensor ....................................................................................................................... 488
ENWW lxxix
Figure 3-451 Remove two screws and three gears ....................................................................................................................... 500
Figure 3-452 Remove the bracket-rear ............................................................................................................................................ 500
Figure 3-464 Remove the top right cover ........................................................................................................................................ 509
Figure 3-465 Fuser unit screw locations .......................................................................................................................................... 509
Figure 3-466 Fuser unit removal ....................................................................................................................................................... 510
Figure 3-467 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws ............................................................................................ 510
Figure 3-468 Remove the output unit .............................................................................................................................................. 511
lxxx ENWW
Figure 3-483 Return sensor ............................................................................................................................................................... 520
Figure 3-499 Remove the duplex 1 sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 531
ENWW lxxxi
Figure 3-514 Remove one screw and the guide ............................................................................................................................. 540
Figure 3-515 Remove the black adhesive strip ............................................................................................................................... 541
Figure 3-516 Release two tabs .......................................................................................................................................................... 541
Figure 3-518 Remove the output 1 bin full sensor ........................................................................................................................ 542
Figure 3-533 On the output unit, disconnect one connector and remove two gears ............................................................... 552
Figure 3-534 Output gate solenoid ................................................................................................................................................... 553
Figure 3-541 Remove one screw and the cover ............................................................................................................................. 558
Figure 3-543 Rotate pickup unit 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 559
Figure 3-545 Align gear, coupler, and bracket ................................................................................................................................ 560
lxxxii ENWW
Figure 3-569 Remove prefeed sensor 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 575
ENWW lxxxiii
Figure 3-600 Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor .......................................................................................................... 595
Figure 3-616 Remove five screws and the bracket. ....................................................................................................................... 605
Figure 3-620 Remove the HDD cover ............................................................................................................................................... 609
Figure 3-621 Remove the HDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 609
Figure 3-630 Remove the gear cover ............................................................................................................................................... 616
Figure 3-631 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws ............................................................................................... 616
Figure 3-632 Remove the registration assembly ........................................................................................................................... 617
Figure 3-633 Install the gear side of the shaft ................................................................................................................................ 617
Figure 3-634 Remove the bushing .................................................................................................................................................... 618
Figure 3-635 Install the bushing ........................................................................................................................................................ 618
Figure 3-636 Install the front of the shaft ....................................................................................................................................... 619
lxxxiv ENWW
Figure 3-645 Remove the gear cover ............................................................................................................................................... 625
Figure 3-646 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws ............................................................................................... 626
Figure 3-647 Remove the registration assembly ........................................................................................................................... 626
Figure 3-648 Install the gear side of the shaft ................................................................................................................................ 627
Figure 3-649 Remove the bushing .................................................................................................................................................... 627
Figure 3-650 Install the bushing ........................................................................................................................................................ 628
Figure 3-651 Install the front of the shaft ....................................................................................................................................... 628
Figure 3-653 Remove three screws and the registration sensor assembly .............................................................................. 629
Figure 3-665 Remove five screws ..................................................................................................................................................... 638
Figure 3-667 Disconnect one connector and release two retainers ............................................................................................ 639
Figure 3-668 Remove the main drive unit ....................................................................................................................................... 639
Figure 3-669 Rotate the coupler ....................................................................................................................................................... 640
Figure 3-670 Disconnect two connectors and release cables ...................................................................................................... 640
Figure 3-671 Remove one ground screw ......................................................................................................................................... 641
Figure 3-672 Disconnect three connectors ...................................................................................................................................... 641
Figure 3-673 Remove three screws and the high voltage terminal ............................................................................................ 642
Figure 3-674 Remove document feeder connector cover ............................................................................................................ 644
Figure 3-675 Remove the cable choke ............................................................................................................................................. 644
Figure 3-676 Disconnect document feeder harness ...................................................................................................................... 645
Figure 3-677 Alignment marks .......................................................................................................................................................... 645
ENWW lxxxv
Figure 3-679 Release the document feeder .................................................................................................................................... 646
Figure 3-680 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws .......................................................................................... 649
Figure 3-681 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws ................................................................................... 649
Figure 3-682 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws ........................................................................................... 650
Figure 3-683 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws ................................................................................... 650
Figure 3-685 Remove the jam access cover ground wire ............................................................................................................. 651
Figure 3-686 Remove the jam access cover door arm support ................................................................................................... 652
Figure 3-691 Remove the document feeder damping unit .......................................................................................................... 657
Figure 3-692 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover screws .................................................................. 657
Figure 3-693 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly .......................................................................................... 658
Figure 3-694 Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector ................................................................................................... 658
Figure 3-699 Remove the pickup roller assembly .......................................................................................................................... 664
Figure 3-700 Remove the document feeder paper path cover .................................................................................................... 664
Figure 3-701 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws ....................................................................................................... 665
Figure 3-702 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin ....................................................................................... 665
Figure 3-705 Remove the document feeder front motor ............................................................................................................. 669
Figure 3-706 Document feeder motors ........................................................................................................................................... 673
Figure 3-709 Remove the motor ....................................................................................................................................................... 675
Figure 3-711 Pickup motor ................................................................................................................................................................. 677
Figure 3-712 Pre-REGI motor ............................................................................................................................................................. 677
Figure 3-713 Remove the main fan .................................................................................................................................................. 678
lxxxvi ENWW
Figure 3-719 Remove the document feeder PCA fan connector ................................................................................................. 683
Figure 3-722 Remove the document feeder PCA fan .................................................................................................................... 686
Figure 3-727 Remove the pickup roller assembly .......................................................................................................................... 691
Figure 3-728 Remove the document feeder paper path cover .................................................................................................... 691
Figure 3-730 Remove the pick/feed cover ....................................................................................................................................... 692
Figure 3-731 Remove the ultrasonic sensor ................................................................................................................................... 693
Figure 3-740 Remove the document feeder bezel ........................................................................................................................ 701
Figure 3-741 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors ............................................................................ 702
Figure 3-742 Remove the USB interconnect cable ......................................................................................................................... 702
Figure 3-743 Disconnect one FFC ...................................................................................................................................................... 703
Figure 3-744 Remove the control-panel keyboard ........................................................................................................................ 703
Figure 3-745 Remove screw-caps and screws and release scan-front cover ........................................................................... 704
Figure 3-746 Release scan-left cover ............................................................................................................................................... 704
Figure 3-747 Remove scan-right cover ............................................................................................................................................ 705
Figure 3-748 Disconnect scan cables ............................................................................................................................................... 705
Figure 3-751 Lift up and release image scanner unit .................................................................................................................... 706
Figure 3-752 Remove scan glass ...................................................................................................................................................... 709
ENWW lxxxvii
Figure 3-762 Remove transparent tape ........................................................................................................................................... 716
Figure 3-763 Disconnect cable .......................................................................................................................................................... 716
Figure 3-764 Remove screws and release LED lamp module ...................................................................................................... 716
Figure 3-766 Remove screws and release imaging unit cover ..................................................................................................... 719
Figure 3-767 Disconnect flat cable .................................................................................................................................................... 720
Figure 3-768 Remove screws and release scanner imaging unit ................................................................................................ 720
Figure 3-777 Release scan-left cover ............................................................................................................................................... 727
Figure 3-778 Remove scan-right cover ............................................................................................................................................ 727
Figure 3-780 Remove three screws and the scanner rear cover ................................................................................................. 728
Figure 3-781 Remove screws and release scan joint board ......................................................................................................... 729
Figure 3-789 Remove joint board cover ........................................................................................................................................... 734
Figure 3-790 Remove screw .............................................................................................................................................................. 734
Figure 3-791 Disconnect harness ...................................................................................................................................................... 735
Figure 3-792 Remove screws and release APS sensor ................................................................................................................. 735
Figure 3-799 Remove the lower right cover .................................................................................................................................... 742
Figure 3-800 Slide the hinge pin ........................................................................................................................................................ 742
lxxxviii ENWW
Figure 3-801 Remove the DCF right door ........................................................................................................................................ 743
Figure 3-802 Remove the DCF rear cover ........................................................................................................................................ 745
Figure 3-803 Disconnect two connectors and open one retainer ................................................................................................ 745
Figure 3-804 Remove the feed drive unit ........................................................................................................................................ 746
Figure 3-805 Remove the feed motor .............................................................................................................................................. 746
Figure 3-807 Remove the DCF pickup motor .................................................................................................................................. 749
Figure 3-809 Remove the DCF PCA ................................................................................................................................................... 751
Figure 3-816 Remove the lower right cover .................................................................................................................................... 757
Figure 3-817 Slide the hinge pin ........................................................................................................................................................ 757
Figure 3-818 Remove the DCF right door ........................................................................................................................................ 758
Figure 3-819 Remove two screws and the cable cover ................................................................................................................. 758
Figure 3-820 Remove five screws and two brackets ..................................................................................................................... 759
Figure 3-821 Disconnect two connectors and remove eight screws .......................................................................................... 759
Figure 3-822 Remove the pickup units ............................................................................................................................................. 760
Figure 3-823 Remove the rear cover ................................................................................................................................................ 763
Figure 3-824 Disconnect two connectors and open the clamp .................................................................................................... 763
Figure 3-825 Remove the feed drive unit ........................................................................................................................................ 763
Figure 3-826 Remove the feed motor .............................................................................................................................................. 764
Figure 3-828 Remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor ............................................................................................................. 766
Figure 3-830 Remove the bottom HCI tray PCA .............................................................................................................................. 769
Figure 3-832 Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor .............................................................................................................. 772
Figure 3-834 Remove the shaft motor ............................................................................................................................................. 774
Figure 3-835 Remove the sHCI rear cover ....................................................................................................................................... 777
Figure 3-836 Right sHCI cover ............................................................................................................................................................ 779
Figure 3-837 Remove the sHCI cable cover ..................................................................................................................................... 779
Figure 3-839 Drive PH ......................................................................................................................................................................... 780
Figure 3-840 Feed motor .................................................................................................................................................................... 780
ENWW lxxxix
Figure 3-844 Pickup motor ................................................................................................................................................................. 784
Figure 3-848 sHCI PCA ......................................................................................................................................................................... 787
Figure 3-852 sHCI lift-up motor ......................................................................................................................................................... 790
Figure 4-1 Main assembly ................................................................................................................................................................... 794
Figure 4-2 Main assembly 2 ................................................................................................................................................................ 796
Figure 4-3 Output ................................................................................................................................................................................. 798
Figure 4-4 First cassette ...................................................................................................................................................................... 800
Figure 4-5 Second cassette ................................................................................................................................................................ 802
Figure 4-6 Main assembly frame ....................................................................................................................................................... 804
Figure 4-7 Main frame registration assembly ................................................................................................................................. 806
Figure 4-8 Drive system ...................................................................................................................................................................... 808
Figure 4-9 Frame main pickup 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 810
Figure 4-10 Frame main pickup ......................................................................................................................................................... 812
Figure 4-11 Cover ................................................................................................................................................................................. 814
Figure 4-12 Right door ........................................................................................................................................................................ 816
Figure 4-13 MP tray ............................................................................................................................................................................. 818
Figure 4-14 Right door guide ............................................................................................................................................................. 820
Figure 4-15 Right door output and takeaway ................................................................................................................................. 822
Figure 4-16 PTB transfer ..................................................................................................................................................................... 824
Figure 4-17 Flow ADF (z models) ....................................................................................................................................................... 826
Figure 4-18 Flow ADF open cover (z models) .................................................................................................................................. 828
Figure 4-19 Flow ADF pickup roller assembly ................................................................................................................................. 830
Figure 4-20 Flow ADF stacker ............................................................................................................................................................ 832
Figure 4-21 Flow ADF main frame (z models) ................................................................................................................................. 834
Figure 4-22 Flow ADF image scanner ............................................................................................................................................... 836
Figure 4-23 Flow ADF image scanner, lower ................................................................................................................................... 838
Figure 4-24 Reservoir .......................................................................................................................................................................... 840
Figure 4-25 DCF main .......................................................................................................................................................................... 842
Figure 4-26 DCF frame ........................................................................................................................................................................ 844
Figure 4-27 DCF rear frame ................................................................................................................................................................ 846
Figure 4-28 Opt feed drive .................................................................................................................................................................. 848
Figure 4-29 DCF second pickup .......................................................................................................................................................... 850
Figure 4-30 HCI main ........................................................................................................................................................................... 852
xc ENWW
Figure 4-31 HCI drive ........................................................................................................................................................................... 854
Figure 4-32 HCI cassette ..................................................................................................................................................................... 856
Figure 4-33 HCI frame ......................................................................................................................................................................... 858
Figure 4-34 HCI main pickup ............................................................................................................................................................... 860
Figure 4-35 sHCI main 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 862
Figure 4-36 sHCI main 3 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 864
Figure 4-37 sHCI main 5 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 866
Figure 4-38 sHCI main 6 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 868
Figure 4-39 Pickup cover unit ............................................................................................................................................................. 870
Figure 4-40 sHCI frame ....................................................................................................................................................................... 872
Figure 4-41 Booklet finisher ............................................................................................................................................................... 874
Figure 4-42 Mainline finisher 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 876
Figure 4-48 Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold output .................................................................... 888
Figure 4-49 Low output, hb motor, and top guide .......................................................................................................................... 890
Figure 4-50 SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide ............................................................................................................... 892
Figure 4-51 Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor .................................................................................... 894
Figure 4-52 Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam ............................................................................................................................ 896
Figure 4-53 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade ........................................................................................................ 898
Figure 4-54 Fold roller, main blade, and top frame ........................................................................................................................ 900
Figure 4-55 Three fold blade .............................................................................................................................................................. 902
Figure 4-56 Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide ..................................................................................................... 904
Figure 4-57 Entrance guide, mid jam, and main output ................................................................................................................ 906
Figure 4-58 Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor .......................................................................... 908
Figure 4-59 Front alignment (tamper) .............................................................................................................................................. 910
Figure 4-60 Rear alignment (tamper) ............................................................................................................................................... 912
Figure 4-61 Shield ................................................................................................................................................................................ 914
Figure 4-62 PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle .................................................................................................................. 916
Figure 4-63 Finisher sub booklet ....................................................................................................................................................... 918
Figure 4-64 IPTU (bridge) .................................................................................................................................................................... 920
Figure 4-65 Sub-inner finisher ........................................................................................................................................................... 922
Figure 4-66 Finisher sub 1 .................................................................................................................................................................. 924
Figure 5-1 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image) ............................................................................................................... 979
Figure 5-2 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone ....................................................................................................................... 980
Figure 5-3 No control panel sound .................................................................................................................................................... 981
ENWW xci
Figure 5-4 Home button is unresponsive ......................................................................................................................................... 982
Figure 5-5 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional) ................................................... 983
Figure 5-7 Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock ..................................................................................................................... 985
Figure 5-8 Defeat the front door interlock ....................................................................................................................................... 986
Figure 5-12 Open the Control Panel ............................................................................................................................................... 1003
Figure 5-13 Turn Windows features on or off ............................................................................................................................... 1003
Figure 5-14 Enable the telnet client feature ................................................................................................................................. 1004
Figure 5-15 Select the +3:Administrator item .............................................................................................................................. 1005
Figure 5-16 Select the +A:Remote Admin item ............................................................................................................................ 1005
Figure 5-17 Select the 1:Start Telnet item .................................................................................................................................... 1005
Figure 5-18 Telnet connecting message ....................................................................................................................................... 1005
Figure 5-19 Telnet error message .................................................................................................................................................. 1006
Figure 5-20 Telnet server function initialized ............................................................................................................................... 1006
Figure 5-21 Open a command window .......................................................................................................................................... 1007
Figure 5-22 Start a telnet session ................................................................................................................................................... 1007
Figure 5-23 Establish a telnet connection ..................................................................................................................................... 1007
Figure 5-24 Enter the PIN ................................................................................................................................................................. 1008
Figure 5-25 Remote Admin window ............................................................................................................................................... 1008
Figure 5-26 Access the administrator menu ................................................................................................................................. 1009
Figure 5-27 Access the remote admin menu ................................................................................................................................ 1009
Figure 5-28 Terminate the telnet connection ............................................................................................................................... 1010
Figure 5-29 Open the Flow ADF cover ............................................................................................................................................ 1083
Figure 5-30 Remove jam from the Flow ADF ................................................................................................................................ 1084
Figure 5-31 Open the Flow ADF cover ............................................................................................................................................ 1084
Figure 5-33 Open input tray ............................................................................................................................................................. 1085
Figure 5-35 Open the Flow ADF ....................................................................................................................................................... 1086
Figure 5-36 Remove jam from the feed area ................................................................................................................................ 1087
Figure 5-37 Open right door ............................................................................................................................................................ 1087
Figure 5-38 Remove jam .................................................................................................................................................................. 1088
Figure 5-39 Remove tray .................................................................................................................................................................. 1088
Figure 5-41 Open bottom right door .............................................................................................................................................. 1089
Figure 5-43 Remove paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 1090
xcii ENWW
Figure 5-52 Remove paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 1095
Figure 5-53 Bin full sensor ............................................................................................................................................................... 1095
Figure 5-54 Service tools view ......................................................................................................................................................... 1096
Figure 5-55 Information .................................................................................................................................................................... 1097
Figure 5-56 Maintenance counts ..................................................................................................................................................... 1098
Figure 5-57 Diagnostics .................................................................................................................................................................... 1099
Figure 5-58 Service functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 1100
Figure 5-62 Typical faulty images ................................................................................................................................................... 1135
Figure 7-1 Sensor locations ............................................................................................................................................................. 1182
Figure 7-2 Roller location ................................................................................................................................................................. 1183
Figure 7-3 Jam removal guide ......................................................................................................................................................... 1185
Figure 7-4 Paper path ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1186
Figure 7-5 Electrical parts layout (1 of 2) ....................................................................................................................................... 1187
Figure 7-6 Electrical parts layout (2 of 2) ....................................................................................................................................... 1188
Figure 7-7 IPTU ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1191
Figure 7-8 Punch unit ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1191
Figure 7-9 ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1192
Figure 7-10 Finisher PCA ................................................................................................................................................................... 1193
Figure 7-11 Switch PCA ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1194
Figure 7-12 Booklet maker PCA ...................................................................................................................................................... 1194
Figure 7-13 Remove the top output bin ......................................................................................................................................... 1201
Figure 7-14 Remove six screws and the right top cover ............................................................................................................. 1203
Figure 7-16 Remove six screws ....................................................................................................................................................... 1207
Figure 7-18 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ..................................................................................................... 1208
ENWW xciii
Figure 7-23 Lift the top hinge pin .................................................................................................................................................... 1212
Figure 7-24 Remove the top hinge pin ........................................................................................................................................... 1213
Figure 7-25 Release the lower hinge pin ....................................................................................................................................... 1213
Figure 7-26 Remove the lower hinge pin ....................................................................................................................................... 1214
Figure 7-27 Remove one screw and the front door ..................................................................................................................... 1214
Figure 7-33 Remove four screws and the rear cover ................................................................................................................... 1220
Figure 7-43 Remove the jam-access knob .................................................................................................................................... 1227
Figure 7-45 Remove five screws and the front cover .................................................................................................................. 1228
Figure 7-58 Remove three screws and the front lower cover .................................................................................................... 1236
Figure 7-59 Remove the booklet tray ............................................................................................................................................ 1239
Figure 7-60 Install the booklet tray ................................................................................................................................................ 1239
xciv ENWW
Figure 7-64 Remove the caster cover ............................................................................................................................................ 1243
Figure 7-78 Remove four screws and the rear cover ................................................................................................................... 1253
Figure 7-82 Remove the caster cover ............................................................................................................................................ 1255
Figure 7-84 Release the lower shield ............................................................................................................................................. 1256
Figure 7-85 Disconnect two connectors ........................................................................................................................................ 1256
Figure 7-86 Locate sensors .............................................................................................................................................................. 1257
Figure 7-100 Remove four screws and the rear cover ................................................................................................................ 1266
Figure 7-101 Remove the booklet tray .......................................................................................................................................... 1266
Figure 7-102 Install the booklet tray .............................................................................................................................................. 1267
ENWW xcv
Figure 7-103 Remove four screws .................................................................................................................................................. 1267
Figure 7-104 Remove the caster cover .......................................................................................................................................... 1268
Figure 7-106 Release the lower shield ........................................................................................................................................... 1269
Figure 7-107 Disconnect two connectors ...................................................................................................................................... 1269
Figure 7-108 Locate sensors ........................................................................................................................................................... 1270
Figure 7-109 Lower the output tray ............................................................................................................................................... 1270
Figure 7-110 Remove six screws .................................................................................................................................................... 1271
Figure 7-111 Release the shield ...................................................................................................................................................... 1271
Figure 7-112 Disconnect one connector ........................................................................................................................................ 1272
Figure 7-114 Remove six screws and the right top cover ........................................................................................................... 1275
Figure 7-117 Disconnect one connector and release retainer ................................................................................................... 1277
Figure 7-118 Remove seven screws .............................................................................................................................................. 1277
Figure 7-120 Remove the controller PCA ...................................................................................................................................... 1278
Figure 7-125 Lift the top hinge pin ................................................................................................................................................. 1283
Figure 7-126 Remove the top hinge pin ........................................................................................................................................ 1284
Figure 7-127 Release the lower hinge pin ..................................................................................................................................... 1284
Figure 7-128 Remove the lower hinge pin .................................................................................................................................... 1285
Figure 7-129 Remove one screw and the front door ................................................................................................................... 1285
Figure 7-130 Remove the jam-access knob ................................................................................................................................. 1286
Figure 7-131 Remove one screw .................................................................................................................................................... 1286
Figure 7-132 Remove five screws and the front cover ................................................................................................................ 1287
Figure 7-135 Move the staple unit to the front ............................................................................................................................. 1288
Figure 7-136 Remove the staple cartridge .................................................................................................................................... 1289
Figure 7-137 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws ........................................................................................ 1289
Figure 7-138 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws ............................................................................................ 1290
Figure 7-139 Remove the staple unit ............................................................................................................................................. 1290
xcvi ENWW
Figure 7-146 Remove two screws and the feed guide ................................................................................................................ 1296
Figure 7-161 Remove the feed exit motor .................................................................................................................................... 1306
Figure 7-162 Remove two screws .................................................................................................................................................. 1307
Figure 7-163 Remove the top jam access cover ........................................................................................................................... 1307
Figure 7-180 Remove the top jam access cover ........................................................................................................................... 1318
Figure 7-182 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector ......................................................................................... 1319
Figure 7-183 Remove three screws ............................................................................................................................................... 1320
Figure 7-184 Remove the feed assembly ..................................................................................................................................... 1320
ENWW xcvii
Figure 7-185 Locate sensors and connector ................................................................................................................................. 1321
Figure 7-213 Move the staple unit to the center .......................................................................................................................... 1337
Figure 7-214 Disconnect three connectors ................................................................................................................................... 1337
Figure 7-217 Rotate the sensor ...................................................................................................................................................... 1339
Figure 7-219 Remove the front tamper shaft .............................................................................................................................. 1340
Figure 7-220 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws ........................................................................................ 1340
Figure 7-222 Remove the rear tamper shaft ................................................................................................................................ 1341
xcviii ENWW
Figure 7-227 Lift the edges of the tampers .................................................................................................................................. 1344
Figure 7-228 Remove the ejector unit ........................................................................................................................................... 1344
Figure 7-229 Reinstall the front tamper shaft .............................................................................................................................. 1345
Figure 7-230 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft ............................................................................................................................... 1345
ENWW xcix
Figure 7-276 Remove the front tamper ......................................................................................................................................... 1371
c ENWW
Figure 7-322 Remove the rear tamper .......................................................................................................................................... 1396
Figure 7-329 Remove the feed entrance motor ........................................................................................................................... 1401
Figure 7-344 Disconnect two connectors and remove two screws .......................................................................................... 1414
Figure 7-345 Slide the gear off of the shaft .................................................................................................................................. 1414
Figure 7-346 Remove the sensor ................................................................................................................................................... 1415
Figure 7-348 Remove the buffer motor ......................................................................................................................................... 1416
ENWW ci
cii ENWW
Figure 7-394 Remove the front tamper ......................................................................................................................................... 1441
Figure 7-396 Release the belt and remove the motor ................................................................................................................ 1442
ENWW ciii
Figure 7-442 Remove the rear tamper .......................................................................................................................................... 1467
Figure 7-444 Release the belt and remove the motor ................................................................................................................ 1468
civ ENWW
Figure 7-474 Remove two screws and the motor ........................................................................................................................ 1485
Figure 7-475 Install the motor and bracket .................................................................................................................................. 1485
Figure 7-483 Open two retainers .................................................................................................................................................... 1492
Figure 7-486 Remove four screws and the motor assembly ..................................................................................................... 1493
Figure 7-487 Remove the motor assembly .................................................................................................................................. 1494
Figure 7-488 Remove the bushing ................................................................................................................................................. 1494
Figure 7-489 Install the bushing ..................................................................................................................................................... 1495
Figure 7-490 Install the motor assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 1495
Figure 7-491 Remove five screws and the cover ......................................................................................................................... 1498
Figure 7-498 Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher ................................................................................................. 1504
Figure 7-499 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw .............................................................................................. 1505
Figure 7-500 Release the metal bracket ....................................................................................................................................... 1505
Figure 7-502 Slide the right rail ....................................................................................................................................................... 1506
Figure 7-504 Remove the booklet finisher .................................................................................................................................... 1507
Figure 7-505 Position the hooks ..................................................................................................................................................... 1508
Figure 7-506 Align arrows ................................................................................................................................................................ 1508
Figure 7-508 Extend the right rail ................................................................................................................................................... 1509
ENWW cv
Figure 7-515 Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher ................................................................................................. 1515
Figure 7-516 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw .............................................................................................. 1516
Figure 7-517 Release the metal bracket ....................................................................................................................................... 1516
Figure 7-519 Slide the right rail ....................................................................................................................................................... 1517
Figure 7-521 Remove the booklet finisher .................................................................................................................................... 1518
Figure 7-522 Position the hooks ..................................................................................................................................................... 1519
Figure 7-525 Extend the right rail ................................................................................................................................................... 1520
Figure 7-527 Remove one screw and the metal cover ................................................................................................................ 1521
Figure 7-528 Remove four screws and the PCA ........................................................................................................................... 1522
Figure 7-538 Remove the lower right shield ................................................................................................................................. 1529
Figure 7-540 Raise the jam access cover ....................................................................................................................................... 1530
Figure 7-541 Raise the booklet width guide ................................................................................................................................. 1530
Figure 7-544 Release the guide arm .............................................................................................................................................. 1532
Figure 7-545 Lower the width guide .............................................................................................................................................. 1532
Figure 7-547 Remove the fold stopper unit .................................................................................................................................. 1533
Figure 7-548 Adjust the alignment gauge ..................................................................................................................................... 1534
Figure 7-550 Remove the booklet feed entrance motor ............................................................................................................ 1537
Figure 7-552 Remove the TE presser motor ................................................................................................................................. 1540
cvi ENWW
Figure 7-557 Remove the stopper moving motor ....................................................................................................................... 1544
Figure 7-559 Remove the separate pawl motor .......................................................................................................................... 1548
Figure 7-566 Remove the folding roller motor ............................................................................................................................. 1553
Figure 7-571 Remove the blade motor .......................................................................................................................................... 1558
Figure 7-573 Check arrow alignment ............................................................................................................................................. 1562
Figure 7-576 Remove one e-clip, gear, and belt .......................................................................................................................... 1563
Figure 7-577 Remove the bracket and motor .............................................................................................................................. 1564
Figure 7-579 Install one screw ........................................................................................................................................................ 1565
Figure 7-580 Check arrow alignment ............................................................................................................................................. 1565
Figure 7-582 Finisher system diagram .......................................................................................................................................... 1569
Figure 8-1 Finisher system—sectional view ................................................................................................................................. 1581
Figure 8-2 Finisher system—paper path ....................................................................................................................................... 1582
Figure 8-3 Finisher system—electrical parts layout .................................................................................................................... 1583
Figure 8-4 Finisher system—block diagram ................................................................................................................................. 1585
Figure 8-5 Finisher system—PBA connection information ......................................................................................................... 1585
Figure 8-6 Remove the entrance sensor (1 of 7) .......................................................................................................................... 1591
Figure 8-10 Remove the entrance sensor (5 of 7) ....................................................................................................................... 1593
ENWW cvii
Figure 8-13 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7) ........................................................................................................................ 1595
Figure 8-26 Remove the exit sensor .............................................................................................................................................. 1604
Figure 8-27 Remove the exit motor (1 of 3) .................................................................................................................................. 1606
Figure 8-30 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub-assembly (1 of 6) ............................................................................................ 1609
Figure 8-31 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub-assembly (2 of 6) ............................................................................................ 1609
Figure 8-32 Remove the Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly (3 of 6) ............................................................................................ 1610
Figure 8-33 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (4 of 6) ............................................................................................. 1610
Figure 8-35 Remove the front jogger motor (1 of 22) ................................................................................................................. 1613
Figure 8-44 Remove the front jogger motor (10 of 22) .............................................................................................................. 1617
cviii ENWW
Figure 8-59 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15) .................................................................................................... 1626
Figure 8-73 Remove the front jogger home sensor (10 of 15) .................................................................................................. 1633
Figure 8-77 Remove the front jogger home sensor .................................................................................................................... 1635
Figure 8-87 Remove the rear jogger motor (1 of 3) ..................................................................................................................... 1641
Figure 8-93 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 11) ...................................................................................................................... 1646
ENWW cix
Figure 8-101 Remove the front jogger home sensor (10 of 11) ............................................................................................... 1650
Figure 8-102 Remove the rear jogger home sensor (11 of 11) ................................................................................................. 1650
Figure 8-103 Remove the exit motor (1 of 3) ............................................................................................................................... 1652
Figure 8-104 Remove the exit motor (2 of 3) ............................................................................................................................... 1652
Figure 8-105 Remove the stapler (1 of 2) ..................................................................................................................................... 1653
Figure 8-106 Remove the stapler (2 of 2) ..................................................................................................................................... 1653
Figure 8-112 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub-assembly (1 of 6) ......................................................................................... 1658
Figure 8-113 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub-assembly (2 of 6) ......................................................................................... 1658
Figure 8-114 Remove the Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly (3 of 6) ......................................................................................... 1659
Figure 8-115 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (4 of 6) .......................................................................................... 1659
Figure 8-116 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (5 of 6) .......................................................................................... 1660
Figure 8-117 Remove the stapler position sensor (1 of 7) ......................................................................................................... 1661
Figure 8-129 Remove the traverse motor (1 of 2) ....................................................................................................................... 1669
Figure 8-130 Remove the traverse motor (2 of 2) ....................................................................................................................... 1669
cx ENWW
Figure 8-141 Remove the stacker motor ...................................................................................................................................... 1676
Figure 8-152 Remove the stacker encoder sensor ...................................................................................................................... 1683
Figure 8-163 Remove the stacker lower limit switch (1 of 2) .................................................................................................... 1690
Figure 8-164 Remove the stacker lower limit switch (2 of 2) .................................................................................................... 1690
Figure 8-171 Remove the stack beam sensor .............................................................................................................................. 1695
ENWW cxi
Figure 8-177 Remove the tray ......................................................................................................................................................... 1700
Figure 8-178 Remove the sub-tray ................................................................................................................................................ 1700
Figure 8-179 Remove the PBA ........................................................................................................................................................ 1701
Figure 8-181 Remove the sub-stacker plate ................................................................................................................................ 1702
Figure 8-182 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly ....................................................................................... 1702
Figure 8-183 Release the motor paddle sub assembly .............................................................................................................. 1703
Figure 8-184 Remove the guide harness front ............................................................................................................................. 1703
Figure 8-185 Release the finisher sub-motor tray ....................................................................................................................... 1704
Figure 8-187 Release the sensor .................................................................................................................................................... 1705
Figure 8-199 Remove the paper holding lever solenoid (1 of 4) ............................................................................................... 1712
cxii ENWW
Figure 8-232 Remove the paper support home sensor (1 of 4) ................................................................................................ 1733
Figure 8-255 Remove the ejector motor assembly (1 of 6) ....................................................................................................... 1746
Figure 8-257 Remove two belt-timing gears ................................................................................................................................ 1747
Figure 8-258 Remove the belt-timing gear and one screw ........................................................................................................ 1747
ENWW cxiii
Figure 8-259 Disconnect connectors .............................................................................................................................................. 1748
Figure 8-262 Remove the main paddle motor ............................................................................................................................. 1750
Figure 8-263 Remove the bracket-paddle sensor ....................................................................................................................... 1752
Figure 8-264 Remove the main paddle home sensor ................................................................................................................. 1752
Figure 8-265 Remove the main paddle ......................................................................................................................................... 1754
Figure 8-282 Remove two belt-timing gears ................................................................................................................................ 1764
Figure 8-283 Remove the belt-timing gear and one screw ........................................................................................................ 1764
Figure 8-284 Disconnect connectors .............................................................................................................................................. 1765
Figure 8-287 Remove the ejector assembly ................................................................................................................................. 1766
Figure 8-293 Remove the punch dust full sensor sub-assembly ............................................................................................. 1771
Figure 8-294 Remove the punch dust full sensor ........................................................................................................................ 1771
Figure 8-295 Remove three screws ............................................................................................................................................... 1773
Figure 8-296 Remove the e-ring ..................................................................................................................................................... 1773
Figure 8-297 Remove the sheet-punch front ............................................................................................................................... 1774
Figure 8-298 Remove the punch dummy ...................................................................................................................................... 1774
Figure 8-299 Remove the bracket-SPT B ...................................................................................................................................... 1775
cxiv ENWW
Figure 8-300 Remove the door switch ........................................................................................................................................... 1775
Figure 8-301 Remove the cover-rear ............................................................................................................................................. 1777
Figure 8-302 Remove the finisher sub-cover middle and finisher sub-cover compile .......................................................... 1777
Figure 8-304 Remove the finisher sub-tray frame ...................................................................................................................... 1778
Figure 8-305 Remove the PBA cover .............................................................................................................................................. 1779
Figure 8-308 Remove the switch assembly .................................................................................................................................. 1780
Figure 8-310 Remove the end fence home sensor ..................................................................................................................... 1782
ENWW cxv
cxvi ENWW
1 Precautions
Please read the precautions listed below and follow them closely in order to prevent accidents or damage to the
printer.
● Safety warning
● Caution for safety
● ESD precautions
ENWW 1
Safety warning
1. Service should be performed by a factory trained service technician.
This printer contains high voltages and lasers which are dangerous. This printer should only be serviced by
a factory trained service technician.
2. Use HP replacement parts.
There are no customer serviceable parts inside the printer. Do not make any unauthorized changes or
additions to the printer as these could cause the printer to malfunction and create an electric shock or fire
hazard.
3. Laser Safety Statement.
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J
for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the
requirements of IEC 60825-1. Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system
and printer are designed so that there is never human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during
normal operation, user maintenance or a prescribed service condition.
– Wavelength: 800 nm
– Beam divergence
○ Parallel: 11 degrees
○ Perpendicular: 35 degrees
– Maximum power of energy output: 12 mW
WARNING! Do not operate or service the printer when the protective cover is removed from the laser/
scanner assembly. The reflected laser, although invisible, can cause eye damage.
Following these safety precautions will reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and personal injury.
4. Lithium battery not replaceable by user.
2 Chapter 1 Precautions ENWW

Caution for safety
Toxic material
This printer contains toxic materials which could cause illness if ingested.
● Keep the imaging unit and toner cartridge away from children. The toner powder in the imaging unit and
the toner cartridge might be harmful. If the toner powder is swallowed, contact a doctor.
Electric shock and fire safety precautions

Failure to follow these instructions could result in electric shock or cause a fire.
1. Use the correct voltage. Failure to do so could damage the printer and cause fire or electric shock.
2. Use the power cable supplied with the printer. Use of an incorrectly specified cable could cause overheating
and fire.
3. Do not overload the power socket. This could lead to overheating of the cables inside the wall and cause
fire.
4. Keep water and other liquids, paper clips, pins, and other foreign objects away from the printer. Contact
with liquids or these objects might cause electric shock or fire.
5. Do not touch the plugs on the ends of the power cable with wet hands. When servicing the printer, remove
the power plug from the wall socket.
6. Use caution when plugging or unplugging the power cable.
ENWW Caution for safety 3

7. Take care of the power cable. Do not allow the power cable to become twisted or sharply bent around
corners as this will cause damage. Do not place objects on top of the power cable. Damage to the power
cable might cause overheating and fire. Exposed cables might cause electric shock. Replace damaged
power cable immediately. Do not reuse or repair a damaged power cable. Certain chemicals can damage
the coating on the power cable, weakening the coating or exposing cables which might cause electric shock
or fire.
8. Make sure that the power outlet and plugs are not cracked or broken. Repair these defects as soon as
possible. Be careful to not cut or damage the power cable or plugs when moving the printer.
9. Use caution during thunder or lightning storms. HP recommends the printer be disconnected from the
power source when thunder or lightning is expected. Do not touch the machine or the power cable if it is
still connected to the power outlet during these weather conditions.
10. Do not place the printer in damp or dusty areas. Install the printer in a clean, well-ventilated location. Do
not position the machine near a humidifier or in front of an air conditioner. Moisture and dust build up inside
the printer can lead to overheating and cause fire or rust.
11. Do not place the printer in direct sunlight. Direct sunlight can cause the temperature inside the printer to
rise causing failure to work properly, and in extreme conditions, might lead to fire.
12. Do not insert metal objects into the printer through the ventilator fan or other parts of the casing. Doing so
could lead to the metal object making contact with the high voltage conductor inside the printer, causing
electric shock.
13. Wait 5 minutes after unplugging the power cable before replacing the SMPS board to avoid electric shock.

Handling precautions
The following instructions are for the user’s personal safety, to avoid injury, and to avoid damage to the printer.
1. Make sure the printer is placed on a level surface capable of supporting the weight of the printer. Failure to
do so could cause the printer to tip or fall.
2. The printer contains rollers, gears, and fans. Make sure to not catch fingers, hair, or clothing in any these
rotating devices.
3. Do not place any small metal objects, or containers of water, chemicals, or other liquids close to the printer.
If spilled, these objects or liquids could get into the printer and cause damage, or cause electric shock or
fire.
4. Do not place the printer in damp or dusty areas, near an open window, or close to a humidifier or heater.
These conditions can cause damage to the printer.
5. Do place candles or burning cigarettes on the printer. Doing so could cause fire.
6. Make sure that the printer is installed and operated in an area that meets temperature and humidity
specifications.
– The printer cannot be used immediately after being stored at below zero Celsius for long periods of
time. Doing so could cause malfunction. Place the printer in an area where it can reach room
temperature before operation.
Removal and Replacement precautions

1. Use caution when replacing parts. Always use HP parts. Make sure to note the exact location of parts and
cable routing before dismantling any part of the printer. Make sure all parts and cables are replaced
correctly. Complete the following procedures before dismantling the printer or replacing any parts.
2. Make sure that the power cable is disconnected before servicing or replacing any electrical parts.
3. Disconnect interface cables and power cables.
4. Use approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, printer name, voltage, and current or
temperature ratings are correct.
5. Do not excessive force to remove or refit parts, especially when fitting screws into plastic.
6. Make sure not to drop any small parts into the printer.
7. Be careful when handling the OPC drum:
– The OPC Drum can be permanently damaged if exposed to light. Be careful not to expose the OPC
Drum to direct sunlight, fluorescent light, or incandescent room lighting. Exposure for as little as 5
minutes can damage the surface of the photoconductive properties and will result in print quality
degradation. Be careful when servicing the printer. Remove the OPC Drum and store it in a black bag
or other lightproof container. Be careful when working with the printer if the covers, especially the top
cover, are open, as light is admitted to the OPC area and can damage the OPC Drum.
– Make sure not to scratch the green surface of the OPC Drum Unit. If the green surface of the Drum
Cartridge is scratched or touched, the print quality will be compromised.
Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury

1. Be careful with high temperature parts.
ENWW Caution for safety 5

The fuser unit operates at high temperatures. Wait for the fuser unit to cool down before disassembly.
2. Keep fingers, hair, and clothes away from moving parts.
To avoid injury, do not put fingers, hair, or clothes near moving parts such as the paper feeding entrance,
motor, and fan.
3. Use safe lifting and handling techniques to move the printer.
The printer is heavy. To avoid injury, use the lifting handles located on each side of the printer and lift
carefully.
4. Make sure the printer is installed safely.
Make sure the printer is placed on a level surface that is capable of supporting the weight of the printer.
Failure to do so could cause the printer to tip or fall, possibly causing personal injury or damage to the
printer.
5. Do not install the printer on a sloping or unstable surface. After installation, make sure that the printer is
stable.

ESD precautions
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when
removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an
ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
ENWW ESD precautions 7

2 Product specifications and description
● Product overview
● Specifications
● Machine external view
● Feeding system
● Fuser unit
● Image creation
● Laser scanner assembly
● Drive system
● Flatbed Scanner System
● Flow Automatic Document Feeder (Flow ADF) dn/z bundles (GX)
● Hardware configuration
● Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
● High capacity input tray (HCI)
● Side high capacity input tray (sHCI)
ENWW 9
Product overview
● Printing speed
– E82540
○ Up to 40 ppm in A4/Letter
○ Up to 21 ppm in A3
– E82550
– E82560
● Processor
– Quad Core 1.5 GHz
● Memory
– 7 GB (3 GB Formatter + 4 GB)
● ADF
– Flow ADF
● Control panel
– 8 inch touch screen
10 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Specifications
General specifications
Table 2-1 General specifications
Item Specification
Processor CPU 1.5 GHz (Quad Core)
User Interface Operational Panel 8 inch touch screen
LED 2 (Power/Status)
Key/Button 1 (Power)
Memory Total 7 GB (3 GB Formatter + 4 GB)
Storage Standard 320 GB HDD
Interface USB (Host) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 3.0, 2.0)
USB (Device) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 3.0, 2.0)
USB (EDI) N/A
Wired LAN Standard (Ethernet 10/100/1G Base TX)
Additional Wired LAN Support Yes (optional)
Wireless LAN/NFC ● Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n + NFC

Active Type)
● Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n/ac + BLE +

NFC Active Type)
Warmup Time From Power off (power on to ready) 23 sec
From Sleep 12 sec
Power Consumption Ready Less than 30 W
Normal operation Less than 900 W
Max/Peak Less than 1300 W
Sleep/Low Power Mode Less than 2.0 W
TEC (Default Mode) ● E82540: 2.1 kWh
● E82550: 2.717 kWh
● E82560: 3.1 kWh
Power Requirement ● Input Voltage (Europe): AC 220–240 V (-10%-6%)
● Input voltage (USA): AC 110–127 V (-10%-6%)
● Input Voltage (Korea): AC 220–240 V (-10%-6%)
● Rated Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Acoustic Noise Level (Sound Power/ Printing Mode Simplex

Pressure)
● E82540, E82550
ENWW Specifications 11
Table 2-1 General specifications (continued)
Item Specification
– Tray 2: Less than 54 dBA
– MP Tray/Optional trays: Less

than 56 dBA
● E82560

than 58 dBA
Duplex
● E82540, E82550

than 59 dBA
● E82560

than 61 dBA
Copying Mode Simplex

● E82540

than 60 dBA
● E82550, E82560

than 61 dBA
Duplex
● E82540

than 62 dBA
● E82550

than 63 dBA
● E82560

Table 2-1 General specifications (continued)
Item Specification

than 64 dBA
Ready Mode 30 dBA
Dimensions (W x D x H) Set (without stand) ● 585 x 771.1 x 932.2 mm (23 x 30.3 x

36.7 in)
Weight Set (with supplies) ● E82540, E82550, E82560: 95.6 kg

(210.8 lb)
Recommended Monthly Print Volume ● E87640: 15,000 pages
● E82550: 25,000 pages
● E82560: 30,000 pages
Max Monthly Duty Cycle ● E82540: 200,000 pages
● E82550: 250,000 pages
● E82560: 300,000 pages
Print specifications
Table 2-2 Print specifications
Item Specification
Print speed Simplex ● E82540
– Up to 40 ppm in A4 (40 ppm in

Letter)

11x17)
● E82550

Letter)

11x17)
● E82560

Letter)

11x17)
Duplex (Simplex to Duplex) ● E82540
Table 2-2 Print specifications (continued)
Item Specification
– Up to 40 ipm in A4 (40 ipm in

Letter)

11x17)
● E82550

Letter)

11x17)
● E82560

Letter)

11x17)
FPOT From Ready ● E82540: as fast as 8.4 s
● E82550: as fast as 7.5 s
● E82560: as fast as 6.9 s
From Sleep ● E82540: as fast as 20.4 s
● E82550: as fast as 19.5 s
● E82560: as fast as 18.9 s
Resolution 1200 x 1200 dpi (Full Speed)
Printer Language PCL5/PCL6(XL)/PostScript Level 3/PDF v1.7
Font PCL 95 scalable fonts (including OCR-A/OCR-

B)/1 Bitmap
PostScript 3 136 scalable fonts
Supporting Operating Systems Windows ● Windows XP (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows 2003 Server (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows Vista (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows 2008 Server (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows 7 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows 2008 Server R2 (64–bit)
● Windows 8 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows 8.1 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows Server 2012 (64–bit)
● Windows Server 2012 R2 (64–bit)

Table 2-2 Print specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Linux ● Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5, 6 (32–bit,

64–bit)
● Fedora 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19,

20 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● OpenSuSE 11.2, 11.3, 11.4, 12.1, 12.2,

12.3, 13.1 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Ubuntu 10.04, 11.04, 11.10, 12.04,

12.10, 13.04, 13.10, 14.04 (32–bit,
64–bit)
● SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11

(32–bit, 64–bit)
● Debian 6, 7 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Mint 13, 14, 15, 16 (32–bit, 64–bit)
Mac OS Mac OS X 10.6–10.10
Direct Print PRN/PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS
Print Features ● WSD print
● Secure print
● Stored print
● Booklet
● N-up
● Cover page
● Barcode
● Eco
● Poster
● Glossy
● Watermark
● Tray priority setting
● Auto tray setting
● Tray protection
● USB print
● Secure PDF print
● Google Cloud print
Scan specifications
Table 2-3 Scan specifications
Item Specification
Scan Speed Scan to folder speeds DN bundles (black and white,

(hardware) gray scale, and color)
● Simplex: 90 ipm @ 300

DPI
● Duplex: 180 ipm @ 300

DPI
Z bundles (black and white,

gray scale, and color)
● Simplex: 120 ipm @ 300

DPI
● Duplex: 240 ipm @ 300

DPI
Color Mode Mono/Gray/Color
Compatibility Network TWAIN/Network

SANE
Scan Method MMT
File Formats ● PDF
● Searchable PDF
● Compact PDF
● PDF Encryption
● Digital Signature in PDF
● PDF/A
● Single-Page PDF
● Multi-page PDF
● TIFF
● Single-Page TIFF
● Multi-page TIFF
● XPS
● Single-Page XPS
● Multi-page XPS
● JPEG
Resolution Optical (ADF) Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Optical (Image Scanner) Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Enhanced (ADF) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi
Enhanced (Image Scanner) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi

Table 2-3 Scan specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Scan Destinations ● Email
● FTP
● SMB
● HDD
● USB
● WSD
● PC
● Internet FAX
Multi-destinations Yes
Communication Protocol ● SMTP (IPv4, IPv6, SSL/

TLS)
● POP3 (IPv4, IPv6, SSL/

TLS)
● FTP (IPv4, IPv6)
● SMB (IPv4, IPv6)
● WSD
● T4Net
Scan ADF ● Min. A6 SEF 105 mm x

Size 148 mm (4.13 in x 5.83)
● Max. 297 mm x 437 mm

(11.7 in x 17.2 in)
Image Scanner Max. 297 mm x 437 mm

(11.7 in x 17.2 in)
Scan Original Types Text/Text & Photo/Photo
Copy specifications
Table 2-4 Copy specifications
Item Specification
Copy Speed Single Document Multiple Copy (SDMC) ● E82540
– Up to 40 cpm in A4
● E82550
● E82560
Multiple Document Multiple Copy (MDMC) ● E82540
Table 2-4 Copy specifications (continued)
Item Specification
– Simplex to Simplex: Up to 40
cpm in A4/Letter
– Duplex to Simplex: Up to 40 ipm

in A4/Letter
● E82550
cpm in A4/Letter

in A4/Letter
● E82560
cpm in A4/Letter

in A4/Letter
FCOT From Ready ● E82540: 4.6 s
● E82550: 3.7 s
● E82560: 3.1 s
Resolution Flow ADF ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi
● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi
Image Scanner ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi
● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi
Reduce/Enlarge Flow ADF 25–400% in 1% increments
Image Scanner 25–400% in 1% increments
Preset 25% / 50% A3→A5 / 61% A3→B5 / 64%

Ledger→Letter / 70% A3→A4 | B4→B5 |
A4→A5 / 77% Ledger→Legal / 78%
Legal→Letter / 81% B4→A4 | B5→A5 /
86% A3→B4 | A4→B5 / 104%
Executive→Letter / 115% B4→A3 / 121%
Legal→Ledger / 122% A4→B4 / 129%
Letter→Ledger / 141% A4→A3 | A5→A4 /
150% / 200% A5→A3 / 400%
Darkness Control 11 levels
Contrast Control 11 levels
Multi Copy 1–9,999
Duplex Copy Built-in

Table 2-4 Copy specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Copy Original Type ● Text
● Text and Printed Photo
● Text and Glossy Photo
● Newspaper
● Printed Photo
● Glossy Photo
● Copied Original
● Map
● Light Original
Copy Features ● ID Copy
● N-up
● Booklet
● Image Repeat
● Auto Fit
● Book Copy
● Poster Copy
● Watermark
● Image Overlay
● Stamp
● Covers
● Job Build
● Preview
● Erase Edge
● Image Shift
● Image Adjustment
● Background Adjustment
Supplies
Table 2-5 Supplies
Item Part number Average yield Conditions for yield
Toner Cartridge Initial Approx. 30,000 pages @ A4/Letter LEF,

Continuous job, Simplex
NOTE: Only China, Mode, 6% Coverage
Korea
Table 2-5 Supplies (continued)
Item Part number Average yield Conditions for yield
Standard X3A74-67901 Approx. 45,000 pages @ A4/Letter LEF,

Continuous job, Simplex
Mode, 6% Coverage
OPC Drum Unit X3A74-67902 Approx. 450,000 pages @ A4/Letter LEF, 4

pages/job, Simplex Mode
6% Coverage
TCU SAM-JC96-11638A Approx. 300,000 pages @ A4/Letter LEF, 4

pages/job, Simplex Mode
5% Coverage
NOTE: Depending on the print pattern and job mode used, the lifespan of the consumable can vary.
Maintenance parts
Some of the printer parts have a shorter lifespan than the life of the printer.
HP recommends replacing the following maintenance parts at specific intervals to make sure the printer
produces quality copies and to extend the service life of the printer.
Item Part number Life Remark
Development Unit 1,200,000 pages @ A4/Letter LEF, 4 pages/job,

Simplex Mode 6% Coverage
Fuser Unit SAM-JC91-01194A 360,000 pages 220 V
SAM-JC91-01195A 110 V
Paper Transfer Belt (PTB) SAM-JC93-01117A 300,000 pages
Pickup/Feed/Reverse 360,000 pages

(Separation) roller (for Tray 2-X)
MP Pickup/Feed/Reverse 200,000 pages

(Separation) Roller
Flow ADF pickup roller assembly SAM-JC97-04650A 200,000 pages
Flow ADF reverse (separation) SAM-JC97-04661A 100,000 pages

roller assembly
NOTE:
● Depending on the print patterns and job mode used, the lifespan can differ.
● See Replacing the maintenance part for further instructions.

Maintenance table
● EM: Emergency Maintenance (as needed)
● C: Clean
● R: Replace
NOTE: The total pages at the top of the table represents the lifespan for each maintenance part.
Table 2-6 Maintenance table

Section Item EM 45K 50K 100K 200K 300K 360K 450K 1200K
Waste Waste C R
Toner Toner
Container
Around C
Waste
Toner
Container
Imaging Toner C R
Unit Cartridge
Drum C R
Unit
Develope C R
r Unit
Around C
Toner
Pipe
Paper C
Dust
Stick
Fuser Unit Fuser C R

Unit
Transfer Paper C R
Unit Transfer
Belt
(PTB)
Paper Pickup/ C R
Path Feed/
Reverse
(Separati
on) Roller
(for Tray
2-X)*
MP C R
Pickup/
Feed/
Reverse
(Separati
on) roller*
Table 2-6 Maintenance table (continued)
Section Item EM 45K 50K 100K 200K 300K 360K 450K 1200K
Registrati C
on
assembly
/Feed/
Duplex
Roller
Flow ADF Flow ADF C R

pickup
roller
assembly
Flow ADF C R
reverse
(separati
on) roller
assembly
White C
sheet/
White
sponge/
Feed
roller
* Replace those three parts at the same time.
Paper handling specifications

Table 2-7 Paper handling specifications
Item Specification
Input Capacity Standard 1040 sheets
Multipurpose 100 sheets
Maximum 6140 sheets
NOTE: MP (100) + 2 Tray (1040) + HCI

bottom (2000) + sHCI (3000)
Standard Cassette Tray Capacity ● 520 sheets x 2 (Based on Xerox

Premier 80g/m2)
● Envelope: 50 sheets (only Tray 2

support)
NOTE: Supported Envelopes: Monarch, DL,

C4, C5, C6, No.10, No. 9
Media Sizes ● Cassette 1: 98 mm x 139.7 mm —

297 mm x 390 mm (3.9 in x 5.5 in —
11.7 in x 15.4 in)
● Cassette 2: 148.5 mm x 182 mm —

320 mm x 457 mm (5.8 in x 7.2 in —
12.6 in x 18 in)

Table 2-7 Paper handling specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Media Types ● Plain
● Thin
● Bond
● Hole Punched
● Pre-Printed
● Recycled
● Thin Cardstock
● Thick Cardstock
● Heavy Cardstock
● Extra Heavy Cardstock 1
● Letterhead
● Thick
● Cotton
● Colored
● Archive
● Thin Glossy
● Thick Glossy
● Heavy Glossy
● Heavy Weight
● Extra Heavy Weight 1 ,2 ,3 4
● Label
● Transparency
● Envelope (Cassette 1 Only)
Item Specification
Media Weight ● Plain Paper: 70-90 g/m² (18.5-24 lb/

Duplex)
● Thick Paper: 91-105 g/m² (25-28 lb/

Duplex)
● Heavy Weight Paper : 106-176 g/m²

(Duplex)
● Extra Heavy Weight 1 Paper : 177-220

g/m²
● Extra Heavy Weight 2: 221–256 g/m2

(Duplex)
● Extra Heavy Weight 3: 257–300 g/m2
● Thick Cardstock: 164–216 g/m2

(Duplex)
● Heavy Cardstock: 217–256 g/m2

(Duplex)
● Extra Heavy Cardstock: 257–300 g/m2
● Thick Glossy: 164–216 g/m2
● Heavy Glossy: 217–256 g/m2
● Transparency: 138–146 g/m2
● Label: 120–150 g/m2
● Envelope: 75–90 g/m2 (Only Tray 2

support)
● Thick Envelope: 91–120 g/m2 (Only

Tray 2 support)
● Thin Paper: 60-69 g/m² (16-19 lb/

Duplex)
● Cotton paper : 75-90 g/m² (Duplex)
● Colored : 75-90 g/m² (Duplex)
● Pre-Printed : 71-90 g/m² (Duplex)
● Recycled : 60-90 g/m² (Duplex)
● Bond Paper: 105-120 g/m² (Duplex)
● Letterhead : 75-90 g/m² (Duplex)
● Hole Punched Paper: 75-90 g/m²

(Duplex)
● Thin Cardstock : 105-163 g/m²

(Duplex)
● Thin Glossy : 106-163 g/m² (Duplex)

Item Specification
Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes
● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect:

Yes
● Paper Type Detect: No
● Paper Size Detect: Yes
MP Tray Capacity ● Plain Paper: 100 sheets at 80 g/m2
● Envelopes: 10 sheets at 75 g/m2
NOTE: Supported Envelopes:

Monarch, DL, C4, C5, C6, No. 10, No. 9
● Labels: 20 sheets at 120–159 g/m2
● Thick Paper: 10 sheets at 176 g/m2
Media Sizes 98 mm x 139.7 mm — 320 mm x 1200 mm

(3.8 in x 5.5 in — 12.6 in x 47.2 in)
● Thin
● Bond
● Hole Punched
● Pre-Printed
● Recycled
● Thin Cardstock
● Letterhead
● Thick
● Cotton
● Colored
● Archive
● Thin Glossy
● Thick Glossy
● Heavy Glossy
● Heavy Weight
● Extra Heavy Weight 1, 2 ,3 ,4
● Envelope
● Transparency
● Label
Item Specification
Media Weight ● 60 to 256 g/m2: Simplex, Duplex
● 257 to 325 g/m2: Simplex
● Envelope: 75–90 g/m2, Simplex
● Label: 120–150 g/m2, Simplex
Sensing Paper Empty Detect: Yes
Paper Size Detect: Yes
ADF Capacity 250 sheets
Document Size ● Width: 105 mm — 297 mm (5 in —

11.7 in)
● Length: 140 mm — 432 mm (5.5in —

17 in)
Document Weight ● Simplex: 60–163 g/m2 (11.25–43.24

lb) (Guarantee) 42–60 g/m2 and 163–
220 g/m2 (Support)
● Duplex: 60–163 g/m2 (13.25–43.25

lb) (Guarantee) 50–60 g/m2 and 163–
220 g/m2 (Support)
Auto Detected Size A3/A4/A5/A6 SEF/B4/B5/Letter/Legal/

Statement/Folio/Executive
Image Scanner Document Size ● Width: 140 mm — 297 mm (5.5 in —

11.7 in)
● Length: 140 mm — 432 mm (5.5 in —

17 in)
Output Capacity Standard 500 sheets, face down
Maximum 615 sheets [500 sheets (Standard) + 125

sheets (Job Separator)]
Printing Size Maximum Size 320 mm x 457 mm (12.6 in x 18 in)
Minimum Size 98 mm x 139.7 mm (3.8 in x 5.5 in)
Maximum Printing Area Simplex Top: 4.2 +/- 1.5 mm / Left: 4.2 +/- 1.5 mm
Duplex Top: 4.2 +/- 2 mm / Left: 4.2 +/- 2 mm
Duplex Printing Support Built-in
Media Sizes 139.7 mm x 182 mm — 320 mm x 457 mm

(5.5 in x 7.2 in — 12.6 in x 18 in)

Item Specification
● Thin
● Bond
● Hole Punched
● Pre-Printed
● Recycled
● Thin Cardstock
● Letterhead
● Thick
● Cotton
● Colored
● Archive
● Thin Glossy
● Thick Glossy
● Heavy Glossy
● Heavy Weight
● Extra Heavy Weight 1, 2
Media weight 16–17 lb (60 to 256 g/m2)
Network and software specifications
Network interface
Table 2-8 Network interface
Item Specifications
Network OS Windows
● XP (32/64 bit)
● 2003 (32/64 bit)
● Vista (32/64 bit)
● Windows 7
● Windows 8
Mac
● Mac OS 10.5 –10.8
Linux
● RedHat 8–9
● Fedora Core 1–4
● Mandrake 9.2–10.1
● SuSE 8.2–9.2
Novell
● Netware 5.x, 6.x (TCP/IP Only)
Others
● Unix (HP-UX, Solaris, SumOS, SCO)
Network Protocols TCP/IP TCP/IPv4, HTTP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, LDAP,

SMTP, SSL/TLS, IPSec, DNS, WINS, SLP,
Bonjour, SSDP, DDNS, DHCP/BOOTP, IPv6
IPX/SPX No
Ether Talk No
NetBIOS over TCP/IP Yes
Others HTTPS, IPSec, 802.1x
IP Addressing Static IP Yes
Auto IP Yes
BOOTP Yes
DHCP Yes
SNMP/MIB Access MIB-2 (RFC 1213) Yes
Host Resource MIB (RFC 2790) Yes

Table 2-8 Network interface (continued)
Item Specifications
Printer MIB (RFC 3805) Yes
Finisher MIB (RFC 3806) Yes
Private MIB Yes
HP Compatibility Yes — Partially
SNMP Trap Yes
Printing Protocols Windows Printing (SMB) No
LPR/LPD Yes
IPP Yes
Netware I-Print No
Netware NDPS No
Ether Talk No
Port 9100 Yes
Device Discovery DNS Yes
Dynamic DNS Yes
Multicast DNS (Bonjoure) Yes
WSD (including Print and Scan) Yes (Print and Scan)
SLP Yes
uPNP (SSDP) Yes
Software and solutions

Table 2-9 Software and solutions
Item Specifications
Application Anyweb Print N/A
Easy Printer Manager Windows/Mac
Easy Color Manager Windows/Mac
Easy Document Creator Windows
Net PC Fax Windows/Mac
Direct Printing Utility Windows
Easy Deployment Manager Windows
Easy Eco Driver Windows
Universal Printer Driver Windows
Universal Scan Driver Windows
Mobile Printing Google Cloud Print (GCP) Yes
Table 2-9 Software and solutions (continued)
Item Specifications
Airprint Yes
Smart App Smart Workspace Yes
Workbook Composer Yes
Smart Color Manager Yes
Smart Service App Yes
Hancom Office Yes
Solution Device Management Fleet Admin Pro (UniThru)
Output Management CounThru Enterprise/Pro
Document Management and Distribution SmarThru Workflow 3.0
Security SecuThur Pro 1.0
Mobility SCP 1.0 (14.09)
Security Authentication (Local) Yes
Authentication (Network) Yes (SMB/Kerberos/LDAP/IPSec/EAP)
IP Address Filtering Yes (IPv4 Filtering/IPv6 Filtering/MAC

Filtering)
HDD Overwrite (Standard) 9
HDD Overwrite (Maximum Overwrites) Yes
Secure Print Yes
Encrypted Secure Print Yes
Encrypted PDF Mode (Encrypted Scanning) Yes
IP Sec Yes
Smart Card Authentication Yes

Options
Optional configurations
Figure 2-1 Options
Options list
Table 2-10 Options list
Item Part numbers Remark
HP LaserJet Department Cabinet Y1G168
HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Y1F98A

Feeder
HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Tray Y1F21A

Department
HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) Y1F20A
Fax Kit
Fax Multiline Kit
Foreign interface harness (FIH) Kit
HP LaserJet Job Separator Department Y1G01A
HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Department Y1G22A For dual cassette feeder (DCF)
HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Accessory Y1G22A#BGJ For HCI/sHCI

Department (110V)
HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Accessory Y1G22A#B19

Department (220V)
Wireless/NFC Kit
Wireless/NFC/BLE Kit
Additional Network Kit (Dual Network Kit)
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Y1G00A
HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Y1G18A
HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Y1G07A
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3 Punch Y1G02A Two and three hole punch (for America,
Asia, and Africa)
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4 Punch Y1G03A Two and four hole punch (for Europe)
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Punch Y1G04A Swedish four hole punch (for Sweden)
HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory Y1G10A Two and three hole punch (for America,
Asia, and Africa)
HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory Y1G11A Two and four hole punch (for Europe)
HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory Y1G12A Swedish four hole punch (for Sweden)
HP LaserJet Inner/Booklet Finisher Staples Y1G13A ● Regular staples for the HP LaserJet
Inner Finisher
NOTE: The HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher
and HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher ● Regular saddle staples for the HP
have two staple slots. LaserJet Booklet Finisher
HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Staples Y1G14A ● Regular staples for HP LaserJet

Stapler/Stacker Finisher
NOTE: The HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher
and HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher
have two staple slots.

Option specifications
Table 2-11 Option specifications
Item Specification
HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Part number Y1F98A

Feeder
Capacity 520 x 2 sheets
Media Sizes ● Cassette 1: 148.5 mm x 210 mm —

297 mm x 432 mm (5.8 in x 8.2 in —
12 in x 18 in)
● Cassette 2: 148.5 mm x 210 mm —

297 mm x 432 mm (5.8 in x 8.2 in —
12 in x 18 in)
Media Types Plain/Thin/Bond/Hole Punched/Preprinted/

Recycled/Thin Cardstock/Letterhead/Thick/
Cotton/Colored/Archive/Thin Glossy/Heavy
Weight/Extra Heavy Weight
Media Weight ● Plain Paper: 71–90 g/m2 (18.5–24 lb/

Duplex)
● Thick Paper: 91–105 g/m2 (25–28 lb/

Duplex)
● Heavy Weight Paper: 106–176 g/m2

(Duplex)
● Heavy Weight Paper 1: 177–216 g/m2

(Duplex)

(Duplex)
● Thin Paper: 60–69 g/m2 (16–19 lb/

Duplex)
● Cotton Paper: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Colored: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Preprinted: 71–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Recycled: 60–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Bond Paper: 105–120 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Letterhead: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Hole Punched Paper: 75–90 g/m2

(Duplex)
● Thin Cardstock: 105–163 g/m2

(Duplex)
● Thin Glossy: 106–163 g/m2 (Duplex)
Table 2-11 Option specifications (continued)
Item Specification

Yes
● Paper Size Detect: Yes
Dimensions 556 mm x 610 mm x 265 mm (22.3 in x 24

in x 10 in)
Weight Net 20 kg, Packing 23.5 kg
HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Tray Part number Y1G21A

Department
Capacity 2000 sheets at 20 lb (80 g/m2)
Media Sizes A4, Letter
Media Types Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper,

Punched Paper
Media Weight 60 to 300 gsm

Yes
● Paper Size Detect: No
HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) Part number Y1F20A
Capacity 3000 sheets at 20 lb (80 g/m2)
Media Sizes A4, Letter
Media Types Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper,

Punched Paper
Media weight 60 to 300 gsm

Yes
● Paper Size Detect: No
HP LaserJet Department Cabinet Part number Y1G16A
Dimensions 585 mm x 670 mm x 257 mm
Weight (Net) 18 kg
HP LaserJet Job Separator Department Part number Y1G01A
Capacity 125 sheets at (80 g/m2)
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Part number Y1G00A

Item Specification
Capacity 500 sheets stacking, internal
Staple Cartridge Capacity 5000 staples/cartridge
Stacking ● Top Tray: 50 sheets (A4/LT at 80 gsm)
● Finishing Tray: 500 sheets (A4/LT at

80 gsm)
Stapling ● Maximum Number of Sheets: 50

sheets stapling with 90 g/m2 sheet
● Stapling Positions: Front flat and

corner (45), Dual, Rear flat and corner
(45)
Saddle Stapling N/A
Offline Stapling N/A
Offset at Non-Staple Job Yes
Offset at Staple Job N/A
Output Stacking Face Down
HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Part number Y1G18A
Capacity 65 sheets stapling, 3,250 sheets stacking
Stacking ● Top Tray: 250 sheets (A4/LT at 80

gsm)

80 gsm)

● Stapling Positions: 2 Corners (Single ,

45 degree), Center (Double)
Offline Stapling Yes
Offset at Staple Job Yes
HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Part number Y1G07A
Capacity 65 sheets stapling, 2000 sheets stacking
Stacking ● Top Tray: 250 sheets (A4/LT at 80

gsm)

80 gsm)
Item Specification

● Stapling Positions: 2 Corners (Single),

Center (Double)
Saddle Stapling Maximum Number of Sheets: 25 sheets

stapling with 80 g/m2 sheet
Offline Stapling Yes
Offset at Staple Job Yes
1. HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory Part numbers 1. Y1G10A
2. HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory 2. Y1G11A
3. HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish 3. Y1G12A

Accessory
Available Unit Auto change 2/3 hole or auto change 2/4
hole, Swedish 4
Paper Wight 52–300 g/m2
1. HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3 Part numbers 1. Y1G02A

Punch
2. Y1G03A
2. P LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4
Punch 3. Y1G04A
3. HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Available Unit Auto change 2/3 hole or auto change 2/4
Punch hole, Swedish 4
Paper Wight 52–256 g/m2

Machine external view
Front view
Figure 2-2 Printer front view
1 2
3
17 4
16 5
6
7
15 8
9 10
12
13
14 11
1 Flow ADF cover (access for clearing jams)
2 Flow ADF width guides
3 Flow ADF input tray
4 Flow ADF output tray
5 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for easier

viewing)
6 Physical keyboard. Pull the keyboard straight out to use it.
CAUTION: Close keyboard when it is not in use.
7 Right door (access for clearing jams)
8 On/off button
9 Tray 1
10 Power switch
11 Power connection
12 Front door (access to the toner cartridges)
ENWW Machine external view 37

13 Tray 2
14 Tray 3
15 Output bin
16 Easy-access USB port
Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a computer

or to update the printer firmware.
NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.
17 Hardware integration pocket (for connecting accessory and third-

party devices)
Rear view
Figure 2-3 Printer rear view
1 Formatter cover
2 Interface ports
3 Serial number and product number label

Inner view
● Figure 2-4 Inner view
1 TCU
2 Toner Cartridge
3 Imaging units (behind inner cover)
ENWW Machine external view 39

Feeding system
Feeding system overview
The feeding system picks up paper from the cassette or Tray 1 and moves it to the printing mechanism inside
the printer. The feeding system consists of the pickup unit, registration unit, transfer roller assembly, and exit
unit.

Main components and functions
Rollers
Figure 2-5 Rollers
1 Tray 2 13 Tray 4 feed roller (optional)
2 Tray 3 14 Tray 4 trans roller (optional)
3 Tray 4 (optional) 15 Tray 5 feed roller (optional)
4 Tray 5 (optional) 16 Registration sensor
5 Tray 2 pickup/reverse/feed 17 Registration roller

rollers
ENWW Feeding system 41

6 Tray 3 pickup/reverse/feed 18 PTB unit
rollers
7 Tray 4 pickup/reverse/feed 19 Output roller (1st)

rollers (optional)
8 Tray 5 pickup/reverse/feed 20 Output roller (2nd)

rollers (optional)
9 MP Tray pickup/reverse/feed 21 Output roller (trans)

rollers
10 Tray 2 feed roller 22 Duplex 1 roller
11 Tray 3 feed roller 23 Duplex 2 roller
12 Tray 3 trans roller 23 Duplex 3 roller
● Pickup roller (Tray 2, 3, 4, 5, and MP Tray)
– This roller picks up the paper from the tray.
● Feed roller (Tray 2, 3, 4, 5, and MP Tray)
– This roller is placed against the reverse roller. It transfers the paper from the pickup roller to the feed
roller.
● Reverse roller (Tray 2, 3, 4, 5, and MP Tray)
– This roller is placed against the feed roller and transfers only one sheet of paper to the feed roller.
When two or more sheets of paper are being transferred from the pickup roller, the load of the torque
limiter of the reverse roller is heavier than the frictional force between the sheets of paper. As a
result, the reverse roller is stopped and the lower sheet of paper is not transferred.
● Feed roller
– This roller transfers the paper sent from the feed/reverse roller to the registration roller.
● Registration roller
– This roller aligns the leading edge of the paper and transfers the paper to the transfer roller
assembly.
Table 2-16 Roller period table
Roller Periodic
OPC/Drum 188.5 mm
Charge Roller (CR) 37.7 mm
Magnetic roller (MR) 36.9 mm
PTB D/R 65.7 mm
PTB BELT 157.1 mm
Fuser Belt (HR) 110 mm
Fuser Pressure Roller (PR) 114.7 mm

Sensor, motor, and solenoid
Figure 2-6 Sensor, motor, solenoid
Table 2-17 Sensor, motor, solenoid

Item Function
Tray 2 paper size detection sensor Detects Tray 2 paper size
Tray 2 paper empty detection sensor Detects Tray 2 paper empty
Tray 2 upper limit detection sensor Detects Tray 2 upper limit
Tray 2 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 2 paper Lead Edge
sensor

Table 2-17 Sensor, motor, solenoid (continued)
Item Function
Tray 3 paper size detection sensor Detects Tray 3 paper size
Tray 3 paper empty detection sensor Detects Tray 3 paper empty
Tray 3 upper limit detection sensor Detects Tray 3 upper limit
sensor
Tray 3 paper feed jam detection sensor Detects Tray 3 paper feed jam
Tray 4 paper size detection (option) Detects Tray 4 paper size

sensor
Tray 4 paper empty detection (option) Detects Tray 4 paper empty

sensor
Tray 4 upper limit detection (option) Detects Tray 4 upper limit

sensor
(option) sensor
Tray 4/4 paper feed jam detection Detects Tray 4/4 paper feed jam
(option) sensor
Tray 5 paper size detection (option) Detects Tray 5 paper size detection
sensor
Tray 5 paper empty detection (option) Detects Tray 5 paper empty

sensor
Tray 5 upper limit detection (option) Detects Tray 5 upper limit

sensor
(option) sensor
Paper registration jam detection sensor Detects Paper registration jam
Paper fuser-out jam detection sensor Detects Paper fuser-out jam
Output Tray 2 paper full detection Detects output Tray 2 paper full
sensor
Output 2 tray path and Return path Changes paper path

solenoid
Return motor Controls 2nd output tray and duplex printing
Output Tray 3 paper full detection Detects output Tray 3 paper full
sensor
Output 2 paper return detection sensor Detects Duplex Return position
1st Duplex motor Controls duplex printing
2nd Duplex motor Controls duplex printing
Duplex 1 jam detection sensor Detects Duplex 1 jam
Duplex 2 jam detection sensor Detects Duplex 2 jam

Table 2-17 Sensor, motor, solenoid (continued)
Item Function
MP feed assembly paper empty Detects MP feed assembly: paper empty

detection sensor
NOTE: If paper is loaded in the MP Tray, that tray takes priority over trays 2,3,4, or 5.
MP feed assembly Controls MP feed assembly pickup roller
MP feed assembly paper width Detects MP feed assembly paper width

detection sensor
Tray 2 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate
Paper Loop Detection sensor Detects paper loop between transfer Nip and fusing Nip
At warm-up, Detects the fuser jam
Cassette
The cassette stores paper. The paper size is set using the guides in each tray.
Figure 2-7 Basic cassette
Table 2-18 Basic cassette

Item Description
1 Structure: Drawer Type
2 Capacity: 520 sheets (80 g/m² paper standard)

Table 2-18 Basic cassette (continued)
Item Description
3 Paper type
● Plain paper: A5, A4, A3, B5, B4, Letter, 11 in x 17 in (Ledger), Statement, Legal
● Special Paper: Envelope (Tray 2 Only), Label, Transparency
4 Paper weight
● Plain paper: 60–300 g/m²
5 Plate knock up lift type: Lift Motor + Up Limit Sensor
Pickup unit
When paper pickup occurs, the pickup roller moves down in order to come in contact with the surface of the
paper. If the cassette is installed, the LEVER-INPUT CST is pushed and the pickup roller moves down. The feed
and separation rollers make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved into the paper path, and that the feed
roller moves the paper as far as the registration (REGI) roller.
NOTE: The pickup unit 1 and pickup unit 2 are not interchangeable.
Figure 2-8 Pickup unit 1
Figure 2-9 Pickup unit 2
Registration unit
The registration roller is driven by the registration/multipurpose motor. The registration roller clutch is located
between the registration/Tray 1 motor and registration roller, or on the transfer belt (for color), and it controls

power to the registration roller in order to match paper and an image on the drum at the predetermined
registration point.
Figure 2-10 Registration roller
MP feeder assembly
The MP feed assembly allows feeding of special media cardstock and custom size paper.
Figure 2-11 MP feeder assembly
Specification
● Capacity: 100 sheets (80g/m² paper standard)
● Media size: 98 mm x 148 mm – 320 mm x 1200 mm (3.87 in x 5.8 in – 12.6 in x 47.2 in)
● Media weight: Plain paper 60 – 320 g/m²
● Feeding speed: 32 ppm, 40 ppm, 48 ppm Letter/A4 LEF (Long Edge Feeding)

Paper separation
Figure 2-12 Paper separation
When the MP paper detection [A] sensor detects paper and the machine gets a MP printing job, the MP solenoid
[B] drops the pickup roller [C] onto the top of the paper stack in the MP Tray.
This machine uses a Feed and Reverse Roller (FRR) system for feeding paper. The friction between the reverse
roller [D] and feed roller [E] separates the top sheet of paper from the stack.

Fuser unit
Fuser unit overview
This section describes the image fusing process used by the printer.
This unit fuses the toner that was transferred by the transfer roller onto the paper, by applying a combination of
heat and pressure to complete the fusing process. This printer uses an instant fusing system (NIF type). The
fuser unit design for this model has improved. The fuser belt has been changed to require less heat capacity and
still fuse the toner properly. Additionally, the life has been improved by incorporating a sub-bush system with a
lubricant storage design.
Figure 2-13 Fuser unit
● Lamp halogen
The fuser unit has two halogen lamps. One heats the center of the fusing belt, the other heats the end of
axial direction. These halogen lamps are lit alternately to heat the fusing belt. Each lamp has its coil in a
different location. The coil of the center heater lamp is in the center, the coils on the side heater lamp are
on both sides. The lamps are fixed inside of the fusing belt. When the fusing belt rotates, the lamps do not
rotate.
● Belt fuser
The belt fuser gets heat from the halogen lamp and transfers it to the toner and paper. The belt fuser
consists of three thin-layers. The thin fusing belt reduces warm up and mode changing time. To prevent the
fusing belt from adhering to the toner, the surface of the fuser belt is fluorinated. There is a nip inside the
fusing belt. Tension springs are used to keep a constant nip area where the fusing belt contacts the
pressure roller.
● Roller fuser pressure
The pressure roller makes sure there is a proper nip width between the pressure roller and fusing belt. It is
made up of the soft silicone sponge rubber. The pressure roller is driven by the driving system and drives
the fusing belt.
ENWW Fuser unit 49

● Thermistor (NC sensor)
The temperature of the fusing belt is maintained by NC sensors (non-contact type thermistors) located
near the center and the end of the fusing belt.
● Thermostats
The thermostat cuts off the power supply to the halogen lamp by opening the circuit when the fusing belt
becomes abnormally hot as a result of a problem, such as a NC sensor malfunction. The thermostat is used
to prevent abnormal operation. When a thermostat is triggered, it must be replaced as well as the other
damaged parts in the fuser unit.
Fuser unit drive

Figure 2-14 Fuser drive
The fuser motor (A) drives the pressure roller (B) through the gear train. The fuser belt is driven by the pressure
roller.
Fuser unit temperature control

When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays on until the NC sensors detect
the standby temperature. The CPU then raises the temperature up to the printing temperature.

Figure 2-15 Fuser unit temperature control
Overheat protection
● The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp in the following cases:
– The belt temperature detected by the NC sensors keeps higher than 220°C for 20 seconds.
– The belt temperature detected by the NC sensors keeps higher than 230°C for 3 seconds.
– The relay off works when the belt temperature detected by the NC sensors is higher than 230°C.
● The following components are used when thermistor overheat protection fails:
– Two thermostats get into line with the common ground wire of the fusing lamp.
– If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 195°C, it opens and cuts power to the
fusing lamp. If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 195°C, it also opens and cuts
power to the fusing lamp.
Loop control
The tension of the paper between the OPC nip and the fuser nip is known as the paper loop level.
ENWW Fuser unit 51

Figure 2-16 Loop control
The paper loop level is controlled by monitoring photo sensors 1 and 2. The fuser unit controls the motor speed
for the paper loop level.

Image creation
Printing process overview
This machine uses one drum unit, one development unit, and a laser beam for mono printing. The drum unit
consists of an OPC drum, charge roller, and a cleaning blade. The development unit consists of a magnetic roller
and mixing auger.
Figure 2-17 Printing process overview
The OPC drum (A) is charged with a negative voltage and is exposed to light from the laser scanner assembly (B).
The light produced by a laser creates a latent image by discharging on the surface of the OPC drum. The
negatively charged toners are attracted to the latent drum image by an electric field. The toners (mono image)
on the OPC drum are transferred to the paper by the positive bias.
1. OPC drum charge: The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge.
2. Laser exposure: Light produced by a laser diode hits the charged OPC through the lens and mirrors.
3. Development: The magnetic roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the drum
surface.
4. Transfer: The Paper Transfer Belt (PTB) transfers the toner from the OPC drum to the paper.
5. Cleaning the OPC drum: The cleaning blade removes remaining toner on the drum surface after image
transfer to the paper.
6. Quenching for OPC drum: Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at
the end of every job.
Imaging unit
Drum unit overview
This printer has one drum unit and one development unit.
The diameter of the drum is 60 mm with a circumference of approximately 188.5 mm.
The drum unit has a charge roller to charge the drum surface and a cleaning roller to clean the charge roller.
The e-label is the sub part of the Drum unit and stores the count information and other data. If the Drum unit is
replaced, the count information stored by the old drum unit will not be kept.
ENWW Image creation 53

Figure 2-18 Drum unit
Drum drive
The OPC drum and magnetic roller are driven by one BLDC motor and supplied with power from the coupling.
The drive shaft is directly inserted into the OPC drum to fix the drum unit. This structure provides stable printing
quality.
Figure 2-19 Drum drive

Developer unit
This printer uses a dual-component development system. The development unit contains 340 g of magnetic
toner carrier (development powder).
The developer powder is supplied to the magnetic (development) roller [A] by the two mixing augers [B]. The
diameter of the magnetic roller is 18 mm.
The development unit has a Toner Carrier (TC) sensor [C]. It is used for controlling the operating range of the
toner density.
Figure 2-20 Developer unit
Developer agitation
Two mixing augers (A) circulate the developer forward and backward to agitate the developer in order to
sufficiently mix the toner and developer.

Figure 2-21 Developer auger
Agitation occurs at the following times:
● During the process control self-checking (warm up)
● During toner supply job
● During development job
If the developer unit is stored above 45°C (113°F), the toner might harden and will not work properly. If the toner
in the development unit has hardened, an installation error occurs.
Toner cartridge
When the toner and carrier in the toner cartridge is mixing:
● The toner cartridge contains 940 g of toner and 90 g of carrier.
● The toner in the cartridge is transferred from Wheel-Paddle Toner [A] to Wheel-Auger Toner [B] and
transferred from Wheel-Auger Toner [B] to the Reservoir.
● The toner cartridge has an e-label that stores the count information.
● The toner in toner cartridge when stored at temperatures above 45°C (113°F) might harden.

Figure 2-22 Toner cartridge
Paper transfer belt unit
Paper transfer belt unit overview
The Paper Transfer Belt (PTB) moves the paper.
The charged toner on the drum is moved to the paper by the transfer roller in PTB unit (1). The rubber belt in PTB
unit removes the static of the paper then separates the paper from the drum so the paper can move into the
paper path.
This process is done with rotation of the PTB. The rotation is made by the friction between the drive roller (3) and
PTB (1). For this process, the drive roller (3) and guide roller (4) provides proper tension to block slip.
There is one actuator (8) and two photo sensors (5). The actuator recognizes the paper path and controls the
paper speed for stable image quality.

Figure 2-23 Paper transfer belt unit
1 Paper Transfer Belt (PTB)
2 Transfer Roller
3 Drive Roller
4 Guide Roller
5 Photo Interrupter
6 Actuator
Transfer belt drive
The drive motor [A] drives the transfer belt [B] by using gears and the PTB drive roller [C].

Figure 2-24 Transfer belt drive
Cleaning blade
The cleaning blade in the PTB unit removes toner (during printing). Belt cleaning is completed while the transfer
belt makes one rotation.
The cleaning blade [A] always contacts the transfer belt [B], and removes the used toner from the belt.
The film [C] on the cleaning unit protects against toner contamination. The lens [D] always detects waste toner
level. If the light is blocked by waste toner, the machine displays an error message to inform the PTB unit needs
replacement.

Figure 2-25 Cleaning blade

Laser scanner assembly
Laser scanner assembly overview
The laser scanner assembly consists of one polygon motor and one laser diodes (LD) unit. The laser scanner
assembly forms a latent image on the surface of the OPC drum. For this process, the laser scanner assembly has
a collimator lens, cylindrical lens, and an F-Theta lens on an optical path for each color.
The laser scanner assembly has cover glass to protect the glass on the optical path from contamination. The LD
PCA interfaces with the printer.
Figure 2-26 Laser scanner assembly overview
Table 2-20 Laser scanner assembly overview

Item Description
1 LD PCA
2 P/Mirror Motor
3 F1 Lens
ENWW Laser scanner assembly 61

Table 2-20 Laser scanner assembly overview (continued)
Item Description
4 F2 Lens
5 Cover Glass
Laser scanning optical path

The laser moves from the polygon motor (A) to the OPC drum (D). The F1 lens (B) and F2 lens (C) determine the
scanning line and the image position. This setting is adjusted by the manufacturer.
The laser scanner assembly has three types depending on printing speed. The difference between the three
models is shown in the following table.
Figure 2-27 Laser scanning optical path
Table 2-21 Laser scanning optical path
Item Specification Remark
LD Unit Laser Diode: Quad Beam
Driving IC: Dual LD X2
P/Motor Speed ● E82540: 22,087 rpm
● E82550: 27,520 rpm
● E82560: 33,071 rpm
Speed ● E82540: 187 mm/s
● E82550: 233 mm/s
● E82560: 280 mm/s
H/W interface Interface with printer: 40 pin FFC
Laser synchronizing detectors

The laser scanner assembly has a beam detector sensor board (PD PCA). The PD PCA (A) detects the scanning
start point.
Main Scan Start Detection

The beam is detected by the PD PCA at the scanning start point and creates the horizontal sync signal (Hsync).
The following diagram shows the data scanning direction.
Figure 2-28 Laser synchronizing detectors
ENWW Laser scanner assembly 63

Drive system
Pickup and cassette lift drive
Figure 2-29 Pickup and cassette lift drive
Table 2-22 Pickup and cassette lift drive
Power train Pickup: normal rotation (pickup input) counter rotation (cassette lift input)
● 1 PM STEP → normal rotation → 2 Gear (pickup driving)
● 1 PM STEP → counter rotation → 3 Gear → 4 5 Gear → 6 Gear & Coupler (cassette lift driving)

Feed drive
Figure 2-30 Feed drive
Table 2-23 Feed drive
Power Train HP STEP → Feed & MP drive
● 1 HP STEP → 2 Pulley & Coupler → 3 Gear → 4 Gear & Coupler (Feed Roller driving) → 5 E-Clutch & Gear (MP driving)
● 1 HP STEP → 2 Pulley & Coupler → 6 Gear & Coupler (Feed Roller driving) → 7 Pulley & Coupler (Feed Roller driving)
ENWW Drive system 65

Registration drive
Figure 2-31 Registration drive
Table 2-24 Registration drive
Power Train HP STEP → Registration driving
● 1 HP STEP → 2 Gear → 3 Gear (Registration Roller driving)

Fuser release/output drive
Figure 2-32 Fuser release/output drive
Table 2-25 Fuser release/output drive
Power Train BLDC → Fuser and output driving
PM Step → Fuser release driving
● 1 BLDC → 2 Gear (Fuser P/R driving)
● 1 BLDC → 3 Gear & Pulley → 4 Gear (output driving)
● 5 PM Step → 6 Gear → 7 Gear → 8 Gear (Fuser Release driving)
Drive motors
The following diagram shows the location of the printer drive motors.

Figure 2-33 Drive motor
Table 2-26 Drive motor

Number Motor Motor type Qty Function
1 Fuser Release PM-STEP 1 Fuser Release driving
2 Fuser and output BLDC 1 Fuser and output driving
3 Main OPC, Development, BLDC 4 OPC and PTB Belt driving

and PTB
4 Registration assembly HP-STEP 1 Registration assembly driving
5 Feed/MP HP-STEP 1 Feed roller 1, 2, 3 driving
E-CLT 1 Feed/MP driving control

Table 2-26 Drive motor (continued)
Number Motor Motor type Qty Function
6 Pickup PM-STEP 2 Pickup roller/Cassette lift driving
(Reverse driving at cassette lift

driving)
7 Toner Supply PM-STEP 1 Toner transfer (Toner cartridge →

Reservoir)
8 Toner Reservoir PM-STEP 1 Toner transfer (Reservoir →

Development unit)
Main drive unit motors

Figure 2-34 Main drive unit motors
Table 2-27 Main drive unit motors
Power Train BLDC → OPC, Development and PTB driving
● 1 BLDC → 2 Gear & Coupler (OPC driving)
● 1 BLDC → 3 Gear & Pulley → 4 Coupler (Development driving)
● 1 BLDC → 5 Gear (PTB driving)

Toner supply drive
Figure 2-35 Toner supply drive
Table 2-28 Toner supply drive
Power Train PM Step → Toner Supply driving
● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear → 3 Gear (Toner Supply driving)
Toner reservoir drive

Figure 2-36 Toner reservoir drive
Table 2-29 Toner reservoir drive
Power Train PM STEP Motor → Toner Reservoir Auger & Paddle driving
● 1 PM STEP Motor → 2 Gear → 4 Gear & Latch → 5 Pulley & Gear (Paddle driving)
● 1 PM STEP Motor → 2 Gear → 3 Gear & Latch (Auger driving)

Flatbed Scanner System
Flatbed scanner system overview
The scanner converts a hardcopy original into data. To scan an original, the scanner uses the lens and Charge
Coupled Device (CCD). The scanner stores and transfers the converted image to the storage space or transfers
the scanned data to the printer engine for copy.
For scan operation, the scanner uses a full rate (FR) carriage and a half rate (HR) carriage that is moved by a wire.
It scans the original document on the scanner glass or from the ADF.
The scanner system consists of the three following modules:
● Full Rate (FR) carriage: Illuminates the original and reflects the light at a 90 degree angle.
● Half Rate (HR) carriage: Transfers the reflected light from the FR carriage to the lens.
● Imaging module: Makes an image on the CCD.
The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage. This keeps a regular gap between
the original and the imaging lens.
Figure 2-37 Scanner system overview
The following describes the scan process:
ENWW Flatbed Scanner System 71

1. The FR carriage lamp illuminates the original. The reflected light is moved to Mirror #1.
2. The reflected light from Mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through Mirror #2 and #3.
3. The light becomes smaller and makes an optical image.
4. The optical image is generated to the electrical signal by the CCD sensor.
To make a stable image, a gap must be maintained between the original and the lens. To maintain this gap, the
HR carriage moves half the distance and half the speed of the FR carriage.
Figure 2-38 Scan process
The optical image made by the CCD sensor is changed to an electrical-analog signal.
Each color element signal in the optical image is separated by the CCD sensor into red, green, and blue.
The red CCD sensor extracts the red color from the optical image, the green CCD sensor extracts the green color
from the optical image, and the blue CCD sensor extracts the blue color from the optical image.

The analog image signal is changed to a digital image signal by the A/D converter and is transferred to the
processor.
The image scan of the main scanning direction is performed by the CCD sensor. The CCD sensor consists of
approximately 7500 pixels. The image scan of the sub scanning direction is performed by the FR carriage and HR
carriage. The carriage is moved by a wire driven by the scan motor.
Scan resolution is 600 dpi.
Figure 2-39 Image processing
Scanning system components

The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system.
To scan the original on the scanner glass, two carriages driven by the motor move at a regular speed. The motor
drives the timing belt, pulley, and wire. The wire pulley rolls and releases the wire to move the carriage.
The scanner consists of the scanner glass, FR carriage, HR carriage, imaging unit, and driving unit.

Figure 2-40 Scanning system components
● FR Carriage

Figure 2-41 FR carriage
– LED lamp module
This module illuminates the original. Two white LEDs are assembled on the side of the module. The
original is illuminated by the light-guide. The heat sink is attached to the LED PCB. When the heat sink
is broken or expired, an engineer needs to replace it.
○ Light-guide
The light-guide changes the light from point type to line type. The light-guide is made by
transparent resin and controls the amount of light in the scan area uniformly.
○ White LED
The white LED emits white light. The heat sink attached to the PCA prevents heat deterioration.
○ Reflection holder
The reflection holder reflects the light that has passed through the light-guide.
– Mirror #1
Mirror #1 reflects light at a 90 degree angle.
HR Carriage (mirror unit)

Figure 2-42 HR carriage
● Mirror #2 and #3
Mirrors #2 and #3 are positioned at a 45 degree angle in order to change the direction of the light. The
reflected light from mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through mirrors #2 and #3.
● Pulley
The pulley is a ball bearing type. The pulley rolls and releases the wire which makes the HR carriage move.
The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage.
Imaging unit
The imaging unit changes the optical image to an electrical signal.
Figure 2-43 Imaging unit
● Imaging lens
The reflected light from the imaging lens is focused on the CCD. The image is reduced to the fixed CCD
sensor and pixel size.
● CCD PCA
The image made by the imaging lens is changed to an electrical signal by the CCD. The CCD consists of
three channel line sensors for image creation. The brightness and darkness of the image depends on the
voltage level from the CCD. The output voltage is changed to a digital signal. The digital signal makes the
scanned image.
Wire driving

To move the carriages, the wire is assembled in the front and rear of the scanner. The pulley rolls and releases
the wire which moves the FR carriage and the HR carriage.
Figure 2-44 Wire driving
Scanner glass (flatbed glass)
The original is placed on the scanner glass for scan or copy jobs. The scanner glass is made of tempered glass
and is held in place by the frame to prevent distortion.
Drive motor

The scanner drive system uses the step motor to move the carriage. The step motor controls the position and
maintains constant speed. The motor power is transferred to the wire through the timing belt and pulley.
Timing belt
The timing belt has a regular sawtooth gear and transfers the motor power to the pulley.
Figure 2-45 Timing belt
Paper size sensor
The paper size sensor automatically detects the size of the original on the scanner glass. The paper size sensor
uses two sensors. An infrared LED is used to detect the dark original.
Home sensor
The home sensor detects the FR carriage position. The home sensor is a transmission photosensor.
Cover open sensor #1
When the ADF unit opens and closes, a function is triggered which detects whether the paper size sensor is on or
off.
Cover open sensor #2
The cover open sensor #2 detects when the ADF unit is closed using magnetic force.
ADF glass
ADF glass scans the original through the ADF unit. The FR carriage reads the original as it passes. If the original is
contaminated, a horizontal black or white line might appear.
Shading sheet

The shading sheet detects white color in the base. Before every scan job, the scan module reads the shading
sheet to scan the image with the same color and brightness. If the original is contaminated, a vertical image
might occur.
Figure 2-46 Shading sheet
Caution for moving the scanner

Lock the FR and HR carriages to prevent damage when shipping or moving the printer.
When installing
After unpacking, before turning on the printer, the scan locking screw must be removed. If the locking screw is
not removed scanner failure will occur.
1. When installing the printer, remove the scan locking screw.
2. After removing the screw, assemble the screw cap from the accessory package.
Figure 2-47 Remove scan locking screw

When moving
When moving the printer, tighten the scan locking screw to prevent damage to the carriages.
1. Make sure the FR carriage is located in the home position.
2. Remove the screw cap.
3. Tighten the M3x8 screw to secure the FR carriage.
Figure 2-48 Tighten scan locking screw

Flow Automatic Document Feeder (Flow ADF) dn/z bundles (GX)
Flow ADF overview
Figure 2-49 Flow ADF overview
R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1
R8 R9 R1 R11 R1 R1 R1
0 2 3 4
Table 2-30 Flow ADF overview
Part Function
R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray
R2 GUIDE-DOCU F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)
R3 PICKUP ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray
R4 ADF ROLLERr Original paper feed roller
R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller
R6 FEED ROLLER Original paper transfer roller (A6 size)
R7 PRE REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (1 round)
R8 REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (2 round)
R9 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning
R10 SIMPLEX WHITE-ROLLER Support of simplex scanning unit
R11 SIMPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the duplex white-roller
R12 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit
R13 DUPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the exit roller
R14 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray
ENWW Flow Automatic Document Feeder (Flow ADF) dn/z bundles (GX) 81
Sensors
Figure 2-50 Flow ADF sensors
10. MSO 8.Cover Open 7. Pickup Position 5. Detect Sensor 2. Paper Width
9.Pickup 1. Paper Length

Pickup Roller
11. Pre Registration
12. Registration
3.LIFT
PRE REGI PICK UP FEED separation 4.CAM RELEASE

6. POSITION
REGI
DUPLEX-SCAN OUT EXIT
Scan CIS
13. SIM Scan Idle
SIMPLEX
Scan In WHITE-R
OLLER
16. Exit
14. SIM Scan
Scan CCD
MSO Sensors 15. DUP Scan
11. Pre Registration

10. MSO
Table 2-31 Flow ADF sensors
Callout Item Function
1 Paper Length Sensor Detects paperlength
2 Paper Width Sensor Detects paperwidth
3 Stacker Lift Sensor Detects Stacker Position
4 Cam Release Sensor Sensing ‘Separation Roller’ rotation
5 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty
6 Position Sensor Detects Stacker Position
7 Pickup Position Sensor Sensing ‘Pickup Roller’ rotation
8 Cover Open Sensor Detects if cover is open or closed
9 Pickup Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the feed path
10 MSO Sensor Detects mix size
11 Pre-Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the pre-regi path
12 Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Regi path
13 SIM Scan Idle Sensor Sensing ‘Scan In Roller’ rotation
14 SIM Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan In path
15 DUP Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan Out path
16 Exit Sensor Paper Exit Sensing

Ultra Sonic Multi-feed (USM)
Figure 2-51 Flow ADF Ultra Sonic Multifeed
Tx Sensor
Rx Sensor
● This sensor detects multi-feeds.
● Component: Ultrasonic Sensor Tx Board, Rx Board , HIC Board (Amp and Filter)
● The Rx Sensor has a different level on each paper status: no paper, one paper, multiple papers.
● Detect the multi-feeding through the level change of Rx Sensor.
● Transmit and receive operation of 300 khz frequency.
Flow ADF drive system

The flow ADF drive system consists of eight motors.
Figure 2-52 Flow ADF drive system

Pre-Registration Drive section
Registration Drive section

Pickup Drive section Pickup Release Drive section
Scan Drive section
Lift Drive section

Scan in Roller Release Drive section
Exit Drive section
The Flow ADF drive system has eight sections: Pickup Release Drive, Pickup Drive, Pre-Regi Drive, Regi Drive,
Scan-in Roller Release Drive, Scan Drive, Exit Drive, and Lift Drive sections.
Flow ADF document lifting drive system
Figure 2-53 Flow ADF document lifting drive system
● Component: LIFT MOTOR, LIFT SHAFT, LIFT BAR, PAPER SENSOR
● LIFT MOTOR Starts > LIFT SHAFT and LIFT BAR lift Tray
● PAPER SENSOR detects paper in the Tray
● Paper contacts PICKUP ROLLER and stops movement
● Document is passed through SCAN OUT SENSOR. Duplex scanning starts.
Flow ADF Scan-In Roller Release Drive System

Figure 2-54 Flow ADF Scan-In Roller Release Drive System

● Holds the rear of the paper using cam motion for improved scan quality
● Component: RELEASE MOTOR, RELEASE CAM, SCAN-IN IDLE ROLLER
● Motor and cam operation repeats for every piece of paper
Flow ADF specification
Capacity 250 pages (stacker lifting)
Scan Speed 120/240 ipm
Pickup Semi-Retard
Registration 2 times registration
Motor 8 each
Stacker Lifting
Scanning White Roller/White Bar
MSO Support
Flow ADF Registration

Figure 2-55 Flow ADF Registration
Pre Registration Roller
Registration Sensor Pre Registration Sensor
Registration
Roller
The Flow ADF has two times registration.
Flow ADF Scanning Position
Figure 2-56 Flow ADF Scanning Position
6LPSOH[
'XSOH[
Type Simplex Duplex
Scanning Z-GX White Roller White Bar
Mixed Size Original (MSO)

The MSO detects the size of mixed size papers and sets the alignment of the papers to the rear.
Figure 2-57 MSO 1

Figure 2-58 MSO 2
3UH5HJLVWUDWLRQ6HQVRU
062 6HQVRU
Figure 2-59 MSO 3
Dual sensor cleaning method

● Component: LEVER GUIDE EXIT F, GUIDE-EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY.
● Open LEVER GUIDE EXIT F.
● Cleans with a D-CIS GLASS in the direction indicated.
● Cleans the GUIDE EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY in the direction indicated.
Figure 2-60 Dual sensor cleaning method
3XOOWKHOHYHU
Figure 2-61 Dual sensor cleaning method
Flow ADF z bundles (GX)

Model Engine Scanner
Platen DN-sGX Z-GX
Color 40 ppm Same at Scan Speed USM Capacity Scan Speed USM Capacity
whole model
50 ppm 90/180 ipm X 250 sheet 120/240 O 250 sheet
ipm
60 ppm
Mono 40 ppm
50 ppm
60 ppm

Hardware configuration
The electronic circuit system consists of the following:
● Main controller (main board)
● OPE unit
● ADF (flow ADF/ADF) controller
● HVPS board
● LVPS board
● Fuser drive assembly
ENWW Hardware configuration 89

Electronic circuit diagram
Figure 2-62 Electronic circuit diagram
The main controller handles the video controller, engine controller, and scan controller.
The main controller receives print data from the host through the network or USB port and receives copy data
from the scan controller. The main controller uses this information to generate printable video bitmap data. It
controls all modules required to print, including the laser scanner assembly, HVPS, FAN, fuser, and so on.

The main controller communicates with the drive system and other devices through Universal Asynchronous
Receiver Transmitter (UART). The main controller communicates with and checks the life of the toner cartridge,
drum, and developer units through I2C.
The main controller uses Quad Core CPU 1.5 GHz, DDR3 4 GB memory, Micro SD 4 GB, and a 320 GB SATA HDD to
control the engine driving, video signal processing, and user interface.
A MICOM controls power to the fuser lamp and power to the system according to an optimized energy saving
algorithm. The MICOM communicates with the OPE controller through the USB 3.0 protocol to display the system
information on the control panel.
The OPE unit displays the status of the system using the control panel TFT LCD in response to user actions or the
main controller.
The soft power switch in the OPE unit is used to safely shut down the system.
The ADF controller controls some mechanisms required to scan continuously from the ADF. The ADF controller
communicates with the main controller to synchronize scan timing.
The HVPS board generates and controls high-voltage channels. The fuser drive assembly controls power to the
fuser lamp. The LVPS board generates 5 V and 24 V power for the system.
Circuit board locations
The following diagrams show the locations of the printer circuit boards:

Figure 2-63 Circuit board locations
Main controller
NOTE: The main controller for the previous model is not compatible with the new model (IR/UI). Take care to
not use the incompatible Main Controller during replacement.
Main controller for previous model

The main controller consists of the main processor (A3000), memory (DDR3 4 GB), Micro SD (4 GB), 1 G Ethernet
PHY, USB 3.0 HUB, and Micom (Power/Fuser control). It can control Video/UI/FAX signal interface connection,
motor driving IC, engine signal interface connection, and power interface.

The main processor (Quad Core 1.5 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with the
various devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by a SATA cable and connected to the other device
(such as ADF, dual cassette feeder (DCF), Finisher, Modem) by UART.
Main controller block diagram
Figure 2-64 Block diagram

Main controller clock diagram
Figure 2-65 Clock diagram

M 41T81
RTC with IRQ
32.768Khz
CrystalInput
RTS5401
U SB3.0 H U B
12M hz
Crystal
Input
A TSA M D A3000 CH 0_CLK_P(800M hz)

20E15 D D R3 8G b
D D R3 C H 0 CH 0_CLK_N
12M hz K4B8G 1646B
Crystal
Input
RTC D D R3 8G b
K4B8G 1646B
CH 1_CLK_P(800M hz)
N .C
D D R3 8G b
ASM 3P2863 Clk0 D D R3 C H 1 CH 1_CLK_N K4B8G 1646B
12M hz CLK_M A IN (Spread 12M hz)
Crystal Clk1
Input CLK_PU RE(Reference 12M hz)
Sel Clk2 D D R3 8G b
K4B8G 1646B
M AC0
SA TA _REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C0_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 NETWORK PH Y
Crystal SA TA _REFCLK_N M A C0_RX_CLK(125M hz)
Input Clk1 RTL8211
M AC1 NETWORK OPTION

PCI_REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C1_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 NETWORK PH Y
Crystal M A C1_RX_CLK(125M hz)
Input Clk1
PCI_REFCLK_N RTL8211
CLK_M A IN _CCD M _P(35M hz)

U SB3D _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CCD M
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 CLK_M A IN _CCD M _N
Crystal U SB3D _REFCLK_N
Input Clk1 SC AN0 RX_CLK_CCD M _P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_CCD M _N
U SB3H _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CLK_M A IN _D CIS_P(35M hz)

D CIS
U SB3H _REFCLK_N SC AN1 CLK_M A IN _D CIS_N
RX_CLK_D CIS_P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_D CIS_N

Main controller connection information
Figure 2-66 Connection information
1 OUTPUT 12 OPC BLDC MONO 23 FIH JOINT 34 FAX JOINT
2 FUSER DRIVE 13 LVPS TYPE5 24 UI IF 35 2ND NETWORK
3 FUSER DRAWER 14 LVPS TYPE3R 25 USB HOST/HUB 36 EFI SIGNAL
4 TB/DEVE/E-Label 15 FRONT IF MONO 26 DCIS 37 CPU FAN
5 TONER SUP/RES 16 Fuser drive 27 CCDM

assembly IF
6 CTD/Registration 17 Laser scanner 28 Flow ADF

assembly SENS assembly MONO
7 PICKUP 1/2 18 HVPS MONO 29 HDD POWER
8 FEED/Registration 19 USB HOST 1/2 30 HDD SIGNAL

assembly MOT
9 SIDE 20 USB DEVICE 31 SIDE FAN
10 dual cassette 21 NETWORK 32 MSOK

feeder (DCF) IF
11 FINISHER 22 EFI POWER 33 SD CARD

Information
● Part Number:
● Part Name: PBA-MAIN
NOTE: This main board is for all models of the HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560.
Main controller
The main controller consists of the main processor (A3000), memory (DDR3 6 GB), eMMC (4 GB)1 G Ethernet
PHY, USB 3.0 HUB, and Micom (Power/Fuser control). It can control Video/UI/FAX signal interface connection,
motor driving IC, engine signal interface connection, and power interface.
The main processor (Quad Core 1.5 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with the
various devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by a SATA cable and connected to the other device
(such as ADF, dual cassette feeder (DCF), Finisher, and Modem) by UART.
Main controller block diagram
Figure 2-67 Block diagram

O P E IR
IR P B A
C h3
FU S E R
10.1" C h2 PTB SC A N N ER
T FT LC D
TO N ER C R U M
C h1 O PC C R U M D SD F
U S B 3.0 H U B P B A
R TC
W IFI/N FC M O D U LE C h0
D E B U G _M C B
FR O N T 2 nd N W
R T S 5411 C h0 P LA T E N
C A R D R EA D ER U SB D IM M C h1
D E B U G _S C B
4Port H U B H O ST
M S O K /T P M C h2
D E B U G _U I
C h3
E N G IN E P A N E L
LC D C h4
A T S A M D 2E 15
C on. I2C SPI S C A N IF S C A N IF
C h5
CH0 CH1 D SD F
R EA R U SB
U SB H O ST
R T S 5401 3.0
C h6
DCF
1/2 4Port H U B H O ST C h7
FIN IS H E R
C h9
R EA R U SB UART E FI
U SB 3.0 C h10
M O D EM 0
D EVIC E D E V IC E C h11
M O D EM 1
D D R 3 6G B DDRC
FU S E R FU S E R U N IT
O n-board 4G B 800M hz
D IM M 2G B 32bit
N C TH 1 C /D N C TH 2 C /D
M A G IC 12B it AD C A T S A M D 2E 15
IO ExternalAD C 12b A N A LO G M U X
A N A LO G M U X READ M H V YM C K, TH V YM C K
M P SIZE / PAPER SIZE1,2 / ADC TC YM C K / C TD ,AC R / FU SER / W TB
IN N ER, O U TTER, EXIT, LSU TEM P 1.8V
H U M ID ITY, M O D EL SEL, AC Level E FI V ID E O
P C Iex C O N T R O LLE R
Step M otor FB / 24V FB
* C olor m odel
EN G IN E
STEP M O T
PIC KU P1/2, FEED , REG I, T1 EN G AG E,
D R V 8825
X15
A 3000 M AC0 R T L8211E
G igabit phy
R J45
B ASE
D U PLEX_RET/1/2, SKEW Y/M /C , S I-7321M CTRL.

W TB , FU SER RELEASE, TO N ER SU PPLY X2 R T L8211E R J45
YM /C K, TO N ER RESERVO IR YM /C K, M AC1
A N 44061A G igabit phy EXTEN D
C ST LO C K, X1 O PTIO N KIT
FA N SA TA
SEN SO R EXIT1/2/3/4,SM PS(LX/G X), SA TA
2.5", 320G B
EM PTY 1/2, LIFT1/2, PRE FEED 1/2, FEED C PU , LSU , D EVE,SID E,
REG I, M P_EM PTY/SIZEL/W , C U RL2, FU SER O U T CTRL. G P IO
FU SER IN /O U T, B IN _FU LL_EXIT1/2, PW M
D U PLEX_JAM 1/2, D U PLEX_RETU RN , B LD C 4B E A M LS U
PAPER_SIZE1/2, W ASTE_IN STALL, O PC Y,M ,C ,K/ITB , YM CK
O PC _PH ASE Y/M /C /K, RESERVO IR Y/M /C /K, FU SER LS U C CTRL. LD 1,2,3,4
TO N ER SU P YM /C K, ITB H O M E, FU SER PO S, LSU _M O T1
C O VER O PEN FRO N T/SID E, H V PS VD O 1B _YM C K
SC AN H O M E / APS 1,2 SH U TTER AC R, M H V YM C K
VD O 2B _YM C K
PLATEN C O VER O PEN 1,2 D EV D C YM C K H PV C VD O D ATA VD O 3B _YM C K
D EV AC VPP YM C K
VD O 4B _YM C K
S O LE N O ID / C LT D EV AC
C LT : M P D EV AC EN YM C K
SO L : M P / EXIT TH V1 YM C K
TH V2(C V/C C ) / TH V eM M C
DC M OT C LEAN MMC CTRL. 4G B
AC R SH U TTER, C ST LO C K 1/2 SAW / FU SER B IAS B oot D evice

Main controller clock diagram
Figure 2-68 Clock diagram

32.768Khz
M 41T81
Crystal Input RTC w ith IRQ
12M hz
RTS5401 A3000 CH 0_CLK_P(800M hz)
Crystal
U SB3.0 H U B D D R3 2G B
Input D D R3 C H 0 CH 0_CLK_N
(4G b*8*4ea)
RTC D D R3 2G B
(4G b*8*4ea)
CH 1_CLK_P(800M hz) D D R3 2G B
N .C
12M hz
ASM 3P2863 Clk0 D D R3 C H 1 CH 1_CLK_N (4G b*8*4ea)
CLK_M A IN (Spread 12M hz)
Crystal Clk1
Input CLK_PU RE(Reference 12M hz)
Sel Clk2 D D R3 2G b_tem p
(4G b*8*4ea)
M AC 0
SA TA _REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C0_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz ID T6U 41362 D IF_CLK_P N ETW O RK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal SA TA _REFCLK_N
Input D IF_CLK_N M A C0_RX_CLK(125M hz) RTL8211 Crystal
Input
PCI_REFCLK_P(100M hz)
M AC 1 N ETW O RK O PTIO N PBA
D IF_CLK_P M A C1_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
PCI_REFCLK_N N ETW O RK PH Y 12M hz
D IF_CLK_N M A C1_RX_CLK(125M hz) RTL8211 Crystal
Input
CLK_M A IN _CCD M _P(35M hz)

U SB3D _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CCD M
25M hz ID T6U 41362 D IF_CLK_P CLK_M A IN _CCD M _N
Crystal U SB3D _REFCLK_N
Input D IF_CLK_N SC AN 0 RX_CLK_CCD M _P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_CCD M _N
U SB3H _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CLK_M A IN _D CIS_P(35M hz)

D IF_CLK_P
U SB3H _REFCLK_N D CIS
D IF_CLK_N SC AN 1 CLK_M A IN _D CIS_N
RX_CLK_D CIS_P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_D CIS_N

Main controller connection information
Figure 2-69 Connection information
1 OUTPUT 12 OPC BLDC MONO 23 FIH JOINT 34 FAX JOINT
2 FUSER DRIVE 13 LVPS TYPE5 24 HUB IF 35 2ND NETWORK
3 FUSER DRAWER 14 LVPS TYPE3R 25 USB HOST/HUB 36 EFI SIGNAL
4 TB/DEVE/E-Label 15 FRONT IF MONO 26 UI IF 37 DRR3 DIMM
5 TONER SUP_/RES 16 Fuser drive 27 DCIS 38 CPU FAN

assembly IF
6 CTD/Registration 17 Laser scanner 28 CCDM

assembly SENS assembly MONO
7 PICKUP 1/2 18 HVPS MONO 29 Flow ADF
8 FEED/Registration 19 USB HOST 1/2 30 HDD POWER

assembly MOT
9 SIDE 20 USB DEVICE 31 HDD SIGNAL
10 dual cassette 21 NETWORK 32 SIDE FAN

feeder (DCF) IF
11 FINISHER 22 EFI POWER 33 MSOK

Information
● Part Number:
● Part Name: PBA-MAIN
NOTE: This main board is for all HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 models.
Master system operation key (MSOK)

MSOK PCA is used to store all system information and consists of serial flash memory, an EEPROM, and a X-E-
Label. The flash memory (4 MB), EEPROM (256 KB) and X-E-Label are used for all system operations such as
system parameter, device status, tech information, and service information.
NOTE: When a main board needs to be exchanged, reinstall the MSOK PCA to the new main board to retain the
system information.
IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main board in the
same orientation as when it was removed in order for the printer to function.
Figure 2-70 MSOK
1 Main PCA I/F connector

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5)
NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 2 each)
The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards. The
voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection modes for
over current and overload.
Figure 2-71 LVPS PCA (Type 5)
1 INPUT_AC
2 OUTPUT_DC +24 V 1/2/3/4 (to Main PCA)
3 24 V on/off
4 OUTPUT_DC +5 V 1/2 (to Main PCA)
Specification
● General input/output voltage
– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)
– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)
– Input current: 8.0 A (110 V)/5.0 A (220 V)
– Output power: 275 W
○ DC 5 V: 35 W
○ DC 24 V: 240 W

Information
110 V 220 V
Part number SAM-JC44-00249A SAM-JC44-00250A
Part name LVPS 110V Type 5H LVPS 220V Type 5H
Input/output connector
● AC input connector (CN1)
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 AC_L AC input
2 AC_N
● DC output connector (CN2)
1 +5V1 Power
2 GND 5 V ground
3 +5V2 Power
4 GND 5 V ground
1 +24V1 Power
2 GND 24 V ground
3 +24V2 Power
4 GND 24 V ground
5 +24V3 Power
6 GND 24 V ground
7 +24V4 Power
8 GND 24 V ground
● Signal Connector (CN4)
1 GND Active Low
2 24 V On/Off
3 GND

NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 1 each, Type3 x 1 each)
1 INPUT_AC Power (CON1)
2 Fuser AC Power (CON2)
3 OUTPUT_DC +24 V 1/2/3 and +5V1 (CON3)
4 Signal_24 V on/off, Relay on, Fuser on (CON4)
Specification
– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)
– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)
– Input current: 10.0 A (110 V)/8.0 A (220 V)
○ DC 5 V: 20 W
○ DC 24 V: 144 W

Information
110 V 220 V
Part number SAM-JC44-00222E SAM-JC44-00223F
Part name LVPS 110V Type 3 LVPS 220V Type 3
1 AC_L AC input
2 AC_N
● Fuser AC Power Connector (CN2)
1 AC_L AC input for fuser
2 AC_N
1 +5V1 DC 5 V
2 GND Ground
3 +24V1 DC 24 V
4 GND Ground
5 +24V2 DC 24 V
6 GND Ground
7 +24V3 DC 24 V
1 GND Ground
2 24 V On/Off Active Low
3 Relay on Active High
4 24 V Bias for photo triac, relay
5 Fuser on Active High

NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 2 each)
1 INPUT_AC
2 OUTPUT_DC +24 V1/2/3 and DC +5 V 1/2 (to Main PCA)
3 24 V on/off
Specification
– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)
– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)
– Input current: 6.3 A (110 V)/5 A (220 V)
○ DC 5 V: 25 W
○ DC 24 V: 180 W
Information
110 V 220 V
Part number SAM-JC44-00091D SAM-JC44-00092D
Part name LVPS 110V Type 4 LVPS 220V Type 4

1 AC_L AC input
2 AC_N
1 +5V1 Power
2 GND 5 V ground
3 +5V2 Power
4 GND 5 V ground
5 +24V1 Power
6 GND 24 V ground
7 +24V2 Power
8 GND 24 V ground
9 +24V3 Power
1 GND Active Low
2 24 V On/Off
3 GND
Fuser drive assembly

This board supplies voltage to the fuser AC, heater, and main board.

Figure 2-74 Fuser drive board
1 Option Heater
2 Fuser Lamp
3 Fuser drive assembly I/F
4 LVPS (Type 5)
5 Main Switch
6 AC Inlet
7 Option Heater Switch
8 LVPS (Type 4)
9/10 Reactor
Information
110 V 220 V
Part number SAM-JC44-00235B SAM-JC44-00236B
Part name Fuser Drive Board 110V Fuser Drive Board 220V
High voltage power supply (HVPS) board

The HVPS generates five high-voltage channels including FUSER, SAW, DEV, AC/DC, THV+/-, and MHV.

Figure 2-75 HVPS PCA
Table 2-39 HVPS PCA Connections

1 DETECT
2 24 V Input voltage
4 ADC_HVPS_24 Signal
6 GND GND
7 GND GND
8 3.3 V Input voltage
9 GND GND
10 OPEN
11 READ_THV+_CV Output voltage
12 PWM_THV+_CV PWM signal
13 PWM_MHV PWM signal
14 THV+_CV_SELECT Input voltage
15 PWM_SAW PWM signal
16 READ_THV Output voltage
17 PWM_THV- PWM signal
18 nEN_DEVE nEN signal
19 PWM_FUSER_BIAS PWM signal

Table 2-39 HVPS PCA Connections (continued)
20 PWM_DEV_DC PWM signal
21 PWM_THV+_CC PWM signal
22 PWM_DEV_Vpp PWM signal
23 PWM_DEV_AC PWM signal
24 DETECT
Connections
CN2 MHV/SAW Output voltage
CN3 THV +/- Output voltage
CN4 DEV AC/DC Output voltage
CN5 FUSER Output voltage
Specification
● Input voltage: DC 24 V, 3.3 V
● Output voltage:
– MHV: –1387 V
– DEV DC: –603 V, AC: Vpp 960 V
– THV+(CC/CV): 25.6 uA/2045 V, THV-: –1295 V
– SAW: –990 V
– FUSER: 400 V
Information
● Part number: SAM-JC44-00241A
● Part name: HVPS
Eraser PCA
The eraser PCA has one LED. The LED is used for erasing the negative charges on the surface of the drum after
printing.

Figure 2-76 Eraser PCA
Information
● Part number:
● Part name: PCA-ERASER
Fuser PCA
The Fuser PCA includes a CRU memory for Fuser Unit Life Cycle counting. The Fuser PCA provides a connection
interface for the pressure sensor.
Figure 2-77 Fuser PCA
1 Fuser EEPROM, Pressure Sensor I/F
2 Pressure Sensor (Not used)
Information
● Part number:
● Part name: PBA-FUSER
Waste Sensor PCA

The waste sensor PCA detects the waste toner level inside the toner collection unit.

Figure 2-78 Waste sensor PCA
Information
● Part number:
● Part name: WASTE SENSOR RX
Paper Size sensor PCA

The paper size sensor PCA is used for detecting the size of the paper in the tray.
Figure 2-79 Paper size sensor PCA
Flow ADF PCA

The flow ADF-PCA uses the R5F562TAEDFP (100 MHz Main Clock) for controlling the flow ADF unit and interfaces
with the main board through UART.
The flow ADF-PCA has three motor driver ICs to control the BLDC/step motor and controls one BLDC motor, two
step motors, one clutch, one fan, and 11 sensors.

Figure 2-80 Flow ADF PCA
1 Scan Position 1/2, Registration, Feed Sensor
2 Pickup, Paper Detect, Cover Open Sensor
3 BLDC Motor, Registration Motor, Pickup Clutch
4 Output Sensor, Fan
5 Paper Length 1/2, Width Sensor
6 Scan Joint PCA
Information
● Part name: Flow ADF-PCA
● Part number: SAM-JC92-02964B
● Part name: Flow ADF-PCA (sGX)
Scan joint PCA

The scan joint PCA has a Bipolar Step Motor driving IC and interfaces with the WLED, APS sensor (1, 2), cover
open sensor (1, 2), home position sensor, and main board.
The scan joint PCA also functions as the relay board to interface with the ADF I/F and power board.

Figure 2-81 Scan joint PCA
1 WLED IF PCA
2 MAIN PCA
3 Cover Open 2, Home Sensor
4 ADF/flow ADF PCA
5 Image Scanner Motor
Information
● Part name: PCA-SCAN JOINT
CCDM PCA
The CCDM PCA is used in the scanner unit and converts the reflected light from an original document to electrical
signals. The reflected light from an original document is converted to three-color analog signals: red, green, and
blue. The ADC converts each analog signal to digital. For a high speed data transmission, the digital data signal is
converted to a LVDS format with serialization. The CCDM PCA includes the CCD, ADC, Logic IC, and so on.
Figure 2-82 CCDM PCA
1 MAIN PCA
Information
● Part number:
● Part name: PBA-CCDM

WLED IF PCA
The WLED IF PCA interfaces with the WLED and sensors inside the Image Scanner unit.
Figure 2-83 WLED IF PCA
1 APS1, APS2 Sensor
2 Cover Open1 Sensor
3 SCAN JOINT PCA
4 WLED PCA
Information
● Part number:
● Part name: PBA-WLED IF
WLED PCA
The WLED PCA consists of two WLEDs used as scanner light.
Figure 2-84 WLED PCA
1 WLED PCA
Information
● Part number:
● Part name: PBA-WLED

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Paper feeding system (rollers and functions)
Figure 2-85 Paper feeding system
Table 2-46 DCF paper feeding system
Tray number Roller number Roller name Function
4 R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.
4 R2 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed

roller.
4 R3 Reverse (separation) Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

roller
4 R4 Prefeed roller Transports paper to the feed roller.
4 R5 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.
4/5 R6 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the basic

machine.
4/5 R7 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

roller.

roller

Paper path
Figure 2-86 Paper path
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 115

Electrical parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Figure 2-87 Electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Table 2-47 DCF electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Tray number Callouts Description Function
4 S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in Tray 3.
4 S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting-up of Tray 3.
4 S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and R4-5.
4/5 S4 Path sensor Detects paper passing through R6-R7.
5 S5 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in Tray 4.
5 S6 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting-up of Tray 4.
5 S7 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R9-R10 and

R11-12.
4 S8 Paper size sensor Detects tray insertion and paper size in

Tray 3.
5 S9 Paper size sensor Detects tray insertion and paper size in

Tray 4.
4/5 SW1 Side door open switch Detects opening of right cover.
4 M1 Tray 3 pickup motor
5 M2 Tray 4 pickup motor
4/5 M3 Tray feed motor

PCA connection
Figure 2-88 PCA connection and DCF
Table 2-48 DCF PCA connection
Connector number Item number Connection
CN902 1 DC MOTOR I/F
CN801 2 PICK/LIFT4 MOTOR I/F
CN601 3 PICK/LIFT3 & FEED MOTOR I/F
CN701 4 LOCKMOT/MOT LIFT/LCT HOME I/F
CN1001 5 TOPCOVER/OPEN INTERLOCK
CN301 6 MAIN I/F
CN401 7 UART DEBUG I/F
CN402 8 E1 JTAG DEBUG I/F
CN802 9 SENSOR PAPER SIZE
CN901 10 HCI INNER DRAWER
CN302 11 SUB I/F

CN1101 12 BBP I/F
CN501 13 T4 SENSOR
High capacity input tray (HCI)
Table 2-49 HCI paper feeding system
Tray number Roller number Roller name Function

roller.

roller
4 R6 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the basic

machine.

Paper path
Figure 2-90 HCI paper path
ENWW High capacity input tray (HCI) 119

Figure 2-91 Electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Table 2-50 HCI electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Tray number Callouts Description Function
3/4 S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in main tray.
3/4 S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting up of main

tray.
3/4 S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and R4-5.
3/4 S4 Path sensor Detects paper passing through R6-R7.
3/4 S5 Tray insertion sensor Detects tray insertion.
3/4 S6 Knockup home sensor Detects home position of knock-plate.
3/4 S7 Main tray level sensor 1 Detects paper residual paper quantity in
main tray.
3/4 S8 Main tray level sensor 2 Detects paper residual paper quantity in
main tray.
3/4 S9 Shift tray no paper sensor Detects paper empty in sub tray.
3/4 S10 Shift tray level sensor 1 Detects paper residual quantity in sub
tray.
3/4 S11 Shift tray level sensor 2 Detects paper residual quantity in sub
tray.
3/4 S12 Shift plate home sensor Detects home position of shift plate.
3/4 S13 Shift plate end sensor Detects end position of shift plate.
3/4 S14 Solenoid home sensor Detects home position of solenoid.
3/4 SW1 Side door open switch Detects opening of solenoid.
3 M1 Tray pickup motor
120 Chapter 2 Product

3 specificationsM2and description Tray feed motor ENWW
3 M3 Tray lift up motor
3 M4 Paper shift motor

PCA connection
Figure 2-92 HCI PCA connection
Table 2-51 HCI PCA connection
CN902 1 DC MOTOR I/F
CN301 6 MAIN I/F
CN901 10 HCI INNER DRAWER
CN302 11 SUB I/F
CN1101 12 BBP I/F
CN502 14 T3 SENSOR

Side high capacity input tray (sHCI)
Table 2-52 sHCI paper feeding system
Roller number Roller name Function
R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.
R2 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed roller.
R3 Reverse (separation) roller Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.
R4 Idle roller Transports paper to the feed roller.
R5 Feed roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

Paper path
Figure 2-94 sHCI paper path
ENWW Side high capacity input tray (sHCI) 123

Figure 2-95 sHCI electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Table 2-53 sHCI electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Callouts Description Function
S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in tray.
S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting up of main tray.
S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and R4-5.
124 Chapter 2 Product

S4 specifications and description
Paper level sensor 1 Detects paper residual paper quantity in tray.ENWW
S5 Paper level sensor 2 Detects paper residual paper quantity in tray.
S6 Install sensor 1 Detects installation of SL-sHCI501S to the basic

PCA connection
Figure 2-96 sHCI PCA connection
Table 2-54 sHCI PCA connection
CN701 4 LOCKMOT/MOT LIFT/sHCI HOME I/F
CN1001 5 TOPCOVER/OPEN INTERLOCK
CN301 6 MAIN I/F
CN1101 12 BBP I/F
CN501 13 T4 SENSOR
CN502 14 T3 SENSOR
ENWW Side high capacity input tray (sHCI) 125

3 Removal and replacement
● For additional service and support
● Service approach
– Precautions when replacing parts
– Before performing service
– After performing service
– Post-service test
● Maintenance
– Machine cleaning for maintenance
● Removal and replacement procedures
– Accessories
– Replacement of maintenance parts
● Formatter cover
– Introduction
– Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
– Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
● Accelerator board
– Introduction
– Step 2: Remove the accelerator board
● Island of data (IOD)
– Introduction
– Step 2: Remove the island of data (IOD)
ENWW 127
● Formatter hard disk drive (HDD)
– Introduction
– Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
● Formatter
– Introduction
– Step 2: Remove the accelerator board
– Step 3: Remove the hard-disk drive
– Step 4: Remove the formatter PCA
● Control panel
– Introduction
– Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel
– Step 2: Remove the control-panel
● Keyboard (z bundles)
– Introduction
– Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel
– Step 2: Remove the control-panel
– Step 3: Remove the keyboard
● Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU)
– Introduction
– Step 1: Remove the IPTU
● Replacing the main SVC part
– Front top inner cover
– Front power cover
128 Chapter 3 Removal and replacement ENWW

– Front power switch
– Output bin
– Top right cover
– Left cover
– Lower rear cover
– Upper rear cover
– Left rear corner cover
– Right rear cover
– Right door
– Paper dust brush
– Front cover
– Inner front cover
– Front cover open sensor
– Low voltage power supply (LVPS) cover
– Laser scanner assembly
– Developer fan
– High voltage power supply (HVPS) board
– Main board
– Toner supply motor
– CRUM connector
– Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans
– Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 1
– Fuser drive board
– Fuser fan
– Main drive unit
– Inductor unit
– Auto closing unit
– Fuser/output drive unit
– Right door open sensor
ENWW 129
– Right door open switch
– Pickup drive unit 1
– Pickup drive unit 2
– Feed/MP drive unit
– Registration drive assembly
– Toner collection unit (TCU) sensors
– Reservoir unit
– Auto size sensor
– Fuser out sensor (on the right door)
– Feed 2 sensor (on the right door)
– Multi-purpose (MP) unit (on the right door)
– Multi-purpose (MP) empty sensor
– Multi-purpose (MP) paper length sensor
– Multi-purpose (MP) solenoid
– Output unit
– Return sensor (on the output unit)
– Duplex 1 sensor (on the output unit)
– Output 1 bin full sensor (on the output unit)
– Output gate solenoid (on the output unit)
– Pickup unit 2
– Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 2)
– Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2)
– Pickup unit 1
– Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 1)
– Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1)
– Internal hard disk drive (HDD)
– Registration assembly
– Registration sensor assembly
– High voltage terminal
● Flow ADF
– Flow ADF whole unit

– Flow ADF jam access cover
– Flow ADF input tray
– Flow ADF contact image sensor (CIS)
– Flow ADF front motor
– Flow ADF rear motors
– Flow ADF PCA fan
– Flow ADF contact image sensor (CIS) fan
– Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA
– White backing
● Scanner unit (image scanner unit)
– Scanner whole unit
– Scan glass
– LED lamp module
– Scanner imaging unit
– Scan joint board
– APS sensor
– Dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door
– Dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor
– Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor
– Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA
– Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units
● Bottom high-capacity input (HCI) tray
– Bottom HCI tray feed motor
– Bottom HCI tray pickup motor
– Bottom HCI tray PCA
– Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor
– Bottom HCI tray shaft motor
● Side high capacity input (sHCI)
– Side HCI rear cover
– Side HCI feed motor
ENWW 131
– Side HCI pickup motor
– Side HCI PCA
– Side HCI lift-up motor

For additional service and support
HP service personnel, go to the Service Access Workbench (SAW) at http://sawpro.glb.itcs.hp.com.
Channel partners, go to HP Channel Services Network (CSN) at www.hp.com/partners/csn .
At these locations, find information on the following topics:
● Install and configure
● Printer specifications
● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting
● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues
● Remove and replace part instructions and videos
● Service advisories
● Warranty and regulatory information
Channel partners, access training materials in the HP University and Partner Learning Center at
https://content.ext.hp.com/sites/LMS/HPU.page.
To access HP PartSurfer information from any mobile device, go to http://partsurfermobile.hp.com/ or scan the
Quick Response (QR) code below.
Service approach
Precautions when replacing parts
Precautions when assembling and disassembling
● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage, and
current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the machine, circuit
overload, fire, or electric shock.
● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause the
printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.
● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This printer
contains 19 different screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short circuit or electric
shock.
ENWW For additional service and support 133

● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is disassembled, dust
might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There are no serviceable parts
inside the laser scanner assembly.
● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to overheating
and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.
Precautions when handling PCA

Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.
Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.
● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA
– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.
– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.
● Precautions when replacing a PCA
– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.
– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when handling
insulated parts.
● Precautions when checking a PCA
– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before touching a PCA.
– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or cause
electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors, motors, or
lamps, as they might become very hot.
– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the correct
screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted in their
original positions.
– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Releasing plastic latches

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them carefully. To
remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

Before performing service
● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.
● Remove any finishing devices and the side HCI, if they are installed.
● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.
● Remove the toner cartridges, if needed.
After performing service

● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:
Print-quality test
1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.
2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.
3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.
4. Print a configuration page.
5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print quality
defects.
6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.
Copy-quality test
1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder, print a copy job, and then verify the results.
2. Place the configuration page on the flatbed glass, print a copy job, and then verify the results
Fax-quality test
1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder.
2. Type a valid fax number, and send the fax job.
3. Verify that the send quality and the receive quality meet expectations.
ENWW Service approach 135

Parts removal order
For procedures and/or steps that require identifying the right, left, or rear side of the printer, face the front of the
printer for correct orientation.

Maintenance
Machine cleaning for maintenance
Cleaning the paper dust stick
The paper dust stick needs to be cleaned after a specified number of pages are printed. A clean the paper dust
stick message will appear. This is when the paper dust stick must be cleaned. Use the following procedure to
complete this task.
1. Open the front door.
Figure 3-1 Open the front door
2. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).
Figure 3-2 Remove the TCU
ENWW Maintenance 137

3. Pull out the paper dust stick.
Figure 3-3 Remove paper dust stick
4. Remove the paper dust.
Figure 3-4 Remove the paper dust
5. Insert the paper dust stick back into the slot.
Figure 3-5 Install the paper dust stick

6. Insert the toner collection unit (TCU) until it locks in place on each side.
Figure 3-6 Install the TCU
7. Close the front door. Make sure the cover is securely closed. If the message still appears, repeat Steps 3
and 4.
Figure 3-7 Close the front door
Cleaning the scan glass

▲ Open the flow ADF unit. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.

Figure 3-8 Clean the scanner glass
Cleaning the flow ADF white bar and CISCleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS
1. Open the ADF unit, peel back the white backing (callout 1), and then release the green tab (callout 2).
Figure 3-9 Peel back the white backing and release one tab

2. Open the access door. Clean the simplex white bar (callout 1), the CIS (callout 2), and the duplex white bar
(callout 3) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.
Figure 3-10 Clean flow document feeder white bar

Removal and replacement procedures
Accessories

Removal and replacement: Trusted platform module
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive
● Step 3: Remove the trusted platform module (TPM)
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the trusted platform module (TPM).
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
CAUTION: This part contains components that are electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive. To reduce the
possibility of ESD damage, always touch the sheet-metal chassis to ground yourself before touching an ESD
sensitive part.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then go to
http://h20141.www2.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
TPM kit number
F5S62-61001 Trusted platform module
Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.

○ Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated, and that the thumbscrews are finger tight after
replacing it.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
ENWW Removal and replacement procedures 143

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover

▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 3-11 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive

▲ Release one retainer, and then rotate the HDD away from the formatter to remove it.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

Step 3: Remove the trusted platform module (TPM)
CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part.
1. Locate the TPM component on the formatter.
Figure 3-12 Locate the TPM
2. Gently pull the TPM straight off the formatter to remove it.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
instructions.

Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution
● Introduction
● Step 1: Unpack the FIH accessory
● Step 2: Install the FIH accessory
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to install the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory.

cable.
blank).
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) part number
B5L31-67902 Foreign interface harness
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove this part.

printer.
Post service test
Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.
Connect a third party solution to the FIH, and then verify it correctly functions.

Step 1: Unpack the FIH accessory
Unpack the accessory from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an
ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by
placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from the
replacement part prior to installation.
Step 2: Install the FIH accessory

▲ Locate the USB connector on the printer formatter. Connect the FIH to this connector
Figure 3-13 Connect the FIH

NFC Kit Installation
● Introduction
● Step 1: Unpack the NFC kit
● Step 2: Install the NFC kit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to install the NFC kit.
Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
www.hp.com/buy/parts.
NFC kit part number
J8030-61001 Jetdirect Wireless Print Server with NFC Kit
Required tools
● Small, flat-blade screwdriver.
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.
Verify that the light on the NFC accessory illuminates to confirm the installation is correct.
Verify that a wireless network icon appears on the control panel.


Step 1: Unpack the NFC kit
Unpack the kit from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an
ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by
placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from the
part prior to installation.
Step 2: Install the NFC kit
1. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the HIP cover.
Figure 3-14 Release the HIP cover
2. Remove the HIP cover.
Figure 3-15 Remove the HIP cover
3. Identify the USB connector in the HIP, and then attach the appropriate USB cable:
a. Locate the USB connector that is along one of the short edges. A USB Mini B receptacle (callout 1) is
the most common. However, on some models, a USB Mini B plug (callout 2) is used.

Figure 3-16 Identify USB connector
b. Select the appropriate cable from the two that are provided.
Figure 3-17 Select USB cable

c. Install the USB cable in the socket in the HIP. Note that the USB logo on the connector may face down
on some models.
Figure 3-18 Install the USB cable
4. Attach the power and grounding ends of the USB cable:
a. Attach the white power connector of the cable into the corresponding receptacle on the NFC
accessory.
Figure 3-19 Install the white power connector

b. Attach the metal ground connector of the cable to the grounding tab on the NFC accessory.
Figure 3-20 Attach the metal ground connector
5. Install the NFC accessory into the HIP recess.
a. Install the hook-shaped clips on the NFC accessory into the HIP recess..
Figure 3-21 Position the NFC accessory in the HIP recess

b. Gently push the NFC accessory onto the rounded clips so that it is held securely in place within the
recess.
Figure 3-22 Install the NFC accessory

Replacement of maintenance parts

Toner collection unit (TCU)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the TCU
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the toner collection unit (TCU).
instructions.

cable.
blank).
www.hp.com/buy/parts
TCU part number
SAM-JC96-11638A HP Managed LJ Toner Collection Unit
Required tools

printer.

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the TCU
1. Open the front cover.
2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).
instructions.

Imaging drum unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the imaging drum unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the imaging drum unit.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Imaging drum unit part number
X3A74-67902 HP LaserJet Black Imaging Drum Unit
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

printer.

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the imaging drum unit
2. Open the right door.
3. Loosen one screw.
Figure 3-24 Loosen one screw
4. Grip the handle and remove the drum unit.
NOTICE: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the drum unit.
Figure 3-25 Remove the drum unit

instructions.

Developer unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the developer unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the developer unit.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Developer unit part number
SAM-JC96-11599A HP LaserJet Black Developer
Required tools

printer.

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the developer unit
2. Remove the imaging drum unit.
3. Move the developer locking lever (callout 1) to the down position. Remove three screws to release the
bracket, and then disconnect the small, black cable connector .
Figure 3-26 Remove three screws and disconnect the small, black cable connector
4. Hold the grip point of the developer unit and remove it.
NOTE: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the developer unit.
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the developer unit, press on the unit just above the waste toner
auger, and then slide the unit into the printer.
Figure 3-27 Remove the developer unit

5. Unpack the new developer unit box and check the components. In the box is a developer unit and a silver
pack of developer powder.
6. Hold the cover, and then release six hooks. Open the cover.
Figure 3-28 Open the developer unit
NOTE: Before filling the developer, shake the silver pack about three times to prevent the developer
powder from scattering.
7. Distribute the developer powder into the developer unit.
NOTE: When filling the developer, intermittently rock and gently shake the developer from side to side to
avoid overflow.
Figure 3-29 Distribute the developer powder
8. Reinstall the developer cover.
9. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Developer unit

▲ After the replacement developer unit is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware
counter:
i. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
ii. Select the Service menu.
iii. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
access code (04082517).
iv. Select the Service Tools menu.
v. Select the Supply Status menu.

vi. Select Field Replacement Unit.
vii. Select Development Unit (Developer) (YMCK).
viii. Select the check box on the right side of the screen for the Black Developer Unit.
ix. Select Reset.
instructions.

Fuser unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the fuser unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the fuser unit.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Fuser unit part number
SAM-JC91-01195A HP LaserJet 110V Fuser Assembly
SAM-JC91-01194A HP LaserJet 220V Fuser Assembly
Required tools

printer.

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the fuser unit
2. Remove four screws.
Figure 3-30 Fuser unit screw locations
3. Pull out the fuser unit.
CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of
getting burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.
Figure 3-31 Fuser unit removal

instructions.

Paper transfer belt (PTB)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the PTB
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paper transfer belt (PTB).
instructions.

cable.
blank).
PTB part number
SAM-JC93-01117A HP LaserJet Paper Transfer Belt
Required tools

printer.

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the PTB
2. Remove one screw and the connector cover.
Reinstallation tip: Before reinstalling the connector cover, roll the wires around the connector to ensure
they are all contained under the cover.
Figure 3-32 Remove the connector cover
3. Disconnect the PTB connector.
Figure 3-33 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove one screw and position the lever as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3-34 Remove one screw and position the lever
5. Remove one screw and position the lever as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3-35 Remove one screw and position the lever

6. Remove the PTB assembly.
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the PTB, slide it all the way to the back of the printer to engage the
prongs on the bottom of the PTB.
NOTE: There is one unused connector on the right door under the PTB.
Figure 3-36 Remove the PTB assembly
Special installation instructions: PTB assembly

▲ After the replacement PTB is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:
vii. Select PTB (Paper Transfer Belt).
viii. Select Transfer Belt.
ix. Select Reset.

instructions.

Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers part number
X3A92-67917 HP LaserJet Trays 2-x Rollers
Required tools

printer.

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers
NOTE: HP recommends that all three rollers are replaced at the same time.
2. Remove the two cassettes.
Figure 3-37 Remove the two cassettes
3. Inside the tray opening, slide the return guide toward the front of the printer until it stops.
Figure 3-38 Slide the return guide
Reinstallation tip: After installing the new rollers, slide the return guide toward the rear of the printer to
prevent paper jams.

4. Release the latch at the end of the rollers (callout 1) by pulling the latch tab away from the shaft, and then
slide the pick, feed, and separation rollers off of the shaft (callout 2) to remove them.
Figure 3-39 Remove rollers
5. When removing the rollers, make sure to leave the white couplers (callout 1) in place. If the couplers
become dislodged, reinstall them as shown in the figure below.
NOTE: The figure shows the pickup assembly removed from the printer to more clearly show the
positions of the couplers and rollers.
Figure 3-40 Coupler locations
Special installation instructions: Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers
▲ After the replacement rollers are installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

vii. Select Tray X Rollers.
viii. Select the tray number for the rollers just replaced.
ix. Select Reset.
instructions.

Multipurpose (MP) tray pickup/reverse/feed roller
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the MP pickup/reverse/feed roller
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the multipurpose (MP) tray pickup/reverse/feed
roller.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Multipurpose (MP) pickup/reverse/feed roller assembly part number
X3A92-67918 HP LaserJet Tray 1 (MP) Roller
Required tools
● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

printer.

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the MP pickup/reverse/feed roller
1. Open the multipurpose (MP) tray. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of
the cover.
NOTE: The plastic tabs on the edges of the cover might require extra pressure to remove.
Figure 3-41 Remove cover

2. Remove the cover shown (B) using a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of the
cover.
Figure 3-42 Remove cover
Note the orientation of the flag.
Figure 3-43 MP tray flag orientation

3. Release the small tab and remove the MP pickup/reverse/feed roller. Use caution and remove slowly to
avoid loosening the parts behind the rollers. If these parts come loose, they might fall into the printer and
will be difficult to retrieve. Note the location of all components.
Figure 3-44 Remove the MP pickup/reverse/feed roller
NOTE: It is recommended to replace all three rollers at the same time.
Special installation instructions: MP pickup/reverse/feed roller

▲ After the replacement rollers are installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:
service access code.
vii. Select Tray X Rollers.
viii. Select Tray 1 Roller Kit.
ix. Select Reset.

instructions.

Flow ADF pickup roller assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the flow ADF pickup roller assembly.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Flow ADF pickup roller assembly part number
X3A83-67917 HP LaserJet Flow ADF Pick and Sep Rollers
Required tools

printer.

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly
1. Open the document feeder top cover.
2. Remove the pickup roller assembly:
▲ Remove four screws (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and one ground wire (callout
3), and then remove the pickup roller assembly.
Figure 3-45 Remove the pickup roller assembly
3. Remove the pickup rollers:
a. Remove four screws and then remove the cover.
Figure 3-46 Remove the pickup roller assembly cover

b. Remove two plastic clips and two bushings, disconnect two springs, and then remove the shaft
coupler.
NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.
Figure 3-47 Remove the pickup roller components

c. Slide the roller shaft and then remove the pickup roller assembly.
Figure 3-49 Pickup roller components-disassembled
Special installation instructions: Flow ADF pickup roller

▲ After the replacement roller is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

vii. Select ADF Pickup Roller.
viii. Select ADF Pickup Roller.
ix. Select Reset.
instructions.

Flow ADF separation roller assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the Flow ADF separation roller assembly.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Flow ADF separation roller assembly part number
X3A83-67917 HP LaserJet Flow ADF Pick and Sep Rollers
Required tools

printer.

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly
1. Slightly lift the input tray, and then remove the separation roller cover.
Figure 3-50 Remove the separation roller cover
2. Remove one plastic clip.
NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.
Figure 3-51 Remove one plastic clip

3. Slide the roller assembly to the front, and then pull up to release the claws from the shaft.
Figure 3-52 Remove the separation roller
Figure 3-53 Remove the separation roller
NOTE: Ensure the sponge washer (circled above) is retained during the removal of the roller assembly–it
may fall off.
Reinstallation tip: Position the spring and shaft before attaching the claws to the shaft.
Special installation instructions: Flow ADF separation roller

▲ After the replacement roller is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

vii. Select ADF Separation (Reverse) Roller.
viii. Select ADF Separation Roller.
ix. Select Reset.
instructions.

Formatter cover
● Introduction
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the formatter cover.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Formatter cover part number
XXXXX Formatter cover
Required tools

printer.

Post service test


ENWW Formatter cover 193

instructions.

Accelerator board
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the accelerator board
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the accelerator board.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Accelerator board part number
X3A62-60001 Accelerator board
Required tools

printer.
ENWW Accelerator board 195

Post service test
Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Step 2: Remove the accelerator board
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
▲ Loosen two screws, retained in plastic clips, on the outside of the formatter cage. Disconnect one
connector, release the plastic locator pin, and then gently lift the accelerator board away from the
formatter by the edges.
NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.

instructions.
ENWW Accelerator board 197

Island of data (IOD)
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the island of data (IOD)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the island of data (IOD).
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Island of data (IOD) part number
X3A92-60002 Island of Data Board
Required tools

printer.

Post service test

Step 2: Remove the island of data (IOD)
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
▲ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the IOD.
ENWW Island of data (IOD) 199

instructions.

Formatter hard disk drive (HDD)
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the hard disk drive (HDD) located on the
formatter board.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Formatter HDD part number
691917-011 Formatter HDD - 320 GB SED
Required tools

printer.
ENWW Formatter hard disk drive (HDD) 201

Post service test


Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)


instructions.
ENWW Formatter hard disk drive (HDD) 203

Formatter
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the accelerator board
● Step 3: Remove the hard-disk drive
● Step 4: Remove the formatter PCA
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the formatter.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Formatter part number
X3A92-60001 Formatter PCA
Required tools

printer.

Post service test


Step 2: Remove the accelerator board

▲ Loosen two screws, retained in plastic clips, on the outside of the formatter cage. Disconnect one
connector, release the plastic locator pin, and then gently lift the accelerator board away from the
formatter by the edges.
NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.
ENWW Formatter 205

Step 3: Remove the hard-disk drive
Step 4: Remove the formatter PCA

▲ Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter board, remove seven screws, and then remove the
formatter PCA.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter and the main PCA at the same time. Replace one component,
turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

instructions.
ENWW Formatter 207

Control panel
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel
● Step 2: Remove the control-panel
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the control panel.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Control panel part number
B5L47-60101 Control panel
Required tools

printer.

Post service test

Verify that the control panel illuminates and displays information while the printer is initializing. Verify control
panel functionality after initialization.
Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel

1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.
Figure 3-59 Remove the document feeder bezel
2. Place the control panel in the upright position.
3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the control-
panel bezel to the edges to release.
CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.
Step 2: Remove the control-panel

ENWW Control panel 209

2. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, and one HDMI connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws on
the control-panel frame.
Figure 3-60 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors
3. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.
Figure 3-61 Remove the USB interconnect cable
4. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control panel.
Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control panel.


instructions.
ENWW Control panel 211

Keyboard (z bundles)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel
● Step 2: Remove the control-panel
● Step 3: Remove the keyboard
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the keyboard.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Keyboard part numbers
B5L47-60102 US English Keyboard Assy
B5L47-60103 UK English Keyboard Assy
Required tools

printer.

Post service test

Type on the keyboard and verify that it is recognized by the control panel.
Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel

Step 2: Remove the control-panel

ENWW Keyboard (z bundles) 213

Step 3: Remove the keyboard

1. Disconnect one FFC.

Figure 3-65 Disconnect one FFC
2. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.
Figure 3-66 Remove the control-panel keyboard

ENWW Keyboard (z bundles) 215

instructions.

Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the IPTU
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU).
instructions.

cable.
blank).
IPTU part number
JC90-01401A Finisher sub-bridge unit
Required tools

printer.
ENWW Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) 217

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the IPTU

▲ Remove one screw, and then slightly lift and slide the IPTU away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 3-67 Remove the IPTU


instructions.
ENWW Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) 219

Replacing the main SVC part

Front top inner cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front top inner cover.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Front top inner cover part number
SAM-JC63-05635A Cover, Middle Left
Required tools

printer.
ENWW Replacing the main SVC part 221

Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 3-68 Remove the front top inner cover

instructions.

Front power cover
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the front power cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front power cover.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Front power cover part number
SAM-JC63-02105A Cover, Middle Right
Required tools

printer.

Post service test

Step 2: Remove the front power cover

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
Figure 3-70 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 3-71 Remove the front power cover

instructions.

Front power switch
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the front power switch
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front power switch.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Front power switch part number
Front power switch
Required tools

printer.

Post service test
Press the power switch and verify that the printer turns on.



Step 3: Remove the front power switch

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the power switch board.

Figure 3-75 Remove one screw and the power switch board
2. Remove two screws, and then remove the power switch button.
Figure 3-76 Remove two screws and the power switch button


instructions.

Output bin
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the output bin
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the output bin.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Output bin part number
SAM-JC95-02101A Cover, Output Exit
Required tools

printer.

Post service test

Step 2: Remove the output bin

▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the output bin away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 3-78 Remove the output bin


instructions.

Top right cover
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the top right cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top right cover.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Top right cover part number
SAM-JC63-04916B Cover, Right Upper
Required tools

printer.

Post service test



Step 3: Remove the top right cover

▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the top right cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 3-82 Remove the top right cover

instructions.

Left cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the left cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the left cover.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Left cover part number
SAM-JC95-02100A Cover, Left
Required tools

printer.

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the left cover

1. Remove the left-dummy cover.
Figure 3-83 Left dummy cover
2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.
Figure 3-84 Remove the left cover


instructions.

Lower rear cover
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the lower rear cover.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Lower rear cover part number
SAM-JC95-02117A Cover, Lower Rear
Required tools

printer.

Post service test

Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover

▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
Figure 3-86 Remove the lower rear cover

instructions.

Upper rear cover
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the upper rear cover.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Upper rear cover part number
SAM-JC63-05633A Cover, Rear Upper
Required tools

printer.

Post service test



Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover

▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 3-89 Remove the upper rear cover


instructions.

Left rear corner cover
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the left rear corner cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the left rear corner cover.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Left rear corner cover part number
SAM-JC63-04837A Cover, Upper Left
Required tools

printer.

Post service test

Step 2: Remove the left rear corner cover

▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the printer to
remove it.
Figure 3-91 Remove the left rear corner cover

instructions.

Right rear cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the right rear cover.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Right rear cover part number
SAM-JC95-02102A Cover, Right Rear
Required tools

printer.

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 3-92 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 3-93 Remove the right rear cover


instructions.

Right door
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the right door
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the right door.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Right door part number
SAM-JC95-02091A Right Door Assembly
Required tools

printer.

Post service test

Step 2: Remove the right door

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 3-97 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 3-98 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 3-99 Remove the right door


instructions.

Paper dust brush
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the toner collection unit
● Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paper dust brush.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Paper dust brush part number
SAM-JC93-01026B Paper Dust Brush
Required tools

printer.

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the toner collection unit

Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush

▲ Remove the paper dust brush.
Figure 3-101 Remove the paper dust brush


instructions.

Front cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the front cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front cover.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Front cover part number
SAM-JC95-02109A Cover, front
Required tools

printer.
Post service test

Step 1: Remove the front cover
▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.
Figure 3-102 Remove the front cover


instructions.

Inner front cover
● Introduction
● Step 7: Remove the inner front cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the inner front cover.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Inner front cover part number
SAM-JC95-02104A Cover, Inner Front
Required tools

printer.
Post service test









Step 7: Remove the inner front cover

1. Remove the toner cartridge.

3. Remove seven screws.
Figure 3-110 Screw locations
4. Remove two screw caps and two screws on the output bin.
Figure 3-111 Remove two screw caps and two screws

5. Remove the inner front cover while lifting the output bin.
Figure 3-112 Remove the inner front cover

instructions.

Front cover open sensor
● Introduction
● Step 7: Remove the front cover open sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the front cover open sensor.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Front cover open sensor part number
SAM-JC93-00466A Front door switch open
Required tools

printer.
Post service test









2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.
Figure 3-119 Remove seven screws

4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 3-120 Remove the inner cover

Step 7: Remove the front cover open sensor
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the front cover open sensor.
Figure 3-121 Remove one screw and the cover open sensor

instructions.

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) cover
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the low voltage power supply (LVPS) cover.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
LVPS cover part number
LVPS cover
Required tools

printer.

Post service test



Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover

▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.
Figure 3-124 Remove the LVPS cover


instructions.

Laser scanner assembly
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the laser scanner assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Laser scanner assembly part number
SAM-JC97-04574A Laser Scanner Unit
Required tools

printer.

Post service test

Step 2: Remove the laser scanner assembly

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 3-127 Remove two screws
2. Pull the laser scanner assembly partially out of the printer, disconnect one flat cable, and then remove the
laser scanner assembly.
Figure 3-128 Remove the laser scanner assembly


instructions.

Developer fan
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the imaging drum
● Step 7: Remove the developer fan
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the developer fan.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Developer fan part number
Developer fan
Required tools

printer.
Post service test

Step 2: Remove the imaging drum





avoid overflow.

counter:

ix. Select Reset.



Step 7: Remove the developer fan


2. Remove one screw, and then rotate the fan duct to the right to remove it.
Figure 3-140 Remove the fan duct
3. Disconnect one connector.

4. Remove two self-tapping screws.
5. Inside the right door, release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 3-143 Release one tab

6. Inside the printer, slide the developer fan shroud toward the front of the printer to remove it.
Figure 3-144 Remove the developer fan shroud
7. Release the wire harness from the retainer, and then release six tabs to open the developer fan duct.
Figure 3-145 Release six tabs

8. Remove the developer fan from the duct.
Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the fan in the duct and install it in the same orientation when
replacing it.
Figure 3-146 Remove the developer fan
Special installation instructions: Developer fan

▲ When reinstalling the developer fan in the fan duct, make sure that the lower embossed arrow on the
fan points away from the duct and the upper embossed arrow points to the right.
Figure 3-147 Install the developer fan
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

instructions.

High voltage power supply (HVPS) board
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the HVPS
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the high voltage power supply (HVPS) board.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
HVPS board part number
SAM-JC44-00240A HVPS 24V
Required tools

printer.

Post service test



Step 3: Remove the HVPS

▲ Disconnect all connectors on the HVPS board. Remove five screws, and then remove the HVPS board.

Figure 3-151 Remove the HVPS board

instructions.

Main board
● Introduction
● Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
● Step 6: Remove the main board
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main board.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Main board part number
SAM-JC92-02922C PCA Main Board
Required tools

printer.
Post service test





remove it.

Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage

1. Remove one screw.
Figure 3-156 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet
metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 3-157 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws
3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.
Figure 3-158 Identify the formatter cables
4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.
Step 6: Remove the main board

1. One of the connectors that must be released above the main board is a spade connector. Press in on the
center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the cable away from the printer to
disconnect it.

IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the
cable away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.
2. Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 1) are zero insertion
force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables. Remove the
MSOK board (callout 2) and install it on the replacement main board. Remove nine screws, and then
remove the main board.
IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main board in
the correct orientation in order for the printer to function. The MSOK chip is extremely difficult to replace if
it is lost or damaged.
Figure 3-160 Remove the main board

Special installation instructions: Main board
a. When reinstalling the MSOK board, note the dashed outline (callout 1) on the main board. When the
MSOK board is installed correctly, it fits within this outline.
Figure 3-161 Position of MSOK board
b. Make sure that the MSOK board is installed correctly on the replacement main board.
Figure 3-162 Install the MSOK board

c. When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF connector
before closing the latch to secure the cable.
Figure 3-163 Install the flat cable

instructions.

Toner supply motor
● Introduction
● Step 6: Remove the main board and cage
● Step 7: Remove the toner supply motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the toner supply motor.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Toner supply drive unit part number
SAM-JC93-01066B Drive, Toner
Required tools

printer.
Post service test





remove it.



Step 6: Remove the main board and cage

disconnect it.

2. Do not disconnect the two hard disk drive (HDD) connectors at the top of the main board (callout 1).
Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 2) are zero insertion
force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables. Release the
cables from six retainers (callout 3).
1
3 2

3. Remove five screws.
Figure 3-173 Remove five screws
4. Lift the main board cage up, and then rotate the lower edge of the cage away from the printer to remove it.
Special installation instructions: Main board and cage

▲ When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF connector
Step 7: Remove the toner supply motor


2. Remove the wire harness from the guides (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2).
Remove two screws, and then remove the toner supply motor.
Figure 3-175 Remove the toner supply motor
2
1

instructions.

CRUM connector
● Introduction
● Step 9: Remove the CRUM connector
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the CRUM connector.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
CRUM connector part number
CRUM connector
Required tools

printer.
Post service test














Step 9: Remove the CRUM connector

1. Inside the left cover, release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2).

2. At the front of the printer, release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the CRUM connector (callout 2).
Figure 3-189 Remove the crum connector
2
1

instructions.

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the LVPS fans
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans part number
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans
Required tools

printer.

Post service test



Step 3: Remove the LVPS fans

1. Disconnect two connectors, release four tabs, and then remove the LVPS fans.
Figure 3-192 Remove the LVPS fans
Special installation instructions: LVPS fans

▲ When installing the replacement fans, make sure that the embossed arrow on the fans point toward
the printer.

Figure 3-193 Correct installation of LVPS fans

instructions.

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 1
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the LVPS board 1
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 1.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
LVPS board 1 part number
SAM-JC44-00091D LVPS 110V Type 4
Required tools

printer.

Post service test




the cover.
Step 4: Remove the LVPS board 1

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.
NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.
▲ Disconnect all connectors. Remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS board 1.

Figure 3-197 Remove LVPS board 1

instructions.

● Introduction
Introduction
instructions.

cable.
blank).
SAM-JC44-00100D LVPS board 2
Required tools

printer.

Post service test




the cover.

energy.
▲ Disconnect all connectors. Remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS board 2.

Figure 3-201 LVPS board 2

instructions.

● Introduction
Introduction
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Required tools

printer.

Post service test





energy.
1. Remove three screws, then remove the shield-LVPS sub upper.

Figure 3-205 Remove the shield-LVPS sub upper
2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS board 3.
Figure 3-206 LVPS board 3


instructions.

Fuser drive board
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the fuser drive board
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the fuser drive board.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Fuser drive board part number
SAM-JC44-00235B Fuser Drive Board 110V
SAM-JC44-00236B Fuser Drive Board 220V
Required tools

printer.

Post service test




the cover.
Step 4: Remove the fuser drive board

energy.

▲ Disconnect twelve connectors and release one retainer on the lower left. Remove four screws, and then
remove the fuser drive board.
Reinstallation tip: Two of the connectors (callout 1) can be mistakenly switched and connected to the
wrong connector on the fuser drive board. If this happens, the printer will not power on. Make sure that the
cables are installed in the correct positions.
Figure 3-210 Fuser drive board

instructions.

Fuser fan
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the LVPS board 3 and cage
● Step 5: Remove the fuser fan
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the fuser fan.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Fuser fan part number
SAM-JC31-00160C Fan Type 6
Required tools

printer.

Post service test




Step 4: Remove the LVPS board 3 and cage

energy.
1. Release the cables from two retainers (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove
three screws.

Figure 3-214 Disconnect connectors and remove screws
1
2
2. Lift the LVPS board and cage slightly away from the printer, and disconnect one connector behind the cage.
Remove the LVPS board and cage.
Special installation instructions: LVPS board and cage

▲ Two of the connectors are the same size and might be installed in the incorrect positions. Make sure
that the two-wire harness (callout 1) is installed on the LVPS board 3 and the three-wire harness
(callout 2) is installed in the fan connector behind the LVPS board 3 cage.

Figure 3-216 LVPS connectors installation
1
2
Step 5: Remove the fuser fan

1. Release the cables (callout 1) from the cable guides (callout 2), and then remove three screws.
Figure 3-217 Release the harness and remove three screws
2. Pull the fuser fan housing slightly away from the printer, and then disconnect one connector.

3. If you are replacing the fuser fan, release five tabs along the edges of the fan housing. If you are removing
the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.
Figure 3-219 Release five tabs
4. If you are replacing the fuser fan, separate the fan housing, and then remove the fuser fan. If you are
removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.
Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the fan in the housing and install the replacement fan in the
same orientation.
Figure 3-220 Remove the fuser fan


instructions.

Main drive unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the imaging drum
● Step 5: Remove the main drive unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main drive unit.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Main drive unit part number
SAM-JC93-01060A Main Drive Assembly
Required tools

printer.

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the imaging drum





avoid overflow.

counter:
ix. Select Reset.



Step 5: Remove the main drive unit


2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release two retainers.
Figure 3-229 Disconnect one connector and release two retainers
3. Remove three screws, and then remove the main drive unit.
NOTE: Remove only those screws marked in blue in the figure below.
Figure 3-230 Remove the main drive unit
Special installation instructions: Main drive unit

▲ If the drum unit doesn't fully install into position after reinstalling the main drive unit, open the right
door and rotate the coupler on the drum shaft (callout 1) a few degrees.

Figure 3-231 Rotate the coupler

instructions.

Inductor unit
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage
● Step 5: Remove the inductor unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the inductor unit.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Inductor unit part number
Inductor unit
Required tools

printer.

Post service test




the cover.
Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage
energy.
▲ Before removing the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage, note the location of four connectors (callout 1)
that do not have to be disconnected. Disconnect the remaining connectors on the LVPS and fuser drive
boards, and then release the cables from five retainers. Remove three screws, and then tilt the top of the
cage out to remove it.

Figure 3-235 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage
Step 5: Remove the inductor unit

▲ Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove two screws, and then remove the inductor unit.
Figure 3-236 Remove the inductor unit


instructions.

Auto closing unit
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage
● Step 5: Remove the auto closing unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the auto closing unit.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Auto closing unit part number
Auto closing unit
Required tools

printer.

Post service test




the cover.
Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage
energy.

Step 5: Remove the auto closing unit

1. Remove Tray 2.
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cassette rail cover.
Figure 3-241 Remove the CST rail cover

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the auto closing unit.
Figure 3-242 Remove the auto closing unit

instructions.

Fuser/output drive unit
● Introduction
● Step 6: Remove the fuser/output drive unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the fuser/output drive unit.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Fuser/output drive unit part number
SAM-JC93-01064A Drive, Fuser Exit
Required tools

printer.
Post service test





energy.
three screws.

1
2


1
2

Figure 3-249 Release the cables and remove three screws


same orientation.
Step 6: Remove the fuser/output drive unit

▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2). Remove four screws, and
then remove the fuser/output drive unit.
Figure 3-253 Remove the fuser/output drive unit
1
2


instructions.

Right door open sensor
● Introduction
● Step 7: Remove the right door open sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the right door open sensor.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Right door open sensor part number
Right door open sensor
Required tools

printer.
Post service test





energy.
three screws.

1
2


1
2



same orientation.

1
2
Step 7: Remove the right door open sensor

▲ Disconnect one connector. Remove one screw, and then remove the right door open sensor.

Figure 3-265 Remove the side door open sensor

instructions.

Right door open switch
● Introduction
● Step 7: Remove the right door open sensor
● Step 8: Remove the right door open switch
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the right door open switch.
instructions.

Right door open switch part number
X Right door open switch
Required tools

printer.

Post service test





energy.
three screws.

1
2


1
2



same orientation.

1
2
Step 7: Remove the right door open sensor

▲ Disconnect one connector. Remove one screw, and then remove the right door open sensor.

Figure 3-277 Remove the side door open sensor
Step 8: Remove the right door open switch

▲ Remove the micro-switch.
Figure 3-278 Remove micro-switch


instructions.

Pickup drive unit 1
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage
● Step 5: Remove the pickup drive unit 1
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace pickup drive unit 1.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Pickup drive unit 1 part number
SAM-JC93-01063A Drive, Pick up
Required tools

printer.

Post service test




the cover.
Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage
energy.

Step 5: Remove the pickup drive unit 1

▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the pickup drive unit 1.
Figure 3-283 Remove pickup drive unit 1


instructions.

Pickup drive unit 2
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the pickup drive unit 2
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace pickup drive unit 2.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Pickup drive unit 2 part number
SAM-JC93-01063A Drive, Pick up
Required tools

printer.

Post service test



Step 3: Remove the pickup drive unit 2

▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the pickup drive unit 2.
Figure 3-286 Remove pickup drive unit 2


instructions.

Feed/MP drive unit
● Introduction
● Step 5: Remove the feed/MP drive unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the feed/MP drive unit.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Feed/MP drive unit part number
SAM-JC93-01062A Drive, Feed
Required tools

printer.

Post service test








Step 5: Remove the feed/MP drive unit

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

2. Remove the cover (callout 1).
Figure 3-296 Remove the cover
3. At the back of the printer, release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2).
Remove three rubberized screws (callout 3), and then remove the feed/MP drive unit.
Figure 3-297 Remove the feed/MP drive unit
Special installation instructions: Feed/MP drive unit

▲ When reinstalling the drive unit, make sure that the gears are aligned with the black couplers
(callout 1).

Figure 3-298 Align the gears with the couplers

instructions.

Registration drive assembly
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the registration drive assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the registration drive assembly.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Registration drive assembly part number
SAM-JC93-01061A Drive, Registration
Required tools

printer.

Post service test




Step 4: Remove the registration drive assembly

▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove three screws
(callout 3), and then remove the registration drive assembly.

Figure 3-302 Remove the registration drive assembly
2
1

instructions.

Toner collection unit (TCU) sensors
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the TCU
● Step 2: Remove the front cover.
● Step 8: Remove the TCU sensors
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the toner collection unit (TCU) sensors.
Click here to view a video of the toner collection unit level sensor procedure.
Click here to view a video of the toner collection unit detect sensor procedure.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
TCU sensor part numbers
SAM-JC93-00492A TCU sensor
SAM-0604-001393 Photo Interrupter

Required tools

printer.
Post service test
Step 1: Remove the TCU

Step 2: Remove the front cover.











Step 8: Remove the TCU sensors

▲ If removing the toner collection unit level sensor [A], remove one screw, disconnect one connector, and
then remove the sensor. If removing the toner collection unit detect sensor [B], disconnect one connector
and remove the sensor.
Figure 3-313 Remove the sensor


instructions.

Reservoir unit
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the laser scanner assembly
● Step 8: Remove the reservoir unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the reservoir unit.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Reservoir unit part number
SAM-JC93-01071A Toner Reservoir
Required tools

printer.
Post service test



avoid overflow.

counter:
ix. Select Reset.


Step 3: Remove the laser scanner assembly


2. Pull the laser scanner assembly partially out of the printer, disconnect one flat cable, and then remove the
laser scanner assembly.
Figure 3-321 Remove the laser scanner assembly







Step 8: Remove the reservoir unit

1. At the front of the printer, remove one screw securing the toner guide.

2. Lift the front of the guide up and slide it slightly toward the rear of the printer (callout 1). Rotate the front
of the guide toward the left side of the printer, and then remove the guide through the left side opening.
Figure 3-329 Remove the toner guide
1
2

3. Disconnect one connector and remove one screw.
Figure 3-330 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw
4. Remove the reservoir assembly.
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the reservoir assembly, install the tab in the back first, and then
rotate the assembly toward the sheet metal wall over the screw opening.
Figure 3-331 Remove the reservoir assembly


instructions.

Auto size sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the auto size sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the auto size sensor.
instructions.

Auto size sensor part number
SAM-JC92-02622A Auto size sensor
Required tools

printer.
Post service test

Step 1: Remove the auto size sensor
▲ Do the following:
● Remove all trays to access the inside of the printer.
● Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 3-332 Remove screws

instructions.

Fuser out sensor (on the right door)
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the fuser out sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the fuser out sensor.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Fuser out sensor part number
Fuser out sensor
Required tools

printer.

Post service test



Step 3: Remove the fuser out sensor

1. Remove the right rear cover.
2. Remove the right door.

3. Remove one screw on the back, top corner of the door.
4. Remove one screw on the front, top corner of the door, and then open the cover-side output.
5. Remove one screw, and then rotate the sensor holder up.

6. Disconnect the sensor connector, and then remove the fuser-out sensor from its holder.

instructions.

Feed 2 sensor (on the right door)
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
● Step 4: Remove the feed 2 sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the feed 2 sensor.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Feed 2 sensor part number
Feed 2 sensor
Required tools

printer.

Post service test



Step 3: Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the lower cable cover [A].
Figure 3-350 Remove three screws and the lower cable cover

5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.
Figure 3-353 Remove the feed guide take away lower
6. Disconnect the sensor connector. Remove one screw, and then remove the feed guide take away upper.
Figure 3-354 Remove the feed guide take away upper

Step 4: Remove the feed 2 sensor
▲ Disconnect the sensor connector, and then remove the feed 2 sensor located on the feed guide take away
upper.
Figure 3-355 Disconnect one connector and remove the feed 2 sensor

instructions.

Multi-purpose (MP) unit (on the right door)
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the MP unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the multi-purpose (MP) unit on the right door.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
MP unit part number
SAM-JC90-01352B Tray 1, Door
Required tools

printer.

Post service test





Step 4: Remove the MP unit

1. Remove one e-ring and bushing.

Figure 3-368 Remove one e-ring and bushing
3. Remove the shaft.
Figure 3-370 Remove the shaft

4. Release and position the PTB assembly as shown in the figure, and then remove three screws.
Figure 3-371 Remove three screws
5. Remove the guide-duplex lower.
Figure 3-372 Remove the guide-duplex lower

9. Disconnect the sensor connector.

10. Release the MP Tray linker.
Figure 3-377 Release the MP Tray linker
11. Release the MP unit.
Figure 3-378 Release the MP unit


instructions.

Multi-purpose (MP) empty sensor
● Introduction
● Step 5: Remove the MP empty sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the multi-purpose (MP) empty sensor.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
MP empty sensor part number
AM-0604-001393 Photo Interrupter
Required tools

printer.

Post service test












Step 5: Remove the MP empty sensor

▲ Disconnect the connector, and then remove the MP empty sensor.
Figure 3-402 Remove the MP empty sensor


instructions.

Multi-purpose (MP) paper length sensor
● Introduction
● Step 5: Remove the MP paper length sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the multi-purpose (MP) paper length sensor.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
MP paper length sensor part number
MP paper length sensor
Required tools

printer.

Post service test












Step 5: Remove the MP paper length sensor

1. Remove the MP Tray upper.
Figure 3-426 Remove the MP Tray upper
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the MP paper length sensor.
Figure 3-427 Remove the MP paper length sensor

instructions.

Multi-purpose (MP) solenoid
● Introduction
● Step 5: Remove the MP solenoid
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the multi-purpose (MP) solenoid.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
MP solenoid part number
SAM-JC33-00029B Solenoid, Tray 1
Required tools

printer.

Post service test












Step 5: Remove the MP solenoid

1. Remove two screws, remove three gears, and then release the MP Tray.
Figure 3-451 Remove two screws and three gears
2. Remove two screws, three e-rings, and three bushings. Remove the bracket-rear.
Figure 3-452 Remove the bracket-rear

3. Remove seven screws, and then remove the frame-base.
4. Remove two screws, and then remove the MP solenoid.


instructions.

Output unit
● Introduction
● Step 7: Remove the output unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the output unit.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Output unit part number
SAM-JC90-01369A Exit
Required tools

printer.
Post service test









remove it.



Step 7: Remove the output unit

1. Disconnect two connectors, and then remove four screws.
Figure 3-467 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws

2. Remove the output unit while pushing the coupler to the right.
Figure 3-468 Remove the output unit

instructions.

Return sensor (on the output unit)
● Introduction
● Step 8: Remove the return sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the return sensor.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Return sensor part number
Required tools

printer.
Post service test









remove it.





Step 8: Remove the return sensor

▲ Locate the sensor on the output unit. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then peel the black
adhesive strip (callout 2) away from the top of the sensor. Release two small tabs (callout 3), and then
remove the sensor.
Figure 3-483 Return sensor
1
3

instructions.

Duplex 1 sensor (on the output unit)
● Introduction
● Step 8: Remove the duplex 1 sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the duplex 1 sensor.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Duplex 1 sensor part number
Required tools

printer.
Post service test









remove it.





Step 8: Remove the duplex 1 sensor

1. Locate the sensor on the output unit. Remove two screws, and then lift the sensor holder up.

2. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the duplex 1 sensor.
Figure 3-499 Remove the duplex 1 sensor

instructions.

Output 1 bin full sensor (on the output unit)
● Introduction
● Step 8: Remove the output 1 bin full sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the output 1 bin full sensor.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Output 1 bin full sensor part number
Required tools

printer.
Post service test









remove it.





Step 8: Remove the output 1 bin full sensor

1. On the output unit, remove one self-tapping screw (callout 1), and then remove the guide (callout 2).
Figure 3-514 Remove one screw and the guide

2. Remove the black adhesive strip from the output unit.
Figure 3-515 Remove the black adhesive strip
3. Release two tabs, and then unhook the sensor from the sheet metal.
Figure 3-516 Release two tabs

5. Rotate the shaft to release the sensor, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 3-518 Remove the output 1 bin full sensor


instructions.

Output gate solenoid (on the output unit)
● Introduction
● Step 8: Remove the output gate solenoid
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the output gate solenoid.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Output gate solenoid part number
SAM-JC33-00031B Solenoid - Lifting
Required tools

printer.
Post service test









remove it.





Step 8: Remove the output gate solenoid

1. Disconnect one connector. Gently pry the black gear from behind to remove it. Remove the e-ring, and then
remove the white gear.
Figure 3-533 On the output unit, disconnect one connector and remove two gears

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the output gate solenoid [A].
Figure 3-534 Output gate solenoid

instructions.

Pickup unit 2
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace pickup unit 2.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Pickup unit 2 part number
SAM-JC93-01365A Main Pick Up 2nd
Required tools

printer.

Post service test



Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2

1. Remove the paper trays.

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.
Figure 3-541 Remove one screw and the cover
3. Remove three screws.

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.
CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely
Figure 3-543 Rotate pickup unit 2
Special installation instructions: Pickup unit 2

▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 3-545 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

instructions.

Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 2)
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the pickup lifting and empty sensor for pickup
unit 2.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Pickup lifting and empty sensor part number
Required tools

printer.

Post service test









Step 4: Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

▲ Disconnect the corresponding sensor connector, and then remove the sensor.
a. [A]: Empty sensor.

b. [B]: Pickup lifting sensor.

instructions.

Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2)
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the prefeed sensor 2
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 2 for pickup unit 2.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Prefeed sensor 2 part number
SAM-0604-001381 Photo interrupter
Required tools

printer.

Post service test








Step 4: Remove the prefeed sensor 2

▲ Open the guide-pickup, and then remove the prefeed sensor 2.
Figure 3-569 Remove prefeed sensor 2


instructions.

Pickup unit 1
● Introduction
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace pickup unit 1.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Pickup unit 1 part number
SAM-JC93-01364A Main Pick Up 1st
Required tools

printer.

Post service test











▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.


instructions.

Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 1)
● Introduction
● Step 5: Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the pickup lifting and empty sensor for pickup
unit 1.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Pickup lifting and empty sensor part number
Required tools

printer.
Post service test













Step 5: Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

▲ Disconnect the corresponding sensor connector, and then remove the sensor.
a. [A]: Empty sensor.

b. [B]: Pickup lifting sensor.
Figure 3-600 Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

instructions.

Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1)
● Introduction
● Step 5: Remove the prefeed sensor 1
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 1 for pickup unit 1.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Prefeed sensor 1 part number
Required tools

printer.

Post service test













Step 5: Remove the prefeed sensor 1

1. Remove five screws, and then remove the bracket.

Figure 3-616 Remove five screws and the bracket.
2. Remove the sensor from its holder.


instructions.

Internal hard disk drive (HDD)
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the HDD
Introduction
This document provides the procedures for removing the 320 GB hard-disk drive installed beneath the rear-exit
cover.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Internal hard disk drive part number
691917-011 HDD 320GB
Required tools

printer.

Post service test



Step 3: Remove the HDD
1. Remove four screws, and then release the HDD cover.
Figure 3-620 Remove the HDD cover
2. Remove four screws, disconnect the HDD cable, and then remove the HDD with its holder.
Figure 3-621 Remove the HDD


instructions.

Registration assembly
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the registration assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the registration assembly.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Registration assembly part number
SAM-JC93-01116A Registration Assembly
Required tools

printer.

Post service test





Step 4: Remove the registration assembly

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

2. Remove the gear cover.
Figure 3-630 Remove the gear cover
3. Release two retainers (callout 1), disconnect one in-line connector (callout 2), and then remove two screws
(callout 3).
Figure 3-631 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

4. Rotate the left side of the registration assembly away from the printer, and then remove it.
Figure 3-632 Remove the registration assembly
Special installation instructions: Registration assembly
a. Install the back, gear side of the shaft into the opening in the sheet metal first.
Figure 3-633 Install the gear side of the shaft

b. Remove the bushing (callout 1) from the end of the front of the shaft.
Figure 3-634 Remove the bushing
c. Install the bushing in the opening in the sheet metal.
NOTE: The bushing is flat along the top and bottom edges. Install the bushing so the flat edges
match the keyed opening in the sheet metal.
Figure 3-635 Install the bushing

d. Install the front of the shaft into the bushing.
Figure 3-636 Install the front of the shaft

instructions.

Registration sensor assembly
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the registration assembly
● Step 5: Remove the registration sensor assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the registration sensor.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
Registration sensor part number
Registration sensor
Required tools

printer.

Post service test






Step 4: Remove the registration assembly

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

2. Remove the gear cover.
Figure 3-645 Remove the gear cover

3. Release two retainers (callout 1), disconnect one in-line connector (callout 2), and then remove two screws
(callout 3).
4. Rotate the left side of the registration assembly away from the printer, and then remove it.
Figure 3-647 Remove the registration assembly
Special installation instructions: Registration assembly
a. Install the back, gear side of the shaft into the opening in the sheet metal first.

Figure 3-648 Install the gear side of the shaft
b. Remove the bushing (callout 1) from the end of the front of the shaft.

c. Install the bushing in the opening in the sheet metal.
NOTE: The bushing is flat along the top and bottom edges. Install the bushing so the flat edges
match the keyed opening in the sheet metal.
d. Install the front of the shaft into the bushing.
Figure 3-651 Install the front of the shaft
Step 5: Remove the registration sensor assembly

1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then release the wire harness
from the cable guide (callout 3).

1
2
2. Remove three self-tapping screws, and then remove the registration sensor assembly.
Figure 3-653 Remove three screws and the registration sensor assembly


instructions.

High voltage terminal
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the drum unit
● Step 7: Remove the main board and cage
● Step 8: Remove the main drive unit
● Step 9: Remove the high voltage terminal
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the high voltage terminal.
instructions.

cable.
blank).
High voltage terminal part number
High voltage terminal
Required tools

printer.
Post service test
Step 1: Remove the drum unit







remove it.



Step 7: Remove the main board and cage

disconnect it.

2. Do not disconnect the two hard disk drive (HDD) connectors at the top of the main board (callout 1).
Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 2) are zero insertion
force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables. Release the
cables from six retainers (callout 3).
1
3 2

3. Remove five screws.
Figure 3-665 Remove five screws
4. Lift the main board cage up, and then rotate the lower edge of the cage away from the printer to remove it.
Special installation instructions: Main board and cage

▲ When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF connector
Step 8: Remove the main drive unit


2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release two retainers.
Figure 3-667 Disconnect one connector and release two retainers
3. Remove three screws, and then remove the main drive unit.
NOTE: Remove only those screws marked in blue in the figure below.
Figure 3-668 Remove the main drive unit
Special installation instructions: Main drive unit

▲ If the drum unit doesn't fully install into position after reinstalling the main drive unit, open the right
door and rotate the coupler on the drum shaft (callout 1) a few degrees.

Figure 3-669 Rotate the coupler
Step 9: Remove the high voltage terminal

1. Disconnect two in-line connectors (callout 1), and then release the cables (callout 2) from the cable guides.
Figure 3-670 Disconnect two connectors and release cables

2. Remove one ground screw.
Figure 3-671 Remove one ground screw
3. Disconnect three connectors on the HVPS board.
Figure 3-672 Disconnect three connectors

4. Open the right door. Remove three screws, and then remove the high voltage terminal.
Figure 3-673 Remove three screws and the high voltage terminal

instructions.

Flow ADF
Flow ADF whole unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the ADF whole unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the flow ADF whole unit assembly.
instructions.

Flow ADF whole unit assembly part number
SAM-JC97-04868A Flow ADF
Required tools

● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
Post service test
ENWW Flow ADF 643

Step 1: Remove the ADF whole unit
1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.
Figure 3-674 Remove document feeder connector cover
2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder harness
from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.
Figure 3-675 Remove the cable choke

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scan joint board. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.
Figure 3-676 Disconnect document feeder harness
4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open to a
full 90°.
IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled
with the same alignment.
Figure 3-677 Alignment marks
ENWW Flow ADF 645

5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.
6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.
Figure 3-679 Release the document feeder
NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.


instructions.
Flow ADF jam access cover

● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover
● Step 3: Remove the document feeder jam access cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the jam access cover assembly.
instructions.

Jam access cover assembly part number
SAM-JC97-04869A Flow ADF - open cover
ENWW Flow ADF 647

Required tools

printer.
Post service test

Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.
Figure 3-680 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws
2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder front cover, and then remove the
document feeder front cover.
Figure 3-681 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
ENWW Flow ADF 649

Figure 3-682 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the document
feeder back cover.
Figure 3-683 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
Step 3: Remove the document feeder jam access cover

1. Disconnect connector at document feeder PCA and route cable out.

2. Disconnect the ground wire.
Figure 3-685 Remove the jam access cover ground wire
ENWW Flow ADF 651

3. Remove one screw (callout 1), remove hinge (pivot) pin, and then remove door arm support (callout 2)
Figure 3-686 Remove the jam access cover door arm support
4. Remove the jam access cover.

instructions.

Flow ADF input tray
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the dampening unit
● Step 4: Remove the pickup and feed unit
● Step 5: Remove the input tray
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the input tray assembly.
instructions.

Input tray assembly part number
SAM-JC97-04658B Input tray assembly
Required tools

printer.
ENWW Flow ADF 653

Post service test


ENWW Flow ADF 655

feeder back cover.
Step 3: Remove the dampening unit

▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the damping unit.

Figure 3-691 Remove the document feeder damping unit
Step 4: Remove the pickup and feed unit

1. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover.
Figure 3-692 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly cover screws
ENWW Flow ADF 657

2. Remove four screws in the sheet-metal roller bracket, rotate the roller assembly over, and then disconnect
two connectors (callout 1). Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly.
Figure 3-693 Remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly
Step 5: Remove the input tray

1. Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector, and then remove cable from guide.
Figure 3-694 Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector
2. Lift the tray from the front, and pivot the tray outward to remove.


instructions.
ENWW Flow ADF 659

Flow ADF contact image sensor (CIS)
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly
● Step 4: Remove the paper path cover
● Step 5: Remove the CIS assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the CIS assembly.
instructions.

CIS assembly part number
SAM-0609-001558 CIS assembly
Required tools

printer.

Post service test
ENWW Flow ADF 661



feeder back cover.
Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

▲ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2, including one ground wire), and then
remove the pickup roller assembly.
ENWW Flow ADF 663

Step 4: Remove the paper path cover

▲ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.
Figure 3-700 Remove the document feeder paper path cover
Step 5: Remove the CIS assembly

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.
Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover for reinstallation; the cover must
reinstalled with the same orientation.

Figure 3-701 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly (callout 2).
Figure 3-702 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin
3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.

ENWW Flow ADF 665

instructions.

Flow ADF front motor
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the front motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the front motor assembly.
instructions.

Front motor assembly part number
SAM-JC31-00177A Motor, step
Required tools

printer.
Post service test
ENWW Flow ADF 667

feeder back cover.
Step 2: Remove the front motor

▲ Remove two screws and disconnect one connector, and then remove the motor.

Figure 3-705 Remove the document feeder front motor
Reinstallation tip:
a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.
b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.
c. Install the tension spring.
d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

ENWW Flow ADF 669

instructions.

Flow ADF rear motors
● Introduction
● Step 1: Identify the document feeder motors
● Step 3: Remove motors 1 and 2
● Step 4: Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors
● Step 5: Remove the exit motor
● Step 6: Remove the feed motor
● Step 7: Remove the REGI motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the rear motor assemblies.
instructions.

Rear motors part numbers
SAM-JC97-04679A Motor 1 - Flow ADF - drive
SAM-JC97-04681A Motor 2 - Flow ADF- drive release pick up
SAM-JC97-04680A Pickup motor
SAM-JC97-04680A Pre_REGI motor
SAM-JC97-04680A Exit motor
SAM-JC97-04680A Feed motor
SAM-JC31-00177A REGI motor
SAM-JC97-04680A
Required tools
ENWW Flow ADF 671

printer.
Post service test

Step 1: Identify the document feeder motors
▲ Use the figure below to locate the motor.
Figure 3-706 Document feeder motors

1 2 3 4
5 6 7
Table 3-1 Document feeder motors
Callout Description
1 Motor 1
2 Motor 2
3 Pickup motor
4 Pre_REGI motor
5 Exit motor
6 Feed motor
7 REGI motor
ENWW Flow ADF 673

feeder back cover.

Step 3: Remove motors 1 and 2
▲ Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.
Figure 3-709 Remove the motor
ENWW Flow ADF 675

Step 4: Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors
1. Loosen the cable guide
2. Disconnect one connector from the motor.
TIP: Remove the connector harness from the cable retainer, and then disconnect the connector.

3. Remove one spring (callout 1), and then loosen (but do not remove) three screws. Slide the motor off the
screws to remove.
Figure 3-711 Pickup motor
Figure 3-712 Pre-REGI motor
4. To reinstall the motor, do the following:
● Reinstall the motor on the motor mounting screws, and then lift the gear belt up to engage the motor
pulley.
● Install the tension spring.
● Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
ENWW Flow ADF 677

Step 5: Remove the exit motor
1. Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the main fan.
Figure 3-713 Remove the main fan
2. Remove the spring (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), loosen three screws, and then remove
the exit motor.
Reinstallation tip:
b. Install the tension spring.
c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount

Step 6: Remove the feed motor
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
2. Remove two screws, and then remove motor.
ENWW Flow ADF 679

Step 7: Remove the REGI motor
1. Remove the rear cover
2. Remove the Pre-REGI motor
3. Disconnect one connector from the motor.
TIP: Remove the connector harness from the cable retainer, and then disconnect the connector.
4. Remove one spring, loosen (do not remove) 3 screws, and then slide the motor off the screws to remove.
Reinstallation tip:
b. Install the tension spring.
c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount

instructions.

Flow ADF PCA fan
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder PCA fan
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder PCA fan assembly.
instructions.

Document feeder PCA fan assembly part number
SAM-JC31-00146A Document feeder PCA fan assembly
Required tools

printer.
Post service test
ENWW Flow ADF 681

feeder back cover.
Step 2: Remove the document feeder PCA fan

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and then release two tabs (callout 2) to remove the fan.

Figure 3-719 Remove the document feeder PCA fan connector
Reinstallation tip: Install the fan with the correct orientation when reinstalling.

instructions.
ENWW Flow ADF 683

Flow ADF contact image sensor (CIS) fan
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder CIS fan
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the CIS fan assembly.
instructions.

CIS fan part number
CIS fan
Required tools

printer.
Post service test

feeder back cover.
Step 2: Remove the document feeder CIS fan

▲ Remove one connector, and then remove two mounting screws to remove the fan.
ENWW Flow ADF 685

Figure 3-722 Remove the document feeder PCA fan

instructions.

Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly
● Step 4: Remove the paper path cover
● Step 5: Remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA assembly.
instructions.

Ultrasonic sensor with PCA assembly part number
Ultrasonic sensor with PCA assembly
Required tools

printer.
ENWW Flow ADF 687

Post service test


ENWW Flow ADF 689

feeder back cover.
Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

▲ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2, including one ground wire), and then
remove the pickup roller assembly.

Step 4: Remove the paper path cover

▲ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.
Figure 3-728 Remove the document feeder paper path cover
Step 5: Remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA

1. Remove the separation roller, and then remove one screw (callout 1).
ENWW Flow ADF 691

2. Remove the pick/feed cover.
Figure 3-730 Remove the pick/feed cover

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the ultrasonic sensor.
Figure 3-731 Remove the ultrasonic sensor

instructions.
White backing
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the white backing
ENWW Flow ADF 693

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the ADF white backing.
instructions.

White backing part number
SAM-JC63-05238A ADF, white foam
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

printer.
Post service test
Step 1: Remove the white backing
White backing
1. Open the document feeder cover.
2. Peel the white backing away to remove.
3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.
4. Replace any damaged or missing velcro tabs by positioning them on the new white backing.

5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.
6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.

instructions.
ENWW Flow ADF 695

Scanner unit (image scanner unit)
Scanner whole unit
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the flow ADF whole unit
● Step 4: Remove the control panel bezel
● Step 5: Remove the control panel
● Step 6: Remove the keyboard (z bundles)
● Step 7: Remove the scanner whole unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the scanner whole unit.
instructions.

Scanner whole unit part number
SAM-JC97-04520C Scanner whole unit part number
Required tools

printer.

Post service test


ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 697

Step 3: Remove the flow ADF whole unit


grounding wire.

full 90°.

Step 4: Remove the control panel bezel

Step 5: Remove the control panel


Step 6: Remove the keyboard (z bundles)

1. Disconnect one FFC.

Figure 3-743 Disconnect one FFC
2. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.
Figure 3-744 Remove the control-panel keyboard
Step 7: Remove the scanner whole unit

1. Remove six screw-caps and six screws. It might be necessary to use leverage near the left hinge and then
pull the cover toward the back.

Figure 3-745 Remove screw-caps and screws and release scan-front cover
2. Remove three screw-caps and three screws. Release the scan-left cover.
Figure 3-746 Release scan-left cover

3. Remove three screw-caps and three screws (callout 1). Release the scan-right cover.
Figure 3-747 Remove scan-right cover
2
1
NOTE: At the front of the scanner, remove the bracket (callout 2) and install it on the new scanner whole
unit.
4. Disconnect the two scan cables and one FFC at the top of the main board.
Figure 3-748 Disconnect scan cables

5. Remove three screws from the left.
6. Remove two screws from the right.
7. Lift up and release the image scanner unit.
Figure 3-751 Lift up and release image scanner unit
NOTE: After reassembly, utilize the target to adjust the scanner location as necessary.

Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the scan bed by lowering the left side first and then lower the right. Align the screw
holes on the right, and then install the screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the lower cover and ensure the cables are routed through the opening for the
control panel and the bracket is properly aligned in the cover.

instructions.

Scan glass
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the scan glass
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the scanner glass.
instructions.

Scanner glass part number
SAM-JC97-04522B Scanner glass part number
Required tools

printer.
Post service test
Step 1: Remove the scan glass

▲ Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scan glass to the right to remove
it.

Figure 3-752 Remove scan glass

instructions.

LED lamp module
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the flow ADF whole unit
● Step 4: Remove the scanner glass
● Step 5: Remove the LED lamp module
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the LED lamp module assembly.
instructions.

LED lamp module assembly part number
SAM-JC97-04521A LED lamp module assembly
Required tools

printer.

Post service test



Step 3: Remove the flow ADF whole unit

grounding wire.
full 90°.

Step 4: Remove the scanner glass

it.


Step 5: Remove the LED lamp module
1. Remove the transparent tape.
Figure 3-762 Remove transparent tape
2. Disconnect the flat cable.
Figure 3-763 Disconnect cable
3. Remove four screws. Release the LED lamp module.
Figure 3-764 Remove screws and release LED lamp module

instructions.

Scanner imaging unit
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the scanner imaging unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the scanner imaging unit assembly.
instructions.

Scanner imaging unit assembly part number
SAM-JC97-04523B Scanner imaging unit assembly
Required tools

printer.
Post service test

it.
Step 2: Remove the scanner imaging unit

1. Remove four screws, and then release the imaging unit cover.
Figure 3-766 Remove screws and release imaging unit cover

2. Disconnect the flat cable.
Figure 3-767 Disconnect flat cable
3. Remove two screws and release the scanner imaging unit.
CAUTION: Do not remove or adjust the other two screws shown as they require factory setting only.
Figure 3-768 Remove screws and release scanner imaging unit


instructions.

Scan joint board
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the document feeder whole unit
● Step 4: Remove the scan joint board
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Scan joint board assembly.
instructions.

Scan joint board assembly part number
SAM-JC92-02964A Flow ADF PCA
Required tools

printer.
Post service test


Step 3: Remove the document feeder whole unit



grounding wire.
full 90°.

Step 4: Remove the scan joint board

1. Remove three screw-caps and three screws. Release the scan-left cover.

Figure 3-777 Release scan-left cover
2. Remove three screw-caps and three screws, and then remove the scan-right cover.
Figure 3-778 Remove scan-right cover
2
1

3. At the top of the scanner, remove three screw caps and three screws.
4. At the back of the scanner, remove three screw caps and three screws, and then remove the scan-rear
cover.
Figure 3-780 Remove three screws and the scanner rear cover

5. Disconnect all harnesses. Remove four screws, and then release the scan joint board.
Figure 3-781 Remove screws and release scan joint board
NOTE: There are two empty connectors.

instructions.

APS sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder whole unit
● Step 3: Remove the APS sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the APS sensor assembly.
instructions.

APS sensor assembly part number
SAM-JC97-04507A APS sensor assembly
Required tools

printer.
Post service test

Step 1: Remove the document feeder whole unit

grounding wire.
full 90°.


it.

Step 3: Remove the APS sensor

1. Remove the joint board cover.
Figure 3-789 Remove joint board cover
Figure 3-790 Remove screw

3. Disconnect the harness.
Figure 3-791 Disconnect harness
4. Remove two screws. Release the APS sensor.
Figure 3-792 Remove screws and release APS sensor


instructions.


Dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the printer right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the printer right door
● Step 3: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF right door.
instructions.

DCF right door part number
SAM-JC90-01387A DCF right door
Required tools

printer.
Post service test
Step 1: Remove the printer right rear cover


Step 2: Remove the printer right door



Step 3: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door

1. Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the lower right cover.

Figure 3-799 Remove the lower right cover
2. Open the DCF right door and slide the hinge pin to the left. Make sure that the pin slides under the tab
(callout 1).
Figure 3-800 Slide the hinge pin

3. Rotate the right edge of the door away from the feeder (callout 1), and then slide the door to the right to
remove it (callout 2).
Figure 3-801 Remove the DCF right door

instructions.

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the DCF rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF motor.
instructions.

DCF motor part number
SAM-JC93-01135A DCF motor
Required tools

printer.
Post service test
Step 1: Remove the DCF rear cover

▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 3-802 Remove the DCF rear cover
Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor

1. Disconnect two connectors, and then open one retainer.
Figure 3-803 Disconnect two connectors and open one retainer

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive unit.
Figure 3-804 Remove the feed drive unit
3. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor.
Figure 3-805 Remove the feed motor


instructions.

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF pickup motor.
instructions.

DCF pickup motor part number
SAM-JC93-01063B DCF pickup motor
Required tools

printer.
Post service test


Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor

▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the DCF pickup motor.
Figure 3-807 Remove the DCF pickup motor

instructions.

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF PCA.
instructions.

DCF PCA part number
SAM-JC92-02738A DCF PCA
Required tools

printer.
Post service test


Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA

▲ Disconnect eight connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the DCF PCA.
Figure 3-809 Remove the DCF PCA


instructions.

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the printer right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the printer right door
● Step 3: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door
● Step 4: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF pickup units.
instructions.

DCF pickup units part numbers
SAM-JC90-01679A First pickup assembly
SAM-JC90-01680A Second pickup assembly
Required tools

printer.
Post service test

Step 1: Remove the printer right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the printer right door



Step 3: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door

1. Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the lower right cover.

Figure 3-816 Remove the lower right cover
2. Open the DCF right door and slide the hinge pin to the left. Make sure that the pin slides under the tab
(callout 1).
Figure 3-817 Slide the hinge pin

3. Rotate the right edge of the door away from the feeder (callout 1), and then slide the door to the right to
remove it (callout 2).
Figure 3-818 Remove the DCF right door
Step 4: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cable cover.
Figure 3-819 Remove two screws and the cable cover

2. Remove five screws, and then remove two brackets.
Figure 3-820 Remove five screws and two brackets
3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness from the cable guide (callout 2).
Remove eight screws (callout 3).
Figure 3-821 Disconnect two connectors and remove eight screws

4. Rotate both pickup units away from the feeder on the left (callout 1). Release the belt (callout 2) that
connects the two units. Slide the pickup units to the left (callout 3) to remove them.
Figure 3-822 Remove the pickup units

instructions.

Bottom high-capacity input (HCI) tray
ENWW Bottom high-capacity input (HCI) tray 761

Bottom HCI tray feed motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the bottom HCI rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor.
instructions.

Bottom HCI tray feed motor part number
SAM-JC31-00177A Bottom HCI tray feed motor
Required tools

printer.
Post service test
Step 1: Remove the bottom HCI rear cover


Figure 3-823 Remove the rear cover
Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor

1. Disconnect two motor connectors, and open the harness clamp.
Figure 3-824 Disconnect two connectors and open the clamp
2. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive unit.
Figure 3-825 Remove the feed drive unit

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor.
Figure 3-826 Remove the feed motor

instructions.

Bottom HCI tray pickup motor
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.
instructions.

Bottom HCI tray pickup motor part number
SAM-JC93-01083A Bottom HCI tray pickup motor
Required tools

printer.
Post service test


Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor

▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.
Figure 3-828 Remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor


instructions.

Bottom HCI tray PCA
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray PCA
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the bottom HCI tray PCA.
instructions.

Bottom HCI tray PCA part number
SAM-JC92-02738B Bottom HCI tray PCA
Required tools

printer.
Post service test


Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray PCA

▲ Disconnect eight connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the bottom HCI tray PCA.
Figure 3-830 Remove the bottom HCI tray PCA


instructions.

Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.
instructions.

Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor part number
SAM-JC31-00109A Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor
Required tools

printer.
Post service test


Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor

▲ Disconnect the connector. Remove three screws, and the remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.
Figure 3-832 Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor

instructions.

Bottom HCI tray shaft motor
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.
instructions.

Bottom HCI tray shaft motor part number
SAM-JC31-00125A Bottom HCI tray shaft motor
Required tools

printer.
Post service test


Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor

▲ Disconnect the connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.
Figure 3-834 Remove the shaft motor

instructions.

Side high capacity input (sHCI)
ENWW Side high capacity input (sHCI) 775

Side HCI rear cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the side HCI rear cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the side HCI rear cover.
instructions.

Side HCI rear cover part number
SAM-JC90-01660A Side HCI rear cover
Required tools

printer.
Post service test
Step 1: Remove the side HCI rear cover

▲ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.

Figure 3-835 Remove the sHCI rear cover

instructions.

Side HCI feed motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the side HCI right cover
● Step 2: Remove the side HCI cable cover
● Step 4: Remove the side HCI feed motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the side HCI feed motor.
instructions.

Side HCI feed motor part number
SAM-JC31-00163A Side HCI feed motor
Required tools

printer.
Post service test

Step 1: Remove the side HCI right cover
▲ Remove seven screw caps and seven screws, and then remove the sHCI right cover.
Figure 3-836 Right sHCI cover
Step 2: Remove the side HCI cable cover

▲ Remove the side HCI cable cover.
Figure 3-837 Remove the sHCI cable cover


Step 4: Remove the side HCI feed motor
1. Disconnect two connectors. Open the cable clamp. Remove three screws, and then remove the Drive-PH
Figure 3-839 Drive PH
2. Remove two screws, and then replace the feed motor.
Figure 3-840 Feed motor


instructions.

Side HCI pickup motor
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the side HCI pickup motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the side HCI pickup motor.
instructions.

Side HCI pickup motor part number
SAM-JC93-01083A Side HCI pickup motor
Required tools

printer.
Post service test




Step 4: Remove the side HCI pickup motor
▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and then replace the pickup motor.
Figure 3-844 Pickup motor

instructions.

Side HCI PCA
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the side HCI PCA
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the side HCI PCA.
instructions.

Side HCI PCA part number
Side HCI PCA
Required tools

printer.
Post service test




Step 4: Remove the side HCI PCA
▲ Disconnect all connectors. Remove three screws, and replace the sHCI PCA.
Figure 3-848 sHCI PCA

instructions.

Side HCI lift-up motor
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the side HCI lift-up motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the side HCI lift-up motor.
instructions.

Side HCI lift-up motor part number
SAM-JC31-00109A Side HCI lift-up motor
Required tools

printer.
Post service test




Step 4: Remove the side HCI lift-up motor
▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then replace the sHCI lift-up motor.
Figure 3-852 sHCI lift-up motor

instructions.

4 Parts and diagrams
● For additional service and support information
● Order parts, accessories, and supplies
● How to use the parts list and diagrams
● Main parts
● High capacity input tray (HCI)
● High capacity input tray side unit (sHCI)
● Finishers
● Inner finisher
● Alphabetical parts list
● Numerical parts list
ENWW 791
For additional service and support information
HP service personnel, go to the Service Access Work Bench (SAW) at http://h41302.www4.hp.com/km/saw/
home.do.
Channel partners, go to HP Channel Services Network (CSN) at https://h30125.www3.hp.com/hpcsn.
● To access HP PartSurfer information from any mobile device, go to http://partsurfermobile.hp.com/ or scan

the Quick Response (QR) code below.
● Install and configure
● Printer specifications
● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting
● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues
● Remove and replace part instructions and videos
● Service advisories
● Warranty and regulatory information
792 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Order parts, accessories, and supplies
Ordering
Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply
Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.hp.com/buy/parts
or
partsurfer.hp.com
Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported Web browser on your computer, enter the printer IP
address or host name in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to the HP
SureSupply Web site, which provides options for purchasing Original HP supplies.
Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the diagrams in this chapter can be ordered. Refer to the table following the
diagram or the parts lists at the end of this chapter to determine if a part is orderable.
Related documentation and software

HP service personnel, go to the Service Access Work Bench (SAW) at http://h41302.www4.hp.com/km/saw/
home.do.
Channel partners, go to HP Channel Services Network (CSN) at www.hp.com/partners/csn.
How to use the parts list and diagrams

The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the printer and their component parts. A parts list
table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. Each table lists the item number, the associated part
number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a field replacement unit
(FRU).
NOTE: In this manual, the abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components
described as a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and
sensors.
ENWW Order parts, accessories, and supplies 793

Main parts
Main assembly 1
Figure 4-1 Main assembly

Table 4-1 Main assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Cassette SAM-JC90-01610A 1
3 Cover SAM-JC95-02098A 1
5 HVPS SAM-JC44-00241A 1
6 Laser scanner assembly SAM-JC97-04574A 1
7 HDD bracket assembly frame SAM-JC93-01239B 1
7 HDD SAM-JC59-00036A 1
10 Cartridge, developer unit SAM-JC96-11599A 1
11 Cartridge, TCU SAM-JC96-11638A 1
12 Frame holder dust assembly, TF SAM-JC93-01026B 1
15 Image scanner SAM-JC97-04520C 1
16 Sponge white sheet SAM-JC63-05238A 1
17 ADF e-duplex SAM-JC97-04662A 1
18 Output SAM-JC90–01369A 1
18-1 Output 2 SAM-JC90-01373A 1
18–2 Output 1 SAM-JC90-01370A 1
19 Fuser 220V SAM-JC91-01194A 1
19 Fuser assembly 110V SAM-JC91-01195A 1
20 Frame main pickup 1 SAM-JC93-01096A 1
21 Frame main pickup 2 SAM-JC93-01104A 1
22 Right door mono SAM-JC95-01987A 1
23 Drive pickup SAM-JC93-01063A 2
24 Drive main, mono SAM-JC93-01060A 1
25 Drive, toner mono SAM-JC93-01066B 1
26 Drive registration assembly SAM-JC93-01061A 1
27 Drive, feed SAM-JC93-01062A 1
28 Drive fuser, output SAM-JC93-01064A 1
29 Fuser drive board 220V SAM-JC44-00236B 1
29 Fuser drive board 110V SAM-JC44-00235B 1
30 LVPS (SMPS), V2 SAM-JC44-00100D 1
30 LVPS (SMPS), 220v type 3 SAM-JC44-00223B 1
30 LVPS (SMPS), 110v type 3 SAM-JC44-00222B 1
ENWW Main parts 795

Main assembly 2
Figure 4-2 Main assembly 2

Table 4-2 Main assembly 2
31 LVPS (SMPS), 220V type 5H SAM-JC44-00250A 1
31 LVPS (SMPS), 110V type 5H SAM-JC44-00249A 1
35 Fan, type 6 SAM-JC31-00160C 1
38 LVPS (SMPS), 110V type 4 SAM-JC44-00091D 1
37 Reservoir SAM-JC93-01071A 1
43 Tray heaters SAM-JC93-01181A 1
ENWW Main parts 797

Output
Figure 4-3 Output

Table 4-3 Output
1-1 Output, guide upper SAM-JC90-01371A 1
1-1-2 Actuator, F_D full output SAM-JC66-04469A 1
1-2 Output, guide lower SAM-JC90-01372A 1
2-1 Output, upper 2 SAM-JC90-01374A 1
2-1-1 Roller feed, output 2 SAM-JC66-04653A 1
2-2 Output, lower 2 SAM-JC90-01375A 1
3-1 Drive, motor step SAM-JC93-00802A 2
3-2 Solenoid, lifting SAM-JC33-00031B 1
3-5 Photo, interrupter SAM-0604-001393 1
ENWW Main parts 799

First cassette
Figure 4-4 First cassette

Table 4-4 First cassette
ENWW Main parts 801

Second cassette
Figure 4-5 Second cassette

Table 4-5 Second cassette
ENWW Main parts 803

Main frame assembly
Figure 4-6 Main assembly frame

Table 4-6 Main assembly frame
1 Main frame registration assebly SAM-JC93-01116A 1
6 Frame sub, rear bottom SAM-JC93-01370A 2
13-1 Frame main, humidity sensor SAM-JC93-00486A 1
14-1 Frame main, TCU sensor SAM-JC93-00492A 1
14-3 Phone, interrupter SAM-0604-001393 1
15 Front door switch open SAM-JC93-00466A 1
ENWW Main parts 805

Main frame registration
Figure 4-7 Main frame registration assembly

Table 4-7 Main frame registration assembly
3 Registration assembly, harness SAM-JC39-02204A 1
4 Photo, interrupter SAM-0604-001381 1
ENWW Main parts 807

Drive system
Figure 4-8 Drive system

Table 4-8 Drive system
1-1 BLDC Motor, 38w SAM-JC31-00075C 1
1-2 Main drive, common mono SAM-JC93-01049A 1
2-1 Motor circuit, step SAM-JC31-00110A 1
3-1 Motor BLDC SAM-JC31-00123B 1
3-3 Belt timing gear SAM-6602-001581 1
4-1 Motor step 1P SAM-JC31-00132A 1
4-2 Electric clutch SAM-JC31-00037A 1
4-3 Belt timing gear SAM-6602-001730 1
ENWW Main parts 809

Main frame pickup 1 and 2
Figure 4-9 Frame main pickup 1 and 2

Table 4-9 Frame main pickup 1 and 2
ENWW Main parts 811

Main frame pickup
Figure 4-10 Frame main pickup

Table 4-10 Frame main pickup
3 Roller feed SAM-JC66-04625A 1
5 Frame main, pickup roller SAM-JC93-01092A 3
6 Coupler, torque limiter SAM-JC67-00455A 1
ENWW Main parts 813

Cover
Figure 4-11 Cover

Table 4-11 Cover
2 Right cover, middle SAM-JC95-02105A 1
3 Front cover SAM-JC95-02103A 1
4 Inner cover SAM-JC95-02104A 1
5 Front cover, lower SAM-JC63-04861B 1
8 Right cover, front SAM-JC63-04847B 1
9 Right cover, rear SAM-JC63-02102A 1
10 Right cover, upper SAM-JC63-04846B 1
11 Scan cover, right SAM-JC63-05571A 1
13 Rear cover SAM-JC95-02117A 1
14 Rear cover, upper SAM-JC63-05633A 1
16 Output cover, rear SAM-JC63-04840B 1
17 Scan cover, rear SAM-JC63-04859C 1
18 Rear cover, dummy SAM-JC63-04863B 1
20 Output cover SAM-JC95-02101A 1
21 Left cover, upper SAM-JC63-05638A 1
22 Left cover SAM-JC95-02100A 1
23 Left cover, top SAM-JC63-04862B 1
24 Scan cover, left SAM-JC63-05587A 1
25 Cover SAM-JC95-02106A 1
26 Scan cover, front SAM-JC95-02118A 1
ENWW Main parts 815

Right door
Figure 4-12 Right door

Table 4-12 Right door
1 MP SAM-JC90-01352B 1
2 Front cover, mp SAM-JC63-04910B 1
3 Cover, dummy sHCI SAM-JC63-04918B 1
4 Side cover SAM-JC63-04920B 1
5 Side cover, upper SAM-JC63-04916B 1
8 Side cover, link SAM-JC95-01970A 1
9 Side link SAM-JC66-04400A 1
11 Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01085A 1
12 Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-001730 3
14 Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07372A 1
15 Roller, feed-duplex 1 SAM-JC66-04628A 1
24 Roller, feed-duplex 2 SAM-JC66-04629A 1
28 Link lever, d SAM-JC66-04398A 1
29 Side locker SAM-JC64-00710A 1
ENWW Main parts 817

MP tray
Figure 4-13 MP tray

Table 4-13 MP tray
1 MP sub-tray SAM-JC90-01357B 1
4 MP feed guide SAM-JC90-01353A 1
10 Pickup roller, main frame SAM-JC93-00540B 3
11 MP bracket, pickup SAM-JC90-01355A 1
11-1 MP solenoid SAM-JC33-00029B 1
11-4 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604–001393 1
11-5 Actuator lever, empty SAM-JC66-04459A 1
ENWW Main parts 819

Right door guide
Figure 4-14 Right door guide

Table 4-14 Right door guide
0 Side cover guide SAM-JC95-01969A 1
2 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001393 1
3 Spring, ts SAM-6107-001737 1
4 Actuator lever, dup SAM-JC66-04405A 1
6 Spring, cs SAM-6107-001731 4
7 Idle roller, rubber SAM-JC66-02289B 4
8 Feed guide SAM-JC61-06988A 1
ENWW Main parts 821

Right door output and takeaway
Figure 4-15 Right door output and takeaway

Table 4-15 Right door output and takeaway
1 Side cover, output SAM-JC95-01968A 1
1-2 Spring, ts SAM-6107-001737 1
1-3 Actuator lever, fuser out SAM-JC66-04406A 1
2 Side cover, takeaway SAM-JC95-01972A 1
2-2 Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001490 1
ENWW Main parts 823

PTB transfer
Figure 4-16 PTB transfer

Table 4-16 PTB transfer
0 PTB transfer SAM-JC93-01117A 1
1 Cartridge sub-cover, rear SAM-JC96-09859A 1
2 Cartridge sub-cleaning blade SAM-JC96-09862A 1
3 Cartridge sub-cover, front SAM-JC96-09861A 1
5 Cartridge sub-guide, upper SAM-JC96-09860A 1
6 Cartridge sub-belt PTB SAM-JC96-09863A 1
ENWW Main parts 825

Flow ADF
Figure 4-17 Flow ADF (z models)

Table 4-17 Flow ADF
2 Flow ADF pickup, upper SAM-JC97-04872A 1
2 Flow ADF pickup, upper SAM-JC97-04646B 1
3 Link cover, open SAM-JC66-02270A 1
5 Flow ADF, front cover SAM-JC97-04881A 1
6 Flow ADF, dummy front SAM-JC97-04879A 1
8 Flow ADF, damper SAM-JC97-04692A 1
9 Flow ADF, bottom cover SAM-JC97-04880A 1
10 Flow ADF, main frame SAM-JC97-04883A 1
10 Flow ADF, main frame sGX (dn models only) SAM-JC97-04882A 1
13 Rear cover SAM-JC63-05566A 1
ENWW Main parts 827

Flow ADF open cover
Figure 4-18 Flow ADF open cover (z models)

Table 4-18 Flow ADF open cover
0 Flow ADF cover, open SAM-JC97-04869A 1
2 Flow ADF cover, open lower SAM-JC97-04696B 1
2-5-1 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001502 4
ENWW Main parts 829

Flow ADF pickup roller assembly
Figure 4-19 Flow ADF pickup roller assembly

Table 4-19 Flow ADF pickup roller assembly
2-1 Flow ADF pickup, sub SAM-JC97-04650A 1
2-5 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001502 1
ENWW Main parts 831

Flow ADF stacker
Figure 4-20 Flow ADF stacker

Table 4-20 Flow ADF stacker
0 Flow ADF stacker SAM-JC97-04658B 1
6 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604–001393 1
ENWW Main parts 833

Flow ADF main
Figure 4-21 Flow ADF main frame (z models)

Table 4-21 Flow ADF main
1-1 Flow ADF, housing separation roller SAM-JC97-04661A 1
1-2 Flow ADF, separation cover SAM-JC97-04652A 1
5 Flow ADF, scan in lower SAM-JC97-04656B 1
7 Contact image sensor SAM-0609-001558 1
8 Flow ADF, pickup release drive SAM-JC97-04681A 1
11 Flow ADF, PCA high SAM-JC92-02964A 1
12 Flow ADF, feed drive motor SAM-JC97-04680A 4
13 Flow ADF, hinge l SAM-JC97-04640A 1
14 Flow ADF, hinge r SAM-JC97-04641A 1
16 Fan motor housing SAM-JC61-07694A 1
17 Fan, dc SAM-JC31-00168A 1
19 Flow ADF, lift drive SAM-JC97-04679A 1
20 Step motor, ip SAM-JC31-00177A 1
21 Fan SAM-JC31-00146A 1
23 Flow ADF, exterior SAM-JC97-04668B 1
26 Flow ADF, white simplex roller SAM-JC97-04687A 1
27 Flow ADF, scan out SAM-JC97-04830A 1
29 Flow ADF, release drive scan SAM-JC97-04682A 1
ENWW Main parts 835

Flow ADF image scanner
Figure 4-22 Flow ADF image scanner

Table 4-22 Flow ADF image scanner
3 Tempered scan glass SAM-JC01-00101A 1
4 Image scanner, open sensor SAM-JC97-04516A 1
6 Image scanner, lower SAM-JC97-04515A 1
ENWW Main parts 837

Flow ADF image scanner, lower
Figure 4-23 Flow ADF image scanner, lower

Table 4-23 Flow ADF image scanner, lower
4 Image scanner SAM-JC97-04523B 1
ENWW Main parts 839

Reservoir
Figure 4-24 Reservoir

Table 4-24 Reservoir
0 Frame reservoir SAM-JC93-01071A 1
2 Reservoir drive SAM-JC93-01067A 1
5 Agitator paddle, res SAM-JC66-04311A 1
6 Spring, cs SAM-6107-002599 1
ENWW Main parts 841

DCF main
Figure 4-25 DCF main

Table 4-25 DCF main
1 Machinery, fastener screw SAM-JC60-00078A 2
2 DCF, sub-takeaway SAM-JC90-01649A 1
3 Hex screw 6009-001665 19
4 Feed drive opt SAM-JC93-01135A 1
5 Pickup drive SAM-JC93-01063B 2
6 Cassette, fifth SAM-JC90-01652 1
7 Cassette, fourth SAM-JC90-01654 1
8 DCF second pickup SAM-JC90-01680 1
9 DCF first pickup SAM-JC90-01679 1
14 DCF, sub-auto closing SAM-JC90-01677 1
1-2-2 Pick rollers 1 SAM-JC93-0192A 3
1-2-3 Photo-interrupter1 SAM-0604-001490 1
1-2-21 Feed roller1 SAM-JC66-04607A 1
1-2-13 Clutch one way1 SAM-JC66-00977A 1
1-2-24 Feed roller opt1 SAM-JC66-04670A 1
1-2-15 Coupler1 SAM-JC67-00455A 1

1 These parts do not appear in the exploded diagram, but are available for the dual cassette feeder.

DCF frame
Figure 4-26 DCF frame

Table 4-26 DCF frame
1 Frame, left cst rail assembly SAM-JC93-01044A 2
2 Frame, right cst rail assembly SAM-JC93-01045A 2
6 DCF sub-takeaway interlock SAM-JC90-01385A 1
14 Caster SAM-6109-001138 4
15 DCF guide adjust SAM-JC61-04871A 4
18 DCF PCA SAM-JC92-02738A 1
23 DCF, main harness SAM-JC39-02276A 1
25 DCF, sub harness SAM-JC39-02278A 1
30 DCF, t1mot harness SAM-JC39-02268A 1

DCF rear frame
Figure 4-27 DCF rear frame

Table 4-27 DCF rear frame
1 Ground plate SAM-JC61-03002A 2
6 Main frame rear auto-size holder SAM-JC93-00018A 2
6-2 PCA, paper size sensor SAM-JC92-02622A 2

Opt feed drive
Figure 4-28 Opt feed drive

Table 4-28 Opt feed drive
0 Opt feed drive SAM-JC93-01135A 1
8 Hex screw 6009-001665 1

DCF second pickup
Figure 4-29 DCF second pickup

Table 4-29 DCF second pickup
4 E-ring SAM-6044-000125 6
8 Clutch one way SAM-JC66-00977A 4
11 Sheet sensor SAM-JC63-03776A 2
13 Frame, main pickup roller SAM-JC93-01092A 3
16 Screw, tap type SAM-6003–00269 4
20 Bush-6, dl SAM-JC61-00884A 2
23 Opt feed roller SAM-JC66-04607A 1

High capacity input tray (HCI)
HCI main
Figure 4-30 HCI main

Table 4-30 HCI main
1 Tray cover SAM-JC63-04797B 1
2 Feed drive, HCI SAM-JC63-04797B 1
3 Pickup drive SAM-JC90-01115A 1
4 Lift drive, shift SAM-JC93-01118A 1
5 HCI sub-takeaway SAM-JC90-01646A 1
6 HCI, cassette SAM-JC90-01642A 1
7 HCI, main pickup SAM-JC93-01322B 1
8 Drive takeaway roller SAM-JC93-01119A 1
10 HCI, sub-auto closer SAM-JC90-01382A 1

HCI drive
Figure 4-31 HCI drive

Table 4-31 HCI drive
1-1 Motor step, ip SAM-JC31-00177A 1
1-2 Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-003670 1
2 Pickup drive SAM-JC93-01115A 1
2-1 Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01083A 1
3-1 Motor shift gear SAM-JC31-00125A 1
3-2 Motor gear SAM-JC31-00109A 1

HCI cassette
Figure 4-32 HCI cassette

Table 4-32 HCI cassette
0 HCI cassette SAM-JC90-01642A 1
2 Connector holder, scf SAM-JC61-01742A 1
14 Spring, etc torsion doc (cc2-f) SAM-JC61-00076A 1
29 Cassette guide rail SAM-JC61-07471A 1

HCI frame
Figure 4-33 HCI frame

Table 4-33 HCI frame
1 Idle roller, cst SAM-JC61-03331A 2
6 Adjust guide, DCF SAM-JC61-04871A 4
7 Caster SAM-6109-001138 4
13 HCI PCA SAM-JC92-02738B 1
14 Harness, sub if HCI SAM-JC39-02285A 1
15 Harness, heater HCI SAM-JC39-02284A 1
16 Harness, main if HCI SAM-JC39-02283A 1
19 Harness, inner tray HCI SAM-JC39-02286A 1
20 Harness, mot HCI SAM-JC39-02279A 1

HCI main pickup
Figure 4-34 HCI main pickup

Table 4-34 HCI main pickup
0 HCI main SAM-JC93-01139A 1
5 Pickup roller SAM-JC93-01091A 3
11 Feed roller SAM-JC66-04607A 1
16 Bush-6, dl SAM-JC61-00884A 1
28 Belt SAM-JC66-04281A 1

High capacity input tray side unit (sHCI)
sHCI main 1
Figure 4-35 sHCI main 1

Table 4-35 sHCI main 1
1 Left cover SAM-JC63-04797B 1
2 Screw cap SAM-JC67-00711A 3
3 Pickup cover SAM-JC63-04798B 1
4 Rear cover, sHCI SAM-JC90-01660A 1
5 Link door SAM-JC66–04279A 2
6 Link holder, hinge r SAM-JC61-06568A 1
7 Link door, rear 2 SAM-JC66-04277A 1
15 Link door, front 2 SAM-JC66-04278A 1
16 Link holder, hinge f SAM-JC61-06567A 1
ENWW High capacity input tray side unit (sHCI) 863

sHCI main 3

8-1 Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-001730 1
8-3 sHCI, feed pulley gear SAM-JC66-04295A 1
8-5 Step motor, ip SAM-JC31-00163A 1
8-6 sHCI drive gear SAM-JC66-04294A 1
9-1 Gear motor SAM-JC31-00109A 1
10 sHCI, mot harness SAM-JC39-02287A 1

sHCI main 5

9 Actuator SAM-JC66-04290A 1
15 sHCI, connect sensor harness SAM-JC39-02291A 1
16 sHCI, plow harness SAM-JC39-02288A 1

sHCI main 6

13 sHCI, plow harness SAM-JC39-02288A 1

Pickup cover unit
Figure 4-39 Pickup cover unit

Table 4-39 Pickup cover unit
9 Clutch, one way SAM-JC66-00977A 2
10 Idle holder, one way SAM-JC61-01288A 1
14 Machine screw SAM-6001-002716 2
16 Pickup cover lever SAM-JC63-04799A 1
17 Bush-6, dl SAM-JC61-00884A 2
25 Photo-interrupter SAM-0604–001393 2
26 Actuator, empty pickup SAM-JC66-04276A 1

sHCI frame
Figure 4-40 sHCI frame

Table 4-40 sHCI frame
11 Frame latch, rear sensor assembly SAM-JC93-01124A 1
15 Frame interlock sHCI assemlby SAM-JC93-01123A 1

Finishers
Booklet finisher
Figure 4-41 Booklet finisher

Table 4-41 Booklet finisher
3 Caster cover SAM-JC63-04985B 1
4 Cover, front SAM-JC63-04986B 1
5 Cover-f, lower SAM-JC63-04987B 1
6 Cover, rear SAM-JC63-04988B 1
7 Cover-t, tray 2 SAM-JC63-04996B 1
8 Cover-m, tray SAM-JC63-05002B 1
9 Cover-s, tray SAM-JC63-05003B 2
13 Finisher sub-booklet unit SAM-JC90-01416A 1
17 Finisher sub-top door SAM-JC90-01445B 1
18 Finisher sub-top cover SAM-JC90-01446B 1
20 Finisher sub-cover f bm SAM-JC90-01478A 1
ENWW Finishers 875

Mainline finisher 1
Figure 4-42 Mainline finisher 1

Table 4-42 Mainline finisher 1
4 Finisher sub-ejector unit SAM-JC90-01409A 1
5 Roller, main-feed entrance SAM-JC66-04722A 1
12 Bearing ball SAM-6601-001478 6
13 Rail SAM-6102-003369 2
16 Finisher sub-right jam SAM-JC90-01457A 1
19 Finisher sub-alignment rear SAM-JC90-01465A 1
20 Finisher sub-alignment front SAM-JC90-01464A 1
ENWW Finishers 877

Mainline finisher 2

2 Roller, main-feed output SAM-JC66-04726A 1
3 Roller, top-feed mid output SAM-JC66-04725A 1
4 Roller, mid-feed output SAM-JC66-04724A 1
5 Roller, output-feed bm SAM-JC66-04723A 1
6 Spring, es SAM-JC61-07414A 2
9 Bush, 8/5 SAM-JC61-00426A 2
12 Main-brush, output SAM-JC67-00817A 1
13 Finisher sub-trans buff SAM-JC90-01456A 1
14 Finisher sub-top jam SAM-JC90-01455A 1
ENWW Finishers 879

Mainline finisher 3

2 Finisher sub-clutch div SAM-JC90-01474A 1
4 Finisher sub-end stopper SAM-JC90-01466A 1
5 Finisher sub-clutch drive SAM-JC90-01404A 1
6 Roller, top-feed output SAM-JC66-04727A 1
12 Gear, buffer SAM-JC66-04602A 1
17 Actuator, pusher SAM-JC66-04526A 1
18 Cover-t, tray SAM-JC63-04995B 1
19 Top-seal, guide SAM-JC62-01328A 1
22 Guide, pusher SAM-JC61-07206A 1
25 Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003649 1
36 Finisher sub-hb mtr SAM-JC90-01459A 2
37 Finisher sub-ef mtr SAM-JC90-01467A 1
38 Finisher sub-drv buff SAM-JC90-01453A 1
39 Finisher sub-div cam SAM-JC90-01458A 1
43 Solenoid SAM-JC90-01675A 1
44 Motor SAM-JC90-01673A 1
ENWW Finishers 881

Mainline finisher 4

2 Finisher sub-staple unit SAM-JC90-01412A 1
8 Actuator-o, staple SAM-JC66-04528A 1
9 Roller, click-feed SAM-JC66-04523A 1
10 Ground-c, safety SAM-JC63-04984A 1
17 Safety guide SAM-JC61-07192A 1
18 Guide, com ceil SAM-JC61-07189A 1
23 Frame mount SAM-JC61-06663A 1
26 Top-brush output SAM-JC67-00818A 1
27 Compiler-brush, ceiling front SAM-JC67-00820A 1
28 Compiler-brush, ceiling rear SAM-JC67-00819A 1
29 Finisher sub-stk mtr SAM-JC90-01415A 1
31 Finisher sub-scu mtr SAM-JC90-01414A 1
ENWW Finishers 883

Mainline finisher 5

7 Finisher sub-booklet unit SAM-JC90-01416A 1
12 Front cover SAM-JC63-04986B 1
13 Shaft, hinge-door SAM-JC66-04767A 2
14 Cover-f, lower SAM-JC63-04987B 1
15 Caster cover SAM-JC63-04985B 1
16 Rear cover SAM-JC63-04988B 1
17 Finisher sub-tray bm unit SAM-JC90-01417B 1
20 Finisher sub-regist guide SAM-JC90-01448B 1
ENWW Finishers 885

Mainline finisher 6

3 Cover-s, tray SAM-JC63-05003B 2
4 Cover-m, tray SAM-JC63-05002B 1
5 Cover-t, tray 2 SAM-JC63-04996B 1
ENWW Finishers 887

Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold output
Figure 4-48 Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold output

Table 4-48 Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold output
1 Finisher sub-3 fold mtr SAM-JC90-01396A 1
1-2 Gear, double SAM-JC66-04579A 1
1-4 E-ring SAM-6044-000125 2
1-5 Screw, machine SAM-6001-000130 4
1-7 Bush-6, d SAM-JC61-00423A 1
3 Finisher sub-curl pawl SAM-JC90-01398A 1
4 Finisher sub-3 fold output SAM-JC90-01399A 1
4-5 C-ring SAM-6044-000159 1
ENWW Finishers 889

Low output, hb motor, and top guide
Figure 4-49 Low output, hb motor, and top guide

Table 4-49 Low output, hb motor, and top guide
1 Finisher sub-low output SAM-JC90-01400A 1
1-2 Roller, output-3 fold SAM-JC66-04744A 1
1-3 Roller, feed-fold output SAM-JC66-04721A 1
1-7 Bush, 8/5 SAM-JC61-00426A 4
1-8 E-ring SAM-6044-000129 2
2-2 Motor, step ip SAM-JC31-00163B 2
2-3 Cable clamp SAM-6502-001131 1
3 Finisher sub-guide top SAM-JC90-01406A 1
3-3 Spring, es SAM-JC61-07431A 2
ENWW Finishers 891

SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide
Figure 4-50 SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide

Table 4-50 SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide
1 Finisher sub-scu motor SAM-JC90-01414A 1
1-2 Gear-db, gear SAM-JC66-04604A 1
1-5 Cable clamp SAM-6502-001131 1
1-6 E-ring SAM-6044–000125 2
2 Finisher sub-stk motor SAM-JC90-01415A 1
2-1 Cartridge, ICT-PIN SAM-JC70-40542A 1
2-2 Stacker, CSP-worm SAM-JC81-07637A 1
2-9 Motor, DC-stacker SAM-JC31-00178A 1
2-11 Bearing ball SAM-6601-001478 3
3 Finisher sub-entrance guide SAM-JC90-01424A 1
3-1 Bush, D6/L4 SAM-JC61-02372A 2
3-3 Guide-l, entrance SAM-JC61-07247A 1
3-11 Actuator, entrance feed SAM-JC66-04520A 1
3-13 Actuator, te-press1 SAM-JC66-04644A 1
ENWW Finishers 893

Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor
Figure 4-51 Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor

Table 4-51 Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor
1-2 Driver motor, step SAM-JC93-01152A 1
2 Finisher sub-low paddle SAM-JC90-01429A 1
2-1 Rooler, feed-lower bm SAM-JC66-04719A 8
2-3 Paddle holder SAM-JC61-07225A 4
ENWW Finishers 895

Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam
Figure 4-52 Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam

Table 4-52 Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam
2 Finisher sub-top lower SAM-JC90-01454A 1
2-1 Actuator, top-output SAM-JC66-04525A 1
2-3 Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07411A 1
2-6 Harness, 3k finisher output path SAM-JC39-02322A 1
2-7 Sensor, rp SAM-JC32-00020A 1
3 Finisher sub-top jam SAM-JC90-01455A 2
3-6 Guide, seal-top SAM-JC62-01328A 1
3-11 Guide, diverter SAM-JC61-07205A 1
3-12 Guide, top jam SAM-JC61-07196A 1
ENWW Finishers 897

FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade
Figure 4-53 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade

Table 4-53 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade
1 Finisher sub-fd stopper unit SAM-JC90-01432A 1
1-5 Timing pulley SAM-JC66-04583A 2
1-11 Spring, cs SAM-JC61-07403A 1
1-22 Solenoid SAM-JC33-00038A 1
2 Finisher sub-jam clear SAM-JC90-01433A 1
3 Finisher sub-bkt main blade SAM-JC90-01435A 1
3-1 Gear, helical 4 SAM-JC66-04595A 1
3-4 Motor, bldc SAM-JC31-00144A 1
ENWW Finishers 899

Fold roller, main blade, and top frame
Figure 4-54 Fold roller, main blade, and top frame

Table 4-54 Fold roller, main blade, and top frame
1-3 Gear, double SAM-JC66-04573A 1
1-5 Motor, bldc SAM-JC31-00144A 1
2 Finisher sub-main blade SAM-JC90-01437A 1
2-3 Bush-6, d SAM-JC61-00423A 1
2-4 Bush, 8/5 SAM-JC61-00426A 2
2-13 Gear, helical SAM-JC66-04591A 2
3 Finisher sub-top frame SAM-JC90-01440A 1
3-3 Harness, 3k finisher top cover SAM-JC39-02310A 1
ENWW Finishers 901

Three fold blade
Figure 4-55 Three fold blade

Table 4-55 Three fold blade
1 Finisher sub-output roller SAM-JC90-01395A 1
2 Finisher sub-guide three fold SAM-JC90-01394A 1
3 Sheet-jam guide SAM-JC63-05044A 3
4 Sheet-fold output SAM-JC63-05041A 2
ENWW Finishers 903

Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide
Figure 4-56 Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide

Table 4-56 Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide
1 Finisher sub-door SAM-JC90-01444A 1
1-2 Cover, link SAM-JC63-05004A 2
3-1 PCA, 3k switch SAM-JC92-02789A 1
3-2 Magnet, as SAM-JC81-08263A 1
3-3 Button lens SAM-JC64-00996A 1
3-4 Button, staple SAM-JC64-00995A 1
ENWW Finishers 905

Entrance guide, mid jam, and main output
Figure 4-57 Entrance guide, mid jam, and main output

Table 4-57 Entrance guide, mid jam, and main output
2 Finisher sub-mid jam SAM-JC90-01450A 1
3 Finisher sub-output main SAM-JC90-01451A 1
ENWW Finishers 907

Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor
Figure 4-58 Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor

Table 4-58 Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor
1 Finisher sub-trans buff SAM-JC90-01456A 1
1-5 Guide, buff div SAM-JC61-07204A 1
1-7 Harness, 3k finisher bm path SAM-JC39-02320A 1
2 Finisher sub-right jam SAM-JC90-01457A 1
2-1 Magent, as by3-32-1 SAM-JC81-08263A 1
3 Finisher sub-div cam SAM-JC90-01458A 1
3-1 Ict-pin, paralled, p/u SAM-JC70-40360A 1
4 Finisher sub-hb motor SAM-JC90-01459A 2
4-1 Motor step, ip SAM-JC31-00163B 2
ENWW Finishers 909

Front alignment (tamper)
Figure 4-59 Front alignment (tamper)

Table 4-59 Front alignment (tamper)
0 Finisher sub-alignment, front SAM-JC90-01464A 1
13 Driver motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A 1
ENWW Finishers 911

Rear alignment (tamper)
Figure 4-60 Rear alignment (tamper)

Table 4-60 Rear alignment (tamper)
0 Finisher sub-alignment, rear SAM-JC90-01465A 1
1 Driver motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A 1
ENWW Finishers 913

Shield
Figure 4-61 Shield

Table 4-61 Shield
1-9 Cover, stacker SAM-JC63-04999B 1
3 Finisher sub-base low SAM-JC90-01476A 1
3-3 Leg bracket SAM-JC61-07279A 1
ENWW Finishers 915

PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle
Figure 4-62 PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle

Table 4-62 PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle
1 Finisher sub-pcb bm SAM-JC90-01477A 1
2 Finisher sub-cover f bm SAM-JC90-01478B 1
3 Finisher sub-idle fold SAM-JC90-01479A 1
4 Finisher sub-paddle SAM-JC90-01480A 1
4-1 Finisher sub-paddle, wing SAM-JC90-01463A 2
4-2 Finisher sub-paddle, mid SAM-JC90-01462A 1
ENWW Finishers 917

Finisher sub booklet
Figure 4-63 Finisher sub booklet

Table 4-63 Finisher sub booklet
0 Finisher sub-booklet 4 SAM-JC90-01502A 1
ENWW Finishers 919

IPTU (bridge)
Figure 4-64 IPTU (bridge)

Table 4-64 IPTU (bridge)
1 Finisher sub-clutch drive SAM-JC90-01404A 2
3 AS-Magnet BY3-32-1 SAM-JC81-08263A 1
4 Roller, brg-feed entrance SAM-JC66-04733A 1
5 Roller, brg-feed SAM-JC66-04732A 2
7 Actuator, sensor SAM-JC66-04569A 1
10 Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07432A 1
17 Bush-6, d(l) SAM-JC61-00884A 3
18 Cable, 3k finisher IPTU PA SAM-JC39-02328A 1
19 Cable, 3k finisher IPTU sub SAM-JC39-02327A 1
23 Cable clamp SAM-6502-001131 1
24 E-ring SAM-6044-000125 2
25 Screw, tap type SAM-6003-001256 4
26 Screw, machine SAM-6001-000130 4
28 Finisher sub-hb mtr SAM-JC90-01402A 1
ENWW Finishers 921

Inner finisher
Sub-inner finisher
Figure 4-65 Sub-inner finisher

Table 4-65 Sub-inner finisher
1 Finisher sub-paper support SAM-JC90-01310A 1
2 Finisher sub-paper support, rear SAM-JC90-01311A 1
3 Finisher sub-alignment, front SAM-JC90-01315A 1
4 Finisher sub-alignment, rear SAM-JC90-01317A 1
5 Finisher sub-ejector SAM-JC90-01332A 1
6 Finisher sub-motor tray SAM-JC90-01334A 1
7 Finisher sub-guide output, lower SAM-JC90-01336A 1
8 Finisher sub-tray SAM-JC63-04797B 1
10 Finisher sub-staple SAM-JC90-01342A 1
ENWW Inner finisher 923

Finisher sub 1
Figure 4-66 Finisher sub 1

Table 4-66 Finisher sub 1
1 Finisher sub-cover, front SAM-JC90-01321B 1
2 Finisher sub-cover, middle SAM-JC90-01322B 1
3 Finisher sub-cover, compile SAM-JC90-01323B 1
4 Finisher sub-stacker plate SAM-JC90-01324B 1
4-1 Photo, tr SAM-0603–001309 1
5 Cover, rear SAM-JC63-04750B 1
6 Cover, main SAM-JC63-04792B 1

Finisher sub 7

1-1 Stapler-etc assembly SAM-JC98-04473A 1
2 Finisher sub-punch dummy SAM-JC90-01343A 1

Finisher sub 8

2 Inner finisher PCA SAM-JC92-02774A 1
5-1 Paddle absorber, rubber a SAM-JC63-04957A 2
5-2 Paddle absorber, rubber b SAM-JC63-04958A 2
8 Roller, feed-entrance SAM-JC66-04243A 2
10 Finisher sub-entrance motor SAM-JC90-01344A 1
13 Actuator, feed sensor SAM-JC66-04199A 1
14 Finisher sub-actuator tray SAM-JC90-01313A 1
15 Finisher sub-actuator tray sensor SAM-JC90-01314A 1
15-2 Solenoid SAM-JC33-00037A 1
16 Finisher sub-tray lower limit SAM-JC90-01320A 1
16-3 Actuator tray limit SAM-JC66-04200A 1
17-1 Step motor ip SAM-JC31-00149A 1
19-1 Roller, feed-output SAM-JC66-04244A 1
19-2 Compile guide, front SAM-JC61-07449A 1
19-3 Compile guide, rear SAM-JC61-07450A 1
20-1 Step motor ip SAM-JC31-00169B 1
21 Finisher sub-tray frame SAM-JC90-01319A 1
22 Rear join PCA SAM-JC92-02780A 1

Alphabetical parts list
Table 4-69 Alphabetical parts list
Description Part number Table and page
Actuator SAM-JC66-04290A sHCI main 5 on page 867
Actuator lever, dup SAM-JC66-04405A Right door guide on page 821
Actuator lever, empty SAM-JC66-04459A MP tray on page 819
Actuator lever, fuser out SAM-JC66-04406A Right door output and takeaway
on page 823
Actuator tray limit SAM-JC66-04200A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Actuator, empty pickup SAM-JC66-04276A Pickup cover unit on page 871
Actuator, entrance feed SAM-JC66-04520A SCU motor, STK motor, and

entrance guide on page 893
Actuator, F_D full output SAM-JC66-04469A Output on page 799
Actuator, feed sensor SAM-JC66-04199A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Actuator, pusher SAM-JC66-04526A Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Actuator, sensor SAM-JC66-04569A IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Actuator, te-press1 SAM-JC66-04644A SCU motor, STK motor, and

Actuator, top-output SAM-JC66-04525A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897
Actuator-o, staple SAM-JC66-04528A Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
ADF e-duplex SAM-JC97-04662A Main assembly on page 795
Adjust guide, DCF SAM-JC61-04871A HCI frame on page 859
Agitator paddle, res SAM-JC66-04311A Reservoir on page 841
AS-Magnet BY3-32-1 SAM-JC81-08263A IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Bearing ball SAM-6601-001478 Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
Bearing ball SAM-6601-001478 SCU motor, STK motor, and

Bearing ball SAM-6601-001478 IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Belt SAM-JC66-04281A HCI main pickup on page 861
Belt timing gear SAM-6602-001581 Drive system on page 809
Belt timing gear SAM-6602-001730 Drive system on page 809
BLDC Motor, 38w SAM-JC31-00075C Drive system on page 809
Bush, 8/5 SAM-JC61-00426A Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
Bush, 8/5 SAM-JC61-00426A Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891

Table 4-69 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Bush, 8/5 SAM-JC61-00426A Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 901
Bush, D6/L4 SAM-JC61-02372A SCU motor, STK motor, and

Bush-6, d SAM-JC61-00423A Three fold motor, curl pawl

motor, curl pawl, and three fold
output on page 889
Bush-6, d SAM-JC61-00423A Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 901
Bush-6, d(l) SAM-JC61-00884A IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Bush-6, dl SAM-JC61-00884A DCF second pickup on page 851
Bush-6, dl SAM-JC61-00884A HCI main pickup on page 861
Bush-6, dl SAM-JC61-00884A Pickup cover unit on page 871
Button lens SAM-JC64-00996A Door, top door, top cover, and

registration guide on page 905
Button, staple SAM-JC64-00995A Door, top door, top cover, and

C-ring SAM-6044-000159 Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
Cable clamp SAM-6502-001131 Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
Cable clamp SAM-6502-001131 SCU motor, STK motor, and

Cable clamp SAM-6502-001131 IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Cable, 3k finisher IPTU PA SAM-JC39-02328A IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Cable, 3k finisher IPTU sub SAM-JC39-02327A IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Cartridge sub-belt PTB SAM-JC96-09863A PTB transfer on page 825
Cartridge sub-cleaning blade SAM-JC96-09862A PTB transfer on page 825
Cartridge sub-cover, front SAM-JC96-09861A PTB transfer on page 825
Cartridge sub-cover, rear SAM-JC96-09859A PTB transfer on page 825
Cartridge sub-guide, upper SAM-JC96-09860A PTB transfer on page 825
Cartridge, developer unit SAM-JC96-11599A Main assembly on page 795
Cartridge, ICT-PIN SAM-JC70-40542A SCU motor, STK motor, and

Cartridge, TCU SAM-JC96-11638A Main assembly on page 795
Cassette SAM-JC90-01610A Main assembly on page 795
Cassette SAM-JC90-01611A Main assembly on page 795
Cassette SAM-JC90-01610A First cassette on page 801
ENWW Alphabetical parts list 931

Cassette SAM-JC90-01611A Second cassette on page 803
Cassette guide rail SAM-JC61-07471A HCI cassette on page 857
Cassette, fifth SAM-JC90-01652 DCF main on page 843
Cassette, fourth SAM-JC90-01654 DCF main on page 843
Caster SAM-6109-001138 DCF frame on page 845
Caster SAM-6109-001138 HCI frame on page 859
Caster cover SAM-JC63-04985B Booklet finisher on page 875
Caster cover SAM-JC63-04985B Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
Clutch one way SAM-JC66-00977A DCF second pickup on page 851
Clutch one way1 SAM-JC66-00977A DCF main on page 843
Clutch, one way SAM-JC66-00977A Pickup cover unit on page 871
Compile guide, front SAM-JC61-07449A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Compile guide, rear SAM-JC61-07450A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Compiler-brush, ceiling front SAM-JC67-00820A Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
Compiler-brush, ceiling rear SAM-JC67-00819A Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
Connector holder, scf SAM-JC61-01742A HCI cassette on page 857
Contact image sensor SAM-0609-001558 Flow ADF main on page 835
Coupler, torque limiter SAM-JC67-00455A Frame main pickup on page 813
Coupler, torque limiter SAM-JC67-00464A DCF second pickup on page 851
Coupler, torque limiter SAM-JC67-00455A HCI main pickup on page 861
Coupler, torque limiter SAM-JC67-00455A sHCI main 6 on page 869
Coupler1 SAM-JC67-00455A DCF main on page 843
Cover SAM-JC95-02098A Main assembly on page 795
Cover SAM-JC95-02106A Cover on page 815
Cover, dummy sHCI SAM-JC63-04918B Right door on page 817
Cover, front SAM-JC63-04986B Booklet finisher on page 875
Cover, link SAM-JC63-05004A Door, top door, top cover, and

Cover, main SAM-JC63-04792B Finisher sub 1 on page 925
Cover, rear SAM-JC63-04988B Booklet finisher on page 875
Cover, rear SAM-JC63-04750B Finisher sub 1 on page 925
Cover, stacker SAM-JC63-04999B Shield on page 915
Cover-f, lower SAM-JC63-04987B Booklet finisher on page 875
Cover-f, lower SAM-JC63-04987B Mainline finisher 5 on page 885

Cover-m, tray SAM-JC63-05002B Booklet finisher on page 875
Cover-m, tray SAM-JC63-05002B Mainline finisher 6 on page 887
Cover-s, tray SAM-JC63-05003B Booklet finisher on page 875
Cover-s, tray SAM-JC63-05003B Mainline finisher 6 on page 887
Cover-t, tray SAM-JC63-04995B Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Cover-t, tray 2 SAM-JC63-04996B Booklet finisher on page 875
Cover-t, tray 2 SAM-JC63-04996B Mainline finisher 6 on page 887
DCF first pickup SAM-JC90-01679 DCF main on page 843
DCF guide adjust SAM-JC61-04871A DCF frame on page 845
DCF PCA SAM-JC92-02738A DCF frame on page 845
DCF second pickup SAM-JC90-01680 DCF main on page 843
DCF sub-takeaway interlock SAM-JC90-01385A DCF frame on page 845
DCF, main harness SAM-JC39-02276A DCF frame on page 845
DCF, sub harness SAM-JC39-02278A DCF frame on page 845
DCF, sub-auto closing SAM-JC90-01677 DCF main on page 843
DCF, sub-takeaway SAM-JC90-01649A DCF main on page 843
DCF, t1mot harness SAM-JC39-02268A DCF frame on page 845
Drive fuser, output SAM-JC93-01064A Main assembly on page 795
Drive main, mono SAM-JC93-01060A Main assembly on page 795
Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01085A Right door on page 817
Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01083A HCI drive on page 855
Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01083A sHCI main 3 on page 865
Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01154A Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01153A Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01156A SCU motor, STK motor, and

Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01155A Entrance motor, low paddle,

alignment, and paddle motor
on page 895
Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A Entrance motor, low paddle,

on page 895
Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01155A Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 897

Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01155A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

BKT main blade on page 899
Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

cam, hb motor, and paddle motor
on page 909
Drive motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A Shield on page 915
Drive pickup SAM-JC93-01063A Main assembly on page 795
Drive registration assembly SAM-JC93-01061A Main assembly on page 795
Drive takeaway roller SAM-JC93-01119A HCI main on page 853
Drive, feed SAM-JC93-01062A Main assembly on page 795
Drive, motor step SAM-JC93-00802A Output on page 799
Drive, motor step SAM-JC93-01084A Drive system on page 809
Drive, motor step SAM-JC93-01083A Drive system on page 809
Drive, toner mono SAM-JC93-01066B Main assembly on page 795
Driver motor, step SAM-JC93-01152A Entrance motor, low paddle,

on page 895
Driver motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A Front alignment (tamper)

on page 911
Driver motor, step SAM-JC93-01001A Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 913
E-ring SAM-6044-000125 DCF second pickup on page 851
E-ring SAM-6044-000125 Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
E-ring SAM-6044-000129 Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
E-ring SAM-6044–000125 SCU motor, STK motor, and

E-ring SAM-6044-000125 IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Electric clutch SAM-JC31-00037A Drive system on page 809
Fan SAM-JC31-00146A Flow ADF main on page 835
Fan motor housing SAM-JC61-07694A Flow ADF main on page 835
Fan, dc SAM-JC31-00168A Flow ADF main on page 835
Fan, type 6 SAM-JC31-00160C Main assembly 2 on page 797
Feed drive opt SAM-JC93-01135A DCF main on page 843
Feed drive, HCI SAM-JC63-04797B HCI main on page 853
Feed guide SAM-JC61-06988A Right door guide on page 821

Feed roller SAM-JC66-04607A HCI main pickup on page 861
Feed roller SAM-JC66-04670A HCI main pickup on page 861
Feed roller SAM-JC66-04606A sHCI main 6 on page 869
Feed roller opt1 SAM-JC66-04670A DCF main on page 843
Feed roller1 SAM-JC66-04607A DCF main on page 843
Finisher sub-3 fold mtr SAM-JC90-01396A Three fold motor, curl pawl
output on page 889
Finisher sub-3 fold output SAM-JC90-01399A Three fold motor, curl pawl
output on page 889
Finisher sub-actuator tray SAM-JC90-01313A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Finisher sub-actuator tray sensor SAM-JC90-01314A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Finisher sub-alignment front SAM-JC90-01464A Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
Finisher sub-alignment rear SAM-JC90-01465A Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
Finisher sub-alignment, front SAM-JC90-01464A Front alignment (tamper)

on page 911
Finisher sub-alignment, front SAM-JC90-01315A Sub-inner finisher on page 923
Finisher sub-alignment, rear SAM-JC90-01465A Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 913
Finisher sub-alignment, rear SAM-JC90-01317A Sub-inner finisher on page 923
Finisher sub-base low SAM-JC90-01476A Shield on page 915
Finisher sub-bkt main blade SAM-JC90-01435A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and
Finisher sub-booklet 4 SAM-JC90-01502A Finisher sub booklet on page 919
Finisher sub-booklet unit SAM-JC90-01416A Booklet finisher on page 875
Finisher sub-booklet unit SAM-JC90-01416A Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
Finisher sub-clutch div SAM-JC90-01474A Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Finisher sub-clutch drive SAM-JC90-01404A Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Finisher sub-clutch drive SAM-JC90-01404A IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Finisher sub-cover f bm SAM-JC90-01478A Booklet finisher on page 875
Finisher sub-cover f bm SAM-JC90-01478B PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 917
Finisher sub-cover, compile SAM-JC90-01323B Finisher sub 1 on page 925
Finisher sub-cover, front SAM-JC90-01321B Finisher sub 1 on page 925
Finisher sub-cover, middle SAM-JC90-01322B Finisher sub 1 on page 925

Finisher sub-curl pawl SAM-JC90-01398A Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
Finisher sub-div cam SAM-JC90-01458A Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Finisher sub-div cam SAM-JC90-01458A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
Finisher sub-door SAM-JC90-01444A Door, top door, top cover, and

Finisher sub-drv buff SAM-JC90-01453A Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Finisher sub-ef mtr SAM-JC90-01467A Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Finisher sub-ejector SAM-JC90-01332A Sub-inner finisher on page 923
Finisher sub-ejector unit SAM-JC90-01409A Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
Finisher sub-end stopper SAM-JC90-01466A Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Finisher sub-entrance guide SAM-JC90-01424A SCU motor, STK motor, and

Finisher sub-entrance motor SAM-JC90-01344A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Finisher sub-fd stopper unit SAM-JC90-01432A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and
Finisher sub-guide output, lower SAM-JC90-01336A Sub-inner finisher on page 923
Finisher sub-guide three fold SAM-JC90-01394A Three fold blade on page 903
Finisher sub-guide top SAM-JC90-01406A Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
Finisher sub-hb motor SAM-JC90-01459A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
Finisher sub-hb mtr SAM-JC90-01459A Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Finisher sub-hb mtr SAM-JC90-01402A IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Finisher sub-idle fold SAM-JC90-01479A PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 917
Finisher sub-jam clear SAM-JC90-01433A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

Finisher sub-low output SAM-JC90-01400A Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
Finisher sub-low paddle SAM-JC90-01429A Entrance motor, low paddle,

on page 895
Finisher sub-main blade SAM-JC90-01437A Fold roller, main blade, and top
frame on page 901
Finisher sub-mid jam SAM-JC90-01450A Entrance guide, mid jam, and

main output on page 907

Finisher sub-motor tray SAM-JC90-01334A Sub-inner finisher on page 923
Finisher sub-output main SAM-JC90-01451A Entrance guide, mid jam, and

Finisher sub-output roller SAM-JC90-01395A Three fold blade on page 903
Finisher sub-paddle SAM-JC90-01480A PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 917
Finisher sub-paddle, mid SAM-JC90-01462A PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 917
Finisher sub-paddle, wing SAM-JC90-01463A PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 917
Finisher sub-paper support SAM-JC90-01310A Sub-inner finisher on page 923
Finisher sub-paper support, rear SAM-JC90-01311A Sub-inner finisher on page 923
Finisher sub-pcb bm SAM-JC90-01477A PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 917
Finisher sub-punch dummy SAM-JC90-01343A Finisher sub 7 on page 927
Finisher sub-regist guide SAM-JC90-01448B Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
Finisher sub-right jam SAM-JC90-01457A Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
Finisher sub-right jam SAM-JC90-01457A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
Finisher sub-scu motor SAM-JC90-01414A SCU motor, STK motor, and

Finisher sub-scu mtr SAM-JC90-01414A Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
Finisher sub-stacker plate SAM-JC90-01324B Finisher sub 1 on page 925
Finisher sub-staple SAM-JC90-01342A Sub-inner finisher on page 923
Finisher sub-staple SAM-JC90-01343A Sub-inner finisher on page 923
Finisher sub-staple SAM-JC90-01342A Finisher sub 7 on page 927
Finisher sub-staple unit SAM-JC90-01412A Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
Finisher sub-stk motor SAM-JC90-01415A SCU motor, STK motor, and

Finisher sub-stk mtr SAM-JC90-01415A Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
Finisher sub-top cover SAM-JC90-01446B Booklet finisher on page 875
Finisher sub-top cover SAM-JC90-01446B Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
Finisher sub-top cover SAM-JC90-01446B Door, top door, top cover, and
Finisher sub-top door SAM-JC90-01445B Booklet finisher on page 875
Finisher sub-top door SAM-JC90-01445B Mainline finisher 5 on page 885

Finisher sub-top door SAM-JC90-01445B Door, top door, top cover, and
Finisher sub-top frame SAM-JC90-01440A Fold roller, main blade, and top
frame on page 901
Finisher sub-top jam SAM-JC90-01455A Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
Finisher sub-top jam SAM-JC90-01455A Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 897
Finisher sub-top lower SAM-JC90-01454A Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 897
Finisher sub-trans buff SAM-JC90-01456A Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
Finisher sub-trans buff SAM-JC90-01456A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
Finisher sub-tray SAM-JC63-04797B Sub-inner finisher on page 923
Finisher sub-tray bm unit SAM-JC90-01417B Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
Finisher sub-tray frame SAM-JC90-01319A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Finisher sub-tray lower limit SAM-JC90-01320A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Flow ADF cover, open SAM-JC97-04869A Flow ADF open cover on page 829
Flow ADF cover, open lower SAM-JC97-04696B Flow ADF open cover on page 829
Flow ADF pickup, sub SAM-JC97-04650A Flow ADF pickup roller assembly
on page 831
Flow ADF pickup, upper SAM-JC97-04872A Flow ADF on page 827
Flow ADF pickup, upper SAM-JC97-04646B Flow ADF on page 827
Flow ADF stacker SAM-JC97-04658B Flow ADF stacker on page 833
Flow ADF, bottom cover SAM-JC97-04880A Flow ADF on page 827
Flow ADF, damper SAM-JC97-04692A Flow ADF on page 827
Flow ADF, dummy front SAM-JC97-04879A Flow ADF on page 827
Flow ADF, exterior SAM-JC97-04668B Flow ADF main on page 835
Flow ADF, feed drive motor SAM-JC97-04680A Flow ADF main on page 835
Flow ADF, front cover SAM-JC97-04881A Flow ADF on page 827
Flow ADF, hinge l SAM-JC97-04640A Flow ADF main on page 835
Flow ADF, hinge r SAM-JC97-04641A Flow ADF main on page 835
Flow ADF, housing separation roller SAM-JC97-04661A Flow ADF main on page 835
Flow ADF, lift drive SAM-JC97-04679A Flow ADF main on page 835
Flow ADF, main frame SAM-JC97-04883A Flow ADF on page 827
Flow ADF, main frame sGX (dn models only) SAM-JC97-04882A Flow ADF on page 827
Flow ADF, PCA high SAM-JC92-02964A Flow ADF main on page 835

Flow ADF, pickup release drive SAM-JC97-04681A Flow ADF main on page 835
Flow ADF, release drive scan SAM-JC97-04682A Flow ADF main on page 835
Flow ADF, scan in lower SAM-JC97-04656B Flow ADF main on page 835
Flow ADF, scan out SAM-JC97-04830A Flow ADF main on page 835
Flow ADF, separation cover SAM-JC97-04652A Flow ADF main on page 835
Flow ADF, white simplex roller SAM-JC97-04687A Flow ADF main on page 835
Frame holder dust assembly, TF SAM-JC93-01026B Main assembly on page 795
Frame interlock sHCI assemlby SAM-JC93-01123A sHCI frame on page 873
Frame latch, rear sensor assembly SAM-JC93-01124A sHCI frame on page 873
Frame main pickup 1 SAM-JC93-01096A Main assembly on page 795
Frame main pickup 2 SAM-JC93-01104A Main assembly on page 795
Frame main, humidity sensor SAM-JC93-00486A Main assembly frame

on page 805
Frame main, pickup roller SAM-JC93-01092A Frame main pickup on page 813
Frame main, TCU sensor SAM-JC93-00492A Main assembly frame

on page 805
Frame mount SAM-JC61-06663A Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
Frame reservoir SAM-JC93-01071A Reservoir on page 841
Frame sub, rear bottom SAM-JC93-01370A Main assembly frame

on page 805
Frame, left cst rail assembly SAM-JC93-01044A DCF frame on page 845
Frame, main pickup roller SAM-JC93-01092A DCF second pickup on page 851
Frame, main pickup roller SAM-JC93-01092A sHCI main 6 on page 869
Frame, main pickup roller SAM-JC93-01092A Pickup cover unit on page 871
Frame, right cst rail assembly SAM-JC93-01045A DCF frame on page 845
Front cover SAM-JC95-02103A Cover on page 815
Front cover SAM-JC63-04986B Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
Front cover, lower SAM-JC63-04861B Cover on page 815
Front cover, mp SAM-JC63-04910B Right door on page 817
Front door switch open SAM-JC93-00466A Main assembly frame

on page 805
Fuser 220V SAM-JC91-01194A Main assembly on page 795
Fuser assembly 110V SAM-JC91-01195A Main assembly on page 795
Fuser drive board 110V SAM-JC44-00235B Main assembly on page 795
Fuser drive board 220V SAM-JC44-00236B Main assembly on page 795

Gear motor SAM-JC31-00109A sHCI main 3 on page 865
Gear, buffer SAM-JC66-04602A Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Gear, double SAM-JC66-04579A Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
Gear, double SAM-JC66-04573A Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 901
Gear, helical SAM-JC66-04591A Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 901
Gear, helical 1 SAM-JC66-04592A Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 901
Gear, helical 2 SAM-JC66-04593A Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 901
Gear, helical 3 SAM-JC66-04594A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

Gear, helical 4 SAM-JC66-04595A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

Gear-db, gear SAM-JC66-04604A SCU motor, STK motor, and

Ground plate SAM-JC61-03002A DCF rear frame on page 847
Ground-c, safety SAM-JC63-04984A Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
Guide, buff div SAM-JC61-07204A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
Guide, com ceil SAM-JC61-07189A Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
Guide, diverter SAM-JC61-07205A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897
Guide, pusher SAM-JC61-07206A Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Guide, seal-top SAM-JC62-01328A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897
Guide, top jam SAM-JC61-07196A Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 897
Guide-l, entrance SAM-JC61-07247A SCU motor, STK motor, and

Harness, 3k finisher bm path SAM-JC39-02320A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
Harness, 3k finisher output path SAM-JC39-02322A Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 897
Harness, 3k finisher top cover SAM-JC39-02310A Fold roller, main blade, and top
frame on page 901
Harness, heater HCI SAM-JC39-02284A HCI frame on page 859

Harness, inner tray HCI SAM-JC39-02286A HCI frame on page 859
Harness, main if HCI SAM-JC39-02283A HCI frame on page 859
Harness, mot HCI SAM-JC39-02279A HCI frame on page 859
Harness, sub if HCI SAM-JC39-02285A HCI frame on page 859
HCI cassette SAM-JC90-01642A HCI cassette on page 857
HCI main SAM-JC93-01139A HCI main pickup on page 861
HCI PCA SAM-JC92-02738B HCI frame on page 859
HCI sub-takeaway SAM-JC90-01646A HCI main on page 853
HCI, cassette SAM-JC90-01642A HCI main on page 853
HCI, main pickup SAM-JC93-01322B HCI main on page 853
HCI, sub-auto closer SAM-JC90-01382A HCI main on page 853
HDD SAM-JC59-00036A Main assembly on page 795
HDD bracket assembly frame SAM-JC93-01239B Main assembly on page 795
Hex screw 6009-001665 DCF main on page 843
Hex screw 6009-001665 Opt feed drive on page 849
HVPS SAM-JC44-00241A Main assembly on page 795
Ict-pin, paralled, p/u SAM-JC70-40360A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
Idle holder, one way SAM-JC61-01288A Pickup cover unit on page 871
Idle roller, cst SAM-JC61-03331A HCI frame on page 859
Idle roller, rubber SAM-JC66-02289B Right door guide on page 821
Image scanner SAM-JC97-04520C Main assembly on page 795
Image scanner SAM-JC97-04523B Flow ADF image scanner, lower

on page 839
Image scanner, lower SAM-JC97-04515A Flow ADF image scanner

on page 837
Image scanner, open sensor SAM-JC97-04516A Flow ADF image scanner

on page 837
Inner cover SAM-JC95-02104A Cover on page 815
Inner finisher PCA SAM-JC92-02774A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Laser scanner assembly SAM-JC97-04574A Main assembly on page 795
Left cover SAM-JC95-02100A Cover on page 815
Left cover SAM-JC63-04797B sHCI main 1 on page 863
Left cover, top SAM-JC63-04862B Cover on page 815
Left cover, upper SAM-JC63-05638A Cover on page 815

Leg bracket SAM-JC61-07279A Shield on page 915
Lift drive, shift SAM-JC93-01118A HCI main on page 853
Link cover, open SAM-JC66-02270A Flow ADF on page 827
Link door SAM-JC66–04279A sHCI main 1 on page 863
Link door, front 2 SAM-JC66-04278A sHCI main 1 on page 863
Link door, rear 2 SAM-JC66-04277A sHCI main 1 on page 863
Link holder, hinge f SAM-JC61-06567A sHCI main 1 on page 863
Link holder, hinge r SAM-JC61-06568A sHCI main 1 on page 863
Link lever, d SAM-JC66-04398A Right door on page 817
LVPS (SMPS), 110v type 3 SAM-JC44-00222B Main assembly on page 795
LVPS (SMPS), 110V type 4 SAM-JC44-00091D Main assembly 2 on page 797
LVPS (SMPS), 110V type 5H SAM-JC44-00249A Main assembly 2 on page 797
LVPS (SMPS), 220v type 3 SAM-JC44-00223B Main assembly on page 795
LVPS (SMPS), 220V type 5H SAM-JC44-00250A Main assembly 2 on page 797
LVPS (SMPS), V2 SAM-JC44-00100D Main assembly on page 795
Machine screw SAM-6001-002716 Pickup cover unit on page 871
Machinery, fastener screw SAM-JC60-00078A DCF main on page 843
Magent, as by3-32-1 SAM-JC81-08263A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
Magnet, as SAM-JC81-08263A Door, top door, top cover, and

Main drive, common mono SAM-JC93-01049A Drive system on page 809
Main frame rear auto-size holder SAM-JC93-00018A DCF rear frame on page 847
Main frame registration assebly SAM-JC93-01116A Main assembly frame

on page 805
Main-brush, output SAM-JC67-00817A Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
Motor SAM-JC90-01673A Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Motor BLDC SAM-JC31-00123B Drive system on page 809
Motor circuit, step SAM-JC31-00110A Drive system on page 809
Motor gear SAM-JC31-00109A HCI drive on page 855
Motor shift gear SAM-JC31-00125A HCI drive on page 855
Motor step 1P SAM-JC31-00132A Drive system on page 809
Motor step, ip SAM-JC31-00177A HCI drive on page 855

Motor step, ip SAM-JC31-00163B Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
Motor, bldc SAM-JC31-00144A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

Motor, bldc SAM-JC31-00144A Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 901
Motor, DC-stacker SAM-JC31-00178A SCU motor, STK motor, and

Motor, step ip SAM-JC31-00163B Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
MP SAM-JC90-01352B Right door on page 817
MP bracket, pickup SAM-JC90-01355A MP tray on page 819
MP feed guide SAM-JC90-01353A MP tray on page 819
MP solenoid SAM-JC33-00029B MP tray on page 819
MP sub-tray SAM-JC90-01357B MP tray on page 819
Opt feed drive SAM-JC93-01135A Opt feed drive on page 849
Opt feed roller SAM-JC66-04607A DCF second pickup on page 851
Output SAM-JC90–01369A Main assembly on page 795
Output 1 SAM-JC90-01370A Main assembly on page 795
Output 2 SAM-JC90-01373A Main assembly on page 795
Output cover SAM-JC95-02101A Cover on page 815
Output cover, rear SAM-JC63-04840B Cover on page 815
Output, guide lower SAM-JC90-01372A Output on page 799
Output, guide upper SAM-JC90-01371A Output on page 799
Output, lower 2 SAM-JC90-01375A Output on page 799
Output, upper 2 SAM-JC90-01374A Output on page 799
Paddle absorber, rubber a SAM-JC63-04957A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Paddle absorber, rubber b SAM-JC63-04958A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Paddle holder SAM-JC61-07225A Entrance motor, low paddle,

on page 895
PCA, 3k switch SAM-JC92-02789A Door, top door, top cover, and

PCA, paper size sensor SAM-JC92-02622A DCF rear frame on page 847
Phone, interrupter SAM-0604-001393 Main assembly frame

on page 805

Photo interrupter SAM-0604-001490 Right door output and takeaway

on page 823
Photo, interrupter SAM-0604-001393 Output on page 799
Photo, interrupter SAM-0604-001381 Main frame registration assembly

on page 807
Photo, interrupter SAM-0604-001393 Drive system on page 809
Photo, interrupter SAM-0604-001490 Frame main pickup 1 and 2

on page 811
Photo, interrupter SAM-0604-001381 Frame main pickup 1 and 2

on page 811
Photo, interrupter SAM-0604-001393 Frame main pickup on page 813
Photo, tr SAM-0603–001309 Finisher sub 1 on page 925
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604–001393 MP tray on page 819
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001393 Right door guide on page 821
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604–001393 Right door output and takeaway

on page 823
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001502 Flow ADF open cover on page 829
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604–001393 Flow ADF pickup roller assembly

on page 831
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001502 Flow ADF pickup roller assembly

on page 831
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604–001490 Flow ADF stacker on page 833
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604–001393 Flow ADF stacker on page 833
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001393 Reservoir on page 841
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001381 DCF second pickup on page 851
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001393 HCI cassette on page 857
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001381 HCI main pickup on page 861
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001393 sHCI main 5 on page 867
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001490 Pickup cover unit on page 871
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604–001393 Pickup cover unit on page 871
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 SCU motor, STK motor, and


Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Entrance motor, low paddle,

on page 895
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Front alignment (tamper)

on page 911
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 913
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Shield on page 915
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604–001381 Finisher sub 7 on page 927
Photo-interrupter SAM-0604-001415 Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Photo-interrupter1 SAM-0604-001490 DCF main on page 843
Pick rollers1 SAM-JC93-0192A DCF main on page 843
Pickup cover SAM-JC63-04798B sHCI main 1 on page 863
Pickup cover lever SAM-JC63-04799A Pickup cover unit on page 871
Pickup drive SAM-JC93-01063B DCF main on page 843
Pickup drive SAM-JC90-01115A HCI main on page 853
Pickup drive SAM-JC93-01115A HCI drive on page 855
Pickup roller SAM-JC93-01091A HCI main pickup on page 861
Pickup roller, main frame SAM-JC93-00540B MP tray on page 819
PTB transfer SAM-JC93-01117A PTB transfer on page 825
Rail SAM-6102-003369 Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
Rear cover SAM-JC95-02117A Cover on page 815
Rear cover SAM-JC63-05566A Flow ADF on page 827
Rear cover SAM-JC63-04988B Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
Rear cover, dummy SAM-JC63-04863B Cover on page 815
Rear cover, sHCI SAM-JC90-01660A sHCI main 1 on page 863
Rear cover, upper SAM-JC63-05633A Cover on page 815
Rear join PCA SAM-JC92-02780A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Registration assembly, harness SAM-JC39-02204A Main frame registration assembly

on page 807
Reservoir SAM-JC93-01071A Main assembly 2 on page 797

Reservoir drive SAM-JC93-01067A Reservoir on page 841
Right cover, front SAM-JC63-04847B Cover on page 815
Right cover, middle SAM-JC95-02105A Cover on page 815
Right cover, rear SAM-JC63-02102A Cover on page 815
Right cover, upper SAM-JC63-04846B Cover on page 815
Right door mono SAM-JC95-01987A Main assembly on page 795
Roller feed SAM-JC66-04625A Frame main pickup on page 813
Roller feed, output 2 SAM-JC66-04653A Output on page 799
Roller, brg-feed SAM-JC66-04732A IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Roller, brg-feed entrance SAM-JC66-04733A IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Roller, click-feed SAM-JC66-04523A Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
Roller, feed-duplex 1 SAM-JC66-04628A Right door on page 817
Roller, feed-duplex 2 SAM-JC66-04629A Right door on page 817
Roller, feed-entrance SAM-JC66-04243A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Roller, feed-fold output SAM-JC66-04721A Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
Roller, feed-output SAM-JC66-04244A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Roller, main-feed entrance SAM-JC66-04722A Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
Roller, main-feed output SAM-JC66-04726A Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
Roller, mid-feed output SAM-JC66-04724A Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
Roller, output-3 fold SAM-JC66-04744A Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
Roller, output-feed bm SAM-JC66-04723A Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
Roller, top-feed mid output SAM-JC66-04725A Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
Roller, top-feed output SAM-JC66-04727A Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Rooler, feed-lower bm SAM-JC66-04719A Entrance motor, low paddle,

on page 895
Safety guide SAM-JC61-07192A Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
Scan cover, front SAM-JC95-02118A Cover on page 815
Scan cover, left SAM-JC63-05587A Cover on page 815
Scan cover, rear SAM-JC63-04859C Cover on page 815
Scan cover, right SAM-JC63-05571A Cover on page 815
Screw cap SAM-JC67-00711A sHCI main 1 on page 863

Screw, machine SAM-6001-000130 Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
Screw, machine SAM-6001-000130 IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Screw, tap type SAM-6003–00269 DCF second pickup on page 851
Screw, tap type SAM-6003-001256 IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Sensor, rp SAM-JC32-00020A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897
Sensor, rp SAM-JC32-00020A Entrance guide, mid jam, and

Sensor, rp SAM-JC32-00020A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
Shaft, hinge-door SAM-JC66-04767A Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
sHCI drive gear SAM-JC66-04294A sHCI main 3 on page 865
sHCI, connect sensor harness SAM-JC39-02291A sHCI main 5 on page 867
sHCI, feed pulley gear SAM-JC66-04295A sHCI main 3 on page 865
sHCI, mot harness SAM-JC39-02287A sHCI main 3 on page 865
sHCI, plow harness SAM-JC39-02288A sHCI main 5 on page 867
sHCI, plow harness SAM-JC39-02288A sHCI main 6 on page 869
Sheet sensor SAM-JC63-03776A DCF second pickup on page 851
Sheet-fold output SAM-JC63-05041A Three fold blade on page 903
Sheet-jam guide SAM-JC63-05044A Three fold blade on page 903
Side cover SAM-JC63-04920B Right door on page 817
Side cover guide SAM-JC95-01969A Right door guide on page 821
Side cover, link SAM-JC95-01970A Right door on page 817
Side cover, output SAM-JC95-01968A Right door output and takeaway

on page 823
Side cover, takeaway SAM-JC95-01972A Right door output and takeaway

on page 823
Side cover, upper SAM-JC63-04916B Right door on page 817
Side link SAM-JC66-04400A Right door on page 817
Side locker SAM-JC64-00710A Right door on page 817
Solenoid SAM-JC90-01675A Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Solenoid SAM-JC33-00038A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

Solenoid SAM-JC33-00037A Finisher sub 8 on page 929

Solenoid, lifting SAM-JC33-00031B Output on page 799
Sponge white sheet SAM-JC63-05238A Main assembly on page 795
Spring, cs SAM-6107-001731 Right door guide on page 821
Spring, cs SAM-6107-002599 Reservoir on page 841
Spring, cs SAM-JC61-07403A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

Spring, es SAM-JC61-07414A Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
Spring, es SAM-JC61-07431A Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
Spring, es SAM-JC61-07430A Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
Spring, es SAM-JC61-07415A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897
Spring, es SAM-JC61-07409A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897
Spring, es SAM-JC61-07391A Three fold blade on page 903
Spring, es SAM-JC61-07408A Entrance guide, mid jam, and

Spring, etc torsion doc (cc2-f) SAM-JC61-00076A HCI cassette on page 857
Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07372A Right door on page 817
Spring, ts SAM-6107-001737 Right door guide on page 821
Spring, ts SAM-6107-001737 Right door output and takeaway

on page 823
Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07411A Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897

jam on page 897

jam on page 897
Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07401A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07413A Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909

on page 909

on page 909
Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07428A Shield on page 915

Spring, ts SAM-JC61-07432A IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Stacker, CSP-worm SAM-JC81-07637A SCU motor, STK motor, and

Stapler-etc assembly SAM-JC98-04473A Finisher sub 7 on page 927
Step motor ip SAM-JC31-00149A Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Step motor ip SAM-JC31-00169B Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Step motor, ip SAM-JC31-00177A Flow ADF main on page 835
Step motor, ip SAM-JC31-00158A Flow ADF image scanner

on page 837
Step motor, ip SAM-JC31-00177A Opt feed drive on page 849
Step motor, ip SAM-JC31-00163A sHCI main 3 on page 865
Tempered scan glass SAM-JC01-00101A Flow ADF image scanner

on page 837
Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-001730 Right door on page 817
Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-003183 Right door on page 817
Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-001730 Flow ADF main on page 835
Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-003185 DCF main on page 843
Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-003670 Opt feed drive on page 849
Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-003670 HCI drive on page 855
Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-001730 sHCI main 3 on page 865
Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-003644 Front alignment (tamper)

on page 911
Timing belt, gear SAM-6602-003644 Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 913
Timing pulley SAM-JC66-04583A FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003649 Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003648 IPTU (bridge) on page 921

Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003645 IPTU (bridge) on page 921
Timing-belt, gear SAM-6602-003644 Finisher sub 8 on page 929
Top-brush output SAM-JC67-00818A Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
Top-seal, guide SAM-JC62-01328A Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
Tray cover SAM-JC63-04797B HCI main on page 853
Tray heaters SAM-JC93-01181A Main assembly 2 on page 797

Numerical parts list
Table 4-70 Numerical parts list
Part number Description Table and page
6009-001665 Hex screw DCF main on page 843
6009-001665 Hex screw Opt feed drive on page 849
SAM-0603–001309 Photo, tr Finisher sub 1 on page 925
SAM-0604-001381 Photo, interrupter Main frame registration assembly

on page 807
SAM-0604-001381 Photo, interrupter Frame main pickup 1 and 2

on page 811
SAM-0604-001381 Photo-interrupter DCF second pickup on page 851
SAM-0604-001381 Photo-interrupter HCI main pickup on page 861
SAM-0604-001393 Photo, interrupter Output on page 799
SAM-0604-001393 Phone, interrupter Main assembly frame

on page 805
SAM-0604-001393 Photo, interrupter Drive system on page 809
SAM-0604-001393 Photo, interrupter Frame main pickup on page 813
SAM-0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Right door guide on page 821
SAM-0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Reservoir on page 841
SAM-0604-001393 Photo-interrupter HCI cassette on page 857
SAM-0604-001393 Photo-interrupter sHCI main 5 on page 867
SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Entrance motor, low paddle,

on page 895
SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897
SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Front alignment (tamper)

on page 911
SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 913
SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Shield on page 915
ENWW Numerical parts list 951

Table 4-70 Numerical parts list (continued)
SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-0604-001415 Photo-interrupter Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-0604-001490 Photo, interrupter Frame main pickup 1 and 2

on page 811
SAM-0604-001490 Photo interrupter Right door output and takeaway

on page 823
SAM-0604-001490 Photo-interrupter1 DCF main on page 843
SAM-0604-001490 Photo-interrupter Pickup cover unit on page 871
SAM-0604-001502 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF open cover on page 829
SAM-0604-001502 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF pickup roller assembly

on page 831
SAM-0604–001381 Photo-interrupter Finisher sub 7 on page 927
SAM-0604–001393 Photo-interrupter MP tray on page 819
SAM-0604–001393 Photo-interrupter Right door output and takeaway

on page 823
SAM-0604–001393 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF pickup roller assembly

on page 831
SAM-0604–001393 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF stacker on page 833
SAM-0604–001393 Photo-interrupter Pickup cover unit on page 871
SAM-0604–001490 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF stacker on page 833
SAM-0609-001558 Contact image sensor Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-6001-000130 Screw, machine Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
SAM-6001-000130 Screw, machine IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-6001-002716 Machine screw Pickup cover unit on page 871
SAM-6003-001256 Screw, tap type IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-6003–00269 Screw, tap type DCF second pickup on page 851
SAM-6044-000125 E-ring DCF second pickup on page 851
SAM-6044-000125 E-ring Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
SAM-6044-000125 E-ring IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-6044-000129 E-ring Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
SAM-6044-000159 C-ring Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889

SAM-6044–000125 E-ring SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-6102-003369 Rail Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
SAM-6107-001731 Spring, cs Right door guide on page 821
SAM-6107-001737 Spring, ts Right door guide on page 821
SAM-6107-001737 Spring, ts Right door output and takeaway

on page 823
SAM-6107-002599 Spring, cs Reservoir on page 841
SAM-6109-001138 Caster DCF frame on page 845
SAM-6109-001138 Caster HCI frame on page 859
SAM-6502-001131 Cable clamp Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
SAM-6502-001131 Cable clamp SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-6502-001131 Cable clamp IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-6601-001478 Bearing ball Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
SAM-6601-001478 Bearing ball SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-6601-001478 Bearing ball IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-6602-001581 Belt timing gear Drive system on page 809
SAM-6602-001730 Belt timing gear Drive system on page 809
SAM-6602-001730 Timing belt, gear Right door on page 817
SAM-6602-001730 Timing belt, gear Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-6602-001730 Timing belt, gear sHCI main 3 on page 865
SAM-6602-003183 Timing belt, gear Right door on page 817
SAM-6602-003185 Timing belt, gear DCF main on page 843
SAM-6602-003270 Timing-belt, gear Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
SAM-6602-003644 Timing belt, gear Front alignment (tamper)

on page 911
SAM-6602-003644 Timing belt, gear Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 913
SAM-6602-003644 Timing-belt, gear Finisher sub 8 on page 929

SAM-6602-003645 Timing-belt, gear IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-6602-003648 Timing-belt, gear IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-6602-003670 Timing belt, gear Opt feed drive on page 849
SAM-6602-003670 Timing belt, gear HCI drive on page 855
SAM-JC01-00101A Tempered scan glass Flow ADF image scanner

on page 837
SAM-JC31-00037A Electric clutch Drive system on page 809
SAM-JC31-00075C BLDC Motor, 38w Drive system on page 809
SAM-JC31-00109A Motor gear HCI drive on page 855
SAM-JC31-00109A Gear motor sHCI main 3 on page 865
SAM-JC31-00110A Motor circuit, step Drive system on page 809
SAM-JC31-00123B Motor BLDC Drive system on page 809
SAM-JC31-00125A Motor shift gear HCI drive on page 855
SAM-JC31-00132A Motor step 1P Drive system on page 809
SAM-JC31-00144A Motor, bldc FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

SAM-JC31-00144A Motor, bldc Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 901
SAM-JC31-00146A Fan Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC31-00149A Step motor ip Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC31-00158A Step motor, ip Flow ADF image scanner

on page 837
SAM-JC31-00160C Fan, type 6 Main assembly 2 on page 797
SAM-JC31-00163A Step motor, ip sHCI main 3 on page 865
SAM-JC31-00163B Motor, step ip Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
SAM-JC31-00163B Motor step, ip Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
SAM-JC31-00168A Fan, dc Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC31-00169B Step motor ip Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC31-00177A Step motor, ip Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC31-00177A Step motor, ip Opt feed drive on page 849
SAM-JC31-00177A Motor step, ip HCI drive on page 855

SAM-JC31-00178A Motor, DC-stacker SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-JC32-00020A Sensor, rp Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897
SAM-JC32-00020A Sensor, rp Entrance guide, mid jam, and

SAM-JC32-00020A Sensor, rp Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
SAM-JC33-00029B MP solenoid MP tray on page 819
SAM-JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting Output on page 799
SAM-JC33-00037A Solenoid Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC33-00038A Solenoid FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

SAM-JC39-02204A Registration assembly, harness Main frame registration assembly

on page 807
SAM-JC39-02268A DCF, t1mot harness DCF frame on page 845
SAM-JC39-02276A DCF, main harness DCF frame on page 845
SAM-JC39-02278A DCF, sub harness DCF frame on page 845
SAM-JC39-02279A Harness, mot HCI HCI frame on page 859
SAM-JC39-02283A Harness, main if HCI HCI frame on page 859
SAM-JC39-02284A Harness, heater HCI HCI frame on page 859
SAM-JC39-02285A Harness, sub if HCI HCI frame on page 859
SAM-JC39-02286A Harness, inner tray HCI HCI frame on page 859
SAM-JC39-02287A sHCI, mot harness sHCI main 3 on page 865
SAM-JC39-02288A sHCI, plow harness sHCI main 5 on page 867
SAM-JC39-02288A sHCI, plow harness sHCI main 6 on page 869
SAM-JC39-02291A sHCI, connect sensor harness sHCI main 5 on page 867
SAM-JC39-02310A Harness, 3k finisher top cover Fold roller, main blade, and top
frame on page 901
SAM-JC39-02320A Harness, 3k finisher bm path Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
SAM-JC39-02322A Harness, 3k finisher output path Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 897
SAM-JC39-02327A Cable, 3k finisher IPTU sub IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-JC39-02328A Cable, 3k finisher IPTU PA IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-JC44-00091D LVPS (SMPS), 110V type 4 Main assembly 2 on page 797

SAM-JC44-00100D LVPS (SMPS), V2 Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC44-00222B LVPS (SMPS), 110v type 3 Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC44-00223B LVPS (SMPS), 220v type 3 Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC44-00235B Fuser drive board 110V Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC44-00236B Fuser drive board 220V Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC44-00241A HVPS Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC44-00249A LVPS (SMPS), 110V type 5H Main assembly 2 on page 797
SAM-JC44-00250A LVPS (SMPS), 220V type 5H Main assembly 2 on page 797
SAM-JC59-00036A HDD Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC60-00078A Machinery, fastener screw DCF main on page 843
SAM-JC61-00076A Spring, etc torsion doc (cc2-f) HCI cassette on page 857
SAM-JC61-00423A Bush-6, d Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
SAM-JC61-00423A Bush-6, d Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 901
SAM-JC61-00426A Bush, 8/5 Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
SAM-JC61-00426A Bush, 8/5 Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
SAM-JC61-00426A Bush, 8/5 Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 901
SAM-JC61-00884A Bush-6, dl DCF second pickup on page 851
SAM-JC61-00884A Bush-6, dl HCI main pickup on page 861
SAM-JC61-00884A Bush-6, dl Pickup cover unit on page 871
SAM-JC61-00884A Bush-6, d(l) IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-JC61-01288A Idle holder, one way Pickup cover unit on page 871
SAM-JC61-01742A Connector holder, scf HCI cassette on page 857
SAM-JC61-02372A Bush, D6/L4 SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-JC61-03002A Ground plate DCF rear frame on page 847
SAM-JC61-03331A Idle roller, cst HCI frame on page 859
SAM-JC61-04871A DCF guide adjust DCF frame on page 845
SAM-JC61-04871A Adjust guide, DCF HCI frame on page 859
SAM-JC61-06567A Link holder, hinge f sHCI main 1 on page 863
SAM-JC61-06568A Link holder, hinge r sHCI main 1 on page 863
SAM-JC61-06663A Frame mount Mainline finisher 4 on page 883

SAM-JC61-06988A Feed guide Right door guide on page 821
SAM-JC61-07189A Guide, com ceil Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
SAM-JC61-07192A Safety guide Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
SAM-JC61-07196A Guide, top jam Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 897
SAM-JC61-07204A Guide, buff div Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
SAM-JC61-07205A Guide, diverter Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897
SAM-JC61-07206A Guide, pusher Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC61-07225A Paddle holder Entrance motor, low paddle,

on page 895
SAM-JC61-07247A Guide-l, entrance SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-JC61-07279A Leg bracket Shield on page 915
SAM-JC61-07372A Spring, ts Right door on page 817
SAM-JC61-07391A Spring, es Three fold blade on page 903
SAM-JC61-07392A Spring, ts Shield on page 915
SAM-JC61-07401A Spring, ts FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

SAM-JC61-07403A Spring, cs FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

SAM-JC61-07408A Spring, es Entrance guide, mid jam, and

SAM-JC61-07409A Spring, es Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897
SAM-JC61-07409A Spring, ts Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
SAM-JC61-07410A Spring, ts Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897

jam on page 897

on page 909
SAM-JC61-07414A Spring, es Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
SAM-JC61-07415A Spring, es Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897


jam on page 897

on page 909
SAM-JC61-07430A Spring, es Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
SAM-JC61-07431A Spring, es Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
SAM-JC61-07432A Spring, ts IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-JC61-07449A Compile guide, front Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC61-07450A Compile guide, rear Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC61-07471A Cassette guide rail HCI cassette on page 857
SAM-JC61-07694A Fan motor housing Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC62-01328A Top-seal, guide Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC62-01328A Guide, seal-top Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897
SAM-JC63-02102A Right cover, rear Cover on page 815
SAM-JC63-03776A Sheet sensor DCF second pickup on page 851
SAM-JC63-04750B Cover, rear Finisher sub 1 on page 925
SAM-JC63-04792B Cover, main Finisher sub 1 on page 925
SAM-JC63-04797B Tray cover HCI main on page 853
SAM-JC63-04797B Feed drive, HCI HCI main on page 853
SAM-JC63-04797B Left cover sHCI main 1 on page 863
SAM-JC63-04797B Finisher sub-tray Sub-inner finisher on page 923
SAM-JC63-04798B Pickup cover sHCI main 1 on page 863
SAM-JC63-04799A Pickup cover lever Pickup cover unit on page 871
SAM-JC63-04840B Output cover, rear Cover on page 815
SAM-JC63-04846B Right cover, upper Cover on page 815
SAM-JC63-04847B Right cover, front Cover on page 815
SAM-JC63-04859C Scan cover, rear Cover on page 815
SAM-JC63-04861B Front cover, lower Cover on page 815
SAM-JC63-04862B Left cover, top Cover on page 815
SAM-JC63-04863B Rear cover, dummy Cover on page 815

SAM-JC63-04910B Front cover, mp Right door on page 817
SAM-JC63-04916B Side cover, upper Right door on page 817
SAM-JC63-04918B Cover, dummy sHCI Right door on page 817
SAM-JC63-04920B Side cover Right door on page 817
SAM-JC63-04957A Paddle absorber, rubber a Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC63-04958A Paddle absorber, rubber b Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC63-04984A Ground-c, safety Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
SAM-JC63-04985B Caster cover Booklet finisher on page 875
SAM-JC63-04985B Caster cover Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
SAM-JC63-04986B Cover, front Booklet finisher on page 875
SAM-JC63-04986B Front cover Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
SAM-JC63-04987B Cover-f, lower Booklet finisher on page 875
SAM-JC63-04987B Cover-f, lower Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
SAM-JC63-04988B Cover, rear Booklet finisher on page 875
SAM-JC63-04988B Rear cover Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
SAM-JC63-04995B Cover-t, tray Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC63-04996B Cover-t, tray 2 Booklet finisher on page 875
SAM-JC63-04996B Cover-t, tray 2 Mainline finisher 6 on page 887
SAM-JC63-04999B Cover, stacker Shield on page 915
SAM-JC63-05002B Cover-m, tray Booklet finisher on page 875
SAM-JC63-05002B Cover-m, tray Mainline finisher 6 on page 887
SAM-JC63-05003B Cover-s, tray Booklet finisher on page 875
SAM-JC63-05003B Cover-s, tray Mainline finisher 6 on page 887
SAM-JC63-05004A Cover, link Door, top door, top cover, and

SAM-JC63-05041A Sheet-fold output Three fold blade on page 903
SAM-JC63-05044A Sheet-jam guide Three fold blade on page 903
SAM-JC63-05238A Sponge white sheet Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC63-05566A Rear cover Flow ADF on page 827
SAM-JC63-05571A Scan cover, right Cover on page 815
SAM-JC63-05587A Scan cover, left Cover on page 815
SAM-JC63-05633A Rear cover, upper Cover on page 815
SAM-JC63-05638A Left cover, upper Cover on page 815
SAM-JC64-00710A Side locker Right door on page 817

SAM-JC64-00995A Button, staple Door, top door, top cover, and

SAM-JC64-00996A Button lens Door, top door, top cover, and

SAM-JC66-00977A Clutch one way1 DCF main on page 843
SAM-JC66-00977A Clutch one way DCF second pickup on page 851
SAM-JC66-00977A Clutch, one way Pickup cover unit on page 871
SAM-JC66-02270A Link cover, open Flow ADF on page 827
SAM-JC66-02289B Idle roller, rubber Right door guide on page 821
SAM-JC66-04199A Actuator, feed sensor Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC66-04200A Actuator tray limit Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC66-04243A Roller, feed-entrance Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC66-04244A Roller, feed-output Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC66-04276A Actuator, empty pickup Pickup cover unit on page 871
SAM-JC66-04277A Link door, rear 2 sHCI main 1 on page 863
SAM-JC66-04278A Link door, front 2 sHCI main 1 on page 863
SAM-JC66-04281A Belt HCI main pickup on page 861
SAM-JC66-04290A Actuator sHCI main 5 on page 867
SAM-JC66-04294A sHCI drive gear sHCI main 3 on page 865
SAM-JC66-04295A sHCI, feed pulley gear sHCI main 3 on page 865
SAM-JC66-04311A Agitator paddle, res Reservoir on page 841
SAM-JC66-04398A Link lever, d Right door on page 817
SAM-JC66-04400A Side link Right door on page 817
SAM-JC66-04405A Actuator lever, dup Right door guide on page 821
SAM-JC66-04406A Actuator lever, fuser out Right door output and takeaway
on page 823
SAM-JC66-04459A Actuator lever, empty MP tray on page 819
SAM-JC66-04469A Actuator, F_D full output Output on page 799
SAM-JC66-04520A Actuator, entrance feed SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-JC66-04523A Roller, click-feed Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
SAM-JC66-04525A Actuator, top-output Drive buffer, top lower, and top

jam on page 897
SAM-JC66-04526A Actuator, pusher Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC66-04528A Actuator-o, staple Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
SAM-JC66-04569A Actuator, sensor IPTU (bridge) on page 921

SAM-JC66-04573A Gear, double Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 901
SAM-JC66-04579A Gear, double Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
SAM-JC66-04583A Timing pulley FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

SAM-JC66-04591A Gear, helical Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 901
SAM-JC66-04592A Gear, helical 1 Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 901
SAM-JC66-04593A Gear, helical 2 Fold roller, main blade, and top

frame on page 901
SAM-JC66-04594A Gear, helical 3 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

SAM-JC66-04595A Gear, helical 4 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

SAM-JC66-04602A Gear, buffer Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC66-04604A Gear-db, gear SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-JC66-04606A Feed roller sHCI main 6 on page 869
SAM-JC66-04607A Feed roller1 DCF main on page 843
SAM-JC66-04607A Opt feed roller DCF second pickup on page 851
SAM-JC66-04607A Feed roller HCI main pickup on page 861
SAM-JC66-04625A Roller feed Frame main pickup on page 813
SAM-JC66-04628A Roller, feed-duplex 1 Right door on page 817
SAM-JC66-04629A Roller, feed-duplex 2 Right door on page 817
SAM-JC66-04644A Actuator, te-press1 SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-JC66-04653A Roller feed, output 2 Output on page 799
SAM-JC66-04670A Feed roller opt1 DCF main on page 843
SAM-JC66-04670A Feed roller HCI main pickup on page 861
SAM-JC66-04719A Rooler, feed-lower bm Entrance motor, low paddle,

on page 895
SAM-JC66-04721A Roller, feed-fold output Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
SAM-JC66-04722A Roller, main-feed entrance Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
SAM-JC66-04723A Roller, output-feed bm Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
SAM-JC66-04724A Roller, mid-feed output Mainline finisher 2 on page 879

SAM-JC66-04725A Roller, top-feed mid output Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
SAM-JC66-04726A Roller, main-feed output Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
SAM-JC66-04727A Roller, top-feed output Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC66-04732A Roller, brg-feed IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-JC66-04733A Roller, brg-feed entrance IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-JC66-04744A Roller, output-3 fold Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
SAM-JC66-04767A Shaft, hinge-door Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
SAM-JC66–04279A Link door sHCI main 1 on page 863
SAM-JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter Frame main pickup on page 813
SAM-JC67-00455A Coupler1 DCF main on page 843
SAM-JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter HCI main pickup on page 861
SAM-JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter sHCI main 6 on page 869
SAM-JC67-00464A Coupler, torque limiter DCF second pickup on page 851
SAM-JC67-00711A Screw cap sHCI main 1 on page 863
SAM-JC67-00817A Main-brush, output Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
SAM-JC67-00818A Top-brush output Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
SAM-JC67-00819A Compiler-brush, ceiling rear Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
SAM-JC67-00820A Compiler-brush, ceiling front Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
SAM-JC70-40360A Ict-pin, paralled, p/u Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
SAM-JC70-40542A Cartridge, ICT-PIN SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-JC81-07637A Stacker, CSP-worm SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-JC81-08263A Magnet, as Door, top door, top cover, and

SAM-JC81-08263A Magent, as by3-32-1 Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
SAM-JC81-08263A AS-Magnet BY3-32-1 IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-JC90-01115A Pickup drive HCI main on page 853
SAM-JC90-01310A Finisher sub-paper support Sub-inner finisher on page 923
SAM-JC90-01311A Finisher sub-paper support, rear Sub-inner finisher on page 923
SAM-JC90-01313A Finisher sub-actuator tray Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC90-01314A Finisher sub-actuator tray sensor Finisher sub 8 on page 929

SAM-JC90-01315A Finisher sub-alignment, front Sub-inner finisher on page 923
SAM-JC90-01317A Finisher sub-alignment, rear Sub-inner finisher on page 923
SAM-JC90-01319A Finisher sub-tray frame Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC90-01320A Finisher sub-tray lower limit Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC90-01321B Finisher sub-cover, front Finisher sub 1 on page 925
SAM-JC90-01322B Finisher sub-cover, middle Finisher sub 1 on page 925
SAM-JC90-01323B Finisher sub-cover, compile Finisher sub 1 on page 925
SAM-JC90-01324B Finisher sub-stacker plate Finisher sub 1 on page 925
SAM-JC90-01332A Finisher sub-ejector Sub-inner finisher on page 923
SAM-JC90-01334A Finisher sub-motor tray Sub-inner finisher on page 923
SAM-JC90-01336A Finisher sub-guide output, lower Sub-inner finisher on page 923
SAM-JC90-01342A Finisher sub-staple Sub-inner finisher on page 923
SAM-JC90-01342A Finisher sub-staple Finisher sub 7 on page 927
SAM-JC90-01343A Finisher sub-staple Sub-inner finisher on page 923
SAM-JC90-01343A Finisher sub-punch dummy Finisher sub 7 on page 927
SAM-JC90-01344A Finisher sub-entrance motor Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC90-01352B MP Right door on page 817
SAM-JC90-01353A MP feed guide MP tray on page 819
SAM-JC90-01355A MP bracket, pickup MP tray on page 819
SAM-JC90-01357B MP sub-tray MP tray on page 819
SAM-JC90-01370A Output 1 Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC90-01371A Output, guide upper Output on page 799
SAM-JC90-01372A Output, guide lower Output on page 799
SAM-JC90-01373A Output 2 Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC90-01374A Output, upper 2 Output on page 799
SAM-JC90-01375A Output, lower 2 Output on page 799
SAM-JC90-01382A HCI, sub-auto closer HCI main on page 853
SAM-JC90-01385A DCF sub-takeaway interlock DCF frame on page 845
SAM-JC90-01394A Finisher sub-guide three fold Three fold blade on page 903
SAM-JC90-01395A Finisher sub-output roller Three fold blade on page 903
SAM-JC90-01396A Finisher sub-3 fold mtr Three fold motor, curl pawl
output on page 889

SAM-JC90-01398A Finisher sub-curl pawl Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
SAM-JC90-01399A Finisher sub-3 fold output Three fold motor, curl pawl
output on page 889
SAM-JC90-01400A Finisher sub-low output Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
SAM-JC90-01402A Finisher sub-hb mtr IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-JC90-01404A Finisher sub-clutch drive Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC90-01404A Finisher sub-clutch drive IPTU (bridge) on page 921
SAM-JC90-01406A Finisher sub-guide top Low output, hb motor, and top

guide on page 891
SAM-JC90-01409A Finisher sub-ejector unit Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
SAM-JC90-01412A Finisher sub-staple unit Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
SAM-JC90-01414A Finisher sub-scu mtr Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
SAM-JC90-01414A Finisher sub-scu motor SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-JC90-01415A Finisher sub-stk mtr Mainline finisher 4 on page 883
SAM-JC90-01415A Finisher sub-stk motor SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-JC90-01416A Finisher sub-booklet unit Booklet finisher on page 875
SAM-JC90-01416A Finisher sub-booklet unit Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
SAM-JC90-01417B Finisher sub-tray bm unit Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
SAM-JC90-01424A Finisher sub-entrance guide SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-JC90-01429A Finisher sub-low paddle Entrance motor, low paddle,

on page 895
SAM-JC90-01432A Finisher sub-fd stopper unit FD stopper unit, jam clear, and
SAM-JC90-01433A Finisher sub-jam clear FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

SAM-JC90-01435A Finisher sub-bkt main blade FD stopper unit, jam clear, and
SAM-JC90-01437A Finisher sub-main blade Fold roller, main blade, and top
frame on page 901
SAM-JC90-01440A Finisher sub-top frame Fold roller, main blade, and top
frame on page 901
SAM-JC90-01444A Finisher sub-door Door, top door, top cover, and


SAM-JC90-01445B Finisher sub-top door Booklet finisher on page 875
SAM-JC90-01445B Finisher sub-top door Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
SAM-JC90-01445B Finisher sub-top door Door, top door, top cover, and
SAM-JC90-01446B Finisher sub-top cover Booklet finisher on page 875
SAM-JC90-01446B Finisher sub-top cover Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
SAM-JC90-01446B Finisher sub-top cover Door, top door, top cover, and
SAM-JC90-01448B Finisher sub-regist guide Mainline finisher 5 on page 885
SAM-JC90-01450A Finisher sub-mid jam Entrance guide, mid jam, and

SAM-JC90-01451A Finisher sub-output main Entrance guide, mid jam, and

SAM-JC90-01453A Finisher sub-drv buff Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC90-01454A Finisher sub-top lower Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 897
SAM-JC90-01455A Finisher sub-top jam Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
SAM-JC90-01455A Finisher sub-top jam Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 897
SAM-JC90-01456A Finisher sub-trans buff Mainline finisher 2 on page 879
SAM-JC90-01456A Finisher sub-trans buff Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
SAM-JC90-01457A Finisher sub-right jam Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
SAM-JC90-01457A Finisher sub-right jam Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
SAM-JC90-01458A Finisher sub-div cam Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC90-01458A Finisher sub-div cam Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
SAM-JC90-01459A Finisher sub-hb mtr Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC90-01459A Finisher sub-hb motor Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
SAM-JC90-01462A Finisher sub-paddle, mid PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 917
SAM-JC90-01463A Finisher sub-paddle, wing PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 917
SAM-JC90-01464A Finisher sub-alignment front Mainline finisher 1 on page 877

SAM-JC90-01464A Finisher sub-alignment, front Front alignment (tamper)

on page 911
SAM-JC90-01465A Finisher sub-alignment rear Mainline finisher 1 on page 877
SAM-JC90-01465A Finisher sub-alignment, rear Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 913
SAM-JC90-01466A Finisher sub-end stopper Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC90-01467A Finisher sub-ef mtr Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC90-01474A Finisher sub-clutch div Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC90-01476A Finisher sub-base low Shield on page 915
SAM-JC90-01477A Finisher sub-pcb bm PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 917
SAM-JC90-01478A Finisher sub-cover f bm Booklet finisher on page 875
SAM-JC90-01478B Finisher sub-cover f bm PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 917
SAM-JC90-01479A Finisher sub-idle fold PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 917
SAM-JC90-01480A Finisher sub-paddle PCB bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and
paddle on page 917
SAM-JC90-01502A Finisher sub-booklet 4 Finisher sub booklet on page 919
SAM-JC90-01610A Cassette Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC90-01610A Cassette First cassette on page 801
SAM-JC90-01611A Cassette Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC90-01611A Cassette Second cassette on page 803
SAM-JC90-01642A HCI, cassette HCI main on page 853
SAM-JC90-01642A HCI cassette HCI cassette on page 857
SAM-JC90-01646A HCI sub-takeaway HCI main on page 853
SAM-JC90-01649A DCF, sub-takeaway DCF main on page 843
SAM-JC90-01652 Cassette, fifth DCF main on page 843
SAM-JC90-01654 Cassette, fourth DCF main on page 843
SAM-JC90-01660A Rear cover, sHCI sHCI main 1 on page 863
SAM-JC90-01673A Motor Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC90-01675A Solenoid Mainline finisher 3 on page 881
SAM-JC90-01677 DCF, sub-auto closing DCF main on page 843
SAM-JC90-01679 DCF first pickup DCF main on page 843
SAM-JC90-01680 DCF second pickup DCF main on page 843
SAM-JC90–01369A Output Main assembly on page 795

SAM-JC91-01194A Fuser 220V Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC91-01195A Fuser assembly 110V Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC92-02622A PCA, paper size sensor DCF rear frame on page 847
SAM-JC92-02738A DCF PCA DCF frame on page 845
SAM-JC92-02738B HCI PCA HCI frame on page 859
SAM-JC92-02774A Inner finisher PCA Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC92-02780A Rear join PCA Finisher sub 8 on page 929
SAM-JC92-02789A PCA, 3k switch Door, top door, top cover, and

SAM-JC92-02964A Flow ADF, PCA high Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC93-00018A Main frame rear auto-size holder DCF rear frame on page 847
SAM-JC93-00466A Front door switch open Main assembly frame

on page 805
SAM-JC93-00486A Frame main, humidity sensor Main assembly frame

on page 805
SAM-JC93-00492A Frame main, TCU sensor Main assembly frame

on page 805
SAM-JC93-00540B Pickup roller, main frame MP tray on page 819
SAM-JC93-00802A Drive, motor step Output on page 799
SAM-JC93-01001A Drive motor, step Entrance motor, low paddle,

on page 895
SAM-JC93-01001A Drive motor, step Transfer buffer, right jam, div

on page 909
SAM-JC93-01001A Driver motor, step Front alignment (tamper)

on page 911
SAM-JC93-01001A Driver motor, step Rear alignment (tamper)

on page 913
SAM-JC93-01001A Drive motor, step Shield on page 915
SAM-JC93-01026B Frame holder dust assembly, TF Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC93-01044A Frame, left cst rail assembly DCF frame on page 845
SAM-JC93-01045A Frame, right cst rail assembly DCF frame on page 845
SAM-JC93-01049A Main drive, common mono Drive system on page 809
SAM-JC93-01060A Drive main, mono Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC93-01061A Drive registration assembly Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC93-01062A Drive, feed Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC93-01063A Drive pickup Main assembly on page 795

SAM-JC93-01063B Pickup drive DCF main on page 843
SAM-JC93-01064A Drive fuser, output Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC93-01066B Drive, toner mono Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC93-01067A Reservoir drive Reservoir on page 841
SAM-JC93-01071A Reservoir Main assembly 2 on page 797
SAM-JC93-01071A Frame reservoir Reservoir on page 841
SAM-JC93-01083A Drive, motor step Drive system on page 809
SAM-JC93-01083A Drive motor, step HCI drive on page 855
SAM-JC93-01083A Drive motor, step sHCI main 3 on page 865
SAM-JC93-01084A Drive, motor step Drive system on page 809
SAM-JC93-01085A Drive motor, step Right door on page 817
SAM-JC93-01091A Pickup roller HCI main pickup on page 861
SAM-JC93-01092A Frame main, pickup roller Frame main pickup on page 813
SAM-JC93-01092A Frame, main pickup roller DCF second pickup on page 851
SAM-JC93-01092A Frame, main pickup roller sHCI main 6 on page 869
SAM-JC93-01092A Frame, main pickup roller Pickup cover unit on page 871
SAM-JC93-01096A Frame main pickup 1 Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC93-01104A Frame main pickup 2 Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC93-01115A Pickup drive HCI drive on page 855
SAM-JC93-01116A Main frame registration assebly Main assembly frame

on page 805
SAM-JC93-01117A PTB transfer PTB transfer on page 825
SAM-JC93-01118A Lift drive, shift HCI main on page 853
SAM-JC93-01119A Drive takeaway roller HCI main on page 853
SAM-JC93-01123A Frame interlock sHCI assemlby sHCI frame on page 873
SAM-JC93-01124A Frame latch, rear sensor assembly sHCI frame on page 873
SAM-JC93-01135A Feed drive opt DCF main on page 843
SAM-JC93-01135A Opt feed drive Opt feed drive on page 849
SAM-JC93-01139A HCI main HCI main pickup on page 861
SAM-JC93-01152A Driver motor, step Entrance motor, low paddle,

on page 895
SAM-JC93-01153A Drive motor, step Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889

SAM-JC93-01154A Drive motor, step Three fold motor, curl pawl

output on page 889
SAM-JC93-01155A Drive motor, step Entrance motor, low paddle,

on page 895
SAM-JC93-01155A Drive motor, step Drive buffer, top lower, and top
jam on page 897
SAM-JC93-01155A Drive motor, step FD stopper unit, jam clear, and

SAM-JC93-01156A Drive motor, step SCU motor, STK motor, and

SAM-JC93-01181A Tray heaters Main assembly 2 on page 797
SAM-JC93-01239B HDD bracket assembly frame Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC93-01322B HCI, main pickup HCI main on page 853
SAM-JC93-01370A Frame sub, rear bottom Main assembly frame

on page 805
SAM-JC93-0192A Pick rollers1 DCF main on page 843
SAM-JC95-01968A Side cover, output Right door output and takeaway

on page 823
SAM-JC95-01969A Side cover guide Right door guide on page 821
SAM-JC95-01970A Side cover, link Right door on page 817
SAM-JC95-01972A Side cover, takeaway Right door output and takeaway

on page 823
SAM-JC95-01987A Right door mono Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC95-02098A Cover Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC95-02100A Left cover Cover on page 815
SAM-JC95-02101A Output cover Cover on page 815
SAM-JC95-02103A Front cover Cover on page 815
SAM-JC95-02104A Inner cover Cover on page 815
SAM-JC95-02105A Right cover, middle Cover on page 815
SAM-JC95-02106A Cover Cover on page 815
SAM-JC95-02117A Rear cover Cover on page 815
SAM-JC95-02118A Scan cover, front Cover on page 815
SAM-JC96-09859A Cartridge sub-cover, rear PTB transfer on page 825
SAM-JC96-09860A Cartridge sub-guide, upper PTB transfer on page 825
SAM-JC96-09861A Cartridge sub-cover, front PTB transfer on page 825
SAM-JC96-09862A Cartridge sub-cleaning blade PTB transfer on page 825

SAM-JC96-09863A Cartridge sub-belt PTB PTB transfer on page 825
SAM-JC96-11599A Cartridge, developer unit Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC96-11638A Cartridge, TCU Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC97-04515A Image scanner, lower Flow ADF image scanner

on page 837
SAM-JC97-04516A Image scanner, open sensor Flow ADF image scanner

on page 837
SAM-JC97-04520C Image scanner Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC97-04523B Image scanner Flow ADF image scanner, lower

on page 839
SAM-JC97-04574A Laser scanner assembly Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC97-04640A Flow ADF, hinge l Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC97-04641A Flow ADF, hinge r Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC97-04646B Flow ADF pickup, upper Flow ADF on page 827
SAM-JC97-04650A Flow ADF pickup, sub Flow ADF pickup roller assembly
on page 831
SAM-JC97-04652A Flow ADF, separation cover Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC97-04656B Flow ADF, scan in lower Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC97-04658B Flow ADF stacker Flow ADF stacker on page 833
SAM-JC97-04661A Flow ADF, housing separation roller Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC97-04662A ADF e-duplex Main assembly on page 795
SAM-JC97-04668B Flow ADF, exterior Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC97-04679A Flow ADF, lift drive Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC97-04680A Flow ADF, feed drive motor Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC97-04681A Flow ADF, pickup release drive Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC97-04682A Flow ADF, release drive scan Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC97-04687A Flow ADF, white simplex roller Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC97-04692A Flow ADF, damper Flow ADF on page 827
SAM-JC97-04696B Flow ADF cover, open lower Flow ADF open cover on page 829
SAM-JC97-04830A Flow ADF, scan out Flow ADF main on page 835
SAM-JC97-04869A Flow ADF cover, open Flow ADF open cover on page 829
SAM-JC97-04872A Flow ADF pickup, upper Flow ADF on page 827
SAM-JC97-04879A Flow ADF, dummy front Flow ADF on page 827
SAM-JC97-04880A Flow ADF, bottom cover Flow ADF on page 827
SAM-JC97-04881A Flow ADF, front cover Flow ADF on page 827

SAM-JC97-04882A Flow ADF, main frame sGX (dn models only) Flow ADF on page 827
SAM-JC97-04883A Flow ADF, main frame Flow ADF on page 827
SAM-JC98-04473A Stapler-etc assembly Finisher sub 7 on page 927

5 Problem solving
● Troubleshooting process
● Tools for troubleshooting
● Clear paper jams
● Service mode (tech mode)
● Print quality troubleshooting guide
● Adjusting the Flow ADF skew
ENWW 973
Troubleshooting process
Determine the problem source
When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts you to the
situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem.
A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem. The remainder of this chapter
provides steps for correcting problems.
● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart
guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction.
Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:
● Are supply items within their rated life?
● Are supply items Genuine HP supplies?
● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?
NOTE: The customer or service provider is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in
good condition.
Power subsystem
Power-on checks
The basic printer functions should start up when the printer is connected into an electrical outlet and the power
switch is pushed to the on position. If the printer does not start, use the information in this section to isolate and
solve the problem.
If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control-panel
display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.
Power-on troubleshooting overview
During normal operation, a cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on. Place your hand
over the vents at the rear of the printer, next to the formatter, or on the on the rear of the scanner. If the fan is
operating, you will feel air passing out of the printer. You can lean close to the printer and hear the fan operating.
A fan begins to blow on the right door (fuser), and then the control panel goes through a series of set up
functions. The main motor turns on (unless the left door or cartridge access door is open, a jam condition is
sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly determine if the
main motor is turned on.
If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine,
formatter, and control panel problems.
If the control panel is blank 1 minute after turning on the printer, check the following items:
1. Make sure that the printer is connected directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip) that
delivers the correct voltage.
2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position, and then verify that the LED is on.
3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.
974 Chapter 5 Problem solving ENWW

4. Depress the button on the back of the control panel to test the control panel functionality.
5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness is connected.
6. Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the printer on again.
Troubleshooting a blank display, black display, no display, or no power situation
Customers usually report that the control-panel display is not showing anything. It is very important to collect as
much information as possible from the customer about the issue to help resolve it.
Following are some printer behaviors the customer might encounter:
● The control panel is completely blank (no LEDs or back light).
● The control Panel is blank, but there might be LEDs illuminated.
● The control Panel is blank (LEDs are on or flashing) and the back light is on (but no text visible).
Following are some possible causes of a blank control-panel display:
● No power to the printer.
● The control panel contrast setting is not correctly adjusted.
● The formatter connector(s) are not fully seated into the connector(s) on the DC controller, or the
connectors are not fully seated on the formatter.
● A faulty component is installed on the formatter (for example a memory DIMM, fax PCA, network PCA, USB
device, or other component).
● The formatter is defective.
● The control panel connector is not fully seated, or the control panel is defective.
● The DC controller is defective.
Following are some questions to ask the customer:
● Was the printer newly install or has the printer been properly functioning?
– For a new install, investigate to see if there was any shipping damage to the printer.
– Did the customer notice any damage to the shipping box or any visible damage to the printer?
● What happened just prior to the control panel going blank?
– Was the printer serviced recently, a power outage occurred?
– Has a lightning storm recently occurred?
– Did the customer recently add a memory DIMM or install a third-party component?
● Make sure to get a complete description of the failure.
– Is the control-panel display completely blank (might be faint text and no back light)?
– Is the control-panel display back light on?
– Has a print job been sent to the printer? The customer might report that their print jobs seemed to
print but when they go to the printer the control-panel display is blank.
ENWW Troubleshooting process 975

Recommended actions
If the control-panel display is completely blank (no LEDs illuminated or no back light) check to see if the printer is
getting power. Listen for fans or any printer initialization sounds when the power is turned on.
If there are no signs of power, then perform the following:
1. Make sure that the printer is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip or
interruptible power supply) that delivers the correct voltage.
TIP: Try using a different power cable if possible.
2. Turn the printer power on, and make sure that the fan(s) run briefly (this indicates that the power supply is
operational).
3. Check if the yellow LED on formatter is flashing. If so, there is a communication issue between the
formatter and the control panel.
4. Turn the printer power off.
5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness (and/or flat cable) is properly connected (and fully
seated), and then turn the printer power on again.
6. Check control panel diagnostics by pressing the button on the back of the control panel to run different
diagnostic tests.
7. Verify the status LEDs are illuminated, but the control-panel display is blank. If applicable: Check if the
contrast setting is adjusted to very low. If so, try turning the contrast knob to see if the control-panel
display becomes visible.
8. From a host computer, send a print job to the printer.
NOTE: If the print job correctly prints, then the problem is most likely to a defective control panel.
9. Turn the printer power off, and then make sure that the memory DIMM is installed in the correct slot and is
fully seated.
NOTE: For some printers, there may be more than one memory DIMM installed. Some printers have third-
party solutions/applications or fonts that use memory.
10. Remove all of the components/accessories installed on the formatter (for example, hard drive, solid-state
drive, memory DIMM(s), fax PCA, network PCA, USB devices, or other devices).
● Make sure that the formatter is fully seated.
IMPORTANT: This is important because the formatter or a component on the formatter might be
defective or shorted, which causes the printer to lose power.
11. Reinstall the formatter. Make sure that it makes a good connection and is fully seated.
Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are correctly connected and fully seated.
12. Turn the printer power on, and then check the control-panel display.
13. If the printer control panel is properly working, replace each removed component (one at a time) to
determine which one is causing the problem.

CAUTION: Turn the printer power off, and then on again, after replacing a component on the formatter.
14. If the control-panel display is still blank after performing the above troubleshooting steps, and the control
panel diagnostics do not function, replace the control panel. If the control panel diagnostics are
functioning, then replace the formatter.

Control panel checks
Control panel diagnostic flowcharts
Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.
● Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image).
● Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond.
● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.
● No control panel sound.
● Home button is unresponsive.
● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)
NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.
Figure 5-1 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)

Black display White display Dim display
(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)
Is the Home button

Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.
Touch the display or Home button

to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.
Turn the product power off.

Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter cables.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?
Are the formatter

LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y
Do not replace the control panel.

N Turn the product power off.
Check connection and cables on the formatter
and at the comtrol panel.
Turn the product power off. N

Remove and reseat the formatter
cables.
Do not replace the control panel.
N
Replace the
control panel.

Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Figure 5-2 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone

Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone
Is the area of the

touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?
Open the
Perform the
touch test.
Does the previously

inactive area respond
to a touch?
Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.
Replace the Does the previously

N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?
Do not replace the

control panel.

No control panel sound
Figure 5-3 No control panel sound
Control panel
has no
sound
Open the following menus:

Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save
Can sounds
be heard?
N
Y
Open the
Perform the sound test.
Can sounds
be heard?
Y
N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Turn the product power off.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?

Home button is unresponsive
Figure 5-4 Home button is unresponsive

Home button
unresponsive
Note: If illuminated: continue.
If not illumated: verify that
the power is turned on,
the printer is not in sleep mode,
tunr the power off, and
then on agian.
Open the
Perform the Home
button test.
Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Turn the product power off,

and then on again.
Open the
Perform the
Home button test.
Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y
Replace the Do not replace the

control panel. control panel.

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Figure 5-5 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)
Check that all installed hardware integration

pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.
Individual component diagnostics
Tools for troubleshooting: LED diagnostics
LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot printer problems.
Understand lights on the formatter
Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly.
Figure 5-6 LEDs
1 Heartbeat LED
2 HP Jetdirect LEDs

HP Jetdirect LEDs
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green
LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has
failed.
For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, try to manually configure the link settings
on the embedded print server by using the printer control-panel menus.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.
2. Open the following menus:
● Networking
● Ethernet
● Link Speed
3. Select the appropriate link speed, and then select OK.

Tools for troubleshooting: Engine diagnostics
The printer contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper path,
noise, assembly, and timing issues.
Defeating interlocks
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the diagnostic
test when the toner cartridge door or right door is open.
Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation (and view the page enter
registration).
WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service personnel
should open and run the diagnostics with a door open. Never touch any of the power supplies when the printer is
turned on.
Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock
1. Open the toner cartridge door.
2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in) strips,
and insert the strips into the slot for the cartridge door logic switches.
Figure 5-7 Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock
Defeat the front door interlock
1. Open the front door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in) strips,
and insert the strips into the slot for the front door logic switches.
Figure 5-8 Defeat the front door interlock

Tools for troubleshooting
Use the procedure below to test various printer mechanical and electromechanical assemblies.
Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test)
This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.
Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.
Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.
NOTE: The cartridge door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests.
Access the individual component diagnostics from a touchscreen control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.
2. Select one of the following tests:
● Continuous Scan
● Run Fax Test
3. Select the component test options for the test.

Tools for troubleshooting
Problem-solving checklist
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the printer.
● Step 1: Check that the printer power is on
● Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages
● Step 3: Test print functionality
● Step 4: Test copy functionality
● Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality
● Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality
● Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer
● Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality
● Factors that affect printer performance
Step 1: Check that the printer power is on

1. Make sure that the printer is plugged in and turned on. The power button should be lit with a white light. If
it is not, press the power button. If the power button does not light up, check the following conditions.
● Make sure that the power cable is connected to the printer and the outlet.
● Check the power source by connecting the power cable to a different outlet.
2. If the printer motors do not rotate, make sure that the toner cartridges are installed and that the doors are
all closed. The control panel displays messages to indicate these problems.
Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages

The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error.
Print a supplies status page to ensure that the supplies are not at or over end of life.
NOTE: HP long-life consumable and maintenance kit life specifications are estimations. Actual individual life or
yield during normal use will vary depending on usage, environment, media, and other factors. Estimated life is
not an implied warranty.
Step 3: Test print functionality

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Reports button.
2. Open the Reports menu, touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu, select the Configuration Page item,
and then touch the Print button to print the report.
3. If the report does not print, make sure that paper is loaded in the tray, and check the control panel to see if
paper is jammed inside the printer.
NOTE: Make sure that the paper in the tray meets specifications for this printer.

Step 4: Test copy functionality
1. Place the configuration page into the ADF and make a copy. If paper does not feed smoothly through the
ADF, you might need to clean the ADF rollers and separation pad. Make sure that the paper meets
specifications for this printer.
2. Place the configuration page onto the scanner glass and make a copy.
3. If the print quality on the copied pages is not acceptable, clean the scanner glass and the small glass strip.
Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.
2. Open the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tools menu. Touch the Run Fax Test
button to test the fax functionality.
3. Touch the Fax on the printer control panel, and then touch the Start Fax button.
Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.
2. Touch the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tests menu. Touch the Run Fax Test
button to test the fax functionality.
3. Use another fax machine to send a fax to the printer.
4. Review and reset the printer fax settings.
Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer

1. Use a word-processing program to send a print job to the printer.
2. If the job does not print, make sure that you selected the correct printer driver.
3. Uninstall and then reinstall the printer software.
Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality
1. Load a .PDF document or .JPEG photo onto a USB flash drive, and insert it in the USB port near the control
panel.
2. The USB Flash Drive menu opens. Try printing the document or photo.
3. If no documents are listed, try a different type of USB flash drive.
Factors that affect printer performance

Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:
● The software program that you are using and its settings
● The use of special paper (such as heavy paper or custom-size paper)
● Printer processing and download time
● The complexity and size of graphics
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 989

● The speed of the computer you are using
● The USB or network connection
● Whether the printer is printing in color or in monochrome
● The type of USB drive, if you are using one
● Environmental factors, such as low temperature or high humidity

Print menu map
To more easily navigate individual settings, print a report of the complete Reports menu.
Print the menu map from a touchscreen control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.
2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.
3. Select the Settings Menu Map option.
4. Touch the Print button to print the report.
TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.
Print current settings pages

Printing the current settings page provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful in the
troubleshooting process.
Print the current settings page from a touchscreen control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.
2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.
3. Select the Current Settings Page option.
4. Touch the Print button to print the report.
TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.
Print event log

Printing the event log might be helpful in the troubleshooting process. For more information, see the Interpret
control-panel messages and event log entries section in the printer troubleshooting manual.
Print the event log from the Reports menu from a touchscreen control panel
2. Open the following menus:
● Troubleshooting
● Event Log
3. The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button.
Print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel
2. Open the Service menu.
3. Enter the following service access code for the printer:

● Access code: 04082517
4. Touch the Event Log item.
Clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel
2. Open the Service menu.
3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.
4. Enter the following service access code for the printer:
● Access code: 04082517
5. Select the trash icon to clear the event log.

Pre-boot menu options
The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.
CAUTION: The Format Disk option (printers with a hard-disk drive only) performs a disk initialization for the
entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost.
HP does not recommend this action.
TIP: The Pre-boot menu can be remotely accessed by using a telnet network protocol to establish an
administration connection to the printer. See Remote Admin on page 1002.
Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.
Figure 5-9 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2

2. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.
Figure 5-10 Pre-boot menu
Use this button to see more information about a selected item.
Use this button to scroll up through menu items.
Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.
Use this button to scroll down through menu items.
Use this button to go back to the previous menu.
Not used.
Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.
4. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.
Figure 5-11 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2
2. Use the button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.
3. Use the button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.
4. Use the button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to select it.
5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and then
touch the OK button.
NOTE: The printer will initialize.
NOTE: Some of the pre-boot options in the following tables are not supported by the current version of the
printer firmware and are included for information only. Future versions of firmware will support these options.
Table 5-1 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Pre-boot menu and
continues the normal boot process.
If a selection is not made in the initial menu within 30 seconds,

the printer returns to a normal boot (the same as selecting
Continue).
If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout does not

apply.
Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is required to

open the Pre-boot menu.
Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.
If authentication is required (and the user is not already signed

in) the Sign In prompt displays. The user is required to sign in.

Table 5-1 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7) (continued)
Download Network This item initiates a Pre-boot firmware download process. A

USB Thumbdrive option will work on all FutureSmart printers.
USB USB or Network connections are not currently supported.
USB Thumbdrive
Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk partitions.
CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item removes all data.
A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.
The system is not bootable after this action and a 99.09.67

error displays on the control panel. A firmware download must
be performed to return the system to a bootable state.
Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data except the
firmware repository where the master firmware bundle is
downloaded and saved).
CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item removes all data

except the firmware repository. A delete confirmation prompt
is not provided.
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations

and settings to factory defaults (customer configurations and
settings are lost).
This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing the

firmware image from the active directory without having to
download new firmware code (printer remains bootable).
Change Password Select this item to set or change the administrator password.
Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a password from
the Administrator menu. Before the password is actually
cleared, a message will be shown asking to confirm that the
password should be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm
the action.
When the confirmation prompt displays, press the OK button

to clear the password.

Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk Select the Clear disk item to enable using an external device
for job storage. Job storage is normally enabled only for the
(continued) Boot device. This will be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error
is displayed.

Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new secure disk to
this printer.
The secure disk already locked to this printer will remain

accessible to this printer. Use this function to have more than
one encrypted disk accessible by the printer when using them
interchangeably.
The data stored on the secure disk locked to this printer always
remains accessible to this printer.
Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure disk in an
unlocked mode for a single service event. The secure disk that
is already locked to this printer will remain accessible to this
printer and uses the old disk's encryption password with the
new disk.
The secure disk that is already locked to this printer remains

accessible to this printer.
Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the non-
secure disk and clear the password associated with the yet-to-
be installed secure disk.
CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be

permanently inaccessible.
Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-secure disk for
this session only, and then search for the missing secure disk
in future sessions.
Boot Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk
and unlock it if required.
This might take a long time.
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are
reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command is a one-pass
overwrite, which erases the entire disk including firmware. The
disk remains an encrypted disk.
Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all

data on the disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain
access to it from any printer.
reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The encryption key is
erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.
Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal device or
get a status about the internal device.
(continued) (continued)

Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the
disk and unlock it if required.
reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire
disk, including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.
Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of

the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow the user to gain
reinstalled. The HP High Performance Secure Hard Disk is
erased.
External Device Select the External Device item to erase the external device or
get status about the external device.
Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the
disk and unlock it if required.
reinstalled.
The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire disk,

including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.
Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of

the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain
reinstalled. The encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes
a non-encrypted disk.
Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [DHCP] The network can be configured to obtain the network
settings from a DHCP server or as static.
(continued) NOTE: This
configuration is only Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition from the
active when the Pre- DHCP server.
boot menu is open.
IP Mode [STATIC] Use this item to manually assign the network addresses.
IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.
Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.
Default Gateway Use this item to manually enter the default gateway.
Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.

Administrator Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options that can
be set for the next time the printer is turned on and
(continued) initializes to the Ready state.
Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision item to
allow the printer to initialize and show the firmware version
when the printer reaches the Ready state.
Once the printer power is turned on the next time, the Show
Revision item is unchecked so that the firmware revision is
not shown.
Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address and all
customer settings. (This item also returns all settings to
factory defaults.)
NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.
Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed third-
party applications.
Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to skip the printer calibration for the
very next power-initialization cycle only.
Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock the Service
menu access (both in the Pre-boot menu and the Device
Maintenance menu).
Service personnel must have the administrator remove the

Lock Service setting before they can open the Service menu.
Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/ScanVolume

during startup.
Administrator Startup Options First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the printer to
initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on.
(continued) (continued)
For example, the user is prompted to configure first-time
settings like date/time, language, and other settings.
Select this item so that it is enabled for the next time the
printer power is turned on.
When the printer power is turned on the next time, this item
is unchecked so that the pre-configured settings are used
during configuration, and the first-time setting prompt is not
used.
Embedded Jetdirect Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable the
Off embedded HP Jetdirect.
By default this item is unchecked so that HP Jetdirect is

always enabled.
WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the wireless
accessory.

Administrator Diagnostics Diagnostic items are useful to diagnose

hardware components and their interface
(continued) connections. Use these items to
troubleshoot specific hardware
components, and the interface between
them and other components.
Memory Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the
Memory diagnostic when executing multiple
diagnostics.
Short Use the Short item to select a brief memory

test.
NOTE: This test requires about four

minutes to execute.
Long Use the Long item to select an extended

memory test.
NOTE: This test requires about twenty

minutes to execute.
Disk Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the Disk
diagnostic when executing multiple
diagnostics.
Short Use the Short item to select a brief firmware

self-test.
NOTE: This test requires about two or

three minutes to execute.
Long Use the Long item to select an extended

firmware self-test.
NOTE: This test requires about sixty

minutes to execute.
Optimized Use the Optimized item to select a test that

checks the active sectors on the disk.
NOTE: This test requires about thirty

minutes to execute.
Raw Use the Raw item to select a test that

checks every sector on the disk.
NOTE: This test requires about fifty

minutes to execute.
Smart Use the Smart item to select a very brief

test that checks the drive self-monitoring
analysis and reporting technology (SMART)
status—the drive detects and reports
reliability indicators to help anticipate disk
failures (SMART status).
CPB Use the CPB item to verify the integrity of

the copy processor board (CPB) and the
formatter PCA connections.

Interconnect Use the Interconnect item to verify the

integrity of the interconnect PCA (ICB) and
its connections.
Run Selected Select the Run Selected item to execute a

selected test.
NOTE: If more than one test is selected,

they are executed in sequence.
Administrator Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to
access to the printer Pre-boot menu remotely, and to
(continued) navigate the menu selections from a remote location.
IMPORTANT: A Remote Admin connection must be

initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.
This person will also need to provide a randomly

generated PIN to the remote service technician.
NOTE: For more information about using the Remote

Admin function, see Remote Admin on page 1002.
Stop Telnet
Refresh IP
System Triage Copy Logs If the device will not boot to the Ready state, or the
diagnostic log feature found in the Troubleshooting menu
is not accessible, then use the System Triage item to copy
the diagnostic logs to a USB flash drive at the next printer
start up.
The files can then be sent to HP to help diagnose the

problem.
Change Svc PWD Use this item to change the Service menu personal
identification number (PIN).
Reset Svc PWD If the Service menu personal identification number (PIN)
has been changed. Use this item to reset it to the original
PIN.
Service Tools Reset Password Use this item to reset the Pre-boot administrator
password.
Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these values.
Developer Tools Netexec

Remote Admin
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The printer
functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any computer (with
telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and interact with the Pre-boot
menu.
IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security reasons
the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the printer.
This section describes the following Remote Admin items.
● Required software and network connection
● Connect a remote connection
● Disconnect a remote connection
Required software and network connection
Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed, and enabled, on
the remote telnet client computer.
NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a Windows®
operating system.
HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows based system, however, there are other
operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and configuring the
telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that operating system.

Telnet client
Enable the Windows telnet client
All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet client
function might not be enabled by default.
NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 7 Enterprise® operating system. Screens and
menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.
1. Use the Start menu to open the Control Panel, and then click the Programs item to select it.
Figure 5-12 Open the Control Panel
2. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item to select it.
Figure 5-13 Turn Windows features on or off

3. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the box to
select it, and then click the OK button.
TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the Cancel
button.
Figure 5-14 Enable the telnet client feature
Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin
function to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the printer. The
Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote access network security
programs.
If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network (VPN)
connection to the network.
Connect a remote connection
Start the telnet server function at the printer
For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.
NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how the
printer is configured.
1. Turn the printer on.
2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays, touch the
middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then
touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 5-15 Select the +3:Administrator item
4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 5-16 Select the +A:Remote Admin item
5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and then
touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 5-17 Select the 1:Start Telnet item
6. Do one of the following
● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to step 7.
Figure 5-18 Telnet connecting message
● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.

Figure 5-19 Telnet error message
a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.
b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.
○ The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use DHCP
instead.
○ The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.
c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.
7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the information on
this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.
NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.
● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.
● Port: The standard telnet port (23).
● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).
Figure 5-20 Telnet server function initialized
Start the telnet client function at the remote computer
The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.
1. From the Start menu click Run to open a dialog box, type cmd in the Open field, and then click the OK
button to open a Windows command window.

Figure 5-21 Open a command window
2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.
Figure 5-22 Start a telnet session
3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.
NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7 in Start the telnet
server function at the printer on page 1004.
TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall or on a
different network that the remote telnet client computer. See Network connection on page 1004.
Figure 5-23 Establish a telnet connection

4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7 in Start the telnet server function at the printer on page 1004 at
the prompt, and then press the Enter key.
IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer terminates
the Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the printer. See Start the
telnet server function at the printer on page 1004.
Figure 5-24 Enter the PIN
5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered and the Remote Admin connection is
successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see Pre-boot menu options
on page 993.
NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecure telnet network protocol connection, the
following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.
● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.
● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.
● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.
Figure 5-25 Remote Admin window
Disconnect a remote connection
The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet client
computer.
NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote telnet
client computer.

1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.
Figure 5-26 Access the administrator menu
2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press the
Enter key.
Figure 5-27 Access the remote admin menu
3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the Enter
key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer terminates.
IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present at the
printer do the following:
● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

Figure 5-28 Terminate the telnet connection
Control panel menus

You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for more
advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP address or host name in the
address bar of a web browser.
● Reports menu
● Settings menu
● Copy menu (MFP only)
● Scan menu (MFP only)
● Fax menu (fax models only)
● Print menu
● Supplies menu
● Trays menu
● Troubleshooting menu
● Maintenance menu
Reports menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select Reports.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 5-8 Reports menu

First level Second level Values Description
Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire control
panel system and the selected
View values for each setting.
Current Settings Page Print Shows a summary of the current

settings for the printer. This might
View be helpful if you plan to make
changes and need a record of the
present configuration.

Table 5-8 Reports menu (continued)
Configuration Page Print Shows the printer settings and

installed accessories.
View
How to Connect Page Print Shows the network information

typically needed to connect the
View printer to a network.
Supplies Status Page Print Shows the approximate remaining

life for the supplies; reports
View statistics on total number of pages
and jobs processed, serial number,
page counts, and maintenance
information.
HP provides approximations of the

remaining life for the supplies as a
customer convenience. The actual
remaining supply levels might be
different from the approximations
provided.
Usage Page Print Shows a count of all paper sizes

that have passed through the
View printer; lists whether they were
simplex, duplex, monochrome, or
color; and reports the page count.
File Directory Print Shows the file name and folder

name for files that are stored in the
View printer memory.
Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web Services
for the printer.
View
Color Usage Job Log Print Shows color jobs completed by the
printer.
View
Fax Reports (MFP fax models only) Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes that have
been sent from or received by this
View printer.
Billing Codes Report Print Provides a list of billing codes that

have been used for outgoing faxes.
View This report shows how many sent
faxes were billed to each code.
Blocked Fax List Print A list of phone numbers that are

blocked from sending faxes to this
View printer.
Speed Dial List Print Shows the speed dials that have
been set up for this printer.
View
Fax Call Report Print A detailed report of the last fax

operation, either sent or received.
View
Other Pages Demonstration Page Print Prints a demonstration page.

Table 5-8 Reports menu (continued)
RGB samples Print Prints color samples for different

RGB values. Use the samples as a
guide for matching printed colors.
CMYK samples Print Prints color samples for different

CMYK values. Use the samples as a
guide for matching printed colors.
PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts.
PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts.

Settings menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.
Table 5-9 Settings menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
General Date/Time Date/Time Format Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time
Settings Settings menu to
MMM/DD/YYYY specify the date
and time and to
YYYY/MMM/DD configure date/
time settings.
Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format

that the printer
24 hours uses to show the
date and time, for
example 12-hour
format or 24-hour
format.
Date/Time Date Select the time zone Select the time

from a list. zone, date, and
time that the
printer uses.
Time Select the date from a

pop-up calendar.
Time Zone Select the time from a

pop-up keypad.
Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled + (Add) Use to configure

events displays. the printer to
Edit automatically wake
up or go to sleep at
Delete specific times on
specific days. Using
this feature saves
energy.
NOTE: You must

configure the date
and time settings
before you can use
this feature.
New event Event Type Select whether to

add or edit a Wake
event or a Sleep
event, and then
select the time and
the days for the
wake or sleep
event.
Time Set the wake or

sleep event time
parameters.

Table 5-9 Settings menu (continued)
Event Days Select days of the Set the wake or

week from a list. sleep event day
parameters.
Sleep Settings Auto Off After Range: 1 to 110 Set the number of
Sleep minutes minutes after
which the printer
Sleep After Default = 0 minutes enters Sleep or
Inactivity Auto Off mode.
Touch the existing
HP Auto Off/Auto number to open
On the virtual keypad,
and then increase
Shut Down or decrease the
number of
minutes.
Wake/Auto On to All Events*

These Events
Network port
Power button only
Display Settings Display Brightness Automatic* The Manual setting Use to specify the
uses a slider to intensity of the LCD
Manual manually control the control panel
display brightness. display.
System Sound On* Use to specify

whether you hear a
Off sound when you
touch the screen or
press buttons on
the control panel.
Language Settings Language Select from a list of Use to select a

languages that the different language
printer supports. for control panel
messages and
specify the default
keyboard layout.
When you select a
new language, the
keyboard layout
automatically
changes to match
the factory default
for the selected
language.
Keyboard Layout Each language has a Select the default

default keyboard keyboard layout
M681z/M682z layout. To change it, that matches the
only select from a list of language you want
layouts. to use.
Information Screen Show connection Use this menu item

information* to display or hide
connection
Hide connection information on the
information Home screen.

DisplayDate and Show Date and Time* Select whether to

Time display or hide the
Hide Date and Time date and time on
M681/M682 only the control panel
Home screen.
Inactivity Timeout Range: 10-300 Specifies the

seconds amount of time
that elapses
Default = 60 seconds between any
activity on the
control panel and
when the printer
resets to the
default settings.
When the timeout
expires, the control
panel display
returns to the
Home menu, and
any user signed in
to the printer is
signed out.
Clearable Warnings On Use this feature to

set the period that
Job* a clearable warning
displays on the
control panel. If the
On setting is
selected, clearable
warnings appear
until the Clearable
Warnings button is
pressed. If the Job
setting is selected,
clearable warnings
stay on the display
during the job that
generated the
warning and
disappear from the
display when the
next job starts.

Continuable Events Auto-continue (10 Use this option to

seconds)* configure the
printer behavior
Touch OK to continue when the printer
encounters certain
errors. If the Auto-
continue (10
seconds) option is
selected, the job
will continue after
10 seconds. If the
Touch OK to
continue option is
selected, the job
will stop and
require the user to
touch the OK
button before
continuing.

Jam Recovery Auto* This printer

provides a jam
Off recovery feature
that reprints
On jammed pages.
Select one of the
following options:
Auto: The printer

attempts to reprint
jammed pages
when sufficient
memory is
available. This is
the default setting.
Off: The printer

does not attempt
to reprint jammed
pages. Because no
memory is used to
store the most
recent pages,
performance is
optimal.
NOTE: When
using this option, if
the printer runs out
of paper and the
job is being printed
on both sides,
some pages can be
lost.
On: The printer

always reprints
jammed pages.
Additional memory
is allocated to store
the last few pages
printed. This might
cause a decrease in
overall
performance.
Auto Recovery Enabled The printer

attempts to reprint
Disabled* jammed pages
when sufficient
memory is
available. This is
the default setting.

Hold Off Print Job Enabled* Enable this feature

if you want to
Disabled prevent print jobs
from starting while
a user is initiating a
copy job from the
control panel. Held
print jobs start
printing after the
copy job is finished,
provided that no
other copy job is in
the print queue.
Restore Factory Restore Use to restore all

Settings printer settings to
Cancel their factory
defaults.
Copy/Print Copy Settings Image Preview Display a preview

of the image
before printing it.
Enable Device USB Enabled Enables the printer

to open a file from
Disabled* a USB drive.
Manage Stored Job Sort Order Job Name* This option allows
Jobs you list the jobs
Date either
alphabetically or
chronologically.
Retain Temporary Do not retain Sets which

Jobs After Reboot temporary jobs will
Personal jobs only be retained in the
event of a printer
All temporary jobs reboot.
Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global

Storage Limit settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored in
the printer
memory.
The Temporary Job

Storage Limit
feature specifies
the number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.

Temporary Stored 1-300 Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
the printer
memory.
The Temporary
Stored Job
Retention feature
specifies the
number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.
Standard Stored 1-300 Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
the printer
memory.
The Temporary
Stored Job
Retention feature
specifies the
number of
standard jobs that
can be stored on
the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.
Default Print Number of Copies Range: 1-32000 Sets the default

Options number of copies for a
Default = 1 copy job. This default
applies when the Copy
function or the Quick
Copy function is
initiated from the
printer Home screen.
Paper Selection Select from a list Configures the default

of sizes that the paper size used for
printer supports. print jobs.
Default Custom X Dimension Range: 3-8.5 Configures the default

Paper Size inches paper size that is used
when the user selects
Default = 8.5 Custom as the paper
inches size for a print job.
Y Dimension Range: 5-14

inches
Default = 14
inches
Use Inches Enabled*
Disabled

Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate

whether the original
2-sided document is printed
on one or both sides,
and whether the
copies should be
printed on one or both
sides. For example,
select the 1-sided
original, 2-sided
output option when
the original is printed
on one side, but you
want to make two-
sided copies.
Staple None Sets the position of

the staple on the
Top left page.
Top right
Top left or right
Output Bin Automatically select
Standard bin
Upper bin
Middle bin
Resolution FastRes1200 Sets the resolution

for sent
1200x1200dpi documents. Higher
resolution images
have more dots per
inch (dpi), so they
show more detail.
Lower resolution
images have fewer
dots per inch and
show less detail,
but the file size is
smaller. Some file
types, for example
a file that will be
processed with
OCR, require a
specific resolution.
When these file
types are selected,
the Resolution
setting might
automatically
change to a valid
value.

Edge-to-Edge Normal Use to avoid

(recommended)* shadows that can
appear along the
Edge-to-Edge output edges of copies
when the original
document is
printed close to the
edges.
PCL and PostScript Courier Font Regular* Select which

Settings version of the
Dark Courier font you
want to use. The
factory default
setting is Regular,
which uses an
average stroke
width. The Dark
setting can be used
if a heavier Courier
font is needed.
Wide A4 Enabled Changes the

printable area of
Disabled* A4-size paper. If
you enable this
option, eighty 10-
pitch characters
can be printed on a
single line of A4
paper.
Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature to

select whether a
Disabled* PostScript (PS)
error page is
printed when the
printer encounters
a PS error.
Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a

PDF error page is
Disabled* printed when the
printer encounters
a PDF error.

Personality Auto* Configures the

default print
PCL language or
personality for the
PS printer. Normally
you should not
PDF change the printer
language. If you
change the setting
to a specific printer
language, the
printer does not
automatically
switch from one
language to
another unless
specific software
commands are
sent to it.
PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font

source for the
Disk resident user-soft default
font. The list of
available options
varies depending
on the installed
printer options.
Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the font

number for the
Default = 0 user-soft default
font using the
source that is
specified in the
Font Source menu.
The printer assigns
a number to each
font and lists it on
the PCL font list.
The font number
displays in the Font
# column of the
printout.
Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font Source

option and the Font
Default = 10 Number setting
indicate a contour
font, then use this
feature to select a
default pitch (for a
fixed-spaced font).

PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 Controls the PCL

print-command
Default = 60 options. PCL is a
set of printer
commands that HP
developed to
provide access to
printer features.
Use the Form

Length feature to
select the user-soft
default vertical
form length.
Orientation Portrait* Select the

orientation that is
Landscape most often used
for copy or scan
originals. Select the
Portrait option if
the short edge is at
the top or select
the Landscape
option if the long
edge is at the top.
Symbol Set Select from a list of Select any one of

symbol sets. several available
symbol sets from
the control panel. A
symbol set is a
unique grouping of
all the characters in
a font. The factory
default value for
this option is PC-8.
Either PC-8 or
PC-850 are
recommended for
line-draw
characters.

Append CR to LF No* Configure whether

a carriage return
Yes (CR) is appended to
each line feed (LF)
encountered in
backwards-
compatible PCL
jobs (pure text, no
job control). Select
Yes to append the
carriage return.
The default setting
is No. Some
environments, such
as UNIX, indicate a
new line by using
only the line-feed
control code. This
option allows the
user to append the
required carriage
return to each line
feed.
Suppress Blank No* This option is for

Pages users who are
Yes generating their
own PCL, which
could include extra
form feeds that
would cause blank
pages to be
printed. When the
Yes option is
selected, form
feeds are ignored if
the page is blank.
Media Source Standard* Use to select and

Mapping maintain input
Classic trays by number
when you are not
using the printer
driver, or when the
software program
has no option for
tray selection. The
following options
are available:
Standard: Tray
numbering is based
on newer HP
LaserJet models.
Classic: Tray
numbering is based
on HP LaserJet 4
and older models.

Print Quality Adjust Color Tonal Range Highlights
Midtones
Shadows
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Black
Image Registration Tray Tray 1 Specify tray to be

adjusted
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Depends upon
number of trays
installed

Front-side -5.00 mm to 5.00 mm Shift the margin

Horizontal Shift alignment to center
the image on the
Front-side Vertical page from top to
Shift bottom and from
left to right. You
Back-side can also align the
Horizizontal Shift image on the front
with the image
Back-side Vertical printed on the
Shift back.
The direction that

is perpendicular to
the way the paper
passes through the
printer is referred
to as X. This is also
known as the scan
direction. X1 is the
scan direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. X2 is the
scan direction for
the first side of a
two-sided page.
The direction that

the paper feeds
through the printer
is referred to as Y.
Y1 is the feed
direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. Y2 is the feed
direction for the
first side of a two-
sided page.
Use the Adjust Tray

<X> menu to adjust
the registration
settings for each
tray. Before
adjusting these
values, print a
registration test
page. It provides
alignment guides in
the X and Y
directions so you
can determine
which adjustments
are necessary. You
can adjust values
for X1 Shift, X2
Shift, Y1 Shift, and
Y2 Shift.

Print Test Page Use the Print Test

Page option to
print a page to test
the image
registration. It
provides alignment
guides in the X and
Y directions so you
can determine
which adjustments
are necessary.
Auto Sense Tray 1 Sense every page

Behavior
Sense first page
Sense transparency
ony
All Other Trays Sense first page
Sense transparency
only
Adjust paper types Select from a list of

paper types
Reset Paper Types
Optimize Normal Paper
Heavy paper
Envelope control
Tray 1
Background
Background 1
Uniformity Control
Tracking Control
Registration
Transfer Control
Moisture Control
Reset Optimize
Edge Control Off
Light
Normal
Maximum

Manage Trays Use Requested Exclusively* Controls how the

Tray printer handles
First jobs that have
specified a specific
input tray. Two
options are
available:
Exclusively: The
printer never
selects a different
tray when the user
has indicated that a
specific tray should
be used, even if
that tray is empty.
First: The printer

pulls from another
tray if the specified
tray is empty, even
though the user
specifically
indicated a tray for
the job.
Manually Feed Always* Indicate whether a

Prompt prompt should
Unless loaded appear when the
type or size for a
job does not match
the specified tray
and the printer
pulls from the
multipurpose tray
instead. Two
options are
available:
Always: A prompt
always displays
before using the
multipurpose tray.
Unless loaded: A
message displays
only if the
multipurpose tray
is empty.

Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether

the tray
Do not display configuration
message displays
whenever a tray is
closed. Two
options are
available:
Display: Shows the

tray configuration
message when a
tray is closed. The
user is able to
configure the tray
settings directly
from this message.
Do not display:
Prevents the tray
configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.
Use Another Tray Enabled* Use to turn on or

off the control
Disabled panel prompt to
select another tray
when the specified
tray is empty. Two
options are
available:
Enabled: When this

option is selected,
the user is
prompted either to
add paper to the
selected tray or to
choose a different
tray.
Disabled: When this

option is selected,
the user is not
given the option of
selecting a
different tray. The
printer prompts the
user to add paper
to the tray that was
initially selected.

Alternative Disabled* Use to load

Letterhead Mode letterhead or
Enabled preprinted paper
into the tray the
same way for all
print jobs, whether
you are printing to
one side of the
sheet or to both
sides of the sheet.
When this option is
selected, load the
paper as you would
for printing on both
sides. See the user
documentation
that came with the
printer for
instructions about
loading letterhead
for printing on both
sides. When this
option is selected,
the printer speed
slows to the speed
required for
printing on both
sides.
Duplex Blank Auto* Controls how the

Pages printer handles
Yes two-sided jobs
(duplexing). Two
options are
available:
Auto: Enables
Smart Duplexing,
which instructs the
printer not to
process blank
pages.
Yes: Disables
Smart Duplexing
and forces the
duplexer to flip the
sheet of paper
even if it is printed
on only one side.
This might be
preferable for
certain jobs that
use paper types
such as letterhead
or prepunched
paper.

Override A4/Letter Yes* Prints on letter-

size paper when an
No A4 job is sent but
no A4-size paper is
loaded in the
printer (or to print
on A4 paper when
a letter-size job is
sent but no letter-
size paper is
loaded). This option
will also override
A3 with ledger-size
paper and ledger
with A3-size paper.
Scan/Digital Send E-mail Settings E-mail Setup Use to configure

settings that apply
Network Folder NOTE: Email to sending
Settings Settings only documents
through email or
SharePoint saving documents
Settings to a folder on the
network or on a
Scan to USB Drive USB multi-drive.
Settings
The E-mail Setup
NOTE: The same Wizard feature
options are configures the
available for each printer to send
of these features, scanned images as
except where email attachments.
noted. To open the printer
HP Embedded Web
Server and set up
the email
notification server,
enter the printer IP
address into a Web
browser.

Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating the
job, the default
options are used.
For complete
setup, go to the HP
Embedded Web
Server by typing
the IP address of
the printer into a
Web browser.
Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether this
feature is available
on the printer.
Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.
Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.
Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Default File Name The printer is

shipped with a
factory default file
name of [Untitled]
for any scanned
files that are sent
or saved. Use this
feature to specify a
different default
file name. If you are
saving a file to a
network folder or
USB storage printer
and a file with the
default file name
already exists, a
number is
appended to the
file name, for
example,
[Untitled]001.

Document File Select from a list of file PDF provides the

Type types. best overall image
and text quality.
JPEG is a good
choice for most
graphics. Most
computers have a
browser that can
view .JPEG files.
This file type
produces one file
per page.
TIFF is a standard
file format that
many graphics
programs support.
This file type
produces one file
per page.
MTIFF: stands for

multi-page TIFF.
This file type saves
multiple scanned
pages in a single
file.
XPS (XML Paper

Specification)
creates an XML file
that preserves the
original formatting
of the document
and supports color
graphics and
embedded fonts.
NOTE: OCR file

types are not
supported on this
printer unless
attached to DSS.

Optimize Text/ Manually Adjust* Use to optimize the

Picture output for a
Text particular type of
content. You can
Printed picture optimize the
output for text,
Photograph printed pictures, or
a mixture.
Manually Adjust:
Use to manually
optimize the
setting for text or
for pictures.
Text: Use to
optimize the text
portion of the copy
when text and/or
pictures are on the
original.
Printed picture: Use

for line drawings
and preprinted
images, such as
magazine clippings
or pages from
books.
Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.
Output Quality High (large file) Use to select the

quality for the
Medium* output. Higher-
quality images
Low (small file) require a larger file
size than lower-
quality images.
Larger files take
more time to send,
and some
recipients might
have trouble
receiving larger
files.

Original Sides 1-sided Use to describe the

layout for each side
2-sided of the original
document. First
select whether the
original document
is printed on one
side or both sides.
Then touch the
Orientation setting
to indicate whether
the original has
portrait or
landscape
orientation. If it is
printed on both
sides, also select
the 2-sided format
that matches the
original document.
Orientation Automatically detect For some features

to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the
Landscape content of the
original document
is placed on the
page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of
the page is along
the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait or
landscape
orientation.

2-Sided Format Book-style Book-style: The

back side of the
Flip-style original is printed
right-side-up, and
the back side of the
copy is printed the
same way. Use this
option for originals
and copies that are
bound along the
left edge.
Flip-style: The back

side of the original
is printed upside-
down, and the back
side of the copy is
printed the same
way. Use this
option for originals
and copies that are
to be bound along
the top edge.
Resolution 400 dpi Sets the resolution

for sent
300 dpi documents. Higher
resolution images
200 dpi have more dots per
inch (dpi), so they
150 dpi* show more detail.
Lower resolution
75 dpi images have fewer
dots per inch and
show less detail,
but the file size is
smaller. Some file
types, for example
a file that will be
processed with
OCR, require a
specific resolution.
When these file
types are selected,
the Resolution
setting might
automatically
change to a valid
value.

Content Orientation Auto Detect For some features

Orientation to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the
Landscape content of the
original document
is placed on the
page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of
the page is along
the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait or
landscape
orientation.
2-Sided Format Book-style* Use to configure

the default style for
Flip-style 2-sided print jobs.
If the Book-style
option is selected,
page is printed the
right way up. This
option is for print
jobs that are bound
along the left edge.
If the Flip-style
option is selected,
page is printed
upside-down. This
option is for print
jobs that are bound
along the top edge.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or

disable color
Color scanning.
Black/Gray Automatically
detect:
Black Automatically
scans documents
in color if at least
one page has color.
Color: Scans
documents in color.
Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.
Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file
size.
Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

supported sizes. page size of the
original document.
Notification Do not notify* Configure to

receive notification
Notify when job about the status of
completes a sent document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns

off this feature.
Print
Notify when job
E-mail completes: Select
to receive
notification for this
job only.
Notify only if job

fails: Select to
only if the job is not
sent successfully.
Print: Select to
print the
notification at this
printer.
E-mail: Select to
receive the
notification to an
email account.

Include Thumbnail NOTE: When

sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a thumbnail
image of the first
page of the fax in
your notification.
Notification E-mail E-mail: Select to

address receive the
notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then type the email
address for the
notification.
Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of
the copy.
Adjust the
Darkness setting to
increase or
decrease the
amount of white
and black in the
colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on
the page.
Background Adjust the

Cleanup Background
Cleanup setting if
you are having
trouble copying a
faint image.
Sharpness Adjust the

Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften
the image. For
example,
increasing the
sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Automatic Tone The printer

automatically
adjusts the
Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings to
the most
appropriate for the
scanned document.
Default Select this to make

the selected Image
Adjustment setting
the default value.
Job Build Job Build off* Use to combine

several original
Job Build on documents into
one job. Also use to
scan an original
document that has
more pages than
the document
feeder can
accommodate at
one time. The
printer temporarily
saves all the
scanned images.
After you have
scanned all the
pages for the job,
touch Finish to
finish the job.
Cropping Options Do not crop* Use this menu item

to automatically
Crop to content crop the scan for
digital sending. Use
Crop to paper the Crop to content
option to scan the
smallest possible
area that has
detectable content.
Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item

to remove
Back side erase blemishes, such as
dark borders or
Front side erase staple marks, by
cleaning the
specified edges of
the scanned image.
In each of the text
boxes enter the
measurements, in
millimeters or
inches, for how
much of the top
edge, bottom edge,
left edge, and right
edge to clean.

Multi-feed Disabled This setting stops

Detection the scanning
Enabled* process if it detects
multiple-page
feeds through the
document feeder.
Blank Page Disabled* Use to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the
Enabled original document
from being
included in the
output document.
Create Multiple Disabled* Enable this item to

Files scan pages into
Enabled separate files
based on a
specified page
limit.
A page is one side

of an original
document.
JPEG and TIFF have

a limit of one page
per file.
Digital Sending Allow Use of a DSS Disabled Configure how the

Software Setup Server printer interacts
Enabled* with the HP Digital
Allow Transfer to Sending Software
New DSS server (DSS) server.
HP DSS handles
digital sending
tasks, such as
faxing, emailing,
and sending
scanned
documents to a
network folder or
USB storage
device.
Use the Allow Use

of a DSS Server and
Allow Transfer to
New DSS server
options to
configure the
printer to use
HP DSS.
Fax Internal Fax

Modem Setup
Fax Send Settings Image Preview

Fax Dialing Fax Dial Volume Off These settings

Settings control how the fax
Low* modem dials the
outgoing fax
High number when
faxes are sent.
Dialing Mode Tone*
Pulse
Redial Interval 1-5 Minutes
Default = 5 minutes
Fax Send Speed Fast*
Medium
Slow
Dialing Prefix
Detect Dial Tone
Redial on Error Range: 0-9
Default = 2
Redial on No Range: 0-2

Answer
Default = 0
Redial on Busy Range: 0-9
Default = 3
General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature is

Settings Confirmation enabled, you must
Disabled* enter the fax
number twice.
PC Fax Send Enabled* Enables users who

have the correct
Disabled driver installed to
send faxes through
the printer from
their computers.

JBIG Compression Enabled* The JBIG

compression
Disabled reduces fax-
transmission time,
which can result in
lower phone
charges. However,
using JBIG
compression
sometimes causes
compatibility
problems with
older fax machines.
If this occurs, turn
off the JBIG
compression.
Error Correction Enabled* When error-

Mode correction mode is
Disabled enabled and an
error occurs during
fax transmission,
the printer sends or
receives the error
portion again.
Fax Header Prepend* Use to prepend or

overlay the fax
Overlay header page.
Fax Number Speed Enabled Use this item to

Dial Matching match the fax
Disabled* number that you
type to numbers
that are saved as a
speed dial.

Billing Code Enable Billing Off* When billing codes

Settings Codes are enabled, a
On prompt displays
that asks the user
to enter the billing
code for an
outgoing fax. This
prompt does not
appear if the Allow
users to edit billing
codes check box is
not checked.
You can also use

the billing codes
report in the
Reports menu to
view the list of the
billing codes that
have been used for
faxes that have
been sent from the
printer. The list is
grouped by billing
code and also
shows fax details.
This feature can be
used for billing or
usage tracking.
Default Billing Specify a default

Code billing code for
faxing. If you
specify a default
billing code, this
code displays in the
Billing Code field
when the user
sends an outgoing
fax. If this field is
blank, no default
billing code is
provided for the
user.
Minimum Length Range: 1-16 Specify the

required length of
Default = 1 the billing code.
Billing codes can be
between 1 and 16
characters long.
Allow users to edit Off

billing codes
On*
Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ringer Volume Off Use to configure
Settings settings for
Low* receiving faxes.
High

Rings To Answer Range: 1-6
Default = 1
Fax Receive Speed Fast*
Medium
Slow
Ring Interval Range: 220-600 ms
Default = 600 ms
Ring Frequency Range: 1-200
Default = 68hz
Fax Printing Always store faxes If you have

Schedule concerns about the
Always print faxes* security of private
faxes, use this
Use Fax Printing feature to store
Schedule faxes rather than
having them
automatically print.
Open the Fax
Printing Schedule
sub-menu, and
then you can
choose to always
store faxes, always
print them, or you
can set up a
schedule for each
day of the week.
Schedule + (Add) Print incoming faxes If you are using a

fax printing
Touch this to set Edit Store incoming faxes schedule, use this
up a fax printing menu to configure
schedule if you Delete (trash can) Time when to print
selected the Use faxes.
Fax Printing Event Days
Schedule option.

Blocked Fax Fax Number to The blocked fax list

Numbers Block can contain up to
30 numbers. When
the printer receives
a call from one of
the blocked fax
numbers, it deletes
the incoming fax. It
also logs the
blocked fax in the
activity log along
with job-
accounting
information.
Add blocked
numbers: Enter a
fax number into
the Fax Number to
Block field, and
then touch the
arrow button to
add a new number
to the blocked fax
list.
To remove blocked
numbers: Select a
number and touch
the Delete button
to delete it from
the blocked fax list.
To clear all blocked

numbers: Touch
the Delete All
button to clear all
of the numbers
from the blocked
fax list.
You also can use

the Blocked Fax
List report in the
Information menu
to view the list of
the fax numbers
that have been
blocked on this
printer.

Default Job Notification Do not notify* Configure to

Options receive notification
Notify when job about the status of
completes a sent document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns

off this feature.
Notify when job

completes: Select
to receive
notification for this
job only.
Notify only if job

fails: Select to
only if the job is not
sent successfully.
Print E-mail: Select to

receive the
E-mail* notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then enter the
email address for
the notification.
Include NOTE: When

Thumbnail sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a thumbnail
image of the first
page of the fax in
your notification.
Notification E- Touch this text

mail address field, provide the
email address to
which you want
notifications sent,
and then touch the
OK button.
Stamp Received Enabled Use this option to

Faxes add the date, time,
Disabled* sender’s phone
number, and page
number to each
page of the faxes
that this printer
receives.

Fit to Page Enabled* Use to shrink faxes

that are larger than
Disabled Letter-size or A4-
size so that they
can fit onto a
Letter-size or A4-
size page. If this
feature set to
Disabled, faxes
larger than Letter
or A4 will flow
across multiple
pages.
Paper Tray Automatic*
Select from a list of

the trays.
Standard bin
Upper bin
Middle bin
Out Sides 1-sided* Use to describe the

layout for each side
2-sided of the original
document. First
select whether the
original document
is printed on one
side or both sides.
Fax Forwarding Enable Fax Disabled* Use to forward

Forwarding received faxes to
Enabled another fax
machine.
Type of Fax Job to All faxes Use to select the

Forward type of fax jobs
Sent faxes that you want
forwarded.
Received faxes
Fax Forwarding Provide the

Number forwarding phone
number, and then
touch the OK
button.
Clear Fax Activity Clears all events

Log from the fax
activity log.

Manage Supplies Low Warning Black Cartridge 1-100% Set the estimated
Thresholds percentage at
Cyan Cartridge Default = 5% which the printer
notifies you when a
Magenta toner cartridge is
Cartridge very low.
Yellow Cartridge
Low Warning On Displays a message

Threshold on the control
Message Off panel when a
cartridge is very
low.
Very Low Behavior Black Cartridge Stop
Color Cartridges Continue
Transfer Kit Prompt to continue
Fuser Kit
Document Feeder
Kit
Staples Stop
Prompt to continue
Restrict Color Use Enable Use this feature to

enable, restrict, or
Disable Color disable color
printing or copying.
Color if allowed*

Color/Black Mix Auto Instructs the

printer when to
Mostly Color Pages switch between
color and
Mostly Black Pages monochrome
printing modes for
the best overall
performance.
Auto: Uses the

mode that is
appropriate for the
first page of the
job. If necessary,
the printer
switches modes
during the middle
of a job and then
stays in that mode
until the job is
finished.
Mostly Color Pages:

The printer uses
color mode for all
jobs, even if the job
contains no color
pages.
Mostly Black Pages:

The printer uses
monochrome
mode until it
detects a color
page. The printer
switches back to
monochrome
mode when it
detects a sequence
of several
monochrome
pages.

Store Usage Data On supplies The Store Usage

Data provides a
Not on supplies way to suppress
the toner
cartridges from
storing most of the
information
gathered
exclusively for the
purpose of
understanding the
usage of the
printer. Select the
On supplies setting
to store the data
on the toner
cartridge memory
chip. Select the Not
on supplies setting
to suppress the
information from
being stored on the
memory chip.
Cartridge Off* Select to

Protection permanently
Protect Cartridges protect cartridges
so that they can be
used only in this
product or fleet of
products.
Cartridge Policy Off* Set Authorized HP

to allow only
Authorized HP genuine HP
cartridges to be
used in this
product.
Manage Stapler/ Operation Mode Mailbox

Stacker
Stacker
Function Separator
Job Offset On
Off
Networking Ethernet Information Print Security Yes Yes: Prints a page

Report that contains the
No* current security
settings on the
HP Jetdirect print
server.
No: A security
settings page is not
printed.

TCP/IP Host Name Use the arrow buttons An alphanumeric

to edit the host name. string, up to 32
characters, used to
NPIXXXXXX* identify the printer.
This name is listed
on the HP Jetdirect
configuration page.
The default host
name is NPIxxxxxx,
where xxxxxx is
the last six digits of
the LAN hardware
(MAC) address.
IPV4 Settings Config Method Bootp Specifies the

method that TCP/
DHCP* IPv4 parameters
will be configured
Auto IP on the HP Jetdirect
print server.
Manual
Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use for
automatic
configuration from
a BootP server.
DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration
Protocol): Use for
automatic
configuration from
a DHCPv4 server. If
selected and a
DHCP lease exists,
the DHCP Release
menu and the
DHCP Renew menu
are available to set
DHCP lease
options.
Auto IP: Use for

automatic link-local
IPv4 addressing. An
address in the form
169.254.x.x is
assigned
automatically.
If you set this

option to the
Manual setting, use
the Manual
Settings menu to
configure TCP/IPv4
parameters.

Default IP Auto IP* Specify the IP

address to default
Legacy to when the print
server is unable to
obtain an IP
address from the
network during a
forced TCP/IP
reconfiguration (for
example, when
manually
configured to use
BootP or DHCP).
NOTE: This
feature assigns a
static IP address
that might
interfere with a
managed network.
Auto IP: A link-local

IP address
169.254.x.x is set.
Legacy: The
address
192.0.0.192 is set,
consistent with
older HP Jetdirect
printers.
Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = xxx.xxx.xx.xx a Primary Domain
Name System
(DNS) Server.
Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.
IPV6 Settings Enable Off Use this item to

enable or disable
On* IPv6 operation on
the print server.
Off: IPv6 is
disabled.
On: IPv6 is enabled.
Address Manual Settings Use this item to

enable and
Enable manually configure
a TCP/IPv6
Address address.

DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified Router Specified:

The stateful auto-
Router Unavailable* configuration
method to be used
Always by the print server
is determined by a
router. The router
specifies whether
the print server
obtains its address,
its configuration
information, or
both from a
DHCPv6 server.
Router Unavailable:
If a router is not
available, the print
server should
attempt to obtain
its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.
Always: Whether a
router is available,
the print server
always attempts to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.
Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

Default = xxx.xxx.xx.xx a Primary Domain
Name System
(DNS) Server.
Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

Proxy Server Select from a provided Specifies the proxy

list. server to be used
by embedded
applications in the
printer. A proxy
server is typically
used by network
clients for Internet
access. It caches
Web pages, and
provides a degree
of Internet security
for those clients.
To specify a proxy
server, enter its
IPv4 address or
fully-qualified
domain name. The
name can be up to
255 octets.
For some
networks, you
might need to
contact your
Internet Service
Provider (ISP) for
the proxy server
address.
Proxy Port Default = 00080 Enter the port

number used by
the proxy server
for client support.
The port number
identifies the port
reserved for proxy
activity on your
network, and can
be a value from 0
to 65535.
Idle Timeout Default = 0270 The time period, in

seconds, after
which an idle TCP
print data
connection is
closed (default is
270 seconds, 0
disables the
timeout).

Copy menu (MFP only)
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Copy menu.
Table 5-10 Copy menu (MFP only)

First level Second level Third level Values Description
Sides Original Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate whether the

original document is printed
2-sided on one or both sides.
Output Sides 1-sided Use to indicate whether the

copies should be printed on
2-sided one or both sides.
Color/Black Automatically detect* Select how the copy should

be printed.
Color
Automatically detect: Prints
Black/Gray color documents in color,
and black and white
documents in black and
white. For mixed
documents, the printer will
determine whether to print
in color or black and white.
Color: Prints documents in

color.
Black: Prints documents in

black and white or
grayscale.
Quick Sets and Defaults Load
Save
Options Sides Original Sides 1-sided
2-sided
Output Sides 1-sided
2-sided
Color/Black Automatically detect* Select how the copy should

be printed.
Color
Automatically detect: Prints
Black/Gray color documents in color,
and black and white
documents in black and
white. For mixed
documents, the printer will
determine whether to print
in color or black and white.
Color: Prints documents in

color.
Black: Prints documents in

black and white or
grayscale.

Table 5-10 Copy menu (MFP only) (continued)
Staple None Sets the position of the

staple on the page.
Top left angled
Top right angled
Scan mode Standard Document Book Mode allows the user

to scan pages from a book.
Book Mode
2–sided ID allows the user
2–sided ID to scan both sides of an
identification card onto one
sheet.
Reduce/Enlarge Automatic* Use to scale the size of the

document up or down.
Manual Select one of the predefined
percentages, or select the
Scaling field and type a
percentage between 25 and
400. The Auto option
automatically scales the
image to fit the paper size in
the tray.
NOTE: To reduce the

image, select a scaling
percentage that is less than
100. To enlarge the image,
select a scaling percentage
that is greater than 100.
Original Size Select from a list of sizes Describes the page size of
that the printer supports. the original document.
Paper Selection Paper Size For the best color and image
quality, select the
Paper Type appropriate paper type from
the control panel menu or
Paper Tray from the print driver.
Booklet Booklet Format (Checkbox) Use to copy two or more

pages onto one sheet of
paper so you can fold the
sheets in the center to form
a booklet. The printer
arranges the pages in the
correct order. For example, if
the original document has
eight pages, the printer
prints pages 1 and 8 on the
same sheet.

Content Orientation Auto Detect For some features to work

correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of the
original document is placed
Landscape on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the long
edge of the page is along
the top. In the Orientation
area, select whether the
original document has a
portrait or landscape
orientation.
Pages per Sheet One (1) Copies multiple pages onto

one sheet of paper.
Two (2)
NOTE: Before using this
Four (4) screen, use the Content
Orientation screen to
describe the original
document orientation.
Image Adjustment Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness setting

to clarify or soften the
image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.
Darkness Use to improve the overall

quality of the copy.
Adjust the Darkness setting

to increase or decrease the
amount of white and black
in the colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

difference between the
lightest and darkest color on
the page.
Background Cleanup Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a
faint image.

Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output for a
particular type of content.
Text You can optimize the output
for text, printed pictures, or
Mixed a mixture.
Printed picture Manually Adjust: Use to

manually optimize the
Photograph setting for text or for
pictures.
Text: Use to optimize the

text portion of the copy
where text and/or pictures
are on the original.
Printed picture: Use for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books.
Photograph: Best suited for

making copies of printed
pictures.
Edge-to-Edge Normal (recommended)* Use to avoid shadows that

can appear along the edges
Edge-to-Edge output of copies when the original
document is printed close to
the edges.
Erase Edges Front Side Use inches Use this menu item to
remove blemishes, such as
Apply same width to all dark borders or staple
edges marks, by cleaning the
specified edges of the
Top edge scanned image. In each of
the text boxes enter the
Bottom edge measurements, in
millimeters or inches, for
Left edge how much of the top edge,
bottom edge, left edge, and
Right edge
right edge to clean.
Back Side Use inches
Mirror front side
Top edge
Bottom edge
Left edge
Right edge

Collate Collate on (Sets in page If you are making more than

order)* one copy, select the Collate
on (Sets in page order)
Collate off (Pages grouped) option to assemble the
pages in the correct order in
each set of copies.
Select the Collate off (Pages

grouped) option to group
the same pages together.
For example, if you are
making five copies of an
original document that has
two pages, all five first
pages would be grouped
together and all five second
pages would be grouped
together.
Multi-feed Detection Enabled* This setting stops the

scanning process if it
Disabled detects multiple-page feeds
through the document
feeder.
Standard bin
Upper bin
Middle bin

Scan menu (MFP only)
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Scan menu.
Table 5-11 Scan menu (MFP)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Scan to Email
Scan to Network Folder Paths

Folder
File Name
Quick Sets and

Defaults
Options File Type and

Resolution
Original sides 1-sided Use to describe the

layout for each side of
2-sided the original document.
First select whether
the original document
is printed on one side
or both sides. Then
touch the Orientation
setting to indicate
has portrait or
landscape orientation.
If it is printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.

disable color scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if
Black at least one page has
color.
Color: Scans
documents in color.
Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.
Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file size.

original document.

Table 5-11 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)
Content Orientation Orientation Automatically Detect For some features to

work correctly, you
Portrait* must specify the way
the content of the
Landscape original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short edge
of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page
is along the top. In the
Orientation area, select
document has a
orientation.

overall quality of the
copy. Adjust the
Darkness setting to
increase or decrease
the amount of white
and black in the colors.

setting to increase or
decrease the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.
Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but decreasing
it could make
photographs appear
smoother.

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings to the
most appropriate for
the scanned
document.

Default Select this to make the

selected Image
Adjustment setting the
default value.
Optimize Text/Picture
Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to

remove blemishes,
Back side erase such as dark borders
or staple marks, by
Front side erase cleaning the specified
edges of the scanned
image. In each of the
text boxes enter the
measurements, in
millimeters or inches,
for how much of the
top edge, bottom
edge, left edge, and
Cropping Options Do not crop Use this menu item to

automatically crop the
Crop to content scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop
Crop to paper to content option to
scan the smallest
possible area that has
detectable content.
Automatically
Straighten
Blank Page Disabled Use to prevent blank

Suppression pages in the original
Enabled document from being
included in the output
document.
Multi-feed Detection Disabled This setting stops the

Enabled* detects multiple-page
feeds through the
document feeder.
Create Multiple Files Disabled Enable this item to

scan pages into
Enabled separate files based on
a specified page limit.
A page is one side of

an original document.
JPEG and TIFF have a

limit of one page per
file.

Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off

this feature.
Print
Notify when job
E-mail completes: Select to
receive notification for
this job only.
Notify only if job fails:

Select to receive
notification only if the
job is not sent
successfully.
Print: Select to print

the notification at this
printer.
E-mail: Select to
receive the notification
to an email account.
Include Thumbnail Select Include

Thumbnail to receive a
thumbnail image of
the first page of the job
in your notification.
Notification Email E-mail: Select to

in an email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then type the email
address for the
notification.
Scan to USB Drive Destination
Job Name
Options File Type and

Resolution

Original sides 1-sided Use to describe the

layout for each side of
2-sided the original document.
First select whether
the original document
is printed on one side
or both sides. Then
setting to indicate
has portrait or
landscape orientation.
If it is printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.

disable color scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if
Black at least one page has
color.
Color: Scans
documents in color.
Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.
Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file size.

original document.
Content Orientation Automatically detect For some features to

work correctly, you
Portrait* must specify the way
the content of the
Landscape original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short edge
of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page
is along the top. In the
Orientation area, select
document has a
orientation.


overall quality of the
copy. Adjust the
Darkness setting to
increase or decrease
the amount of white
and black in the colors.

setting to increase or
decrease the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but decreasing
it could make
photographs appear
smoother.

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
most appropriate for
the scanned
document.

selected Image
Adjustment setting the
default value.

Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Use to optimize the

output for a particular
Text type of content. You
can optimize the
Printed picture output for text, printed
pictures, or a mixture.
Photograph
Manually Adjust: Use to
setting for text or for
pictures.
Text: Use to optimize

the text portion of the
copy when text and/or
pictures are on the
original.
Printed picture: Use for

line drawings and
preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books.
Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.
Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to

remove blemishes,
Back side erase such as dark borders
or staple marks, by
Front side erase cleaning the specified
edges of the scanned
image. In each of the
text boxes enter the
measurements, in
millimeters or inches,
for how much of the
top edge, bottom
edge, left edge, and
Cropping Options Do not crop Use this menu item to

automatically crop the
Crop to content scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop
Crop to paper to content option to
scan the smallest
possible area that has
detectable content.
Automatically
Straighten
Blank Page Disabled Use to prevent blank

Suppression pages in the original
Enabled document from being
included in the output
document.

Multi-feed Detection Disabled This setting stops the

Enabled* detects multiple-page
feeds through the
document feeder.
Create Multiple Files Disabled Enable this item to

scan pages into
Enabled separate files based on
a specified page limit.
A page is one side of

an original document.
JPEG and TIFF have a

limit of one page per
file.
Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off

this feature.
Print
Notify when job
E-mail completes: Select to
receive notification for
this job only.
Notify only if job fails:

Select to receive
notification only if the
job is not sent
successfully.
Print: Select to print

the notification at this
printer.
E-mail: Select to
to an email account.
Include Thumbnail Select Include

thumbnail image of
the first page of the job
in your notification.
Notification Email E-mail: Select to

in an email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then type the email
address for the
notification.

Scan to Job Storage Folder
Job Name
Scan to SharePoint

Fax menu (fax models only)
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Fax menu.
Table 5-12 Fax menu (fax models only)

Dialing Prefix
Fax Recipients
Quick Sets and Defaults
Options Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe the layout

for each side of the original
2-sided document. First select
document is printed on one
side or both sides. Then
setting to indicate whether
the original has portrait or
landscape orientation. If it is
printed on both sides, also
select the 2-sided format
that matches the original
document.
Resolution Standard (100 x 200dpi)* Select the resolution for

outgoing faxes. If you
Fine (200 x 200dpi) increase the resolution,
faxes might be clearer but
Superfine (300 x 300dpi) they could transmit more
slowly. Some file types, for
example a file that will be
processed with OCR, require
a specific resolution. When
these file types are
selected, the Resolution
setting might be
automatically changed to a
valid value.
Original Size Select from a list of sizes Use to describe the page
that the printer supports. size of the original
document.
Content Orientation Orientation Portrait* For some features to work

correctly, you must specify
Landscape the way the content of the
original document is placed
on the page.
Portrait: This setting means

the short edge of the page
is along the top.
Landscape: This setting

means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Table 5-12 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)
Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the overall

quality of the copy.
Adjust the Darkness setting

amount of white and black
in the colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

lightest and darkest color on
the page.

Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a
faint image.

setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.
Automatic Tone The printer automatically

adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background
most appropriate for the
scanned document.

selected Image Adjustment
setting the default value.

Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output for a
particular type of content.
Text You can optimize the output
for text, printed pictures, or
Printed picture a mixture.
Photograph Manually Adjust: Use to

setting for text or for
pictures.
Text: Use to optimize the

text portion of the copy
where text and/or pictures
are on the original.
Printed picture: Use for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books.
Photograph: Best suited for

making copies of printed
pictures.
Blank Page Suppression Disabled* Prevents blank pages in the

original document from
Enabled being included in the output
document.
Multi-feed Detection Disabled Use this feature to prevent

multiple pages being fed
Enabled* through the document
feeder during document
scans.
Notification Do not notify* Use to receive notification

about the status of a sent
Notify when job completes document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this

feature.
Notify when job completes:

Select to receive notification
for this job only.
Notify only if job fails: Select

to receive notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.
Print Print: Select to print the

notification at this printer.
E-mail
E-mail: Select to receive the
notification in an email.
Touch the text box following
Email Address, and then
enter the email address for
the notification.

Include Thumbnail When sending an analog

fax, select Include
thumbnail image of the first
page of the fax in your
notification.
Notification E-mail address Provide the email address

that will receive
notifications.
2-Sided Format Book-style* Use to configure the default

style for 2-sided print jobs.
Flip-style If the Book-style option is
selected, the back side of
the page is printed the right
way up. This option is for
print jobs that are bound
along the left edge. If the
Flip-style option is selected,
the back side of the page is
printed upside-down. This
option is for print jobs that
are bound along the top
edge.

Print menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Print menu.
Table 5-13 Print Options menu
Print from Job Storage Stored Job to Print Untitled Print a job stored on the printer.
Stored Faxes
Print from USB Drive Stored Job to Print Choose file to print on USB drive. Print a job stored on a USB drive.
Fax Polling Fax Polling Number

Supplies menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Supplies menu.
Table 5-14 Supplies menu
First level Values Description
Supplies Summary
Black Cartridge Status
Cyan Cartridge Order HP Part
Magenta Cartridge Pages Printed
Yellow Cartridge Approximate Pages Remaining
Toner Collection Unit Status
Transfer Kit Order HP Part
Fuser Kit
Document Feeder Kit
Stapler 1

Trays menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Trays menu.
Table 5-15 Trays menu
Tray 1 Size Select paper size from a list of Choose the paper size for the tray
supported sizes.
Tray 2–x
Type Select paper type from a list of Choose the paper type for the tray.
supported types.

Troubleshooting menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then select the Troubleshooting
menu.
Table 5-16 Troubleshooting

Configuration/Status ● Settings Menu Select the

Pages Map configuration/Status
reports to review,
● Current and then touch the
Settings Page Print or View button.
● Configuration
Page
● How to
Connect Page
● Supplies
Status Page
● sage Page
● File Directory
Page
● Web Services
Status Page
● Color Usage
Job Log
Reports
Other Pages ● Demonstration

Page
● RGB Samples
● CMYK Samples
● PCL Font List
● PS Font List
Event Log Print Prints the 50 most

recent events in the
Event Log. For each
event, the printed
log shows the error
number, page count,
error code, and
description or
personality.
Paper Path Page View Shows how many

pages were printed
Print from each tray.

Table 5-16 Troubleshooting (continued)
Fax (Fax is optional) Fax T.30 Trace Print T.30 Report Print Use to print or
configure the fax T.
30 trace report. T.30
is the standard that
specifies
handshaking,
protocols, and error
correction between
fax machines.
When to Print Never automatically Configure the T.30

Report print* report to print after
certain events. You
Print after every fax can choose to print
the report after
Print only after fax every fax job, every
send jobs fax job sent, every
fax job received,
Print after any fax every send error, or
error every receive error.
Print only after fax

send errors
Print only after fax

receive errors
Fax V.34 Normal* Use to disable V.34

modulations if
Off several fax failures
have occurred or if
phone line
conditions require it.
Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Used by a technician

to evaluate and
Diagnostic diagnose fax issues
by listening to the
sounds of fax
modulations
Fax Log Entries On The standard fax log

includes basic
Off* information such as
the time and
whether the fax was
successful. The
detailed fax log
shows the
intermediate results
of the redial process
not shown in the
standard fax log.
Print Quality Pages Print Fuser Test Print Use to print pages
Page that help you
resolve problems
with print quality.
Diagnostic Tests
Continuous Scan 2-sided

Table 5-16 Troubleshooting (continued)
Run Fax Test Start Use this menu to

perform a test on
specific components
within the product to
determine whether
the components are
functioning
correctly.
Retrieve Diagnostic Insert a US drive into Create files that

Data the USB port. The contain information
exported data might about the product
contain personally that can help
identifiable identify the cause of
information. problems.
Generate Debug Start

Data
Maintenance menu
Backup/Restore menu
To display: At the product control panel, select Support Tools and then Maintenance, and then select the Backup/
Restore menu.
Table 5-17 Backup/Restore menu
Backup Data Enable Scheduled Backups Backup Time Enter a time
Days Between Backups Enter the number of days
Backup Now
Export Last Backup
Restore Data Insert a USB drive that

contains the backup file.
Calibration/Cleaning menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibrate/Cleaning
menu.

Table 5-18 Calibrate/Cleaning menu
Calibration/Cleaning Page Print Use to process the cleaning page

that was created by using the
Create Cleaning Page menu. The
process takes up to 1.5 minutes.
Calibration Start The product automatically

calibrates itself at various times.
However, you can calibrate the
product immediately if you see
problems with print quality. Use this
feature to perform a full calibration,
which can take up to three minutes.
Use this calibration if the color
layers seem to be shifted on the
page.
Before calibrating the product,

make sure that the Ready indicator
displays on the control-panel
display. If a job is in progress, the
calibration occurs when that job is
complete.
Delay Calibration at Wake/Power On No Delay Controls the timing of power-on

calibration when the product wakes
Delay 15 minutes up or is turned on.
Wake: Select if you are not using the

feature and want to print jobs
immediately when the product
wakes up or is turned on, before
calibration begins.
No: The product will calibrate

immediately when it wakes up or is
turned on. The product will not print
any jobs until it finishes calibrating.
Yes: Enables the product that is

asleep to accept print jobs before it
calibrates. It might start calibrating
before it has printed all the jobs it
has received. This option allows
quicker printing when coming out of
sleep mode or when you turn the
product on, but print quality might
be reduced.
NOTE: For the best results, allow

the product to calibrate before
printing. Print jobs performed
before calibration might not be of
the highest quality.

USB Firmware Upgrade menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the USB Firmware
Upgrade menu.
Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen
instructions.

Clear paper jams
Clearing original document jams
When an original becomes jammed while passing through the Flow ADF, an error message displays on the
control panel.
Original jam in front of scanner
1. Remove any remaining paper from the Flow ADF.
2. Open the Flow ADF cover.
Figure 5-29 Open the Flow ADF cover
CAUTION: To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed original slowly and gently.
NOTE: To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or mixed paper-type originals.
ENWW Clear paper jams 1083

3. Gently remove the jammed paper from the Flow ADF.
Figure 5-30 Remove jam from the Flow ADF
4. Close the Flow ADF cover.
Original jam inside of scanner
1. Remove any remaining paper from the Flow ADF.
2. Open the Flow ADF cover.
Figure 5-31 Open the Flow ADF cover

3. Gently remove the jammed paper from the Flow ADF.
If there is no paper in this area, go to step 4.
4. Open the input tray.
Figure 5-33 Open input tray

5. Pull the jammed paper gently out of the Flow ADF.
If there is no paper in this area, go to step 6.
6. Close the Flow ADF cover and the Flow ADF input tray.
7. Open the Flow ADF.
Figure 5-35 Open the Flow ADF

8. Grasp the jammed paper and remove it from the feed area by pulling it with both hands.
Figure 5-36 Remove jam from the feed area
9. Close the Flow ADF.
Clearing paper jams

When a paper jam occurs, an error message displays on the control panel.
Paper jam in Tray 2 or 3
CAUTION: The fuser area is hot. Use caution when removing paper from the printer.
Figure 5-37 Open right door

2. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
Figure 5-38 Remove jam
Close the right door. If there is no paper in this area, go to step 3.
NOTE: To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently. The following steps
describe how to clear the jam.
3. Remove Tray 2 or 3.
Figure 5-39 Remove tray

4. Remove the jammed paper from the printer.
5. Insert Tray 2 or 3 back into the machine until it is firmly seated. Printing automatically resumes.
Paper jam in Tray 4 or 5
1. Open the right bottom door of the dual cassette feeder.
Figure 5-41 Open bottom right door

Close the dual cassette feeder right bottom door. If there is no paper in this area, go to step 3.
3. Remove Tray 4 or 5.
4. Remove the jammed paper from the printer.
5. Insert Tray 4 or 5 back into the machine until it is firmly seated. Printing automatically resumes.
Paper jam in the Tray 1
1. If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine.
Figure 5-43 Remove paper
2. Open and close the front door to resume printing.

Paper jam inside the printer (jam feed 1, jam feed 2)
CAUTION: The fuser area is hot. Use caution when removing paper from the machine.
3. Close the right door.
Paper jam inside the printer (jam feed 3, jam feed 4)
1. Open the bottom right door of the dual cassette feeder.

3. Close the dual cassette feeder right bottom door.
Paper jam inside the printer (jam registration)

3. Close the right door.
Paper jam inside the printer (jam at fuser out)

2. Open the fuser cover. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
3. Close the fuser cover and the right door.
Paper jam in output area (jam output face down)
1. Gently pull the paper out of the output tray.

Figure 5-52 Remove paper
2. Open and close the front door. Printing automatically resumes.
If the paper jam persists, make sure the bin full sensor is unfolded. The bin full sensor is located in front of
the output tray.
Figure 5-53 Bin full sensor

Service mode (tech mode)
Entering service mode
To enter service mode
1. From the control panel, select Support tools and then Service.
2. Enter the Service PIN ID.
▲ ID: 04082517
3. Select Service tools.
Figure 5-54 Service tools view

Service mode menu tree
Figure 5-55 Information
Table 5-19 Information

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Information General Engine Board Serial

Number
Supply Status Customer Replacement Toner (K)

Unit
Field Replacement Unit Imaging Unit (K)
Development Unit (K)
TCU
Paper transfer belt (PTB)
Fuser
Tray x rollers
Flow ADF Roller
Software Version System Firmware

Version
Main Firmware Version
Engine Firmware Version
Boot ROM Version
File System Version
Flow ADF Firmware

Version
Finisher Version
Scanner Version
ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 1097

Table 5-19 Information (continued)
Scan Control Version
Tray 2 Version
Tray 3 Version
Tray 4 Version
Tray 5 Version
Tray 6 Version
EP Version
Fuser Version
TR Version
Toner Version
Print CMS Version
Copy CMS Version
Scan CMS Version
Print Reports Supplies Information
Auto Toning History
Figure 5-56 Maintenance counts
Table 5-20 Maintenance counts

Maintenance counts Part Replacement Count Toner Cartridge (K)
Imaging Unit (K)

Table 5-20 Maintenance counts (continued)
Development Unit (K)
Paper Transfer Belt (PTB)
Fuser
Tray x rollers
Flow ADF Pickup Roller
Figure 5-57 Diagnostics
Table 5-21 Diagnostics

Diagnostics Engine Diagnostics Engine NVM Initialization
Engine NVM Read/Write
Engine Test Routines
Scanner Diagnostics Shading Test Shade and Print Report
Print Last Shade Report
Shade and Print Report (Flow

ADF) (dn/z models)
Print Last Shade Report (Flow

ADF) (dn/z models)
Scanner/Flow ADF (dn/z

models) NVM Read/Write
Scanner/Flow ADF (dn/z

models) Test Routines
Adjustment Print Adjustment Image Position

Table 5-21 Diagnostics (continued)
Print Test Patterns
Copy Adjustment Image Position
Scan Area Adjustment Automatic Adjustment
Manual Adjustment
Flow ADF Adjustment Automatic Adjustment
Manual Adjustment
Image Management Auto Tone Adjustment Normal

Activation
Full
Print Test Patterns
Figure 5-58 Service functions
Table 5-22 Service functions

Service Functions Main Memory Clear
Debug Log Job Status
Details
Capture Log All
Period Start Date/End Date
Transfer Assembly T2 Control Mode Paper Group/Paper Side/

Control Mode Paper Direction/T2 PWM
Envelope Rotate Off

Table 5-22 Service functions (continued)
90 degrees
180 degrees
Information
General
Information > General
This menu displays the following information:
● Machine serial number
Supply status
Customer replacement unit (CRU)
Information > Supply Status > Customer Replacement Unit

● This menu displays the printer’s customer replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to
check the information of the selected unit.
Field replacement unit (FRU)
Information > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit

● This menu displays the printer’s field replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to check
the information of the selected unit.
In this menu, there are five columns: Item, Threshold, Status, Count, and Maximum Life.
● Status: This column shows the current status of the selected item.
– OK: The current count is smaller than the default warning value.
– Check: The current count is bigger than the default warning value.
– OFF: The current count exceeds the maximum life.
● Count: This column shows the current count of the selected item.
● Maximum Life: This column shows the maximum capacity of the selected item.
The technician can edit the default warning value within the given threshold.
Selecting some items will enable the reset button to reset the current count to zero after replacing the unit.
Software version
Information > Software Version

● This menu displays the version of the software installed on the printer.

Print reports
Information > Print Reports
This menu displays reports that can be printed from the system. The following reports are available to print:
● Supplies Information
● Auto Toning History
Information > Print Reports > Auto Toning History
NOTE: TRC means Tone Reproduction Curve.
This report shows a history of execution of the TRC control. The TRC control preserves color consistency against
changes in supplies resulting from long-time use and environmental change. The purpose of the history report is
to check if the TRC control is working normally.
● If the TRC control performs normally, Pass count must be a non-zero value and Fail count must be zero.
● If Fail count is not zero, check the image density sensor.
Maintenance counts
Part replacement count
Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count

● This menu displays the replacement counts for the system parts. Users can select one group and press OK
to see the exact name of the part and the occurrence of the replacement.
The following table shows replaceable parts groups of the system:
Unit Item Sensing Method
Toner Cartridge Toner (Black) Auto Sensing
Imaging Unit Imaging Unit (Black) Auto Sensing
Fuser Fuser Auto Sensing
Transfer Transfer Roller Count Clear
Roller Tray 2 Roller Count Clear
Tray 3 Roller Count Clear
Flow ADF Roller Flow ADF Roller Count Clear

Diagnostics
Engine diagnostics
Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Initialization

● This menu initializes all engine NVM values to the default.
Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Read/Write
Purpose To change a configuration value for the engine firmware
Operation procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can navigate through the list of
codes with descriptions and saved values.
Users can also input a code through the text box to find a configuration value directly.
After selecting one value, press the Edit button to open an interface for user input.
Code Display Meaning Offset
109–0200 Standby Center Temperature 10/10
109–0201 Standby Side Temperature 10/10
Engine test routines

● Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines
Purpose To perform test routines for the engine
Operation procedure When the main Engine Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the
list of routines and descriptions that display. Users can directly input an EDC code
through the text box to search for a routine. A maximum of three routines can be
selected at the same time.
After selecting one or more routines, press the OK button to open the test window. The
selected routines will display and users can start/start the selected test routine.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Code Display Meaning
100-0044 OPC Motor K Black OPC BLDC motor is on/off
100-0049 K OPC Motor Ready Detects if black OPC BLDC motor is running at
normal speed
100-0140 Duplex Motor Forward Duplex motor forward on/off
100-0141 Duplex Motor Forward Slow Duplex motor forward slow on/off
100-0142 Duplex Motor Forward Slowest Duplex motor forward slowest on/off

100-0160 Duplex Fan 1 Run Start/stop duplex fan 1 run
100-0180 Duplex Fan 1 Run Ready Detects if duplex fan 1 is running at normal speed
100-0200 Transfer Assembly Elevating Motor Transfer assembly elevate motor on/off
100-0210 Tray 3 Elevating Motor Tray 3 elevate motor on/off (optional)
100-0241 TCU LED TCU LED on/off
100-0250 TCU Full Sensor Detects if the TCU is full
100-0251 PTB TCU Full Sensor Detect level of a PTB TCU bottle
100-0260 LVPS Fan Run Start/stop LVPS fan run
100-0270 LVPS Fan Run Ready Detects if LVPS fan is running at normal speed
100-0340 Feed Motor Feed motor is on/off
100-0341 Feed Motor Slow Feed motor slow is on/off
100-0342 Feed Motor Slowest Feed motor slowest is on/off
100-0370 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Tray 2 motor is on/off
100-0371 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 2 motor slow on/off
100-0372 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 2 motor slowest on/off
100-0410 Registration Motor Registration motor is on/off
100-0411 Registration Motor Slow Registration motor slow on/off
100-0412 Registration Motor Slowest Registration motor slowest on/off
100-0420 Tray 1 Motor Tray 1 motor is on/off
100-0421 Tray 1 Motor Slow Tray 1 motor slow on/off
100-0422 Tray 1 Motor Slowest Tray 1 motor slowest on/off
100-0430 Output 2 Motor Forward Output 2 motor is on/off

100-0431 Output 2 Motor Forward Slow Output 2 motor slow on/off
100-0432 Output 2 Motor Forward Slowest Output 2 motor slowest on/off
100-0490 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Duplex motor forward is on/off
100-0491 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Slow Duplex motor forward slow is on/off
100-0492 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Slowest Duplex motor forward slowest is on/off
100-0600 Return Motor Forward Return motor forward is on/off
100-0601 Return Motor Forward Slow Return motor forward slow is on/off
100-0602 Return Motor Forward Slowest Return motor forward slowest is on/off
100-0603 Return Motor Reverse Return motor reverse is on/off
100-0604 Return Motor Reverse Slow Return motor reverse slow is on/off
100-0605 Return Motor Reverse Slowest Return motor reverse slowest is on/off
101-0101 Tray 4 Shift Gate Solenoid Tray 4 shift gate solenoid on/off
101-0140 Tray 4 Feed Motor Tray 4 feed motor on/off
101-0151 Tray 5 Feed Motor Slow Tray 5 feed motor slow on/off
101-0152 Tray 5 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 5 feed motor slowest on/off
101-0161 Tray 6 Feed Motor Slow Tray 6 feed motor slow on/off
101-0162 Tray 6 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 6 feed motor slowest on/off
101-0190 Output Bin Full Sensor Detects when paper is at output bin full sensor
101-0191 Output Bin 2 Full Sensor Detects when paper is at output bin 2 full sensor
101-0206 Developer Suction Fan Run Start/stop developer suction fan run
101-0207 Developer Suction Fan Run Ready Detects if developer suction fan runs at normal
speed
101-0270 Tray 1 Clutch Tray 1 clutch on/off
101-0271 Tray 1 Solenoid Tray 1 solenoid on/off
101-0280 Reverse Solenoid Reverse solenoid on/off
102-0000 Tray 2 Home Position Detects when Tray 2 is closed
102-0001 Tray 2 Lock Detect Detect Tray 2 lock unit
102-0002 Tray 2 Lock Position Check Tray 2 lock position
102-0010 Transfer Assembly Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 2
102-0041 Transfer Assembly Paper Size Read Detects paper Tray 2 size.

102-0050 Transfer Assembly Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 2 is elevated to the sensor
102-0080 Tray 3 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 3
102-0111 Tray 3 Paper Size Read Detects paper Tray 3 size.
102-0120 Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 3 is elevated to the sensor
102-0150 Tray 4 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 4
102-0181 Tray 4 Paper Size Read Detects Paper Tray 4 size.
102–0201 Tray 4 Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 level
sensor 1
sensor 2
102-0210 Tray 5 Home Position Detect when Tray 5 is closed.
102-0220 Tray 5 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 5
102-0251 Tray 5 Paper Size Read Detects Paper Tray 5 size
sensor 1
sensor 2
102–0273 Tray 5 Install Sensor 1 Detect when Tray 5 install sensor 1
102–0274 Tray 5 Install Sensor 2 Detect when Tray 5 install sensor 2
102-0280 Bypass Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Bypass Tray (Tray 1)
102-0281 Bypass Paper Size Read Detect Paper Tray 1 size
102-0292 Prefeed 1 Sensor Detects when paper is at prefeed 1 sensor
102-0300 Tray 3 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at Tray 3 feed sensor
(optional)
102-0320 Tray 4 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at Tray 4 feed sensor
(optional)

102-0330 Tray 4 Door Open Sensor Detect when Tray 4 is closed
102-0353 Prefeed 5 Sensor Detects when paper is at Tray 6 feed sensor

(optional)
102-0360 Registration Sensor Detects when paper is at the registration sensor
102-0361 Fuser Out Sensor Detects when paper is at the fuser out sensor.
102-0371 Output 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at output 2 sensor.
102-0380 Duplex Jam 1 Sensor Detects when paper is at duplex jam 1 sensor.
102-0390 Duplex Jam 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at duplex jam 2 sensor.
102-0435 Front Cover Sensor Detects status of front cover
102-0436 Right Door Sensor Detects status of right door
102-0480 Tray 6 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 6
102-0531 Tray 6 Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 6 level
sensor 1
102-0532 Tray 6 Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 6 level
sensor 2
102-0533 Tray 6 Install Sensor 1 Detect when Tray 6 install sensor 1
102-0534 Tray 6 Install Sensor 2 Detect when Tray 6 install sensor 2
102-0730 Tray 4 Knock Up Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 knock up home sensor
102-0731 Tray 4 Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 4 shift tray
102-0732 Tray 4 Shift Tray Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 shift tray
level sensor 1
102-0733 Tray 4 Shift Tray Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 shift tray
level sensor 2
102-0734 Tray 4 Shift Plate Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 shift plate home sensor
102-0735 Tray 4 Shift Plate End Sensor Detect when Tray 4 shift plate end sensor
102-0736 Tray 4 Gate Solenoid Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 gate solenoid home sensor
104-0000 Waste Install Sensor Detects if waste is installed
105-0030 Black MHV Bias Black MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level
106-0030 Black Developer Bias Black developer bias voltage on at normal drive
level
106-0031 Black Developer AC Bias Black developer bias AC voltage on at normal drive
level

106-0200 HVPS Installed Detect HVPS unit
107-0033 THV(-) Bias THV minus bias voltage on at normal drive level
107-0034 THV CC Bias THV constant current plus bias voltage
107-0035 THV CV Bias THV constant voltage plus bias voltage
107-0165 K Eraser On K eraser lamp on/off
107-0169 K Eraser Detect Detect K eraser status
109-0000 Fuser Temperature A Detects what the temperature A is on fuser
109-0010 Fuser Temperature B Detects what the temperature B is on fuser
109-0012 Inner Temperature Inner temperature
109-0013 Outer Temperature Outer temperature
109-0014 Humidity Humidity
109-0020 Fuser Fan Run Ready Detects if fuser fan motor runs at normal speed
109-0021 Output 2 Fan Run Start/stop output 2 fan run
109-0022 Output 2 Fan Run Ready Detects if output 2 fan runs at normal speed
109-0023 Output 3 Fan Run Start/stop output 3 fan run
109-0024 Output 3 Fan Run Ready Detects if output 3 fan runs at normal speed
109-0030 Fuser Motor Forward Fuser motor forward on/off
109-0034 Fuser Motor Ready Detects if fuser motor runs at each speed
109-0040 Fuser Fan Run Fuser fan motor on/off
109-0046 Output Fan Run Output fan motor on/off
109-0047 Output Fan Run Ready Detects if fuser fan runs at normal speed
109-0130 Fuser Gap Motor Fuser press control motor on/off
109-0140 Fuser Gap Home Sensor Detects if the fuser press is located home position
109-0200 Detect Fuser Relay Detect fuser relay status
109-0210 Detect Zero Cross Period Detect zero cross period
109-0300 Fuser Installed Detect fuser unit
110-0000 Laser Scanner Assembly Motor 1 Run Ready Detects if laser scanner assembly motor 1 runs at
normal speed
110-0060 Laser Scanner Assembly Motor 1 Run Laser scanner assembly motor 1 on/off
110-0110 Laser Scanner Assembly LD Power 4 Laser scanner assembly LD 4 power on/off (black)
110-0170 Laser Scanner Assembly HSync 4 Detects laser scanner assembly HSync 4 (black)
110-0200 Laser Scanner Assembly Installed Detect laser scanner assembly
111-0030 Toner Dispense Motor Black Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off
111-0070 Toner Sensor Black TC sensor in developer tank
111-0140 Toner Control Voltage K K toner voltage on/off

111-0230 Toner Supply Lock Sensor K K supply motor lock sensor
111-0330 Toner Reservoir Motor K K reservoir motor on/off
111-0370 Toner Reservoir Level K K reservoir level display
112-0340 Center ID Sensor P Read Show center ID sensor P value
112-0350 Center ID Sensor S Read Show center ID sensor S value
113-0000 Finisher Present Sensor Detect if the finisher is in place
113-0350 Finisher Entrance Sensor Detects when paper is at entrance sensor
113-0360 Finisher Output Sensor Detects when paper is at output sensor
113-0361 Finisher Compile Paper Sensor Detect when a paper is at compile sensor
113-0370 Finisher Paddle Home Sensor Detects paddle home position
113-0380 Finisher Left Tamper Home Sensor Detects lift tamper home position
113-0390 Finisher Right Tamper Home Sensor Detects right tamper home position
113-0410 Finisher Stapler Door Sensor Detects if stapler door cover is closed
113-0420 Finisher Jam Cover Sensor Detects if jam door cover is closed
113-0430 Finisher Stapler Home Sensor Detects stapler home position
113-0440 Finisher Stapler Low Sensor Detects stapler level
113-0451 Finisher Stapler Ready Sensor Detect stapler ready sensor
113-0461 Finisher Ejector 1 Home Sensor Detect ejector 1 home position
113-0462 Finisher Ejector 2 Home Sensor Detect ejector 2 home position
113-0463 Finisher Ejector 2 Encoder Sensor Detect ejector 2 encoder Sensor
113-0470 Finisher Main Tray Home Sensor Detects main tray home position
113-0471 Finisher Main Tray Beam Sensor Detect main tray beam sensor
113-0472 Finisher Main Tray Low Limit Sensor Detect main tray low limit sensor
113-0473 Finisher Main Tray Encoder Sensor Detect main tray encoder sensor
113-0481 Finisher Paper Support Sensor Detect paper support home sensor
113-0491 Finisher Traverse Front Sensor Detect traverse front home sensor
113-0492 Finisher Traverse Rear Sensor Detect traverse rear home sensor
113-0501 Finisher Entrance Motor Finisher entrance motor on/off
113-0502 Finisher Output Motor Finisher output motor on/off
113-0510 Finisher Paddle Motor Finisher paddle motor on/off
113-0520 Finisher Left Tamper Motor Finisher left tamper motor on/off
113-0530 Finisher Right Tamper Motor Finisher right tamper motor on/off
113-0550 Finisher Staple Unit Motor Finisher staple unit motor on/off
113-0561 Finisher Ejector 1 Motor Finisher ejector 1 motor on/off

113-0562 Finisher Ejector 2 Motor Finisher ejector 2 motor on/off
113-0563 Finisher Ejector 2 Reverse Motor Finisher ejector 2 reverse direction on/off
113-0570 Finisher Main Tray Motor Finisher main tray motor on/off
113-0571 Finisher Paper Support Motor Finisher paper support motor on/off
113-0581 Finisher Traverse Motor Finisher staple unit traverse motor on/off
113-0591 Finisher Stack Solenoid Finisher stack solenoid on/off
113-0600 Finisher Punch Motor Finisher punch motor on/off
113-0610 Finisher Punch Encoder Sensor Detect finisher punch encoder sensor
113-0611 Finisher Punch Position Sensor Detect finisher punch position sensor
113-0612 Finisher Punch Home Sensor Detect finisher punch home sensor
113-0620 Finisher output bin Install Sensor Detect finisher punch output bin install sensor
113-0621 Finisher output bin Full Sensor Detect finisher punch output bin full sensor
113-2000 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Lift Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher buffer lift sensor
113-2010 2 Bin Finisher Clamp Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher clamp home sensor
113-2020 2 Bin Finisher Diverter Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher diverter home sensor
113-2030 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Away Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 away sensor
113-2031 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 home sensor
113-2032 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 encoder sensor
113-2040 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 2 home sensor
113-2041 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 2 encoder sensor
113-2050 2 Bin Finisher End Stopper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher end stopper sensor
113-2060 2 Bin Finisher Paddle Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher paddle home sensor
113-2070 2 Bin Finisher IPTU Entrance Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher IPTU entrance sensor
113-2071 2 Bin Finisher IPTU Middle Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher IPTU middle sensor
113-2080 2 Bin Finisher Entrance Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher entrance sensor
113-2090 2 Bin Finisher Main Output Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main output sensor
113-2091 2 Bin Finisher Sub Output Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher sub output sensor
113-2100 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Output Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher buffer output sensor
113-2110 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler home sensor
113-2111 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Rear Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler rear sensor
113-2112 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Front Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler front sensor
113-2113 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Manual Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler manual sensor
113-2114 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Head Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler head sensor
113-2115 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Low Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler low sensor

113-2116 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Ready Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler ready sensor
113-2120 2 Bin Finisher Front Tamper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher front tamper sensor
113-2130 2 Bin Finisher Rear Tamper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher rear tamper sensor
113-2140 2 Bin Finisher Main Beam Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main beam sensor
113-2141 2 Bin Finisher Main Front Level Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main front level sensor
113-2142 2 Bin Finisher Main Rear Level Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main rear level sensor
113-2143 2 Bin Finisher Main Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main encoder sensor
113-2144 2 Bin Finisher Main Full Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main full sensor
113-2145 2 Bin Finisher Sub Full Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher sub full sensor
113-2150 2 Bin Finisher Booklet Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher booklet paper sensor
113-2160 2 Bin Finisher Staple Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher staple paper sensor
113-2161 2 Bin Finisher Staple Button Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher staple button sensor
113-2170 2 Bin Finisher Compile Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher compile paper sensor
113-2180 2 Bin Finisher IPTU Cover Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher IPTU cover sensor
113-2181 2 Bin Finisher Top Cover Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher top cover sensor
113-2182 2 Bin Finisher Front Door Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher front door sensor
113-2190 2 Bin Finisher Stack Top Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stack top sensor
113-2200 2 Bin Finisher IPTU Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher IPTU detect sensor
113-2201 2 Bin Finisher Punch Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher punch detect sensor
113-2202 2 Bin Finisher Booklet Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher booklet detect sensor
113-2500 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Lift Motor 2 bin finisher buffer lift motor on/off
113-2510 2 Bin Finisher Clamp Motor 2 bin finisher camp motor on/off
113-2520 2 Bin Finisher Diverter Motor 2 bin finisher dverter motor on/off
113-2530 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Motor 2 bin finisher eject 1 motor on/off
113-2540 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Motor 2 bin finisher eject 2 motor on/off
113-2560 2 Bin Finisher IPTU Feed Motor 2 bin finisher IPTU feed motor on/off
113-2570 2 Bin Finisher Entrance Motor 2 bin finisher entrance motor on/off
113-2580 2 Bin Finisher Output Feed Motor 2 bin finisher output feed motor on/off
113-2590 2 Bin Finisher End Stopper Motor 2 bin finisher end stopper motor on/off
113-2600 2 Bin Finisher Paddle Motor 2 bin finisher paddle motor on/off
113-2610 2 Bin Finisher Main Tray Motor 2 bin finisher main tray motor on/off
113-2620 2 Bin Finisher Staple Move Motor 2 bin finisher staple move motor on/off
113-2621 2 Bin Finisher Staple Head Motor 2 bin finisher staple head motor on/off
113-2630 2 Bin Finisher Front Tamper Motor 2 bin finisher front tamper motor on/off

113-2640 2 Bin Finisher Rear Tamper Motor 2 bin finisher rear tamper motor on/off
113-2650 2 Bin Finisher Manual Blue LED 2 bin finisher manual blue LED on/off
113-2651 2 Bin Finisher Manual Red LED 2 bin finisher Manual red LED on/off
113-3000 Booklet Stopper Home Sensor Detect booklet Stopper home sensor
113-3010 Booklet Staple Home Sensor Detect booklet staple home sensor
113-3020 Booklet Front Staple Empty Sensor Detect booklet front staple empty sensor
113-3030 Booklet Rear Staple Empty Sensor Detect booklet rear staple empty sensor
113-3040 Booklet Knife Home Sensor Detect booklet knife home sensor
113-3050 Booklet Guide Home Sensor Detect booklet guide home sensor
113-3060 Booklet Diverter Home Sensor Detect booklet Diverter home Sensor
113-3080 Booklet Tamper Home Sensor Detect booklet tamper home sensor
113-3090 Booklet Paddle Home Sensor Detect booklet paddle home sensor
113-3100 Booklet Entrance Paper Sensor Detect booklet entrance paper sensor
113-3110 Booklet Tray Paper Sensor Detect booklet fold output paper sensor
113-3120 Booklet Fold Output Paper Sensor Detect booklet fold output paper sensor
113-3130 Booklet Press Home Sensor Detect booklet press home sensor
113-3500 Booklet Feed Motor Booklet feed motor on/off
113-3510 Booklet Fold Motor Booklet fold motor on/off
113-3520 Booklet Stopper Solenoid Booklet stopper solenoid on/off
113-3530 Booklet Stopper Motor Booklet stopper motor on/off
113-3540 Booklet Tamper Motor Booklet tamper motor on/off
113-3550 Booklet Knife Motor Booklet knife motor on/off
113-3560 Booklet Diverter Motor Booklet diverter motor on/off
113-3570 Booklet Press Motor Booklet press motor on/off
113-3580 Booklet Paddle Motor Booklet paddle motor on/off
113-3590 Booklet Guide Motor Booklet guide motor on/off
113-3600 Booklet Staple Motor Booklet staple motor on/off
113-4000 Punch Scan Home Sensor Detect punch scan home sensor
113-4010 Punch Scan Edge 1 Sensor Detect punch scan edge 1 sensor
113-4020 Punch Home Sensor Detect punch home sensor
113-4030 Punch Position A Sensor Detect punch position A sensor

113-4031 Punch Position B Sensor Detect punch position B sensor
113-4040 Punch Encoder Sensor Detect punch encoder sensor
113-4050 Punch Output Bin Full Sensor Detect punch output bin full sensor
113-4060 Punch Type 1 Detect Sensor Detect punch type 1 detect sensor
113-4061 Punch Type 2 Detect Sensor Detect punch type 2 detect sensor
113-4500 Punch Scan Motor Punch scan motor on/off
113-4510 Punch Motor Punch motor on/off
Fax diagnostics
Fax NVM Read/Write

● Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write
Purpose To change a configuration value for fax firmware.
Operation procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can navigate through the list
of configuration values and descriptions that display.
Users can input a code through the text box to search for a configuration value.
After selecting a value, press the Edit button to open an interface for user input.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Code Name Description Default Range
20-200 Pause dial time Pause time (value * 1000 ms) Country value 0-200
20-210 Dial pulse M/B ratio 33/66 40/60 Country value 0=

OPTION_DP_33
1=
OPTION_DP_40
2=
OPTION_DP_37
3=
OPTION_DP_50
20-220 Auto dial start pause time Pause time before auto-dialing 1 0-10
(second)
20-300 Ring on time Ring on time (ms) 170 90-800
20-310 Ring off time Ring off time (ms) 560 90-800

20-320 Ring detection frequency Sets the call indication frequency 1 1 = 12-80 hz
range that will be detected by LIU.
2 = 16-55 hz
3 = 20-55 hz
4 = 22-55 hz
20-330 Ring on max time Ring on max time (ms) 5100 3000-12000
20-340 Ring off max time Ring off max time (ms) 11100 9000-22000
20-400 DTMF high-frequency level DTMF high-frequency level (dBm) Country value 0-15
20-410 DTMF low-frequency level DTMF low-frequency level (dBm) Country value 0-15
20-420 DTMF timing DTMF duration of on/off output 8 1 = 80/80

(ms)
2 = 70/70
3 = 70/150
4 = 60/60
5 = 80/100
6 = 150/50
7 = 150/240
8 = 100/100
9 = 100/80
20-500 Dial mode Select tone/pulse Country value 0=

OPTION_TONE_
MODE
1=
OPTION_PULSE
_MODE
20-520 Error rate Adjust error rate (Off/5%/10%/ 2 0=

20%) OPTION_RATE_
OFF
1=
OPTION_RATE_
5
2=
OPTION_RATE_
10
3=
OPTION_RATE_
20
20-530 Dial tone detect Detect dial tone prior to sending Country value 0 = OPTION_OFF
1 = OPTION_ON
20-540 Loop current detect Detect if loop current is present Country value 0 = OPTION_OFF
prior to sending
1 = OPTION_ON

20-550 Busy signal detect Detect busy signal to allow redials Country value 0 = OPTION_OFF
1 = OPTION_ON
20-560 TCF duration Adjust TCF duration (ms) 1500 1000-3000
20-800 Modem speed Select modem start speed 24
20-810 Fax transmission level Adjust fax transmission level (dBm) Country value Country value
20-830 Auto dial timeout Adjust auto dial timeout (second) Country value 30-150
20-920 CNG detection count CNG tone detection check count 2 1-15
during ANS/FAX mode
20-930 Caller ID This option is needed to guide Country value 0 = OPTION_OFF

Caller ID off for user environment
1 = OPTION_ON
20-940 Ext. phone Ext. phone detection enable/ 1 0 = Disable

disable (default: enable 1)
1 = Enable
21-999 Fax line setting Fax test line setting (dual fax) 0 0 = Line 1
1 = Line 2
21-800 Modem speed line 2 Select modem start speed for line 24
2. This item will display only when
a dual line fax kit is installed
Fax test routines

● Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax Test Routines
Purpose To perform test routines for the fax machine.
Operation procedure When the main Fax Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the list
of routines and descriptions that display. Users can input a code through the text box
to search for a routine.
After selecting a routine, press OK to open the test window that lists the selected
routine. Users can start/stop the selected test routine.
Code Name Description State Displayed
20-012 Single tone 1100Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 1100Hz on line 1 On/Off
20-020 DTMF # Line1 Emits DTMF # on line 1 On/Off
20-021 DTMF * Line1 Emits DTMF * on line 1 On/Off
20-022 DTMF 0 Line1 Emits DTMF 0 on line 1 On/Off

20-040 V.21 300 bps Line1 Emits V.21 300 bps Line 1 On/Off
20-041 V.27ter 2400 bps Line1 Emits V.27ter 2400 bps Line1 On/Off
20-043 V.29 7200 bps Line1 Emits V.29 7200 bps Line1 On/Off

21-020 DTMF # Line2 Emits DTMF # on line 2 On/Off
21-021 DTMF * Line2 Emits DTMF * on line 2 On/Off

Scanner diagnostics
Shading test
● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test
Purpose – To check the quality of scanned images, especially if there might be defects in optical devices
such as the lens, mirror, or lamp.
– Check the quality problem as shown below:

Operation procedure For the Image Scanner Unit
Press Shade and Print report to see if the current shading value is correct. Mono, red, green, and
blue gray shading values will be shown on the printed report. When the previous shading value is
needed, press “Print Last Shade Report”.
For the Flow ADF unit
1. Load the shading sheet on the Flow ADF tray.
2. Enter SCV mode. Select the following menu items:
Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test > Shade and Print Report (Flow ADF)
Press Print Last Shade Report (ADF) for the previous shading value report.
3. Check if the printed results are correct.
NOTE:
– When executing Flow ADF shading, use only the shading sheet (JC63–05055A).
– A Shading Test for the Flow ADF unit must be completed after replacing the Flow ADF unit or
main board.
Verification

Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write
● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write
Purpose To read and/or write values in the scanner and Flow ADF memory.
Operation procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can navigate through the list
of codes with descriptions and saved values. Users can also directly input a code
through the text box to search for an NVM.
After selecting a code, the Edit button will be enabled only if the code is writable.
If the selected code is writable and the Edit button is enabled, press the button to
configure the desired value for the code.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Code NVM description Default GX Model
05-0000 Pick Up Count 0 O
05-0001 Separation Roller Count 0 O
05-0010 Document Duplex Reverse Point 0 O
05-0030 Simplex Registration Value (Registration 1) 0 O
05-0040 Duplex Registration Value (Registration 2) 0 O
05-0050 Width Guide Max Value Depends on Flow ADF O
05-0060 Width Guide Min Value Depends on Flow ADF O
Scanner/Flow ADF test routines

● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines
Purpose To perform test routines for the scanner and Flow ADF.
Operation procedure When the main Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines window displays, users can navigation
through the list of routines and descriptions that display. Users can input a code
through the text box to search for a routine.
After selecting a routine, press OK to open the test window that lists the selected
routine. Users can start/stop the selected test routine.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference Table below
Code Name Value GX model
06-0000 Scanner Original Size High/Low O

Detecting Sensor 1

06-0001 Scanner Original Size High/Low O

Detecting Sensor 2
06-0010 Scanner Cover Open/Close High/Low O

Sensor 1
06-0011 Scanner Cover Open/Close High/Low O

Sensor 2
06-0020 Scanner Image Scanner Motor Start/Stop O

Forward
06-0030 Scanner Image Scanner Motor Start/Stop O

Backward
06-0040 Scanner Image Scanner Home High/Low O

Position Sensor
05-0000 Document Length .1 Sensor High/Low O
05-0001 Document Length .2 Sensor High/Low O
05-0020 Document Cover Open Sensor High/Low O
05-0040 Document Detect Sensor High/Low O
05-0050 Document Feed Sensor High/Low O
05-0060 Document Simplex High/Low O

Registration Sensor
05-0070 Document Scan Read Sensor 1 High/Low O
05-0071 Document Scan Read Sensor 2 High/Low O
05-0080 Document Output Sensor High/Low O
05-0090 Document Pickup Clutch Start/Stop X
05-0110 Document Motor Forward Start/Stop O
05-0111 Document Motor Backward Start/Stop O
05-0123 Document width 1 MSO High/Low O

Sensor

Sensor

Sensor
05-0130 Document Pickup Motor Start/Stop O

Forward
05-0131 Document Pickup Motor Start/Stop O

Backward
05-0140 Document Pickup Roller High/Low X

Detect Sensor
05-0150 Document Stacker Lift Upper High/Low O

Sensor
05-0151 Document Stacker Lift Lower High/Low O

Sensor

05-0160 Document Registration 1 Start/Stop O

Motor Forward

Motor Backward

Motor Forward

Motor Backward
05-0180 Document Stacker Lift Motor Start/Stop O

Forward
05-0181 Document Stacker Lift Motor Start/Stop O

Backward
05-0190 Document Width Guide ADC 10Bit (0~1023) O

Sensor
05-0210 Document Jig Test Low Speed Start/Stop O

Simplex
05-0230 Document Jig Test High Speed Start/Stop O

Simplex
Adjustment
Print adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Image Position
Purpose Manually adjust the position of the printed image on the paper in the print engine.
Operation procedure 1. Select a tray to adjust.
2. Change the adjustment value using the + or - buttons, then press the OK button
to save the changes.
○ Simplex Leading Edge
○ Simplex Side Edge
○ Duplex Leading Edge
○ Duplex Side Edge
NOTE:
○ Adjustment must be done for each tray (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5).
○ Do not choose ALL for the tray selection.
○ Adjust for the tray with each new tray selection.
3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image is adjusted. If not, repeat Step 2.
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Print Test Patterns
This menu is used to print out the test pattern manually.

Copy adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Copy Adjustment > Image Position
Purpose Manually adjust the position of the copied image on the paper in the copy engine.
Operation procedure NOTE: Before copy adjustment:
– Make sure that the initial values of margin adjustment are the same as the
values of the print adjustment.
– Perform an adjustment for each tray. Do not choose All for tray selection, as this
can confuse the adjustment.
NOTE:
– Complete adjustment for each tray (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5).
– Do not choose All for tray selection.
– Adjust for the tray with each new tray selection.
1. Locate the Scanner A/S Chart at the scanner glass.
2. Change the adjustment value using the + or - button, and then press OK to save
the changes.
○ Simplex Leading Edge
○ Simplex Side Edge
○ Duplex Leading Edge
○ Duplex Side Edge
3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image has moved. It not, repeat Step 2.
Scan area adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment
Purpose To correct the image position and magnification of scanned images automatically.
Operation procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart at the scanner glass.

Note that the Lead Edge arrows point to the left side of the scanner glass and are placed face
down. The Scanner A/S Chart comes in two sizes, A4 and Letter.
2. Press OK. A scan begins and the system will automatically calculate the proper value based on
the scanning result of the chart.
3. The new value saves to the system.
4. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from the scanner
glass.
5. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from the chart to
the scanned image.
6. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the scanned image.
NOTE: Specifications:
○ a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
○ c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Manual Adjustment
Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.
Operation procedure 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:
○ Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
○ Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
○ Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)
2. Select one item and press the Edit button.
3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.
4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press
+, otherwise press -.
5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press -,
otherwise, press +.
6. Press the OK button to apply the new value to the system.
7. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from
the scanner glass.
8. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from
the chart to the scanned image.
9. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the
scanned image.
○ a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
○ c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
Flow ADF adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Flow ADF Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment

Purpose To correct the image position and magnification of images scanned with the Flow ADF
automatically.
Operation procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart at the scanner glass.
2. Press OK. A scan begins and the system will automatically calculate the proper
value based on the scanning result of the chart.
3. The new value saves to the system.
the Flow ADF.
scanned image.
○ a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
○ c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
NOTE: After executing the Flow ADF adjustment, perform a shading test. Refer
to Scanner Diagnostics.
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Flow ADF Adjustment > Manual Adjustment
Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.
Operation procedure 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:

○ Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
○ Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
○ Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)
2. Select one item and press the Edit button.
3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.
4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press
+, otherwise press -.
5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press -,
otherwise, press +.

○ a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
○ c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
6. Press the OK button to apply the new value to the system.
the Flow ADF.
scanned image.
10. If Auto Skew Correction during job box is checked, skewed image is corrected by
digitally rotating the scanned images.
NOTE: When this function is enabled, visual artifact (like checkerboard

patterns) might appear on the image depending on the original contents or copy
option settings.
NOTE: After executing the Flow ADF adjustment, perform a shading test. Refer to
Scanner Diagnostics.

Image management
Auto tone adjustment activation

● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Normal
Purpose To correct image quality when density of the image is poor. Normal TRC Control is
recommended after changing a unit, such as a toner cartridge, imaging unit, and ITB,
or after restarting the printer.
Operation procedure 1. Select On or Off for Normal TRC Control execution.
○ Off: Normal TRC Control will not execute.
○ On: Normal TRC Control will execute during the determined conditions,
2. Change the execution condition(s) of Normal TRC Control.
○ Page Count: The system executes Normal TRC Control based on the count
of printed pages since the last execution.
○ Time Left Alone: The system executes Normal TRC Control when the
system returns from a power save mode and the rest time exceeds the
configured value.
Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has recovered.
● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Full
Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is replaced, the life of the OPC drum is
changed, the density of the image is poor, or the temperature and/or humidity in the
room changes suddenly.
Operation procedure 1. Select On or Off for Full TRC Control execution.
○ Off: Full TRC Control will not execute.
○ On: Full TRC Control will execute during the determined conditions,
2. Change the execution condition(s) of Full TRC Control.
○ Page Count: The system executes Full TRC Control based on the count of
printed pages since the last execution.
○ Time Left Alone: The system executes Full TRC Control when the system
returns from a power save mode and the rest time exceeds the configured
value.
Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has recovered.
Print test patterns
Diagnostics > Print Test Patterns >

● EP Calibration Pattern1 Contone

Service functions
Main memory clear
Service Functions > Main Memory Clear

● This function resets the main memory of the system to the factory default setting. This function can be
used to reset the system to the initial value when the product is functioning abnormally. User configured
values return to the default values.
To clear the main memory, select the country/region where the system is located, and restart the printer.
Debug log
Service Functions > Debug Log

● This function sets the system log message level. Users can select three options:
– Off: This option disables the logging option.
– Job Status: This option only enables the logging of user created jobs.
– Details: This option enables all the logging options of the running tasks of the system. This option
might effect the performance of certain system operations. Use this option when the system
performs abnormally and engineers need to investigate the problem.
Capture log
Service Functions > Capture Log

● This function copies all the saved logs in the system to a USB flash drive as a .zip file. The size of the
system log could reach up to 1 GB. If the system log size becomes very large, it will take a longer time to
copy to the USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the printer.
2. Tap the Service Mode app. When the pop-up displays, press the area below the pop-up until the
password window appears. Enter 1934 and press the OK button.
3. Go to Service Functions > Debug Log and change the debug log level to DETAILS.
4. Go to Service Functions > Capture Log.
5. Select All or Period. If selecting Period, enter the start and end date.
6. Press the Capture Log button.
7. Once the log is completed, a completion message will display. Restore the debug log level to JOB
STATUS.
NOTE: If the system log size becomes very large, it will take longer to copy to the USB flash drive.
8. Check that the Log File has been saved to the USB flash drive.

Transfer assembly control mode
Service Functions > Transfer Assembly Control Mode

●
Purpose To correct transfer related problems. This function can be used to change the transfer value to
optimize image quality to a certain type of paper.
Operation procedure – T2 Control Mode
○ Choose the paper group, paper side, and paper direction.
○ Adjust PWM value based on the problem type.
● Blur: Increase PWM value
● Poor Transfer: Increase PWM value
● Re-transfer: Decrease PWM value
● White Spot: Decrease PWM value
● OPC Cylic Ghost: Decrease PWM value
Verification Print a test job and make sure the transfer problem has been resolved.
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Envelope rotate
Service Functions > Envelope Rotate

● This menu enables rotation when printing on an envelope. The machine usually guides loaded envelopes
with SEF direction. If this function is enabled, the user can load an envelope with LEF direction and the
machine will rotate the image for printing on the envelope.
This function provides the following setting options:
– Off (default): Load envelope SEF direction
– 90 degrees: Load envelope LEF direction.

– 180 degrees: Load envelope SEF direction with flap on bottom side.
NOTE: If the paper source is Auto, the device will feed from the Tray 1 because the LEF envelope can only
be loaded in the Tray 1 according to paper specification.
If the length of envelope is over the maximum size of the custom width, the device will not rotate the
image and determine that the direction of the envelope is SEF. For example, the A4 model supports custom
sizes like W 98–216 ~ L148–356. This model does not support C5 Env (162x229) DL Env (110x220), No 9
Env (98x225), No 10 Env (105x241) rotation.

Print quality troubleshooting guide
Image quality problems and solutions
Print quality defects can be caused by printer components, consumables, media, internal software, external
software applications, and environmental conditions.
To successfully troubleshoot print quality problems, eliminate as many variables as possible.
First, generate prints using printable pages using laser paper. Use paper from an unopened ream that has been
acclimated to room temperature. Make sure that genuine HP toner is installed in the printer.
Figure 5-59 A/S chart (A3)

Figure 5-60 A/S chart
[1] Grid pattern For adjusting margin and magnification
[2] Black patches For adjusting skew error
[3] Barcode For checking the reproduction of the barcode
[4] Note area For recording the date, conditions, and so on.
[A] Halftone band For checking banding and jitter (K 50%)
[B, L] Resolution patterns For checking resolution
[C, D, E] Images For checking color reproduction
[F] Map image For checking fine line reproduction
[G] Color patches For checking color reproduction and uniformity
[H] Gradation pattern For checking tone reproduction of seven colors (C, M, Y, K, R, G, B/
10~100%)
[I] Color/Mono text For checking the reproduction of color, mono text
[J] Multilingual feature For checking the reproduction of small text
[K] White gap pattern For checking color to color, color to mono white gap
[M] Rulers For checking the magnification error (unit: cm)
[N] Rulers For checking the magnification error (unit: inch)
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1133

How to analyze image defects
See the following flowchart.
TIP: Depending on the remaining life of the part, the cause of the defect can vary. Check the remaining life of
the part.
Check for defects even if the defect is not repeated.
Figure 5-61 Defect analysis flowchart

Vertical black lines
Figure 5-62 Typical faulty images
Table 5-23 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Check item Action
1 Check the OPC for scratches or contamination in a vertical Replace the drum unit.
direction.
2 Scanner unit is contaminated (Flow ADF glass/mirror/CCD Wipe the surface of the contaminated parts with a soft
sensor) cloth.

Vertical light or white lines

1 A foreign substance is between the magnetic roller and Remove the foreign substance.
the blade.
No toner on magnetic roller.
Make the hook (transparency sheet is recommended.)
Put the hook into the gap between magnetic roller and
blade.
Pull out foreign substances.
2 The developer in the developer unit is empty or the ● Check the life remaining of the developer unit on the
developer unit life has expired. supplies information report.
– If its life has expired, replace the developer

unit.
● Check if the developer layer on magnetic roller is

uniform.

Table 5-24 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)
– If the developer layer is short, replace the

developer unit.
3 The laser beam path is blocked. Clean the laser scanner assembly window.
(Foreign substance is on the laser scanner assembly

window.)
4 The OPC is scratched or contaminated in a vertical Replace the drum unit.

direction.
Horizontal periodic black lines, dots


1 Horizontal periodic band or dot (CR 38 mm). Clean the contaminated surface on the charge roller with a
soft cloth.
Check if the surface of the charge roller is contaminated or
scratched. If the surface is scratched, replace the drum unit.
2 Horizontal periodic band or dot (OPC 188 mm). Clean the contaminated surface on the OPC drum with a
soft cloth.
Check if the surface of the OPC drum is contaminated or
scratched. If the surface is scratched, replace the drum unit.
3 Check if the charge roller contact plate had debris or is Clean the charge roller contact plate.
contaminated.
If the problem persists, replace the drum unit.
If the problem persists after replacing the drum unit,

replace the HVPS board.
Horizontal periodic light/dark lines, dots


1 Horizontal periodic bands (OPC, 188 mm) This problem is likely to resolve itself over time.
● OPC was exposed for too long. If the problem persists, replace the drum unit.
● Damage was caused by a high voltage in a short

amount of time.
2 Horizontal periodic bands (magnetic roller, 35.7 mm) Replace developer unit.
The magnetic roller is in poor condition.
V-groove of the surface of magnetic roller is not uniform.
Blurred image

Step Cause Action
1 High humidity and/or the quality of the paper. Use new, high quality paper.

Step Cause Action
2 THV transfer voltage is low. Increase the THV transfer voltage.
3 Connection between HVPS and THV is incorrect. Check if the connection between THV high voltage
terminal and HVPS THV terminal is correct.
Check if the connection between the HVPS and TR is

correct.
Foggy image
Step Cause Action
1 Voltage of OPC motor is abnormally low. Replace the drum unit.
2 Toner is over supplied by abnormal TC sensor. Replace the toner cartridge.
3 Transfer assembly voltage is abnormally high. Check the HVPS connection.
● Connection of transfer rollers in THV and TR.
Replace HVPS.
4 HVPS operates abnormally. Replace HVPS.
HVPS is damaged or broken.

Light image
Step Cause Action
1 A poor transfer has occurred. Replace HVPS.
2 Output voltage of HVPS is abnormally low. Replace HVPS.
● Color density decreases.
3 TC sensor operates abnormally. Replace the developer unit.
Uneven pitch and jitter image


Step Cause Action
1 Under 3 mm periodic jitters or horizontal bands have Remove foreign substance from the drive gears.
occurred.
Grease the drive gears.
● Toner cartridge gears

Step Cause Action
● OPC unit gears.
● Main drive unit gears.
Replace abnormal units.
● Toner cartridge
● Drum unit
● Main drive unit
2 Under 1 mm periodic jitter or horizontal bands have Check if the laser scanner assembly is assembled
occurred. correctly. If not, replace the screws.
Replace the laser scanner assembly.

Skewed image
1 Is the tray properly installed? Reinstall the tray correctly.
2 Is too much paper loaded in the tray? Remove some paper.
3 Are the paper guides properly set? Adjust the paper guides.
4 Is the surface of the pickup/reverse/feed roller dirty? Clean or replace the contaminated roller.
5 Is the Flow ADF installed and adjusted properly? Reinstall the Flow ADF unit.
Adjust the Flow ADF skew.
6 Is the transfer belt installed properly? Reinstall the ITB unit.
Poor fusing performance


Step Cause Action
1 Check the paper type. Check that the paper type displayed on the control panel is
the same type of paper being used for the print job.
Depending on what type of paper is used, print speed
varies.
● Plain (71~90g/), Thick (91~105g/): Full Speed
● Heavy weight (106~175g/): Half Speed
● Envelope (75~90 g/), Label (120~150 g/): Half Speed
2 The fuser unit is worn out. Replace the fuser unit.
3 Check the surface of the fuser belt and pressure roller for Replace the fuser unit.
scratches.
4 Check the temperature control system for problems. Check the non-contact thermistor sensor
● Thermistor is broken or operates abnormally
● Halogen lamp is broken or operates abnormally
Check the halogen lamp.
If parts are broken, replace the broken parts or the fuser

unit.
5 Check if the pressure control system operates properly. Check the pressure control system.
If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.
6 Paper is wrapped on the heating roller. Remove the wrapped paper and print a test page.
If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.
Stain on the paper back side


Step Cause Action
1 Is the transfer roller dirty or worn out? Clean or replace the transfer roller assembly.
2 Is the fuser belt or pressure roller dirty? Clean the fuser belt and pressure roller.
3 Check the pressure roller surface for damage or scratches. Replace the fuser unit.
Setting standard tone

Setting standard tone
Purpose
● To adjust the color tone to the standard set by the manufacturer.
NOTE: This function must be executed after first installation.
Procedure
1. Load A4 or Letter with Short Edge Feeding (SEF) direction on tray.
2. Select Setting on the control panel.
3. Log in as Admin.
4. Select Adjustment > Tone Adjustment > Setting Standard Tone.
5. Select OK on confirmation window.
6. The scan ID chart prints.
7. Load the chart on the scanner glass in a horizontal direction.
8. Start the scan.
9. When the scan complete window appears, select OK.

Cancel setting standard tone
NOTE: When the machine is installed for the first time, Cancel Setting Standard Tone does not need to be
executed.
Purpose
● Cancel the setting standard tone
● Return to the customized tone set by the user after setting the standard tone
Procedure
1. Select Adjustment > Tone Adjustment > Cancel Setting Standard Tone.
2. When the cancellation is complete, select OK.
3. Select Full TRC : Adjustment > Tone Adjustment > Auto Tone Adjustment > *Full + Execute Now

Error message
Scan image fail

● When a problem occurs on the scanned ID chart, an error message will display.
Check items
● Check the scanned ID chart for correct placement.
● Make sure the chart direction is horizontal.
● Retry the setting standard tone procedure.
When to perform Setting Standard Tone procedure
● When installing the machine for the first time.
● When the brightness has changed in comparison to the previous image.
NOTE: If the problem persists after executing the setting standard tone procedure, look for other causes.

Other errors
Image system problem
No Problem Description Troubleshooting Page
1 Toner cartridge detection error
2 Image contamination (pressure roller contamination)
Toner cartridge detection error
Symptom
● Toner cartridge is installed, but Not Installed message displays.
Cause
● Toner cartridge is not properly installed.
● Toner cartridge e-label harness is defective.
● E-label PCA or e-label Chip is defective.
● E-label connection (modular connector) is defective.
● E-label Joint PCA is defective.
● Bad connection between the main board and the e-label Joint PCA.
Troubleshooting
● Toner cartridge installation problem:
– Check if the toner cartridge is properly installed.
– If the cartridge comes out automatically, check the cartridge fixing hook.
– If the cartridge fixing hook is damaged, replace the cartridge cap or cartridge.
● E-label harness problem:
– Make sure the e-label harness is correctly connected.
Check the modular jack for damage or abnormal assembly.
– If the modular jack harness is defective, replace it with a new one.
If the modular jack has moved into the toner cartridge, remove it.
● E-label PCA problem or e-label data problem:
– Replace the toner cartridge.
● E-label connection (modular connector) installation problem:

– Open the front cover. Remove the toner cartridge.
– Make sure that the e-label connection (modular connector) is correctly installed.
– If the modular connector is not installed correctly, open the rear cover and reinstall.
● E-label Joint PCA problem:
– If the e-label Joint PCA, modular jack pin, or main board interface connector are damaged, replace the
PCA (see the previous step).
● Bad connection between the main board and the e-label Joint PCA:
– Check the connection between the main board and the e-label Joint PCA. If the connection is bad,
replace the harness, the e-label Joint PCA, or the main board.
Image contamination (pressure roller contamination)
Symptom
● Image (front/back side of paper) is contaminated with toner
Cause
● Toner is contaminated on the surface of pressure roller with low coverage, mainly simplex, and low duty
jobs.
Troubleshooting
1. Install Vx.D6.08 or latest version.
2. Make sure Clean Fuser function is set to Auto.
Vx.D6.08 or later version has Clean Fuser: Auto function as default.
If the previous setting used is On mode, that pre-existing setting value will be kept as before. Otherwise, it
will be changed to Auto.
On mode can be set at desired intervals as required.
SVC mode → Service Functions → Clean Fuser → Auto

3. To execute fuser cleaning function manually, press Execute Now.
4. Repeat step 3 up to six times until you cannot find any contamination on the fuser cleaning sheet.
If the contamination on the fuser cleaning sheet still exists, clean the pressure-roller with soft brush or
scraper with care.
– Open the fuser jam cover. Remove three screws, and then remove the brush.
– Check the surface of pressure roller and remove the toner contamination while carefully rotating the
pressure roller one cycle.

Fuser problem
1 Acoustic noise in fuser unit
2 Image hot offset problem
3 Error fusing unit not compatible problem
Acoustic noise in fuser unit
● Symptom: Acoustic noise from the fuser assembly in the early stages of printing.
● Cause: Fuser belt edges are damaged.
Troubleshooting
▲ Replace the fuser unit.
Image hot offset problem
● Symptom: Image at the leading edge of the paper is duplicated after 110 mm.
● Cause: The fusing temperature is high.
Troubleshooting
▲ Lower the fusing temperature in SVC mode until the problem disappears. The default value is 10, and it is
recommended to change the value up to 8.
How to change the plain temperature offset
a. Enter SVC mode, and select Engine NVM Rear/Write.

b. Select the Plain Temperature offset menu.
c. Press the OK button after adjusting the value. (1 = 2℃)
d. Press the Home button to exit SVC mode.
Error “fusing unit not compatible” problem
● Symptom: Error Fusing unit not compatible message appears.
● Cause: Harness for EEPROM signal is damaged by the sharp edge of the fuser frame.

Troubleshooting
▲ Check if the EEPROM signal harness is damaged.
If so, replace the fuser unit (from 2015.08.11 the new part was applied) or insulate the damaged spot of
harness by wrapping each harness up.
NOTE: The pre-existing AT tape might need to be removed, and then re-apply the insulation for each
damaged harness.
NOTE: New design was applied from 2015.08.11 which doesn’t have the sharp edge on the harness path
Scanner and Flow ADF problems
1 Noise of Flow ADF hinge/Crack of Flow ADF hinge/Flow ADF will not stay
open
2 Flow ADF is not recognized
3 During copy or scan job, the original paper JAM and U3–3213 error occur.
Noise of Flow ADF hinge/crack of Flow ADF/Flow ADF does not stay open

Symptom
● A noise comes from the Flow ADF hinges when it is opened or closed.
● The Flow ADF hinge is cracked.
● When the Flow ADF is opened to access the scanner glass, the unit should remain at a 50° angle (±10°).
The Flow ADF does not remain open as expected.
Troubleshooting
1. Remove the Flow ADF connector cover.
2. Remove the connector and one screw.
3. Lift and remove the Flow ADF unit.
4. Remove four screws from the hinge unit. Remove and replace the hinge unit.
5. Reassemble the Flow ADF.
Flow ADF is not recognized.
Symptom
● The Flow ADF installation is not recognized.
Cause
● The Flow ADF power cable fails.
Troubleshooting
1. Reassemble the Flow ADF power cable. If the problem is not resolved, replace the power cable.
2. Adjust the harness and fix it with a cable tie.
During copy or scan job, the original paper JAM and U3–3213 error occurs.
Symptom
● During copy or scan job, the original paper JAM and U3–3213 error occurs.
Troubleshooting
1. Check if the Sponge-Damper Separation has changed position.

2. If yes, refer to following guide.
a. Remove three screws.
b. Remove the linker by pressing its upper side from an inner direction. Then remove the front cover.
c. Remove four screws.
d. Remove the pickup assembly.

e. Replace the Flow ADF housing separation.
Drive unit problem
1 Machine makes noise during print job
Machine makes noise during print job
Symptom
● Machine makes noise during a print job.
Cause
● The gear train needs to be greased.
● An old type gear is assembled.
Troubleshooting
1. Enter service mode.
2. Execute a fuser motor test.
Service Mode > Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines > Fuser Motor Forward
3. Remove the fuser unit and execute the fuser motor test again.
4. If the printer still makes a noise during a print job, replace the fuser drive output assembly.
5. If the problem is not resolved, replace the fuser unit.
Feeding system problem
1 Tray 1, Tray 2, and Tray 3 cannot pick up paper
2 Printer cannot feed paper
3 Envelope wrinkle

Tray 1, Tray 2, and Tray 3 cannot pick up paper
Symptom
● Tray 1, Tray 2, and Tray 3 cannot pick up paper.
Cause
● Bad harness connection on the main board.
● Connector defect of the main board.
Troubleshooting
1. Check the harness connection. Reconnect the harness if it is not connected correctly.
2. Check the pickup connector on the main board.
If the connector has a problem with the soldering, replace the main board.
Printer cannot feed paper
Symptom
● The printer cannot feed paper from Tray 2 or Tray 3.
Cause
● Feed motor problem
● Feed motor connection problem
● Main board defect
Troubleshooting
● Check the feed motor operation.
– Open the right door and push the cover switch forcibly.
– Enter service mode.
– Select the following menu items:
EDC Mode > Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routine > Feed motor > On/Off
Check the operating status of the two feed rollers.
– If the feed rollers cannot rotate, open the rear cover and check the motor and gears.
● Check the connection between the main board and the feed motor.
● If the problem persists, replace the main board.
Envelope wrinkle
Symptom
● Envelope is wrinkled when printed from the MP Tray.

Troubleshooting
1. Enter service mode.
2. Select Envelope Rotate. (Service Functions > Envelope Rotate)
3. Select a menu item: Off, 90 degrees, or 180 degrees.
Laser scanner assembly problem
1 Laser scanner assembly motor makes a loud noise
Symptom
● The laser scanner assembly motor makes a loud noise while in printing mode.
Cause
● The laser scanner assembly motor is defective.
Troubleshooting
1. Enter service mode and execute the laser scanner assembly motor test.
2. If the laser scanner assembly motor running sound is loud, replace the laser scanner assembly.
3. If the laser scanner assembly motor running sound is not loud, check the other unit.
Electrical circuit problem
1 LVPS output voltage drop error
2 SMPS output voltage drop error
3 HDD makes a loud noise
4 Control panel malfunction: networking not functioning
5 Home screen icon not visible or control panel is broken
LVPS output voltage drop error
Symptom
● An error message occurs on the control panel (C3–1312, S3–3121, M1–4111, M1–4211).
Cause
● 24V channel output voltage drops to under 21.6V and 5V channel output is normal.

Troubleshooting
1. Check all 24V output channels (24VS1, 24VS2, 24VS3, 24VS4) to determine if 24V voltage comes out.
2. If 24V voltage does not come out, check 24V on/off signal pin on the main board.
a. The voltage at 24V on/off signal pin is 0V. → Main board and signal is normal.
b. The voltage at signal pin is 4~5.3V → Main board and signal is abnormal
3. If Main board and signal is normal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, check other parts (such as the
fuser, motor, scanner harness, and so on) driven by 24V voltage before replacing the LVPS.
4. If Main board and signal is normal and just one or two or three 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect
some harness from abnormal 24V output channel before replacing the LVPS.
5. If Main board and signal is abnormal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect the harness,
connector and main board.
Hard disk drive (HDD) makes a loud noise
Symptom
● The Hard disk drive (HDD) makes a loud noise.
Cause
● The HDD has defects.
Troubleshooting
● Replace the HDD.
Networking not function
Symptom
● Network is not functioning.
Cause
● Network line itself is not working properly.
● Network configuration is wrong.
● Some related electronic components in the main board have defects.
Troubleshooting
1. Connect a network line to the PC and complete a ping test.
2. Complete a ping test after connecting the network line to the SET. If the connection is working, check the
network configuration which might have been set incorrectly.
3. If the ping test does not have a result, open the rear cover and check the main board for visible defects on
the network related components such as the connector (CN16), capacitor (C192), and other close
components. Surge voltage from the outside can cause defects.
4. If any of the components have visible defects, then replace the main board.

Control panel malfunction
Symptom
● When touching a button, another button is pressed.
Cause
● Touch IC is influenced by the interference between TX frequency and power noise frequency.
Troubleshooting
1. If the power cable is connected to the multi-tap, unplug and plug it into an independent outlet.
2. If the touch malfunction persists, check the following:
– Press the power button until a pop-up window displays.

– Press and hold inside of the window area, avoiding the Cancel and Turn Off buttons, until the
password window displays.

– Enter 8378 and press Done.
– Select Utilities.
– Change the Touch Config value:
○ After changing Touch Config value, select Home.
○ Priority: 1.(default) → 4. 401K_500K → 5. 500K_599K → 3. 148K_290K → 2. 86K_216K
– Check the touch operation.

○ If the touch malfunction persists, change Touch Config to another value and test the touch
operation again.
Home screen icon is missing or control panel is broken
Symptom
● Home screen icon is missing or the control panel screen is broken.
Cause
● UI software error.
Troubleshooting
● Enter service mode.
● Execute Main Memory Clear (Service Functions > Main Memory Clear)

Adjusting the Flow ADF skew
1. Open the Flow ADF. Loosen the two screws securing both hinges.
2. Adjust the position of the Flow ADF hinge according to the skew status.

a. If the skew image is similar to the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
arrow. (1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)
ENWW Adjusting the Flow ADF skew 1165

b. If the skew image is like the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the arrow. (1
scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)

3. Detach the Flow ADF sponge after adjusting the skew. Place the Flow ADF sponge on the scanner glass.
Close the Flow ADF unit to attach the sponge.
ENWW Adjusting the Flow ADF skew 1167

6 Diagrams
● Connection Diagram (FUSER/EXIT/DUPLEX/TONER)
● Connection Diagram (Scanner)
● Connection Diagram (Laser Scanner Assembly/OPE/USB)
● Connection Diagram (Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup)
● Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock)
● Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB)
ENWW 1169
Connection Diagram (FUSER/EXIT/DUPLEX/TONER)
HDD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
SATA SIGNA L
SATA PO W ER
CN 22-SATA PO W ER
CN 19-SATA SIGN AL
SATA_RX_N
SATA_RX_P
SATA_TX_P
SATA_TX_N
5V2_SATA
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
EXIT/DU PLEX
I.5m m / 14*2P
Color
CN 33 EXIT/DU PLEX
4 1 14 1 A_DU P_RET TO NER CRUM
DU P_RET 3 2 13 2 nA_DUP_RET 1.5mm / 17*1P
M OT STEP 2 3 12 3 nB_DU P_RET CN 50 TB CRU M JC39-02261A JC39-02214A
1 4 11 4 B_DU P_RET 3.3V_CRUM 1 5 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_K 2 4 2 3 2 3
5 10 5 A_DU PLEX1 3 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M K
4 SCL_CRUM_ TB_K
3 6 9 6 nA_DUPLEX1 DGN D 4 2 4 1 4 1
DUP1 M O T STEP 2 7 8 7 nB_DU PLEX1 1 5
1 8 7 8 B_DU PLEX1
JC39-02214A
3.3V_CRUM 5 5 1 4 1 4
3 9 6 9 R_5V_PS SDA_CRUM_ TB_C 6 4 2 3 2 3
D up RETU RN 10 5 10 DGND 7 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M C
2 SCL_CRUM_ TB_C
SEN 11 4 11 nSEN SE_P_DUP_RETU RN DGN D 8 2 4 1 4 1
1
1 5
2 12 3 12 DGND
EXIT TEM P
1 13 2 13 ADC_EXIT_TEMP 9
JC39-02214A 4 1 4
3.3V_CRUM 5 1
SDA_CRUM_ TB_M 10 4 2 3 2 3
14 1 14 NC SCL_CRUM_ TB_M 11 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M M
JC39-02189A JC39-02188A 3
DGN D 12 2 4 1 4 1
3 1 14 15 R_5V_PS 1 5
BIN FU LL1 2 2 13 16 DGND
1 3 12 17 nSEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT1 3.3V_CRUM 13 1
JC39-02214A
5 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_Y 14 4 2 3 2 3
3 1 5 4 11 18 R_5V_PS SCL_CRUM_ TB_Y 15 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M Y
BIN FU LL2 2 2 4 5 10 19 DGND DGN D 16 2 4 1 4 1
1 3 3 6 9 20 nSEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT2 1 5
NC 17
JC39-02190A
7 8 21 R_5V_PS
4 2 8 7 22 DGND
5 1 9 6 23 nDETECT_JOB_SEP
Mono
TO NER CRUM
3 10 5 24 24V4 1.5mm / 17*1P
EXIT GATE
SO L
SO LEN O ID 2 CN 50 TB CRU M JC39-02237A 5

1 11 4 25 EN _EXIT_SO L 3.3V_CRUM 1 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_K 2 4 2 3 2 3
12 3 26 R_5V_PS 3 3 2 3 2 BTL CRU M
3 SCL_CRUM_ TB_K 3
D UP 13 2 27 DGND 4 2 4 1 4 1
2 DGN D
JAM 1 14 1 28 nSEN SE_JAM_ DU PLEX1 1 5
1
3.3V_CRUM 5 5 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_C 6 4 2 3 2 3
FU SER DRIVE 3 2 3 2 DEVE CRU M
SCL_CRUM_ TB_C 7 3
1.5mm / 16*2P 8 2 4 1 4 1
DGN D
1 5
JC39-02195A CN 30 FU SER DRIVE
10 1 R_DGND 3.3V_CRUM 9
9 2 CLK_BLDC_FUSER 5V_PS 10 2 1 ERASER LED
8 3 nREADY_BLDC_FU SER M_ O N _ERASER 11 1 2
7 4 nEN_BLDC_FU SER
FU SER BLDC
6 12
BLDC 5
5 NC
6 R_DGND
DGN D
3.3V_CRUM 13
4 7 DG ND SDA_CRUM_ TB_Y 14
3 8 DG ND SCL_CRUM_ TB_Y 15
2 9 24V2_SW DGN D 16
1 10 24V2_SW NC 17
3 11 FAN_FUSER_O UT
FUSER OU T 2 12 FB_OUT_FAN _FUSER_OUT
FAN 1 13 DG ND
SIDE CO M 1 3 14 DG ND
Color
2 2 TO N ER RESERVOIR
COVER OPEN N .O . 15 CO VER_O PEN _SIDE
3 1 I.5mm / 11*2P
N .C. 16 nCO VER_O PEN_SIDE
CN 27 Toner M otor/L
o ck JC39-02257A
4 17 A_FUSER_REL A_TNR_SU P_KC 1 4
TO N ER
3 18 nA_FUSER_REL nA_TNR_SUP_KC 2 3
FU SER REL M O T STEP 2 19 nB_FU SER_REL nB_TN R_SU P_KC 3 2
SU PP
M O T_KC
1 20 B_FU SER_REL B_TN R_SU P_KC 4 1
3 3
1 9 21 FAN_EXIT1 R_5V_PS 5 TN R LO CK
2 2
EXIT FAN 1 2 8 22 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT1 DGN D 6 SEN S_KC
1 1
3 7 23 DG ND nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_KC 7
3 4 6 24 FAN_EXIT2 A_RES_KC 8 4
EXIT FAN 2 2 5 5 25 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT2 nA_RES_KC 9 3 RESERVO IR
1 6 4 26 DG ND nB_RES_KC 10 2 M O T_KC
JC39-02191A B_RES_KC 11 1
3 7 3 27 FAN_EXIT3
EXIT FAN 3 2 8 2 28 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT3 A_TNR_SU P_M Y 12 4
29 DG ND TO N ER
1 9 1 nA_TNR_SUP_M Y 13 3
SU PP
nB_TN R_SU P_MY 14 2
30 R_5V_PS M O T_M Y
3 3 B_TN R_SU P_M Y 15 1
Fuser 2 31 DG ND
2
POSI 1 32 nSENS_FU SER_PO S1 R_5V_PS 16 3
1 RES LO CK
DGN D 17 2
nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_MY 18 1 SEN S_M Y
FU SER DRAWE R
A_RES_MY 19 4
I.5m m / 9*2P
JC39-02218A JC39-02217A nA_RES_M Y 20 3 RESERVO IR
CN 40 FUSER DRAW ER nB_RES_M Y 21 2 M O T_M Y
1 11 1 DGND B_RES_M Y 22 1
FU SER N C TH ERM
CEN TER
3
2
1
2
3
4
10
9
8
2
3
4
DGND
N C_C_TD
N C_C_TC
Mono
TO N ER RESERVOIR
I.5mm / 11*2P
3 5 7 5 DGN D CN 27 Toner M otor/L
o ck
N C TH ERM JC39-02242A
2 6 6 6 N C_S_TD A_TNR_SU P_KC 1 4
SIDE TO NER
1 7 5 7 N C_S_TC nA_TNR_SUP_KC 2 3
SU PP
nB_TN R_SU P_KC 3 2
M OT
8 4 8 nDETECT_FU SER B_TN R_SU P_KC 4 1
9 3 5 3
R_5V_PS TN R LO CK
10 2 6 2
DGN D SEN S
11 1 1
21P-RW ZV-K4GG -P4
21R-RW ZV-K2G G-P4
nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_KC 7

JC39-02243A
A_RES_KC 8 7 1 4
JST
JST
nA_RES_KC 9 6 2 3 RESERVO IR
6 1 10 9 R_5V_PS 10
nB_RES_KC 5 3 2 M OT
5 2 9 10 3.3V_CRUM 11
B_RES_KC 4 4 1
4 3 8 11 ADC_CU RL_TEST
3 7 3 5 3
4 12 DGND RES FU LL
FUSER 2 6 2 6 2
5 13 SDA2_FU SER SEN S
EEPRO M 1 5 1 7 1
6 14 SCL2_FU SER
7 4 15 THERM_ REAR1
8 3 16 THERM_ REAR2
JC39-02244A 4
DGN D 12 4 1
M_ TC_VIN _K 13 3 2 3 TC
9 2 17 THERM_ FRO N T1 14 2 3 2 SENSO R
24V1_TC
10 1 18 THERM_ FRO N T2 15 1 4 1
M_ TN R_VCON _K
R_5V_PS 16
DGN D 17
nSEN SE_RES_FULL 18
A_RES_MY 19
nA_RES_M Y 20
nB_RES_M Y 21
To FDB B_RES_M Y 22
1170 Chapter 6 Diagrams ENWW

Connection Diagram (Scanner)
???
CN 55 ???
1 3.3V_MICOM
2 PA30|SWCLK
3 PA31|SWDIO
4 DGND
5 nRST_XMEGA
FLOW DOCUMENT FEEDER

-1.5mm / 17*2P
CN 42 D SDF
M S1_STEP_SCAN 1
CUR_STEP_SCAN 2
DIR_STEP_SCAN 3
nEN _STEP_SCAN 4
PLS_STEP_SCAN 5
PW M _W LED 6
nCO VER_O PEN _PLATEN 2 7
nCO VER_O PEN _PLATEN 1 8
??? nSEN SE_SCAN _HO M E 9
-1.5mm / 6*1P nSEN SE_APS2 10
nSEN SE_APS1 11
CN 51 ??? nDETECT_RSDF 12
6 1 6 1 DG N D nSENSE_PAPER_RADF 13
5 2 5 2 nSEN SE_P_REG I_R1 nSENSE_SCAN_PO S_1 14
4 3 4 3 5V_PS TXD_DSDF 15
3 4 3 4 DG N D RXD_DSDF 16
2 5 2 5 nSEN SE_P_REG I_R2 nRST_RSDF 17
1 6 1 6 5V_PS nSENSE_SCAN_PO S_2 18
DGN D 19
DGN D 20
DGN D 21
DGN D 22
3.3V_SCAN 23
DGN D 24
5V_W KUP 25
DGN D 26
5V_SCAN 27
5V_SCAN 28
DGN D 29
24V_SCAN 30
24V_SCAN 31
24V_SCAN 32
24V_SCAN 33
M S2_STEP_SCAN 34
DCIS
40P FFC
CN 43 DCIS
CLK_M AIN _DCIS_P 1
CLK_M AIN _DCIS_N 2
DGN D 3
LVDO _DCIS_4_P 4
LVDO _DCIS_4_N 5
DGN D 6
LVDO _DCIS_3_P 7
LVDO _DCIS_3_N 8
DGN D 9
LVDO _DCIS_2_P 10
LVDO _DCIS_2_N 11
DGN D 12
RX_CLK_DCIS_P 13
RX_CLK_DCIS_N 14
DGN D 15
LVDO _DCIS_1_P 16
DCIS
LVDO _DCIS_1_N 17
DSDF
DGN D 18
LVDO _DCIS_0_P 19
LVDO _DCIS_0_N 20
DGN D 21
DGN D 22
SDI_DCIS 23
SCLK_DCIS 24
Scanner Unit
SDO _DCIS 25
SLO AD_DCIS 26
DGN D 27
DGN D 28
PI_SH_DCIS 29
DGN D 30
3.3V_SCAN 31
3.3V_SCAN 32
3.3V_SCAN 33
3.3V_SCAN 34
3.3V_SCAN 35
3.3V_SCAN 36
3.3V_SCAN 37
3.3V_SCAN 38
DGN D 39
DGN D 40
CCDM
BBP 50P FFC
50P
CN 41 BBP CN 44 CCDM
1 5V DGN D 1
2 N EN_STEP_DU PLEX1 CLK_M AIN _CCDM_ P 2
3 EN _M P_CLU TCH CLK_M AIN _CCDM_ N 3
4 N EN_STEP_FU SER_REL DGN D 4
5 CO VER_OPEN _SIDE SLO AD_CCDM 5
6 N EN_STEP_TNR_SU P_KC SCLK_CCDM 6
7 DIR_STEP_TNR_SUP_KC SDI_CCDM 7
8 EN _EXIT_SO L DGN D 8
9 N EN_STEP_DUP_RET PITG_CCDM 9
10 NSENSE_T1_PO S nRST_AFE 10
11 N EN_STEP_TNR_SU P_KC SDO _CCDM 11
12 PW M _M P_SO L DGN D 12
13 CLK_BLDC_FU SER LVDO _CCDM _4_N 13
14 N EN_BLDC_FUSER LVDO _CCDM _4_P 14
15 CO VER_OPEN _FRO N T DGN D 15
16 N SEN SE_P_EM PTY2 LVDO _CCDM _3_N 16
17 PLS_STEP_T1 LVDO _CCDM _3_P 17
18 N EN_STEP_T1 DGN D 18
19 nEN_STEP_FEED RX_CLK_CCDM _N 19
20 NSENSE_FUSER_PO S1 RX_CLK_CCDM _P 20
21 nEN_STEP_REGI DGN D 21
22 PLS_STEP_DU PLEX1 LVDO _CCDM _2_N 22
23 nSEN SE_CU RL1 LVDO _CCDM _2_P 23
24 N SEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT1 DGN D 24
25 DIR_STEP_TNR_SUP_M Y LVDO _CCDM _1_N 25
26 N EN_STEP_DU PLEX2 LVDO _CCDM _1_P 26
27 PLS_STEP_DU P_RET DGN D 27
28 N SENSE_JAM_ DUPLEX1 LVDO _CCDM _0_N 28
29 N SEN SE_P_DUP_RETU RN LVDO _CCDM _0_P 29
30 N SEN SE_P_REGI DGN D 30
31 PLS_STEP_DU PLEX2 3.3V_SCAN 31
32 PLS_STEP_FEED 3.3V_SCAN 32
33 PLS_STEP_PICKU P1 3.3V_SCAN 33
34 PLS_STEP_PICKU P2 3.3V_SCAN 34
35 PLS_STEP_REG I 3.3V_SCAN 35
36 nSEN SE_CU RL2 3.3V_SCAN 36
37 N SEN SE_P_PRE_FEED1 3.3V_SCAN 37
38 N SEN SE_P_PRE_FEED2 3.3V_SCAN 38
39 N SEN SE_P_FEED DGN D 39
40 N SEN SE_P_FU SER_O UT DGN D 40
41 N SENSE_JAM_ DUPLEX2 5V_SCAN 41
42 N EN_STEP_PICKU P1 5V_SCAN 42
43 N EN_STEP_PICKU P2 5V_SCAN 43
44 ADC_FB_FR 5V_SCAN 44
45 ADC_FB_REGI DGN D 45
46 ADC_FB_FEED DGN D 46
47 FB_DU P2 10V_CCD 47
48 FB_PU1 10V_CCD 48
49 FB_PU2 10V_CCD 49
50 DGN D 10V_CCD 50
BBP
16P
CN 54 BBP
1 5V
2 N EN_BLDC_O PC_K
3 N READY_BLDC_O PC_K
4 N EN_BLDC_O PC_C
5 N READY_BLDC_O PC_C
6 N EN_BLDC_O PC_M
7 N READY_BLDC_O PC_M
8 N EN_BLDC_O PC_Y
9 N READY_BLDC_O PC_Y
10 NSEN SE_SHUT_ACR
11 NREADY_BLDC_FU SER
12 N EN_STEP_RES_KC
13 DIR_STEP_RES_KC
14 N EN_STEP_RES_M Y
15 DIR_STEP_RES_M Y
16 DGN D
ENWW Connection Diagram (Scanner) 1171

Connection Diagram (Laser Scanner Assembly/OPE/USB)
SPEAKER
HUB
FDIJOINT
-1.5m m / 11P
CN20 FDIJO INT

DGND 1
DGND 2
3.3VSUSP 3
5V_SUSP 4
nDETECT_FDI 5
NOT_READY_FDI 6
EN_COPY_EXIT_FDI 7
nEN_COPY_CNT_FDI 8
nDETECT_PSIZE_FDI 9
nDETECT_COLOR_DFI 10
nEN_FDI 11
N/W RJ45
CN1 NETW ORK 1
TD+ 2
TD- 3
RD+ 4
TERM1
Color Only LSU SIGNAL M Y 5
TERM2 6
50FFC RD- 7
CN25 LSU SIGNAL TERM3 8
MY TERM4 9
1 DGND GREEN- 10
2 PW M _LD_POW ER_M GREEN+ 11 NTWORK
3 DGND YELLOW - 12
4 nHSYNC_M _DP YELLOW +
5 nHSYNC_M _DN
6 DGND
7 nVDO_M _B1_DP
USB
8 nVDO_M _B1_DN
9 DGND CN14 USB 1
10 nSH_M1 USB3D_VBUS 2
11 nSH_M2 USB3D_DN 3
12 DGND USB3D_DP 4
13 VDO_M _B2_DP DGND 5
14 nVDO_M _B2_DN USB3D_PXN 6
15 DGND USB3D_PXP 7
16 nVDO_M _B3_DP DGND 8
17 nVDO_M _B3_DN USB3D_RXN 9
18 DGND USB3D_RXP
19 nSH_M3
20 nSH_M4
21 DGND PC
22 nVDO_M _B4_DP
23 nVDO_M _B4_DN USB HOST Ch2
24 DGND
25 CN17 USB HOST Ch2 1
nLDON_LSU_M
26 USB3H_VBUS_REAR2 2
nLDON_LSU_Y
27 USB3H_REAR2_DN 3
DGND
28 USB3H_REAR2_DP 4
nHSYNC_Y_DP
29 DGND 5
nHSYNC_Y_DN
30 USB3H_REAR2_RXN 6
DGND
31 USB3H_REAR2_RXP 7
nVDO_Y_B1_DP
32 DGND 8
VDO_Y_B1_DN
33 USB3H_REAR2_TXN 9
DGND
34 USB3H_REAR2_TXP
nSH_Y1
35 nSH_Y2
36 DGND
EXT.DRIVE
37 nVDO_Y_B2_DP
38 nVDO_Y_B2_DN USB HOST Ch1
39 DGND
40 nVDO_Y_B3_DP CN16 USB HOST Ch1 1
41 nVDO_Y_B3_DN USB3H_VBUS_REAR1 2
42 DGND USB3H_REAR1_DN 3
43 nSH_Y3 USB3H_REAR1_DP 4
44 nSH_Y4 DGND 5
45 DGND USB3H_REAR1_RXN 6
46 nVDO_Y_B4_DP USB3H_REAR1_RXP 7
47 nVDO_Y_B4_DN DGND 8
48 DGND USB3H_REAR1_TXN 9
LASER SCANNER 49
50
PW M _LD_POW ER_Y
DGND
USB3H_REAR1_TXP
ASSEMBLY CARD READER

(COLR) LSU SIGNAL KC
60FFC
CN2 LSU SIGNALKC
1 DGND
2 DGND
3 DGND
4 DGND
Mono Only
5 DGND
6 DGND LSU
7 DGND 40FFC
8 DGND
9 DGND CN28 LSU
10 PW M _LD_POW ER_C DGND 1
11 DGND NC 2
12 nVDO_C_B4_DN 24V3 3
13 nVDO_C_B4_DP 24V3 4
14 DGND NC 5
15 nSH_C4 DGND 6
16 nSH_C3 nSTART_LSU_M OT 7
17 DGND nREADY_LSU 8
18 nVDO_C_B3_DN CLK_LSU_M OT 9
19 nVDO_C_B3_DP 5V_LSU 10
20 DGND 5V_LSU 11
21 nVDO_C_B2_DN DGND 12
22
23
nVDO_C_B2_DP
DGND
PW M _LD_POW ER_K
DGND
13
14 LASER SCANNER
ASSEMBLY
24 nSH_C2 nHSYNC_K_DP 15
25 nSH_C1 nHSYNC_K_DN 16
26 17
(MONO)
DGND DGND
27 nVDO_C_B1_DN nVDO_K_B1_DP 18
28 nVDO_C_B1_DP nVDO_K_B1_DN 19
29 DGND DGND 20
30 nHSYNC_C_DN nSH_K1 21
31 nHSYNC_C_DP nSH_K2 22
32 DGND DGND 23
33 nLDON_LSU_C nVDO_K_B2_DP 24
34 nLDON_LSU_K nVDO_K_B2_DN 25
35 DGND DGND 26
36 nVDO_K_B4_DN nVDO_K_B3_DP 27
37 nVDO_K_B4_DP nVDO_K_B3_DN 28
38 DGND DGND 29
39 nSH_K4 nSH_K3 30
40 nSH_K3 nSH_K4 31
41 DGND DGND 32
42 nVDO_K_B3_DN nVDO_K_B4_DP 33
43 nVDO_K_B3_DP nVDO_K_B4_DN 34
44 DGND DGND 35
45 nVDO_K_B2_DN nLDON_LSU_K 36
46 nVDO_K_B2_DP DGND 37
47 DGND DGND 38
48 nSH_K2 DGND 39
49 nSH_K1 CON_DETECT_LSU 40
50 DGND
51 nVDO_K_B1_DN
52 nVDO_K_B1_DP
53 DGND
54 nHSYNC_K_DN
55 nHSYNC_K_DP
56 DGND
57 PW M _LD_POW ER_K
58 DGND
59 ADC_LSU_TEMP
1172 Chapter 6 Diagrams 60 CON_DETECT_LSU

ENWW
Connection Diagram (Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup)
Color Only REAR/FRONT/LED
I.5m m /10*2P TB CRUM
1.5m m /8*1P Color
JC39-02229A JC39-02230A CN35 REAR/FRONT/LED
1 1 15 1 ACR_REAR CN48 TB CRUM
LEFT 2 2 14 2 5VA ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1
ACR 3 3 13 3 DGND 5VA 2
REAR 4 4 12 4 NC DGND 3
5 5 11 5 PW M _ACR_LED_REAR ADC_CTD_CENTER_S 4
JC39-02239A JC39-02258A
1 6 10 6 ADC_ACR_FRONT_P R_5V_PS 5 1 3 3
2 2 T1 POSI
RIGHT 2 7 9 7 5VA DGND 6 2
3 1 SENSOR
ACR 3 8 8 8 DGND SENS_T1_POS 7 1
FRONT 4 9 7 9 NC
5 10 6 10 PW M _ACR_LED_FRONT DGND 8 3
nSENSE_P_REGI 9 PAPER REGI
2
5V_PS 10 SENSOR
1 11 5 11 ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1
2 12 4 12 5VA
CENTER
3 13 3 13 DGND
CTD
Mono
4 14 2 14 ADC_CTD_CENTER_S TB CRUM
5 15 1 15 PW M _ACR_LED_CENTER 1.5m m /8*1P
CN48 TB CRUM
ACR SHUTTER 2 1 5 16 DGND ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1 JC39-02236A 7 1 JC39-02235A 1
M OT DC 1 2 4 17 OUT_DC_ACR_SHUT1 6 2
5VA 2 2
JC39-02220A DGND 3 5 3 3 CTD SENSOR
3 3 3 18 R_5V_PS 4 4
ACR SHUTTER ADC_CTD_CENTER_S 4 4
2 4 2 19 DGND 3 5
SENS PW M _ACR_LED_CENTER 5 5
1 5 1 20 nSENSE_SHUT_ACR
DGND 6 2 6 2 INNER
ADC_INNER_TEM P 7 1 7 1 TEM P
PICKUP 8
DGND 3 1 3
9 PAPER REGI
nSENSE_P_REGI 2 2 2
10 SENSOR
CN49 PICKUP 5V_PS 1 3 1
JC39-02234A 1 JC39-02204A
3 1 9 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EM PTY1 2 2 8 2 DGND
1 3 7 3 nSENSE_P_EM PTY1
JC39-02201A 4 m icroSD SOCKET
3 4 6 R_5V_PS
2 5 5 5 DGND
PAPER_LIFT1 CN12 microSD SOCKET
1 6 4 6 nSENSE_C_LIFT1 1
DATA2_SD
2
3 7 3 7 DGND DATA3_SD
3
FEED1 2 8 2 8 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED1 CM D_SD
4
1 9 1 9 5V_PS 3.3V
5
CLK_SD
6
4 10 A_PICKUP1 DGND
7
3 11 nA_PICKUP1 DATA0_SD
PICKUP1 8
M OT STEP 2 12 nB_PICKUP1 DATA1_SD
9
1 13 B_PICKUP1 DGND
10
DGND
11
3 14 R_5V_PS DGND
1 10 12
2 15 DGND DGND
PAPER_EM PTY2 2 9 13
1 16 nSENSE_P_EM PTY2 DGND
3 8 14
DGND
3
JC39-02202A 17 R_5V_PS
4 7
2 5 6 18 DGND M SOK
PAPER_LIFT2
1 6 5 19 nSENSE_C_LIFT2
CN21 M SOK
20 DGND 1
3 7 4 DGND
FEED2 21 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED2 2
2 8 3 SCK_M SOK
22 5V_PS 3
1 9 2 DGND
4
10 1 M SOI_M SOK
5
DGND
4 23 A_PICKUP2 6
nSS_M SOK
PICKUP2 3 24 nA_PICKUP2 7
M OT STEP 2 25 nB_PICKUP2
DGND
M SIO_M SOK
8
1 26 B_PICKUP2 9
3_3V_PS
10
SCL0_M SOK
11
3_3V_PS
FEED_REGI 12
SDA0_M SOK
DEBUGGER M AIN
CN53 FEED_REGI
JC39-02336A -2.0mm /4*1P
1 6 1 A_FEED
2 5 2 24V4 CN8 DEBUGGER M AIN
FEED M OT
STEP 3 4 3 nA_FEED 3.3V 1
4 3 4 nB_FEED RXD_M CB 2
HYBRID
5 2 5 24V4 TXD_M CB 3
6 1 6 B_FEED DGND 4
1 6 7 A_REGI DEBUGGER SCAN

2 5 8 24V1_SW -2.0mm /4*1P
REGIM OT
STEP 3 4 9 nA_REGI
CN9 DEBUGGER SCAN
4 3 10 nB_REGI
HYBRID 11 24V1_SW 3.3V 1
5 2 2
12 B_REGI RXD_SCB
6 1 3
TXD_SCB
M P CLUTCH DGND 4
1 2 13 24V4
CL 2 1 14 EN_M P_CLUTCH
DEBUGGER ENGINE
-2.0mm /4*1P
SIDE /MP CN10 DEBUGGER
ENGINE
1.5m m /20*2P
3.3V 1
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A CN32 SIDE / M P /PTB RXD_ENG 2
2 1 5 1 20 1 24V3 TXD_ENG 3
M P SO L
1 2 4 2 19 2 PW M _MP _SOL DGND 4
INNER
JC39-02210A ENGINE PANEL
3 3 3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
-1.5m m /5*1P FINISHER
M P EM PTY 2 4 2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EM PTY CN11 ENGINE PANEL
DGND 1
3 1 6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS 5V_SUSP 2
M P PAPER 2 2 5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_W IDTH RXD_ENG_PANEL 3
W IDTH 1 3 4 8 13 8 DGND R_5V_SUSP 4
JC39-02211A TXD_ENG_PANEL 5
3 4 3 9 12 9 R_5V_PS
M P PAPER
2 5 2 10 11 10 DGND
LENGTH
1 6 1 11 10 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH DUAL FAX
3 1 3 12 9 12 DGND CN24 DUALFAX

PRE FEED 2 2 2 13 8 13 nSENSE_P_FEED 5V_SUSP 1 FINISHER
14 5V_PS
1
JC39-02208A
3 1 14 7 DGND
3.3V
2
3
3K
4 15 6 15 A_DUPLEX2 3.3V 4
DUP2 3 16 5 16 nA_DUPLEX2 DGND 5
M OT STEP 2 17 4 17 nB_DUPLEX2 DGND 6
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2 CM L_M ODEM 1 7
3 CM L_M ODEM 2 8 *****-****/
19 2 19 NC AOUT0 9 M OLEX
20 1 20 NC AOUT1 10
nRST_M ODEM 1 11
JC39-02338A 1 6
JC39-02240A 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS nCTS_M ODEM 1 12
3 54679-1619/
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND nCTS_M ODEM 2 13
M OLEX
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1 nRTS_M ODEM 1 14
nRTS_M ODEM 2 15
3 4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS DGND 16
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND nDETECT_MO DEM 1 17
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2 nDETECT_MO DEM 2 18
TXD_M ODEM1 19
4 7 4 TXD_M ODEM2 20
3 8 3 RXD_M ODEM1 21
PTB CRUM
Mono
2 9 2 RXD_M ODEM2 22
1 10 1 nRI_MOD EM _1 23
nRI_MOD EM _2 24
nINT_M ODEM _1 25
nINT_M ODEM _2 26
nDCD_M ODEM _1 27
PTB 4 1 7 27 DGND nDCD_M ODEM _2 28
7 14
W ASTE 3 2 6 28 ADC_PTB_W TB_FULL nRST_M ODEM _2 29
8 13
FULL 2 3 5 29 EN_PTB_W TB_LED DGND 30
9 12
1 4 4 30 R_5V_PS
10 11
11 10 31 3.3V_CRUM
JC39-02207A 12 9 32 SCL2_PTB
13 8 33 SDA2_PTB
14 7 34 DGND
3 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
DUPLEX 6 2
2 16 5 36 DGND
JAM 2 7 1
1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM _DUPLEX2
3 1 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
P FUSER 39 DGND
2 2 2 19 2
OUT 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
1 3 1 20 1
JC39-02209A
3 1 3
FAN
2 2 2
SIDE
1 3 1
To FDB
2-292246-2/
JC39-02338A JC39-02341A TYCO
3 1 6 1
CURL1 2 2 5 2
1 3 4 3
2-292249-2/
3 4 3 4 TYCO
CURL2 2 5 2 5
1 6 1 6
7
8 DCF
Color 9
10
LC T HCF
ENWW Connection Diagram (Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup) 1173

Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock)
T1 /ERASER /OPC CRUM
-1.5mm /16*2P OPC HOM E
CN36 T1 / ERASER /
JC39-02256A JC39-02255A OPC CRUM CN29 O PC HO M E
1 1 6 1 6 1 5V_PS
JC39-02240A
R_5V_PS 1 3
2 2 5 2 5 2 ON_ERASER_K DGND 2 2
3 3 4 3
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_K 3 1
4 4 3 4 4 3 3.3V_CRUM
3 4 SDA_CRUM _OPC_K
2 R_5V_PS 4 3
5 2 5 2 5 SCL_CRUM _OPC_K
1 DGND 5 2
6 1 6 1 6 DGND nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_C 6 1
R_5V_PS 7 3
JC39-02256A DGND 8 2
1 1 6 1 6 7 5V_PS 9 1
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_M
2 2 5 2 5 8 ON_ERASER_C
3 3 4 3 R_5V_PS 10 3
4 4 3 4 4 9 3.3V_CRUM 11 2
DGND
3 10 SDA_CRUM _OPC_C 12 1
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_Y
2 5 2 5 2 11 SCL_CRUM _OPC_C
1 6 1 6 1 12 DGND
2 13 ADC_INNER_TEMP
1 14 DGND OPC K
15 NC
16 NC CN29 OPC K JC39-02239A
JC39-02256A 1 10
DIR_BLDC_OPC_K 9
1 1 6 1 6 17 5V_PS 2
CLK_BLDC_OPC_K 8
2 2 5 2 5 18 ON_ERASER_M 3
nREADY_BLDC_OPC_K 7
3 3 4 3 4
nEN_BLDC_OPC_K 6
5
4 4 3 4 4
3
19
20
3.3V_CRUM
SDA_CRUM _OPC_M
NC
6 5 BLDC
2 BRK_BLDC_OPC_K 4
5 2 5 2 21 SCL_CRUM _OPC_M 7
1 DGND 3
6 1 6 1 22 DGND 8
DGND 2
9
DGND 1
10
DGND
11
JC39-02256A NC
12
1 1 6 1 6 23 5V_PS
2 2 5 2 5 24 ON_ERASER_Y
3 3 4 3
4 4 3 4 4 25 3.3V_CRUM
3 26 SDA_CRUM _OPC_Y
2 5 2 5 2 27 SCL_CRUM _OPC_Y T/C SENSOR
1 6 1 6 1 28 DGND -1.5m m /15*2P
CN34 T/C SENSOR
1 4 29 A_T1 DGND 1 JC39-02260A JC39-02259A
2 3 30 nA_T1 4 1 4
TC_VIN_K 2 3 2 3
3 2 31 nB_T1 3
24V1_TC 2 3 2
4 1 32 B_T1 4
TNR_VCON_K 1 4 1
DGND 5 4 1
JC39-02259A 4
TC_VIN_C 6 3 2 3
24V1_TC 7 2 3 2
TNR_VCON_C 8 1 4 1
R_5V_PS 9
12 1 3
DGND 10
11 2 2
nSENSE_FULL_RES_K 11
10 3 1
R_5V_PS 12
9 4 3
DGND 13
BLDC OPC KCMY 8 5 2
nSENSE_FULL_RES_C 14
7 6 1
JC39-02342A
CN47 BLDC OPC NC 15
6 7 3
JC39-02232A KCM Y 5 8 2
10 1 DIR_BLDC_OPC_K 4 9 1
9 2 CLK_BLDC_OPC_K
8 3 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_K 3 10 3
7 4 nEN_BLDC_OPC_K 2 11 2
6 5 NC
BLDC 5 6 BRAKE_BLDC_OPC_K
1 12 1
4 7 DGND DGND 16
4 1
JC39-02259A 4
3 8 DGND TC_VIN_M 17
3 2 3
2 9 24V1_SW 24V1_TC 18
2 3 2
1 10 24V1_SW TNR_VCON_M 19
1 4 1
10 11 DIR_BLDC_OPC_C DGND 20
4 1
JC39-02259A 4
9 12 CLK_BLDC_OPC_C TC_VIN_Y 21
3 2 3
8 13 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_C 24V1_TC 22
2 3 2
7 14 nEN_BLDC_OPC_C TNR_VCON_Y 23
1 4 1
6 15 NC
BLDC 5 16 BREAK_BLDC_OPC_C R_5V_PS 24
4 17 DGND DGND 25
3 18 DGND nSENSE_FULL_RES_M 26
2 19 24V7
1 20 24V7 R_5V_PS 27
DGND 28
10 21 DIR_BLDC_OPC_M nSENSE_FULL_RES_Y 29
9 22 CLK_BLDC_OPC_M
8 23 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_M NC 30
7 24 nEN_BLDC_OPC_M
6 25 NC
BLDC 5 26 BREAK_BLDC_OPC_M
4 27 DGND
3 28 DGND
2 29 24V7
1 30 24V7 HVPS2 /SKEW MO TOR
-1.5mm /12*2P
10 31 DIR_BLDC_OPC_Y CN4 HVPS2 / SKEW CN2
9 32 CLK_BLDC_OPC_Y M O TOR
33 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_Y
JC39-02228A 12 nEN_DEVE_AC_K
8 nEN_DEVE_AC_K 1 12
7 34 nEN_BLDC_OPC_Y nEN_DEVE_AC_C 2 11 11 nEN_DEVE_AC_C
6 35 NC 10 10 nEN_DEVE_AC_M
BLDC 5 36 BRK_BLDC_OPC_Y
nEN_DEVE_AC_M
nEN_DEVE_AC_Y
3
4 9 9 nEN_DEVE_AC_Y
4 37 DGND ADC_READ_HVPS_24V 5 8 8 ADC_READ_HVPS_24V
3 38 DGND DGND 6 7 7 GND
2 39 24V5 DGND 7 6 6 GND
1 40 24V5 DGND 8 5 5 GND
3.3V_PS 9 4 4 3.3V
24V2_SW 10 3 3 24V
24V2_SW 11 2 2 24V
24V2_SW 12 1 1 24V
A_SKEW _Y 13 12
nA_SKEW _Y 14 11
B_SKEW _Y 15 10
nB_SKEW _Y 16 9
A_SKEW _M 17 8
nA_SKEW _M 18 7
B_SKEW _M 19 6
nB_SKEW _M 20 5
A_SKEW _C 21 4
nA_SKEW _C 22 3
B_SKEW _C 23 2
nB_SKEW _C 24 1
W TB/CST LOCK/FAN_LSU
CN38 W TB/CST
LOCK/FAN_LSU JC39-02337A
FAN_LSU 1 3
FB_OUT_ FAN_LSU 2 2
DGND 3 1
A_W TB 4 4
nA_W TB 5 3
nB_W TB 6 2
B_W TB 7 1
DGND 8 3 1 COM
COVER_OPEN_FRONT 9 2 2 N.O.
nCOVER_OPEN_FRONT 10 1 3 N.C.
DGND 11 4 1 4
ADC_W TB_FULL 12 3 2 3
EN_W TB_LED 13 2 3 2
5V_PS 14 1 4 1
R_5V_PS 15 3
DGND 16 2
nDETECT_W TB 17 1
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_2 18 10 1 2 1
R_5V_PS 20 8 3 3
DGND 21 7 4 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK1 22 6 5 1
JC39-02186A
R_5V_PS 25 3 8 3
DGND 26 2 9 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK2 27 1 10 1
NC 28
LSU PD /RESERVOIR SENSOR

-1.5m m /22*1P
CN26 LSU P M OTOR JC39-02231A

5V_LSU 1
5V_LSU 2
DGND 3
24V2 4
DGND 5
nSTART_LSU_M OT 6
nREADY_LSU 7
CLK_LSU_M OT 8

Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB)
M ono Only
HVPS(MONO)
HVPS
HEATER SW ITCH
24FFC
M AIN SW ITCH
CN31 HVPS
nDETECT_HVPS 1 1 nDETECT_HVPS
24V2_SW 2 2 24V
24V2_SW 3 3 24V
ADC_HVPS_24V 4 4 ADC_HVPS_24V
24V2_SW 5 5 24V
GND 6 6 GND
GND 7 7 GND
3.3V 8 8 3.3V
GND 9 9 GND
NC 10 10 NC
JC39-02197A
11 11 ADC_READ_M HV
AC
ADC_READ_M HV
PW M _THV+_CV_hybrid 12 12 PW M _THV+_CV_hybrid
JC39-02203A
PW M _M HV 13 13 PW M _M HV
PW M _THV+_CV_SELECT_hybrid 14 14 PW M _THV+_CV_SELECT_hybrid
9
3
C
J
1
2
0
-
A
7
ToFUSER
PW M _SAW 15 15 PW M _SAW
ADC_READ_THV 16 16 ADC_READ_THV
INLET
PW M _THV_N 17 17 PW M _THV_N
nEN_DEVE 18 18 nEN_DEVE
PW M _FUSER_BIAS 19 19 PW M _FUSER_BIAS
PW M _DEVE_DC 20 20 PW M _DEVE_DC
GND
PW M _THV_P 21 21 PW M _THV_P
PW M _DEVE_VPP 22 22 PW M _DEVE_VPP
JC39-02199A
PW M _DEVE_AC 23 23 PW M _DEVE_AC
GND 24 24 GND
JC39-02248A
4
3
2
1
HEATER SW ITCH
4
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
M AIN SW ITCH
LIVE
LIVE
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
CN10
LIVE
LIVE
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
CN5
NEUTRAL
LIVE
CN1
COM M ON
LAM P2
LAM P1
CN6
FUSER
INLET
DEVE HV M 2
JC39-02249A
To INPUT OPTION
THV M
JC39-02247A
SAW /M HV
CN2 1
1 LIVE
2 NEUTRAL 2
M ono :SM PS TYPE3R
Color SM
TYPE5 3
(OPTI
INPUT OPTION
CN7 (Blue)
1 LIVE CN3
JC39-02246A
2 NEUTRAL 1 LIVE
O N/SCAN)
1
: PS TYPE4
FDB
2 NEUTRAL FUSER HV M 2
TYPE3R TYPE3R
JC39-02193A
DCF
CON1 CN8(Red)
LIVE 1 1 LIVE CN4
NEUTRAL 2 2 NEUTRAL 1 LIVE
2 NEUTRAL JC39-02196A
9
3
C
J
1
2
0
-
A
6
JC39-02192A
ColorOnly
220V Only
HVPS
35FFC
HVPS(COLOR)
CN11
CN3 HVPS
ON_FUSER_CENTER 1
1
REACTOR
ON_FUSER_RELAY 5
ON_SM PS_RELAY 7
nDETECT_HVPS 1 1 nDETECT_HVPS
FUSER_ON
24VS
RELAY_ON
24V_ON/OFF
GND
CON4
+24V3
GND
+24V2
GND
+24V1
GND
+5V
CON3
ON_FUSER_SIDE 2
2
PW M _D_AC_FREQ 2 2 PW M _D_AC_FREQ
TYPE3R S
ZERO_CROSS 10
SM PS TYPE 3R
M AIN IF
PW M _D_AC_VPP_Y 3 3 PW M _D_AC_VPP_Y
AC_SENSE 9
ADC_R_M HV_K 4 4 ADC_R_M HV_K

+24VS2 6
+24VS1 4
PW M _D_DC_Y 5 5 PW M _D_DC_Y
GND 8
GND 3
CN12
CN9
IGNAL
NC 6 6 NC
1
PW M _DC_AC_VPP_M 7 7 PW M _DC_AC_VPP_M
2
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PW M _THV+_CC_SEL 8 8 PW M _THV+_CC_SEL
PW M _D_DC_M 9 9 PW M _D_DC_M
JC27-00009A PW M _THV+CC_Hyb 10 10 PW M _THV+CC_Hyb
2
C
J
0
-
7
A
9 PW M _D_AC_VPP_C 11 11 PW M _D_AC_VPP_C
PW M _M HV_K 12 12 PW M _M HV_K
SM PS TYPE5 6*2P PW M _D_DC_C 13 13 PW M _D_DC_C
CN5 SM PS TYPE5 PW M _M HV_C 14 14 PW M _M HV_C
1 5V1 PW M _D_AC_VPP_K 15 15 PW M _D_AC_VPP_K
2 5V2 PW M _M HV_M 16 16 PW M _M HV_M
SM PS TYPE 5 PW M _D_DC_K 17 17 PW M _D_DC_K
TYPE5 3 24V1
4 24V2 PW M _M HV_Y 18 18 PW M _M HV_Y
CN3 JC39-02213A(C) 19 19 ADC_R_THV2
1 5 ADC_R_THV2
CN1 +24V1 1 9
3
C
J
2
0
-
(
A
4
) M)
M
JC39-02344A( 6
24V3
ADC_R_M HV_C 20 20 ADC_R_M HV_C
1 LIVE 24V4 HV_OPC_Y
JC39-02225A
GND 2 21 21 PW M _THV_2
2 NEUTRAL 7 DGND PW M _THV_2
+24V2 3 22 22 ADC_R_M HV_M
8 DGND ADC_R_M HV_M HV_OPC_M
GND 4 23 23 PW M _THV2_CLEAN
9 DGND PW M _THV2_CLEAN
+24V3 5 ADC_R_M HV_Y 24 24 ADC_R_M HV_Y
10 DGND HV_OPC_C
GND 6 25 25 PW M _SAW
11 DGND PW M _SAW
+24V4 7 26 26 ADC_R_ITHV_Y
12 DGND ADC_R_ITHV_Y
(M ain SYSTEM )
GND 8 HV_OPC_K
PW M _FUSER_BIAS 27 27 PW M _FUSER_BIAS
SM PS TYPE5
SM PS TYPE3 4*2P ADC_R_ITHV_M 28 28 ADC_R_ITHV_M

ADC_R_IHTV_K 29 29 ADC_R_IHTV_K
TYPE5SIGNAL CN6 SM PS TYPE4
PW M _ITHV_Y 30 30 PW M _ITHV_Y
/ TYPE3R
JC39-02212A(C) 8 1 ADC_R_IHTV_C 31 31 ADC_R_IHTV_C
JC39-02223A
CN4 5V_OPT HV_DEVE_Y
GND 1 1
3
C
J
2
0
-
9
A
4
) M)
M
(
JC39-02343A( 7 2 24V5 PW M _ITHV_M 32 32 PW M _ITHV_M
+24V_ON/OFF 2 6 3 PW M _ITHV_K 33 33 PW M _ITHV_K
24V6 HV_DEVE_M
GND 3 5 4 PW M _ITHV_C 34 34 PW M _ITHV_C
24V7
4 5 GND 35 35 GND
DGND HV_DEVE_C
3 6 DGND
SM PS TYPE 5 2 7 DGND
1 HV_DEVE_K
8 DGND
CN2
+5V1 1
GND 2
JC39-02226A
HV_T1_Y 1
+5V2 3 AC CTRL./FDB /PAPER 2
GND 4
DET 1.5m m /17*2P HV_T1_M 3
JC39-02221A(C) CN39 AC CTRL./ 4
1
J
-
9
3
C
2
0
M
(
A
) M)
JC39-02233A( FDB / PAPER DET HV_T1_C 5
JC39-02196A
9
3
C
J
1
2
0
-
A
6 6
17 1 ZEROCROSS
10 1 HV_T1_K 7
16 2 AC_SENS
9 2
15 3 DGND
8 3
14 4 ON_SM PS_RREAY
7 4
JC39-02227A
13 5 24V3
6 5
12 6 ON_FUSER_RELAY T2 HV
5 6
11 7 24VS_FUSER
4 7
10 8 DGND
3 8
9 9 ON_FUSER_SIDE
2 9
8 10 ON_FUSER_CENTER
1 10 1
3
2 11 11 EN_24V_ENGINE 2
7
JC39-02224A
1 12 6 12 DGND HV_SAW
3
5
4
3
2 13 5 13 EN_24V_OPTION
1 14 4 14 DGND
3 15 3 15 FAN_SM PS
SM PS
FAN
2 16 2 16 FB_OUT_FAN_SM PS
1 17 1 17 DGND
18 nDETECT_CST1
PAPER SIZE1 PAPER SIZE2
4
3 19 DGND
2 20 ADC_P_SIZE1
1 21 DGND
4 22 nDETECT_CST2
3 23 DGND
2 24 ADC_P_SIZE2
1 25 1.8V_PS
26 FAN_DEVE
DEVE / OPC
3
2 27 FB_OUT_FAN_DEVE
FAN
1 28 DGND
4 29 ADC_OUT_TEM P
3 30 DGND
2 31 ADC_OUT_HUM I
1 32 3.3V_PS
OU T TEM P
/HUM ID
33 NC
34 NC
ENWW Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB) 1175

7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet
Booklet Finisher
● Precautions
● Product specification and description
● Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers)
● Problem solving
● Finisher system diagram
ENWW 1177
Precautions
Caution for safety
and fire.
fire.
6. Use caution when connecting or disconnecting the power cable.
or fire.
1178 Chapter 7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ENWW

power source when thunder or lightning is expected. Do not touch the printer or the power cable if it is still
connected to the power outlet during these weather conditions.
not position the printer near a humidifier or in front of an air conditioner. Moisture and dust build up inside
electric shock.
13. Wait 5 minutes after unplugging the power cable before replacing the LVPS board to avoid electric shock.
rotating devices.
fire.
ENWW Precautions 1179

5. Do not place candles or burning cigarettes on the printer. Doing so could cause fire.
specifications.
Removal and replacement precautions


motor, and fan.

carefully.
printer.
stable.
ESD precautions

Product specification and description
Finisher system
Finisher sectional view
Sensor location
Figure 7-1 Sensor locations
Table 7-1 Sensor locations

Item Name Item Name
1 IPTU Entrance Sensor 10 Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Emitter)
2 IPTU Output Sensor 11 Feed Buffer Output Sensor
3 Feed Entrance Paper Sensor 12 Feed Booklet Entrance Sensor
4 Diverter Home Sensor 13 Stacker Full Sensor

Table 7-1 Sensor locations (continued)
Item Name Item Name
5 Feed Main Output Sensor 14 Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Detector)
6 Feed Top Output Sensor 15 Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Emitter)
7 Sub Tray Full Sensor (Detector) 16 Fold Output Paper Sensor
8 Sub Tray Full Sensor (Emitter) 17 Booklet Compile Paper Sensor
9 Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Detector)
Roller location
Figure 7-2 Roller location
Table 7-2 Roller location

Item Name Item Name
1 Top Output Roller 8 TB Entrance Roller
ENWW Product specification and description 1183

Table 7-2 Roller location (continued)
Item Name Item Name
2 Top Middle Roller 9 Feed Buffer Output Roller
3 Finisher Compile Output Roller 10 BM Compile Output Roller
4 Middle Roller 11 BM Folding Roller
5 Entrance Roller 12 BM C-Folding Roller
6 TB Output Roller 13 BM Folding Output Roller
7 TB Middle Roller

Jam removal guide
Figure 7-3 Jam removal guide
Table 7-3 Jam removal guide
Item Name Item Name
1 Top Door Guide 6 SD Jam Clear Cover
2 IPTU Door 7 Booklet Feed Jam Clear Cover
3 Booklet Module 8 BM C-Folding Roller Knob
4 Middle Roller Knob 9 Booklet Lower Feed Jam Clear Cover
5 Feed Buffer Output Roller Knob

Paper path
Figure 7-4 Paper path
Table 7-4 Paper path
Item Name
1 Finisher Main Tray - Staple & Punch (Optional)
2 Finisher Top Tray - Punch (Optional)
3 Booklet Tray – Folding & Staple

Electrical parts layout
Finisher and booklet module
Figure 7-5 Electrical parts layout (1 of 2)

Figure 7-6 Electrical parts layout (2 of 2)
Table 7-5 Electrical parts layout

Item Part code Description Function
S1 Sensor-RP A Feed Entrance Paper Sensor
S2 Photo Sensor Feed Top Output Sensor
S3 Sensor-RP A Feed Main Output Sensor
S4 Sensor-RP A Feed Buffer Output Sensor
S5 Photo Sensor Diverter Home Sensor
S6 Photo Sensor Buffer Home Sensor
S7 Photo Sensor Rear Tamper Home Sensor

Table 7-5 Electrical parts layout (continued)
S8 Photo Sensor Front Tamper Home Sensor
S9 AS-Sensor EF Home Sensor
S10 Photo Sensor Main Paddle Home Sensor
S11 Photo Sensor Main Tray Front Level Sensor
S12 Photo Sensor Main Tray Rear Level Sensor
S13 Photo Sensor SCU Home Sensor
S14 AS-Sensor Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Detector)
S15 AS-Sensor Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Emitter)
S16 Photo Sensor Main Tray Encoder Sensor
S17 Photo Sensor Offline Staple Position Sensor
S18 Photo Sensor Stapler Move Offline Sensor
S19 Photo Sensor Stapler Move Home Sensor
S20 Photo Sensor Stapler Move Mid-Rear Sensor
S21 Photo Sensor Stapler Move Mid-Front Sensor
S22 Photo Sensor Stacker Full Sensor
S23 AS-Sensor Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Detector)
S24 AS-Sensor Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Emitter)
S25 Photo Sensor Grip Home Sensor
S26 Photo Sensor PE EJT Home Sensor
S27 Photo Sensor PE EJT Away Sensor
S28 Sensor-RP A Compile Paper Sensor
S29 Photo Sensor GE Encoder Sensor
S30 Photo Sensor PE Encoder Sensor
S31 Photo Sensor Feed Booklet Entrance Sensor
S32 Photo Sensor TE Presser Home Sensor
S33 Photo Sensor Blade Home Sensor
S34 Sensor-RP A Fold Output Paper Sensor
S35 Photo Sensor Separate Pawl Home Sensor
S36 Photo Sensor Guide Home Sensor
S37 Photo Sensor Booklet Paddle Home Sensor
S38 Photo Sensor Booklet Tamper Home Sensor
S39 Sensor-RP A Booklet Compile Paper Sensor
S40 Photo Sensor Stopper Home Sensor

Table 7-5 Electrical parts layout (continued)
S41 AS-Sensor Sub Tray Full Sensor (Detector)
S42 AS-Sensor Sub Tray Full Sensor (Emitter)
SW1 Micro Switch Front Door I/L Switch
SW2 Micro Switch Top Door I/L Switch
SW3 Micro Switch Stacker Upper Limit Switch
P1 3K Main PCA Finisher Main PCA
P2 Switch PCA Offline Staple OP PCA
P3 Booklet PCA Booklet Main PCA
M1 Assembly, HB Motor Feed Entrance Motor
M2 Assembly, HB Motor Feed Output Motor
M3 Assembly, PM Motor Buffer Motor
M4 Assembly, PM Motor End Fence Motor
M5 Assembly, PM Motor Main Paddle Motor
M6 Assembly, PM Motor Front Tamper Motor
M7 Assembly, PM Motor Rear Tamper Motor
M8 AS-Motor DC Ejector Grip-Eject Motor
M9 AS-Motor DC Ejector Pre-Eject Motor
M10 Assembly, PM Motor SCU Motor
M11 Assembly, 3657 DC Motor Main Tray Moving Motor
M12 Assembly, HB Motor Stapler Move Motor
M13 Assembly, PM Motor Booklet Feed Entrance Motor
M14 Assembly, PM Motor TE Presser Motor
M15 Assembly, PM Motor Booklet Tamper Motor
M16 Assembly, PM Motor Stopper Moving Motor
M17 Assembly, PM Motor Separate Pawl Motor
M18 Motor BLDC-Main Folding Roller Motor
M19 Motor BLDC-Main Blade Motor
M20 Assembly, PM Motor C Fold Motor
M21 Assembly, PM Motor Booklet Paddle Motor
M22 Solenoid Stopper Solenoid

IPTU
Figure 7-7 IPTU
Table 7-6 IPTU
M23 Assembly, HB Motor IPTU Feed Motor
S43 Photo Sensor IPTU Door Sensor
S44 Sensor-RP A IPTU Entrance Sensor
S45 Photo Sensor IPTU Output Sensor
Punch unit
Figure 7-8 Punch unit
Table 7-7 Punch unit

M24 AS-HB Motor Punch Scan Motor

Table 7-7 Punch unit (continued)
S46 AS-Sensor Punch Scan Home Motor
S47 AS-Sensor Hole Punch Hopper Sensor
P4 AS-PCB Punch Punch PCA
P5 AS-PCB Punch Sensor Punch Scan Sensor PCA
Each unit functions

Figure 7-9
Item Unit Function
1 Frame unit Finisher main frame and exterior.
2 Stapler unit Device used for putting staples in to sheets of paper.

(continued)
Item Unit Function
3 Feed unit Transports the paper to the compile and eject unit.
4 Compile unit Compiles the paper.
5 Eject unit Transports the stacked paper to the tray.
6 Stacker unit Stacks the stapled papers on the tray.
7 Booklet unit Folds paper, completes stapling jobs, and transports paper to
the tray.
8 IPTU Transports the paper from the main machine to the finisher
entrance.
9 Punch unit Device used for punching on the paper.
PCA connection information
Finisher PCA
Figure 7-10 Finisher PCA
Table 7-9 Finisher PCA

CN No. Connection CN No. Connection
CN1 PSU, ENGINE INTERFACE CN9 SAFETY SWITCH
CN2 FRONT DOOR SWITCH CN10 STAPLER

Table 7-9 Finisher PCA (continued)
CN No. Connection CN No. Connection
CN3 TOP DOOR SWITCH CN11 EJECTOR
CN4 FRONT PATH CN12 FRONT LOWER
CN5 FRONT COMPILE CN13 SCU
CN6 IPTU CN14 STACKER
CN7 PUNCH CN15 BOOKLET
CN8 REAR UPPER CN16 LOG
Switch PCA
Figure 7-11 Switch PCA
Table 7-10 Switch PCA
CN No. Connection
CN1 Offline Staple LED and Button
Booklet maker PCA
Figure 7-12 Booklet maker PCA
CN No. Connection
CN1 Finisher interface
CN3 Log

CN No. Connection
CN4 Stapler/Feed Booklet Entrance Sensor
CN5 Booklet Feed Entrance Motor/TE Presser Motor
CN6 Blade Home Sensor/Booklet Tamper Home Sensor/ Booklet Compile Paper Sensor
CN7 Booklet Paddle Motor/Separate Pawl Motor
CN8 Fold Output Paper Sensor/Guide Home Sensor/C Fold Motor
CN9 Stopper Solenoid/Stopper Moving Motor
CN10 Folding Roller Motor/Blade Motor
Service approach
CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach under the
weight of the product.

current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the printer, circuit
shock.

Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.

insulated parts.
original positions.


● Remove all paper from the product.
● Turn off the power using the power button.
● Remove the toner cartridges.
● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.

● Plug in the power cable.
● Verify the functions of the printer that might have been impacted by service procedures. Make sure the
printer is in complete working order.
● Replace any accessories removed for service.
Post-service test
Print-quality test
defects.

Ordering
or
partsurfer.hp.com
Orderable parts

Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet
finishers)
● Top output bin
● Right top cover
● Top cover
● Front door
● Rear cover
● Front cover
● Front lower cover
● Booklet tray
● Caster cover
● Lower shield assembly
● Upper shield assembly
● Controller PCA
● Stapler unit
● Dummy feed guide
● Top jam access cover
● Top lower feed assembly
● Ejector unit
● Front tamper unit
● Rear tamper unit
● Feed entrance motor (M1)
● Feed exit motor (M2)
● Buffer motor, gear, and sensor (M3)
● Front tamper motor (M6)
● Rear tamper motor (M7)
● SCU motor (M10)
● Main tray moving motor (M11)
● Booklet finisher front cover
● Booklet finisher
● Booklet finisher PCA

● Booklet finisher fold stopper unit
● Booklet feed entrance motor (M13)
● TE presser motor (M14)
● Stopper moving motor (M16)
● Separate pawl motor (M17)
● Folding roller motor (M18)
● Blade motor (M19)
● C fold motor (M20)
ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1199
Top output bin
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the top output bin
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top output bin on the finisher.
instructions.

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
Top output bin part number
SAM-JC63-05002B Cover, M Tray
Required tools

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the top output bin

▲ Raise the end of the top output bin (callout 1), and then lift it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 7-13 Remove the top output bin

instructions.
Right top cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the right top cover of the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Right top cover (finisher) part number
SAM-JC90-01448B Finisher sub - regist guide
Required tools


Post service test
Step 1: Remove the right top cover

▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Figure 7-14 Remove six screws and the right top cover

instructions.

Top cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top cover of the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Top cover (finisher) part number
SAM-JC90-01446B Cover, top
Required tools

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)

Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 7-16 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Figure 7-18 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

instructions.

Front door
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front door for the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Front door (finisher) part number
SAM-JC90-01444A Finisher sub - door
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 7-23 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 7-24 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 7-25 Release the lower hinge pin
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 7-26 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Figure 7-27 Remove one screw and the front door


instructions.
Rear cover
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear cover for the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Rear cover (finisher) part number
SAM-JC63-04988B Cover, rear
Required tools


Post service test



(callout 2).
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Figure 7-33 Remove four screws and the rear cover

instructions.

Front cover
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front cover for the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Front cover (finisher) part number
SAM-JC63-04986B Cover, front
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).


from the finisher.
front door
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 7-43 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Figure 7-45 Remove five screws and the front cover

instructions.

Front lower cover
● Introduction
● Step 5: Remove the front lower cover (finisher)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front lower cover for the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Front lower cover (finisher) part number
SAM-JC63-04987B Cover, front lower
Required tools
Post service test



(callout 2).


from the finisher.
front door


Step 5: Remove the front lower cover (finisher)

▲ Remove three machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front lower cover.
Figure 7-58 Remove three screws and the front lower cover


instructions.
Booklet tray
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the booklet tray
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tray on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Booklet tray part number
SAM-JC90-01419A Booklet tray
Required tools


Post service test
Step 1: Remove the booklet tray

1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 7-59 Remove the booklet tray
Special installation instructions: Booklet tray

▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.
Figure 7-60 Install the booklet tray
instructions.

Caster cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the booklet tray (booklet finishers only)
● Step 2: Remove the caster cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the caster cover on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Caster cover part number
SAM-JC63-04985A Caster cover
Required tools

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the booklet tray (booklet finishers only)



Step 2: Remove the caster cover
1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).
2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.
Figure 7-64 Remove the caster cover
3
1 2
instructions.

Lower shield assembly
● Introduction
● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the lower shield assembly on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Lower shield assembly (finisher) part number
SAM-JC90-01417A Lower shield assembly (finisher)
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).


from the finisher.
front door






screws (callout 2).

3
1 2
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).
NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.
2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.
Figure 7-84 Release the lower shield
2 1
3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.
Figure 7-85 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 7-86 Locate sensors

instructions.
Upper shield assembly
● Introduction
● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the upper shield assembly on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Upper shield assembly (finisher) part number
SAM-JC90-01475A Finisher sub - shield

Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).

from the finisher.

front door






screws (callout 2).
3
1 2


2 1
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.
Figure 7-109 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).
3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.
Figure 7-111 Release the shield
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.
5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper


instructions.
Controller PCA
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the controller PCA
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the controller PCA on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Controller PCA (finisher) part number
XXXXX Controller PCA (finisher)
Required tools


Post service test



(callout 2).

Step 4: Remove the controller PCA

▲ Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the controller PCA.
Reinstallation tip: Refer to the figure below for correct positioning and connection of the cables.
Figure 7-120 Remove the controller PCA

instructions.
Stapler unit
● Introduction
● Step 6: Remove the staple unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the staple unit on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Staple unit part number
SAM-JC90-01412A Finisher Sub - Staple Unit
Required tools

Post service test
Staple a document and verify that the stapler functions correctly.



(callout 2).

from the finisher.

front door



Step 6: Remove the staple unit

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.
Figure 7-135 Move the staple unit to the front

2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to remove it
(callout 2).
Figure 7-136 Remove the staple cartridge
3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then
remove two screws (callout 3).
Figure 7-137 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws
4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).
5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.
Figure 7-139 Remove the staple unit


instructions.
Dummy feed guide
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the dummy feed guide on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Dummy feed guide part number
SAM-JC93-01161A Assy-Guide Dummy-Feed
Required tools


Post service test



(callout 2).

Step 4: Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher)

▲ At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the dummy feed guide
(callout 2).
Figure 7-146 Remove two screws and the feed guide

instructions.
Top jam access cover
● Introduction
● Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor
● Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top jam access cover for the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Top jam access cover part number
SAM-JC90-01455A Finisher Sub - Top Jam
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).

from the finisher.

front door



Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor

▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the feed exit motor.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when
reinstalling the motor.
Figure 7-161 Remove the feed exit motor
4
3
1
2

Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover
1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).
2. Remove the top jam access cover.
Figure 7-163 Remove the top jam access cover

instructions.

Top lower feed assembly
● Introduction
● Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor (finisher)
● Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover
● Step 8: Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top lower feed assembly for the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Top lower feed assembly part number
SAM-JC90-01454A Finisher Sub-Top Lower
Required tools
Post service test



(callout 2).


from the finisher.
front door




Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor (finisher)

4
3
1
2
Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover
1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).
2. Remove the top jam access cover.
Figure 7-180 Remove the top jam access cover
Step 8: Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)

1. At the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1) on the buffer motor housing, and then tilt the
motor aside to access the screws under it.

2. At the front of the finisher, remove three self-tapping screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one
connector (callout 2).
Figure 7-182 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector
3. At the rear of the finisher, remove three machine screws (callout 1).
4. At the top of the finisher, lift the feed assembly straight up to disengage two tabs on the bottom and
remove the assembly.
Figure 7-184 Remove the feed assembly

5. If you are replacing the top lower feed assembly, locate two sensors (callout 1) and one connector
(callout 2) on the back of the assembly. Remove these items and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 7-185 Locate sensors and connector

instructions.
Ejector unit
● Introduction
● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)
● Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)
● Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector unit on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Ejector unit part number
SAM-JC90-01409A Finisher Sub - Ejector Unit

Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).

from the finisher.

front door



Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)


Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)

screws (callout 2).
3
1 2


2 1


Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 7-213 Move the staple unit to the center
2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).
3. Remove two screws (callout 1).
4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
Figure 7-217 Rotate the sensor
1
3
7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.
Figure 7-219 Remove the front tamper shaft
8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 7-220 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.
Figure 7-222 Remove the rear tamper shaft
11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).
12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).
14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).
15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.
Figure 7-227 Lift the edges of the tampers
16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.
Figure 7-228 Remove the ejector unit
1 2
3
Special installation instructions: Ejector unit
a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the
notch (callout 1).

Figure 7-229 Reinstall the front tamper shaft
b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
notch (callout 1).
Figure 7-230 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft

instructions.

Front tamper unit
● Introduction
● Step 5: Remove the rear cover
● Step 11: Remove the front tamper unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper unit on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Front tamper unit part number
SAM-JC90-01464A Finisher Sub - Tamper Front
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).


from the finisher.
front door


Step 5: Remove the rear cover




screws (callout 2).

3
1 2

2 1





1
3



frame.
1 2
3
notch (callout 1).
notch (callout 1).
Step 11: Remove the front tamper unit

▲ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 7-276 Remove the front tamper

instructions.
Rear tamper unit
● Introduction
● Step 11: Remove the rear tamper unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper unit on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Rear tamper unit part number
SAM-JC90-01465A Finisher Sub - Tamper Rear

Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).

from the finisher.

front door






screws (callout 2).
3
1 2


2 1





1
3


frame.
1 2
3
notch (callout 1).

notch (callout 1).
Step 11: Remove the rear tamper unit

▲ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it
Figure 7-322 Remove the rear tamper

instructions.

Feed entrance motor (M1)
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the feed entrance motor (M1)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the feed entrance motor on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Feed entrance motor (M1) part number
SAM-JC31-00163B Motor, Step
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).


Step 4: Remove the feed entrance motor (M1)

(callout 3), and then remove the feed entrance motor.
Figure 7-329 Remove the feed entrance motor
3 4
1
2
instructions.

Feed exit motor (M2)
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the feed exit motor (M2)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the feed exit motor on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Feed exit motor (M2) part number
SAM-JC31-00163B Motor, Step
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).


Step 4: Remove the feed exit motor (M2)

4
3
1
2
instructions.

Buffer motor, gear, and sensor (M3)
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the buffer motor, gear, and sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the buffer motor, gear, and sensor on the
finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Finisher sub - drive buffer part number
SAM-JC90-01453A Finisher sub - drive buffer
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).


Step 4: Remove the buffer motor, gear, and sensor

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).
Figure 7-344 Disconnect two connectors and remove two screws
2. If you are replacing the gear, slide it off of the shaft.
Figure 7-345 Slide the gear off of the shaft

3. If you are replacing the sensor (callout 1), remove it from the motor housing.
4. If you are replacing the motor, do the following:).
a. Remove two screws (callout 1)
b. Lower the motor (callout 1) and then pull it away from the housing (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 7-348 Remove the buffer motor

instructions.

Front tamper motor (M6)
● Introduction
● Step 11: Remove the front tamper (finisher)
● Step 12: Remove the front tamper motor (M7)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper motor on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Front tamper motor (M6) part number
SAM-JC93-01001A Drive Motor, Step
Required tools

Post service test


(callout 2).


from the finisher.
front door






screws (callout 2).

3
1 2

2 1





1
3



frame.
1 2
3
notch (callout 1).
notch (callout 1).
Step 11: Remove the front tamper (finisher)

▲ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 7-394 Remove the front tamper
Step 12: Remove the front tamper motor (M7)

2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the front tamper motor.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.
Figure 7-396 Release the belt and remove the motor

instructions.

Rear tamper motor (M7)
● Introduction
● Step 11: Remove the rear tamper (finisher)
● Step 12: Remove the rear tamper motor (M7)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper motor on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Rear tamper motor (M7) part number
Required tools

Post service test


(callout 2).


from the finisher.
front door






screws (callout 2).

3
1 2

2 1





1
3



frame.
1 2
3
notch (callout 1).
notch (callout 1).
Step 11: Remove the rear tamper (finisher)

▲ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 7-442 Remove the rear tamper
Step 12: Remove the rear tamper motor (M7)

2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the rear tamper motor.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.
Figure 7-444 Release the belt and remove the motor

instructions.

SCU motor (M10)
● Introduction
● Step 10: Remove the SCU motor (M10)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the SCU motor on the finisher.
instructions.

blank).
SCU motor (M10) part number
SAM-JC93-01156A Motor, Step
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).


from the finisher.
front door






screws (callout 2).

3
1 2

2 1



Step 10: Remove the SCU motor (M10)

1. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2).
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor and bracket.

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor.
Figure 7-474 Remove two screws and the motor
Special installation instructions: SCU motor (M10)

▲ When installing the motor and bracket, align the tab and slot on the motor bracket with the tab and
slot in the printer.
Figure 7-475 Install the motor and bracket

instructions.

Main tray moving motor (M11)
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the main tray moving motor (M11)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main tray moving motor (M11) on the
finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Main tray moving motor (M11) part number
SAM-JC90-01415A Motor
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).


Step 4: Remove the main tray moving motor (M11)

2. Open two retainers (callout 1), and then release the green wires (callout 2).
Figure 7-483 Open two retainers
1
2
3. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then thread the cable up through the opening in the top of the
bracket.
5. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor assembly.
Figure 7-486 Remove four screws and the motor assembly
6. Carefully pull the motor assembly away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 7-487 Remove the motor assembly
Special installation instructions: Main tray moving motor (M11)
a. Before installing the motor assembly, slide the bushing (callout 1) off of the shaft.

b. Align the flat edges on the bushing with the flat edges on the opening in the motor assembly bracket,
and then install the bushing.
c. Position the bushing over the shaft, and then install the motor assembly.
Figure 7-490 Install the motor assembly

instructions.

Booklet finisher front cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet finisher front cover.
instructions.

blank).
Booklet finisher front cover part number
SAM-JC90-01478B Finisher Sub - Cover F Bm
Required tools

Post service test
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover

▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.
Figure 7-491 Remove five screws and the cover
1 4
2
3


instructions.
Booklet finisher
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Booklet finisher part number
SAM-JC90-01416A Finisher Sub - Booklet Unit
Required tools


Post service test



(callout 2).

Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher

1. Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher.
Figure 7-498 Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
2
3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.
Figure 7-500 Release the metal bracket
4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet finisher.
1 2
5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.
Figure 7-502 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet finisher.
7. Lift the booklet finisher up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet finisher.
Figure 7-504 Remove the booklet finisher
Special installation instructions: Booklet finisher

▲ When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
finisher.
Figure 7-505 Position the hooks
9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet finisher aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.
Figure 7-506 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet finisher aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.
11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet finisher slot.
Figure 7-508 Extend the right rail

instructions.

Booklet finisher PCA
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher
● Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher PCA
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet finisher PCA.
instructions.

blank).
Booklet finisher PCA part number
XXXXX Booklet finisher PCA
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).


Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher

1. Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher.
Figure 7-515 Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher
2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
2
3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.
Figure 7-517 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet finisher.
1 2
5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.
Figure 7-519 Slide the right rail
6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet finisher.
7. Lift the booklet finisher up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet finisher.
Figure 7-521 Remove the booklet finisher
Special installation instructions: Booklet finisher

▲ When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
finisher.

Figure 7-522 Position the hooks
9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet finisher aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.
10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet finisher aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.
11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet finisher slot.
Figure 7-525 Extend the right rail
Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher PCA


2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the metal cover.
Figure 7-527 Remove one screw and the metal cover
3. Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the booklet finisher PCA.
Figure 7-528 Remove four screws and the PCA

instructions.

Booklet finisher fold stopper unit
● Introduction
● Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield
● Step 6: Remove the fold stopper unit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet finisher fold stopper unit.
instructions.

blank).
Booklet finisher fold stopper unit part number
SAM-JC90-01432A Finisher Sub - Face Down Stopper Unit
Required tools
Post service test



(callout 2).



1 4
2
3
Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield
1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet finisher (callout 1).
2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet finisher (callout 1).

3. Slide the booklet finisher out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the lower right shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet finisher to remove it.
Figure 7-538 Remove the lower right shield
Step 6: Remove the fold stopper unit

1. On the left side of the booklet finisher, remove two screws through access openings in the jam access
cover (callout 1).
2. Raise the jam access cover.
Figure 7-540 Raise the jam access cover
3. Raise the booklet width guide.
Figure 7-541 Raise the booklet width guide

4. On the right side of the booklet finisher, open two retainers (callout 1), and then disconnect three
connectors (callout 2).
6. Release the tab (callout 1) on the guide arm, and then slide the guide off of the shaft (callout 2) to remove
it.
Figure 7-544 Release the guide arm
7. Lower the width guide to the lowest position.
Figure 7-545 Lower the width guide

8. On the right side of the booklet finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).
9. Lift the right lower corner (callout 1) to clear the cable guide, and then slide the assembly to the right
Figure 7-547 Remove the fold stopper unit
Special installation instructions: Fold stopper unit

▲ Loosen the two alignment screws (callout 1) and move the fold unit side to side to until the alignment
gauge is positioned on the center line. Tighten the screws and run a folded job through the finisher
and verify that the fold is correct. If the fold is not correct, loosen the screws, adjust the alignment,
and run another fold job. Continue this process until the fold is correct.
Figure 7-548 Adjust the alignment gauge

instructions.

Booklet feed entrance motor (M13)
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the booklet feed entrance motor (M13)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet feed entrance motor on the booklet
finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Booklet feed entrance motor (M13) part number
Required tools

Post service test

1 4
2
3
Step 2: Remove the booklet feed entrance motor (M13)

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2). Lift the motor away from the
booklet finisher and release the belt (callout 3) from the back of the motor.

Figure 7-550 Remove the booklet feed entrance motor

instructions.
TE presser motor (M14)
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the TE presser motor (M14)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the TE presser motor on the booklet finisher.
instructions.

blank).
TE presser motor (M14) part number
Required tools


Post service test

1 4
2
3
Step 2: Remove the TE presser motor (M14)

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the TE presser
motor.
Figure 7-552 Remove the TE presser motor

instructions.

Stopper moving motor (M16)
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the stopper moving motor (M16)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stopper moving motor on the booklet
finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Stopper moving motor (M16) part number
Required tools

Post service test

1 4
2
3


Step 3: Remove the stopper moving motor (M16)

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the stopper moving
motor.
Figure 7-557 Remove the stopper moving motor


instructions.
Separate pawl motor (M17)
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the separate pawl motor (M17)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the separate pawl motor on the booklet finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Separate pawl motor (M17) part number
Required tools


Post service test

1 4
2
3
Step 2: Remove the separate pawl motor (M17)

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the separate pawl
motor.
Figure 7-559 Remove the separate pawl motor
1
2

instructions.

Folding roller motor (M18)
● Introduction
● Step 4: Remove the folding roller motor (M18)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the folding roller motor on the booklet finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Folding roller motor (M18) part number
SAM-JC31-00144B Folding roller motor
Required tools

Post service test



(callout 2).


Step 4: Remove the folding roller motor (M18)

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the folding roller
motor.
Figure 7-566 Remove the folding roller motor
instructions.

Blade motor (M19)
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the blade motor (M19)
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the blade motor on the booklet finisher.
instructions.

blank).
Finisher sub - bm main blade part number
SAM-JC90-01435A Finisher sub - bm main blade
Required tools

Post service test

1 4
2
3


Step 3: Remove the blade motor (M19)

▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the blade motor.
Figure 7-571 Remove the blade motor


instructions.
C fold motor (M20)
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the C fold motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the C fold motor on the booklet finisher.
instructions.

blank).
C fold motor (M20) part number
Required tools


Post service test

1 4
2
3
Step 2: Remove the C fold motor

1. Note the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor (callout 1). These
arrows must be aligned in these positions when the motor is reinstalled.
Figure 7-573 Check arrow alignment
2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

4. Remove one e-clip (callout 1) on top of the white gear. Remove the white gear (callout 2) and release the
belt (callout 3).
Figure 7-576 Remove one e-clip, gear, and belt
1 2
5. Remove the bracket and motor from the booklet finisher.
CAUTION: Do not pull on the shaft (callout 1) while removing the bracket and motor. The shaft might
become dislodged at the other end. If the shaft becomes dislodged, remove the booklet finisher PCA shield
and PCA bracket to reinstall the shaft.
Figure 7-577 Remove the bracket and motor
6. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the C fold motor.

Special installation instructions: C fold motor
a. When installing the motor, install one screw (callout 1) to hold the bracket in place while installing the
gear and belt.
Figure 7-579 Install one screw
b. Check the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor (callout 1).
Figure 7-580 Check arrow alignment
c. If the arrows are not aligned, slightly pull up on the belt to create some slack around the gear
(callout 1), and then rotate the gear (callout 2) until the arrows align.

instructions.

Problem solving
ENWW Problem solving 1567

Control panel message document (CPMD)
Control-panel messages and event log entries
The CPMD is not provided in this service manual. The CPMD for this printer is available on the HP Service Access
Workbench (SAW) Web site. Go to h41302.www4.hp.com/km/saw/home.do.

Finisher system diagram
PCA structure diagram
Finisher system consists of the FINISHER PCA, BOOKLET MAKER PCA, SWITCH PCA, and HOLE PUNCH PCA.
Figure 7-582 Finisher system diagram
PCA function
● FINISHER PCA
This PCA controls the finisher modules and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
● SWITCH PCA
This PCA shows the manual stapling condition and accepts the button input for manual staple operation.
● BOOKLET MAKER PCA
This PCA controls the booklet maker module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
● HOLE PUNCH PCA
This PCA controls the hole punch module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
ENWW Finisher system diagram 1569

8 Inner finisher
● Precautions
● Product Specification and Description
● Removal and replacment (inner finisher)
● Problem solving
● Block Diagram
ENWW 1571
Precautions
Caution for safety
and fire.
fire.
6. Use caution when connecting or disconnecting the power cable.
or fire.
1572 Chapter 8 Inner finisher ENWW

power source when thunder or lightning is expected. Do not touch the printer or the power cable if it is still
connected to the power outlet during these weather conditions.
not position the printer near a humidifier or in front of an air conditioner. Moisture and dust build up inside
electric shock.
13. Wait 5 minutes after unplugging the power cable before replacing the LVPS board to avoid electric shock.
rotating devices.
fire.

5. Do not place candles or burning cigarettes on the printer. Doing so could cause fire.
specifications.
Removal and replacement precautions


motor, and fan.

carefully.
printer.
stable.
ESD precautions

Product Specification and Description
Specification
Item Description
Capacity 550 Sheets (Main 500, Top 50) @ 80gsm
Sensing Paper Jam/Tray Sensing/Stapler/Cover Open
Media Sizes ● Main: 148 - 320 mm x 140-457.2 mm (58.3-126 inch x 55.1-180 inch)
● Top: 98 - 297 mm x 140-432 mm (38.6-116.9 inch x 55.1-170.1 inch)
Media types Plain/Thick/Heavy weight/Thin/Cotton/Colored/Recycled/Bond/Archive/Pre-Punched/Cardstock/Glossy/

Envelope
Media Weight ● Main: 52-256 gsm (13.9-68.3 lb.)
● Top: 52-325 gsm (13.9-86.7 lb.)
Number of Bin 2 (Main/Top)
Dimension (W X D X H) 458 x 491 x 173 mm (18.0 X 19.3 X 6.8 inch)
Weight 15 kg (33 lb.)
Tray1 Finishing Capacity 50 Sheets @ 80gsm
Tray1 Finishing Mode Stapling (Left, Right, Center)/Punch (2/3, 2/4, Swedish)
Tray2 Finishing Capacity 500 Sheets @ 80 gsm
Table 8-1 Paper Size Specification

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position
mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL
52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat
A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF O O O X F/R1 O
Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF O O O X F/R1 O
Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
B5(JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
B5(ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X O X X X
Monarch 98.4 x 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X O X X X

Env 190.5
PostCard 101.6 x 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X O X X X

4X6 152.4
A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X O X X X

Table 8-1 Paper Size Specification (continued)
Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position
mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL
52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat
No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X O X X X
DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X O X X X
C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X O X X X
B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X O X X X
Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X O X X X
A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X X X
C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X 0 X X X
B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X
B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X
Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 X
16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Oficio 215.9 x 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

342.9
C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X O X X X
Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O F/R 1

X O
8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
Tabloid 304.8 x 12 x 18 SEF O X X X X X

Extra 457.2
SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF O O X X X X
Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 — W X W 98-297 X X X

~ 148-320
L 140-1200 -L
L 5.5-47 -L 140-1200
140-1200
1 “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.
ENWW Product Specification and Description 1577

Name Paper size Orientation Punch
mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish
2H 3H 2H 4H 4H
A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF 0 X O X O
Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF 0 X O X O
Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O O O
A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O O O
B5 (JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O X O
B5 (ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O X O
Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O O O
No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X X X X
Monarch 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X X X X

Env
PostCard 101.6 x 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X X X X

4X6 152.4
A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X X X X
No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X X X X
DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X X X X
C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X X X X
B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X X X X
Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X X X X
A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X O
C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X X X X
B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O
B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O
Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O X O X O
16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O X O X O
A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O X O X O
Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O X O X O
Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O X O X O
Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O X O X O
Oficio 215.9 x 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O X O X O

342.9
C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X X X X
Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O X O
B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O X O

Name Paper size Orientation Punch
mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish
2H 3H 2H 4H 4H
8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O O
Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O O O
A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O O O
Tabloid 304.8 x 12 x 18 SEF X X X X X

EXtra 457.2
SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF X X X X X
Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ - X X X X X
L 140-1200 L 5.5-47
Table 8-2 Media performance

Paper Type Function
Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch
Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O
Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O
Heavy weight (106-175 O O O O

g/m2)
Extra Heavy weight 1 O O O O

(176-216 g/m²)
Extra Heavy weight 2 O O O O

(217-256 g/m2)
Extra Heavy weight 3 X O X X

(257-300 g/m2)
Extra Heavy weight 4 X O X X

(301-325 g/m2)
Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O
Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O O O
Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O
Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O
Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O
Bond O O O O
Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O
LetterHead O O O O
Pre-Punched O O O X
Thin Cardstock (105-163 O O O O

g/m2)

Table 8-2 Media performance (continued)
Paper Type Function
Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch
Thick Cardstock O O O X
(170-216 g/m2)
Heavy Cardstock O O O X
(217-256 g/m2)
Extra Heavy Cardstock X O X X

1(257-300 g/m²)
Extra Heavy Cardstock X O X X

2(301-325 g/m2)
Thin Glossy (106-169 O O O O

g/m2)
Thick Glossy (170-216 O O O X

g/m²)
Heavy Glossy (217-256 O X X X

g/m2)
Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X
Thick Envelope (217-256 O X X X

g/m2)
Tab O X X O
Perforated Paper (75-90 X O X X

g/m2)

Finisher System
Sectional view
Figure 8-1 Finisher system—sectional view
Table 8-3 Finisher system—sectional view
Item Description Item Description
1 Entrance sensor 7 Jam Door Open Sensor
2 Passthru Sensor 8 Front Door Open Sensor
3 Paddle Home Sensor 9 Stacker Tray Home Sensor
4 Tamper Home_F Sensor 10 Paper Feed roller
5 Tamper Home_R Sensor 11 Paper Exit roller
6 Eject Home Sensor 12 Turning Knob

Paper path
Figure 8-2 Finisher system—paper path
Table 8-4 Finisher system—paper path
Item Description
1 Finisher Main Tray – Staple / offset / Punch
2 Finisher Top Tray – Stack only

Electrical parts layout
Figure 8-3 Finisher system—electrical parts layout
Table 8-5 Finisher system—electrical parts layout

Item Description Function
S1 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001381) Entrance Sensor
S2 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Shaft Docking Sensor
S3 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Dust Box Sensor
S4 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001381) Sub Stay Sensor
S5 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Stapler Position Sensor_Rear
S6 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Staple Position Sensor_ Center 1
S7 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Staple Position Sensor_ Center 2
S8 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Exit Sensor
S9 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Stapler Position Sensor_Front
S10 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) End Defence Sensor
S11 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Eject Sensor
S12 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Paper Support Sensor

Table 8-5 Finisher system—electrical parts layout (continued)
Item Description Function
S13 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Eject 2 Motor Sensor
S14 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Tamper Position Sensor_Rear
S15 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Paper Holder Position Sensor
S16 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Tray Home Position Sensor
S17 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Tamper Position Sensor_Front
S18 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Main Paddle Position Sensor
S19 JC81-07403A AS- Sensor
S20 JC81-07396A AS- Sensor
S21 JC39-01610A Switch Front cover open
S22 JC39-02175A Switch Jam door open
M1 JC31-00169A Entrance Motor
M2 JC31-00009C EJECTOR_1_Motor
M3 Mabuchi EJECTOR_2_Motor
M4 JC31-00149A Tamper_Motor_Front
M5 JC31-00149A Tamper_Motor_Rear
M6 JC31-00149A Paper Support
M7 KIG Tray Motor
M8 JC31-00149A Main Paddle Motor
M9 JC31-00169A Exit Motor
M10 JC31-00149A Traverse Motor
M11 TDS-10SL Paper Holder Solenoid

Block Diagram
Figure 8-4 Finisher system—block diagram
PBA Connection Information

Figure 8-5 Finisher system—PBA connection information
Table 8-6 Finisher system—PBA connection information
No. Connection
1 CN3 : REAR Joint I/F
2 CN1 : REAR Sensor
3 CN10 : Traverse Mid Sensor
4 CN8 : Debug
5 CN2 : REAR I/F
6 CN7 : FRONT I/F
7 CN6 : Stacker Switch
8 CN9 : Solenoid
9 CN4 : Ejector & Supporter I/F
10 CN5 : Main I/F

Service approach
CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach under the
weight of the product.

current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the printer, circuit
shock.

Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.
insulated parts.

original positions.


● Remove all paper from the product.
● Turn off the power using the power button.
● Remove the toner cartridges.
● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.

● Plug in the power cable.
● Verify the functions of the printer that might have been impacted by service procedures. Make sure the
printer is in complete working order.
● Replace any accessories removed for service.
Post-service test

Print-quality test
defects.

Ordering
or
partsurfer.hp.com
Orderable parts

Removal and replacment (inner finisher)
● Entrance sensor
● Entrance motor
● Exit sensor
● Exit motor
● Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly
● Front Jogger Motor
● Front Jogger Home Sensor
● Rear Jogger Motor
● Rear Jogger Home Sensor
● Stapler
● Stapler position sensor assembly
● Traverse Motor
● Stacker Motor
● Stacker Encoder Sensor
● Stacker Lower Limit Switch
● Stack Beam Sensor
● Stack Position Sensor
● Paper Holding Lever Solenoid
● Paper Support Motor
● Paper Support Home Sensor
● Ejector Motor assembly
● Main Paddle Motor
● Main Paddle Home Sensor
● Main Paddle
● Ejector assembly
● Punch Dust Full Sensor
● Door Switch
● Top Door Switch
● End Fence Home Sensor
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1589

Entrance sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the entrance sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Entrance sensor assembly.
***** PLACEHOLDER FOR BRIGHTCOVE URL*****
instructions.

Entrance sensor assembly part number
Entrance sensor assembly part number
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Step 1: Remove the entrance sensor
1. On the right-side of the printer remove three screws, and then remove the cover-rear.
Figure 8-6 Remove the entrance sensor (1 of 7)
2. On the right, back-side of the printer remove the e-ring, and then remove the shaft-side plate. Unplug the
connector.

3. On the right, front-side of the printer remove the sheet-punch front.
4. Remove the e-ring and washer, and then remove the punch dummy.

5. Loosen the adhesive tape around, and then remove, four screws. Remove the handle, and then remove the
punch dummy cover.
6. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the sensor bracket.
7. Remove one screw, and then remove the sensor.

Entrance motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
● Step 2: Remove the entrance motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Entrance motor assembly.
instructions.

Entrance motor assembly part number
Entrance motor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub-cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 8-13 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller feed.

4. Remove six screws.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.

Step 2: Remove the entrance motor
1. Disconnect the sensor cable at the rear.
2. Remove the cable restraint at the rear.
3. Release two tabs that engage with the frame, and then remove the guide middle lower.
CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flag.
5. Open the clamps, and then unplug the connector.

6. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor.

Exit sensor
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the exit sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Exit sensor assembly.
instructions.

Exit sensor assembly part number
Exit sensor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test




Step 2: Remove the exit sensor
▲ Remove the hook, and then remove the exit sensor.
Figure 8-26 Remove the exit sensor

Exit motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the exit motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Exit motor assembly.
instructions.

Exit motor assembly part number
Exit motor
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the exit motor
1. Remove the front cover.
Figure 8-27 Remove the exit motor (1 of 3)
2. Remove two screws, and then unplug the motor connector.

3. Remove the exit motor from the BKT motor feed exit.

Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly.
instructions.

Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly part number
Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly
1. Open the cover top tray sub-assembly, and then remove one screw securing the guide-exit lower.
Figure 8-30 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub-assembly (1 of 6)
2. Remove four screws securing the guide-harness A.

3. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt.
Figure 8-32 Remove the Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly (3 of 6)
4. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the bushing.
Figure 8-33 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (4 of 6)

5. Lift up and remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly.

Front Jogger Motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the front jogger motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Front Jogger Motor assembly.
instructions.

Front Jogger Motor assembly part number
Front Jogger Motor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the front jogger motor
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub cover front.
Figure 8-35 Remove the front jogger motor (1 of 22)

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.
4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.
NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The rack
and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
6. Remove four screws from both sides.
7. Remove two screws and then remove the lower PBA cover.

8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
9. Remove one screw, and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.

10. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor paddle sub assembly.
NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.
11. Remove the wire harness from the harness guide, remove three screws, and then remove the guide-
harness front.
NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.

12. Remove three screws, unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-motor tray.
13. Open the cover top tray sub assembly, and then remove one screw securing the guide-exit lower.



18. Remove the ring-c, actuator-home paddle, AS pulley S2M48T, and cam-paddle A.
Reinstallation tip: The cam must be installed with the same orientation as the cam on the opposite side.
Reinstallation tip: The actuator home cam paddle is installed hollow side out
19. Remove the e-ring and bush-6_D.

20. Remove the main paddle A unit / B unit, and then carefully remove the shaft from its retainer.
NOTE: Note the orientation of paddles and use caution to not break the plastic locator pin on the paddle.

22. Unplug the connector, and then pull the finisher sub-tamper front up to remove.
Reinstallation tip: Position the upper left-corner of the sub tamper, and then carefully rotate it counter-
clockwise into position.
23. Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor.

Front Jogger Home Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the front jogger home sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Front Jogger Home Sensor assembly.
instructions.

Front Jogger Home Sensor assembly part number
Front Jogger Home Sensor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the front jogger home sensor

Figure 8-59 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)

7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.

9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main

harness front.

13. Open the cover top tray sub assembly, and then remove one screw securing the guide-exit lower.



18. Remove the ring-C, actuator-home paddle, AS pulley S2M48T, and cam-paddle A.
Reinstallation tip: The cam must be installed with the same orientation as the cam on the opposite side.
Reinstallation tip: The actuator home cam paddle is installed hollow side out
19. Remove the e-ring and bush-6_D.

20. Remove the main paddle A unit / B unit, and then carefully remove the shaft from its retainer.
NOTE: Note the orientation of paddles and use caution to not break the plastic locator pin on the paddle.

22. Unplug the connector, and then remove the front jogger home sensor.
Figure 8-77 Remove the front jogger home sensor
23. Remove the tamper front sub assembly.

Rear Jogger Motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the rear jogger motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Rear Jogger Motor assembly.
instructions.

Rear Jogger Motor assembly part number
Rear Jogger Motor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the rear jogger motor




NOTE: Move cable guide out of position to access the screws.
Figure 8-87 Remove the rear jogger motor (1 of 3)

12. Unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-tamper rear.
13. Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the rear jogger motor.

NOTE: Move cable guide out of position to access the screws.
15. Unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-tamper rear.

16. Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the rear jogger motor.

Rear Jogger Home Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the rear jogger home sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Rear Jogger Home Sensor assembly.
instructions.

Rear Jogger Home Sensor assembly part number
Rear Jogger Home Sensor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the rear jogger home sensor
Remove the rear jogger home sensor
1. Remove the finisher sub-cover front and the cover-rear.




11. Unplug the connector, and then remove the rear jogger home sensor.
Figure 8-102 Remove the rear jogger home sensor (11 of 11)

Stapler
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the stapler
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the stapler assembly.
instructions.

Stapler assembly part number
SAM-JC90-01342A Stapler assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the stapler
2. Remove two screws, and then unplug the motor connector.

3. Remove one screw, unplug two connectors, and then remove the stapler unit.
NOTE: Ensure the tab on the back of the stapler unit clears the chassis while removing.
Figure 8-105 Remove the stapler (1 of 2)
4. Remove two screws, and then remove the finisher sub-staple.
Figure 8-106 Remove the stapler (2 of 2)

Stapler position sensor assembly
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly
● Step 3: Remove the staple position sensor assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stapler position sensor assembly.
instructions.

Stapler position sensor assembly part number
Stapler position sensor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test




Step 2: Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly
1. Open the cover top tray sub-assembly, and then remove one screw securing the guide-exit lower.

Figure 8-114 Remove the Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly (3 of 6)


Step 3: Remove the staple position sensor assembly
1. Remove two screws from the front of the printer. Remove three screws, and then remove the bracket
support.
Figure 8-117 Remove the stapler position sensor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two screws from the rear of the printer.

3. Loosen three cable restraints. Unplug the connector at the sensor, and then remove the finisher sub-stay
bracket.
4. Remove one screw from the front of the printer.

5. Remove one screw from the rear of the printer.
6. Unplug four photo-sensor connectors. Open the six cable restraints, and then unplug the FFC cable.
NOTE: The FFC is glued to the support bracket. However, the sensors can be replaced without removal of
the FFC.
Reinstallation tip: Connect the sensors, lock the cable restraints, and then connect the FCC.

7. Remove the assembly, and then remove the sensor.

Traverse Motor
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the traverse motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Traverse Motor assembly.
instructions.

Traverse Motor assembly part number
??? Traverse Motor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test




Step 2: Remove the traverse motor
1. Remove three screws, unplug the motor connector, and then remove the finisher sub-staple travers.
Figure 8-129 Remove the traverse motor (1 of 2)
Figure 8-130 Remove the traverse motor (2 of 2)
3. Use the following steps when reinstalling the traverse motor:
a. Apply tension to the spring by pushing toward the center of the printer, and then tighten the screw.
Tightening the screw puts maximum slack in the belt.
b. Lower the motor while placing the belt on the motor pulley.
c. Secure the bracket with three screws.
d. Release the spring tension screw to allow the spring to apply tension to the belt.
e. Tighten the screw.

Stacker Motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the stacker motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stacker Motor assembly.
instructions.

Keyboardr assembly part number
??? Stacker Motor
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the stacker motor


7. Remove two screws and then remove Lower PBA cover.


harness front.

12. Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the stacker motor.
Figure 8-141 Remove the stacker motor

Stacker Encoder Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the stacker encoder sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stacker Encoder Sensor assembly.
instructions.

Stacker Encoder Sensor assembly part number
Stacker Encoder Sensor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the stacker encoder sensor




harness front.

12. Remove one screw, remove the shaft, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 8-152 Remove the stacker encoder sensor

Stacker Lower Limit Switch
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the stacker lower limit switch
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stacker Lower Limit Switch assembly.
instructions.

Stacker Lower Limit Switch assembly part number
Stacker Lower Limit Switch assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the stacker lower limit switch




harness front.

Figure 8-163 Remove the stacker lower limit switch (1 of 2)
13. Open three clamps, unplug the connector, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 8-164 Remove the stacker lower limit switch (2 of 2)

Stack Beam Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the stack beam sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stack Beam Sensor assembly.
instructions.

Stack Beam Sensor assembly part number
Stack Beam Sensor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the stack beam sensor



8. Remove two screws from both sides of the finisher sub-stacker plate. Remove the bracket, and then
remove the sensor.
Figure 8-171 Remove the stack beam sensor

Stack Position Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stack Position Sensor assembly.
instructions.

Stack Position Sensor assembly part number
Stack Position Sensor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test




Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor
1. Remove four screws, and then, remove the tray.
Figure 8-177 Remove the tray
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the device while assembling.
Hold the arms, and then drop the first wheel into the channel (on both sides). Simultaneously let the
second wheel rest on the channel (on both sides). Gently squeeze wheels into the channel. The rack and
pinion might need to be engaged several times to achieve a level assembly.
Figure 8-178 Remove the sub-tray

Figure 8-179 Remove the PBA
NOTE: Also, remove two screws, and then remove the lower PBA cover (not shown).

5. Disconnect two in-line connectors, and then, remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
Figure 8-181 Remove the sub-stacker plate
6. Remove one screw, disconnect the connector, release the cable guide, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor sub assembly.
Figure 8-182 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly

7. Remove three screws, disconnect the connector, and then release the motor paddle sub assembly.
NOTE: Move the wire harness out of the guide to access one screw.
Figure 8-183 Release the motor paddle sub assembly
8. Remove three screws, release the wire harness from the guide, and then remove the guide harness front.
Figure 8-184 Remove the guide harness front

9. Remove three screws, disconnect two connectors, and then release the finisher sub-motor tray.
Figure 8-185 Release the finisher sub-motor tray

11. Open three clamps, disconnect the connector, and then release the switch.
Figure 8-187 Release the sensor
12. Do the following:
a. Disconnect the sensor.
b. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.
c. Remove the stack position sensor.

Paper Holding Lever Solenoid
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the paper holding lever solenoid
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Paper Holding Lever Solenoid assembly.
instructions.

Paper Holding Lever Solenoid assembly part number
Paper Holding Lever Solenoid assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the paper holding lever solenoid




harness front.

12. Remove one screw, and then remove stack lower limit switch bracket.
Figure 8-199 Remove the paper holding lever solenoid (1 of 4)
13. Remove the second screw.

15. Remove two screws on the solenoid bracket.
16. Disconnect the connector from the main board.
17. Remove the solenoid assembly.

Paper Support Motor
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the paper support motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Paper Support Motor assembly.
instructions.

Paper Support Motor assembly part number
Paper Support Motor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test







Step 2: Remove the paper support motor
3. Remove the cables from their restraints at the front of the ejector.
4. Disconnect the motor and the sensor cable at the rear

5. Remove the cables from the cable restraints at the rear.
NOTE: The black paddle is inside the chrome bracket at rear of ejector
6. Remove the ejector.

Paper Support Home Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the paper support home sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Paper Support Home Sensor assembly.
instructions.

Paper Support Home Sensor assembly part number
Paper Support Home Sensor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test










Step 3: Remove the paper support home sensor
Figure 8-232 Remove the paper support home sensor (1 of 4)
3. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.

4. Remove the paper support with attention for pinion.
5. Remove the sensor from the paper support.

Ejector Motor assembly
● Introduction
● Step 3: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Ejector Motor assembly.
instructions.

Ejector Motor assembly part number
Ejector Motor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test










Step 3: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly
1. Disconnect one connector on the paper support motor.
2. Remove one screw on the paper support home sensor.

4. Remove the e-clip and the bushing, and then pull and remove the drive shaft.
Figure 8-255 Remove the ejector motor assembly (1 of 6)
Reinstallation tip: When reassembling the drive shaft, ensure the paper supports are in the full down
position (against the stops).

6. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two belt-timing gears, and then remove one screw.
Figure 8-257 Remove two belt-timing gears
7. Remove the clip, remove the belt-timing gear, and then remove one screw.
Figure 8-258 Remove the belt-timing gear and one screw

8. Remove the cable from restraint, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor connector.
Remove the motor assembly.
Figure 8-259 Disconnect connectors

Main Paddle Motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the main paddle motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Main Paddle Motor assembly.
instructions.

Main Paddle Motor assembly part number
Main Paddle Motor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the main paddle motor
2. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor assembly.
Figure 8-262 Remove the main paddle motor

Main Paddle Home Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the main paddle home sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Main Paddle Home Sensor assembly.
instructions.

Main Paddle Home Sensor assembly part number
Main Paddle Home Sensor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the main paddle home sensor
2. Remove one screw. Open the clamp, and then remove the bracket-paddle sensor.
Figure 8-263 Remove the bracket-paddle sensor
3. Remove the main paddle home sensor from the bracket.
Figure 8-264 Remove the main paddle home sensor

Main Paddle
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the main paddle
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Main Paddle assembly.
instructions.

Main Paddle assembly part number
Main Paddle assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the main paddle
▲ Open the cover top tray sub assembly, and then remove the main paddle A unit and main paddle B unit.
Figure 8-265 Remove the main paddle

Ejector assembly
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly
● Step 3: Remove the paper ejector assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Ejector assembly.
instructions.

Ejector assembly part number
Ejector assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test







Step 2: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly
1. Disconnect one connector on the paper support motor.
2. Remove one screw on the paper support home sensor.

4. Remove the e-clip and the bushing, and then pull and remove the drive shaft.
Reinstallation tip: When reassembling the drive shaft, ensure the paper supports are in the full down
position (against the stops).

6. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two belt-timing gears, and then remove one screw.
Figure 8-282 Remove two belt-timing gears
7. Remove the clip, remove the belt-timing gear, and then remove one screw.
Figure 8-283 Remove the belt-timing gear and one screw

8. Remove the cable from restraint, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor connector.
Remove the motor assembly.
Figure 8-284 Disconnect connectors

Step 3: Remove the paper ejector assembly
2. Unplug the harness, and then remove the ejector assembly.
Figure 8-287 Remove the ejector assembly

Punch Dust Full Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 2: Remove the punch dust full sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Punch Dust Full Sensor assembly.
instructions.

Punch Dust Full Sensor assembly part number
Punch Dust Full Sensor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test




Step 2: Remove the punch dust full sensor
1. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the punch dust full sensor sub-assembly.
Figure 8-293 Remove the punch dust full sensor sub-assembly
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the punch dust full sensor.
Figure 8-294 Remove the punch dust full sensor

Door Switch
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the door switch
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Door Switch assembly.
instructions.

Door Switch assembly part number
??? Door Switch assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the door switch
1. On the right-side of the printer remove three screws, and then remove the cover-rear.
2. On the right, back-side of the printer remove the e-ring, and then remove the shaft-side plate and unplug
the connector.
Figure 8-296 Remove the e-ring

3. On the right, front-side of the printer, remove the sheet-punch front.
Figure 8-297 Remove the sheet-punch front
4. Remove the e-ring and washer, and then remove the punch dummy.
Figure 8-298 Remove the punch dummy

5. Remove three screws, and then remove the bracket-SPT B.
Figure 8-299 Remove the bracket-SPT B
6. Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the door switch.
Figure 8-300 Remove the door switch

Top Door Switch
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the top door switch
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Top Door Switch assembly.
instructions.

Top Door Switch assembly part number
Top Door Switch assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the top door switch
Figure 8-301 Remove the cover-rear
Figure 8-302 Remove the finisher sub-cover middle and finisher sub-cover compile

Figure 8-304 Remove the finisher sub-tray frame

Figure 8-305 Remove the PBA cover

9. Unplug the connector, and then remove the switch assembly.
Figure 8-308 Remove the switch assembly
10. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor.

End Fence Home Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the end fence home position sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the End Fence Home Sensor assembly.
instructions.

End Fence Home Sensor assembly part number
End Fence Home Sensor assembly part number
Required tools

Post service test

Step 1: Remove the end fence home position sensor
1. Follow steps 1-5 in the traverse front home sensor disassembly procedure.
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 8-310 Remove the end fence home sensor

Problem solving
ENWW Problem solving 1783

Control panel message document (CPMD)
Control-panel messages and event log entries
The CPMD is not provided in this service manual. The CPMD for this printer is available on the HP Service Access
Workbench (SAW) Web site. Go to h41302.www4.hp.com/km/saw/home.do.

Block Diagram
ENWW Block Diagram 1785

A Appendix: Printer specifications
● Printer dimensions
● Printer space requirements
● Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions
● Certificate of Volatility
ENWW 1787
Printer dimensions
1788 Appendix A Appendix: Printer specifications ENWW

Printer space requirements
HP recommends that 30 mm (1.81 in) be added to the printer dimensions provided in this chapter to make sure
there is sufficient space to open doors and covers, and to provide proper ventilation. See {Xref Error! Target does
not exist.} .
ENWW Printer space requirements 1789

Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions
See www.hp.com/support/colorlje87600mfpwww.hp.com/support/colorlje82500mfp for current information.
CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not convert
operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.

Certificate of Volatility
ENWW Certificate of Volatility 1791

Glossary
802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN
Standards Committee (IEEE 802).
802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n
supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens,
cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
Access point
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on
wireless local area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals.
ADF
An document feeder is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the printer can scan
some amount of the paper at once.
BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image.
Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible colors
becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white.
BMP
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a
simple graphics file format on that platform.
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done
in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign the IP address
from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to
loading any advanced operating system.
CCD
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD
module to prevent any damage when you move the printer.
Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before
printing additional copies.
Control Panel
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically
found in front of the printer.
ENWW Glossary 1793

Coverage
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided
paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage
will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage.
CSV
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications. The file
format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft
platforms.
Default
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized.
DHCP
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration
parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to participate on
an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.
DIMM
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all the data within the printer like
printing data, received fax data.
DLNA
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on a home network to share information with
each other across the network.
DNS
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database
on networks, such as the Internet.
Dot Matrix Printer

A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by
impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a
higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.
DRPD
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single
telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.
Duplex
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the printer can print (or scan) on both sides of the
paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle.
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan
limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period.
For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
ECM
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It
automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line
noise.
1794 Glossary ENWW

Emulation
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first
system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an
abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling
for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model.
Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s
to the present.
EtherTalk
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original Mac (1984) and is
now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
FDI
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the printer to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device
or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your printer.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP
protocol (such as the Internet or an intranet).
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller. After
toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper
permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a
computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network.
Grayscal
A shade of gray that represents light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale; colors
are represented by various shades of gray.
Halftone
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of
dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization for the
advancement of technology related to electricity.
IEEE 1284
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term
"1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a
printer).
Intranet
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication system to
securely share part of an organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the term refers only to
the most visible service, the internal website.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other
on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.
ENWW Glossary 1795

IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided
sheets a printer can complete within one minute.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs, media size,
resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access
control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones.
IPX/SPX
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell
NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having
similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a
very efficient protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of
representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.
ITU-T
The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate
international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and
organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T
indicates telecommunication.
ITU-T No. 1 chart

Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions.
JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was
designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic
images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.
LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services
running over TCP/IP.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a printer.
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit
identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually
hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines
on large networks.
Mass storage device

Mass storage device, commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a nonvolatile storage device which stores
digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
MFP
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office printer that includes the following functionality in one physical body, so as to
have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.
1796 Glossary ENWW

MH
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between
the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length encoding scheme
optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission
time of most faxes.
MMR
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITUT T.6.
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode
transmitted information.
MR
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The
next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and transmitted.
NetWare
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a
PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as
IPX/SPX.
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser
printer, and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape.
An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer, and it should be replaced
appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper.
OPE unit
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to
produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else.
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for
communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex
functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation,
Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.
PABX
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has
become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying levels for
thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional
documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.
PostScript
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop
publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
ENWW Glossary 1797

PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of
pages a printer can produce in one minute.
Print Media
The media like paper, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.
PRN file
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input/output system
calls, which simplifies many tasks.
Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two
computing endpoints.
PS
See PostScript.
PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks
which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS
enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA (authentication,
authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network access.
Resolution
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.
SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous
communications between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication mechanism.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively
simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is
transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.
SSID
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same
SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network
address and which part is the host address.
TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications protocols that implement
the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications protocols that implement
the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.
1798 Glossary ENWW

TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data that typically
come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in
the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image
processing applications.
Toner Cartridge
A kind of bottle or container used in a printer like a printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and
photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by a combination of heat/pressure
from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.
TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a
scan can be initiated from within the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac operating
systems.
UNC Path
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products.
The format of a UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>
URL
>: Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet. The first part of the
address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is
located.
USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers
and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple
peripherals.
Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks
were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and also on
postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting.
WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of
a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end
point to another.
WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP.
A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner.
WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to
improve upon the security features of WEP.
WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A shared key, or password, is
configured in the wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key
for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security.
WPS
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home network. If your wireless access point
supports WPS, you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer.
ENWW Glossary 1799

XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new document format, which
has benefits for portable document and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based specification,
based on a new print path and a vector-based device-independent document format.
1800 Glossary ENWW

Index
A bottom high-capacity input tray checklists

accelerator board 195 lift-up motor 771 after-service 135, 1197, 1587
after performing services 195 bottom high-capacity input tray preservice 135, 1196, 1587
before performing service 195 PCA 768 cleaning page 1081
introduction 195 bottom high-capacity input tray cleaning the flow ADF white bar and
post service test 196 pickup motor 765 CIS 140
remove the accelerator board bottom high-capacity input tray cleaning the flow document feeder
196 shaft motor 773 white bar and CIS 140
remove the formatter cover 196 bottom high-capacity input tray feed cleaning the paper dust stick 137
required tools 195 motor 762 cleaning the scan glass 139
unpack the replacement bottom high-capacity input tray lift-up clear paper jams 1083
assembly 197 motor 771 clearing original document jams
ADF pickup roller 183 bottom high-capacity input tray PCA 1083
ADF reverse roller 188 768 clearing paper jams 1087
after-service checklist 135, 1197, bottom high-capacity input tray pickup component test
1587 motor 765 special mode test 987
APS sensor 730 bottom high-capacity input tray shaft components
auto closing unit 369 motor 773 diagnostic tests 987
auto size sensor 440 buffer motor, gear, and sensor (M3) scanning system 73
removing and replacing 1409 connection diagrams 1169
B BYOD table control panel 208
blade motor (M19) card reader 151 after performing service 208
removing and replacing 1555 NFC kit 151 Backup/Restore menu 1080
booklet feed entrance motor (M13) before performing service 208
removing and replacing 1535 C Calibrate/Cleaning menu 1080
booklet finisher C fold motor (M20) Copy menu (MFP only) 1057
removing and replacing 1500 removing and replacing 1560 Fax menu (fax models only)
booklet finisher fold stopper unit Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control 1071
removing and replacing 1523 panel 1080 introduction 208
booklet finisher front cover card reader 149 messages, types of 1568, 1784
removing and replacing 1497 install 151 post service test 209
booklet finisher PCA cassette 45 Print menu 1075
removing and replacing 1511 cassette lift drive 64 remove the control panel 209
booklet tray caster cover (finisher) remove the control panel bezel
removing and replacing 1238 removing and replacing 1241 209
bottom high-capacity input tray (HCI) caution for moving the scanner 79 Reports menu 1010
unit cautions iii required tools 208
bottom high-capacity input tray CCDM PCA 112 Scan menu (MFP only) 1062
feed motor 762 Settings menu 1013
ENWW Index 1801

Supplies menu 1076 drive motors 67 event log 991
Trays menu 1077 feed drive 65 clear using touchscreen control
troubleshooting menu 1078 fuser release drive 67 panel 992
unpack the replacement main drive unit motor 69
assembly 210 output drive 67 F
USB Firmware Upgrade menu pickup drive 64 Fax menu (fax models only), control
1082 registration drive 66 panel 1071
control panel diagnostic flowcharts toner reservoir drive 70 feed 2 sensor 448
978 toner supply drive 70 feed drive 65
control panel menus 1010 dual cassette feeder 114 feed drive unit 408
controller PCA (finisher) dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor feed entrance motor (M1)
removing and replacing 1274 744 removing and replacing 1397
conventions, document iii dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA 750 feed exit motor (M2)
Copy menu (MFP only), control dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup removing and replacing 1403
panel 1057 motor 748 feed roller
copy specifications 17 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup MP 178
CRUM connector 319 units 753 multipurpose 178
CST lock diagram 1174 dual cassette feeder (DCF) right feeding system 40
current settings pages 991 door 738 cassette 45
dual cassette feeder (DCF) unit 737 main components and functions
D dual cassette feeder (DCF) 41
DCF 114 motor 744, 748 MP feeder assembly 47
defeating dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA overview 40
interlocks 985 750 pickup unit 46
determine problem source 974 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup registration unit 46
developer fan 287 units 753 rollers 41
developer unit 55, 162 dual cassette feeder (DCF) right sensor, motor, and solenoid 43
diagnostics door 738 feeding system information 40
adjustment 1122 dummy feed guide FIH
component 987 removing and replacing 1292 HP Foreign interface harness (FIH)
engine 985, 1103 duplex 1 sensor 522 solution, install 147
fax 1113 finisher sectional view 1182
image management 1128 E finisher system 1182
LED 983 each unit functions diagrams 1569
print test patterns 1128 finisher system 1192 each unit functions 1192
scanner 1118 ejector unit electrical parts layout 1187
diagram removing and replacing 1322 finisher sectional view 1182
fuser 1170 electrical parts layout paper path 1186
HVPS/LVPS/FDB 1175 finisher system layout 1187 PCA connection information
laser scanner assembly 1172 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 7, 1193
OPC 1174 1181, 1575 flatbed scanner system
scanner 1171 engine overview 71
side/MP/feed/registration/pickup diagnostics 985 flow ADF 643
1173 eraser PCA 108 contact image sensor (CIS) 660
diagrams 1169 error messages contact image sensor (CIS) fan
finisher system 1569 types of 1568, 1784 684
document conventions iii ESD electrostatic discharge (ESD) 7, document feeder PCA fan 681
document feeder pickup 183 1181, 1575 front motor 667
drive system 64 input tray 653
cassette lift drive 64 jam access cover 647
1802 Index ENWW

rear motors 671 front tamper motor (M6) hardware integration pocket (HIP) is
ultrasonic sensor with PCA 687 removing and replacing 1417 not functioning 983
white backing 693 front tamper unit HCI 118
whole unit 643 removing and replacing 1347 high capacity input tray 118
flow ADF PCA 110 front top inner cover 221 high voltage power supply (HVPS)
folding roller motor (M18) fuser diagram 1170 board 299
removing and replacing 1549 fuser drive assembly 105 high voltage power supply PCA 106
formatter 204 fuser drive board 345 high voltage terminal 631
after performing service 204 fuser drive unit 374 high-capacity input tray (HCI) unit
before performing service 204 fuser fan 349 761
introduction 204 fuser out sensor 442 home button is unresponsive 982
post service test 205 fuser PCA 109 HP Foreign interface harness (FIH),
remove the accelerator board fuser release drive 67 install 147
205 fuser unit 49, 166 HP Jetdirect print server
remove the formatter PCA 206 fuser unit drive 50 lights 983
remove the hard-disk drive 206 overview 49 HVPS PCA 106
required tools 204 temperature control 50 HVPS/LVPS/FDB diagram 1175
unpack the replacement fuser unit drive 50
assembly 207 fuser unit temperature control 50 I
formatter cover 192 image creation 53
after performing service 192 G imaging unit 53
before performing service 192 General Settings menu, control overview 53
introduction 192 panel 1013 paper transfer belt unit 57
post service test 193 general specifications 11 toner cartridge 56
remove the formatter cover 193 image quality
required tools 192 H black lines, vertical 1135
unpack the replacement hard disk drive (HDD) 607 blurred image 1139
assembly 193 hardware configuration 89 foggy image 1140
formatter hard disk drive 201 CCDM PCA 112 jitter image 1141
after performing service 201 eraser PCA 108 light image 1141
before performing service 201 flow ADF PCA 110 light lines, vertical 1136
introduction 201 fuser drive assembly 105 periodic black dots, horizontal
post service test 202 fuser PCA 109 1137
remove the formatter cover 202 high voltage power supply PCA periodic black lines, horizontal
remove the hard disk drive 202 106 1137
required tools 201 low voltage power supply PCA periodic light/dark dots,
unpack the replacement (Type 3) 102 horizontal 1138
assembly 203 low voltage power supply PCA periodic light/dark lines,
formatter lights 983 (Type 4) 104 horizontal 1138
front cover 262 low voltage power supply PCA poor fusing 1143
open sensor 272 (Type 5) 100 skewed image 1143
front cover (finisher) LVPS PCA (Type 3) 102 stain on back side 1144
removing and replacing 1221 LVPS PCA (Type 4) 104 standard tone, setting 1145
front cover open sensor 272 LVPS PCA (Type 5) 100 uneven pitch 1141
front door (finisher) main controller 92 white lines, vertical 1136
removing and replacing 1209 master system operation key 99 image scanner unit 696
front lower cover (finisher) scan joint PCA 111 imaging drum unit 159
removing and replacing 1229 WLED IF PCA 113 imaging unit 53
front power cover 223 WLED PCA 113 developer unit 55
front power switch 226 overview 53
ENWW Index 1803

individual component diagnostics intermediate paper transport unit left cover 238
983 217 left rear corner cover 248
inductor unit 364 after performing service 217 lights
information before performing service 217 formatter 983
general 1101 introduction 217 troubleshooting with 983
print reports 1102 post service test 218 low voltage power supply (LVPS) board
software version 1101 remove the IPTU 218 1
supply status 1101 required tools 217 LVPS board 1 332
inner finisher unpack the replacement low voltage power supply (LVPS) board
block diagram 1785 asembly 218 2
door switch 1772 interpret control-panel messages and LVPS board 2 336
ejector assembly 1755 event log entries 1568, 1784 low voltage power supply (LVPS) board
ejector motor assembly 1735 IOD 198 3
end fence home sensor 1781 IPTU 217 LVPS board 3 340
entrance motor 1594 island of data 198 low voltage power supply (LVPS)
entrance sensor 1590 after performing service 198 cover 279
exit motor 1605 before performing service 198 low voltage power supply (LVPS)
exit sensor 1600 introduction 198 fans 328
front jogger home sensor 1624 post service test 199 low voltage power supply PCA (Type
front jogger motor 1612 remove the formatter cover 199 3) 102
main paddle 1753 remove the island of data 199 low voltage power supply PCA (Type
main paddle home sensor 1751 required tools 198 4) 104
main paddle motor 1749 unpack the replacement low voltage power supply PCA (Type
paper holding lever solenoid assembly 200 5) 100
1706 lower rear cover 241
paper support home sensor J lower shield assembly
1723 Jetdirect print server removing and replacing 1245
paper support motor 1714 lights 983 LVPS board 1 332
punch dust full sensor 1767 LVPS board 2 336
rear jogger home sensor 1645 K LVPS board 3 340
rear jogger motor 1636 keyboard (z bundles) 212 LVPS PCA (Type 3) 102
remove and replace 1589 after performing service 212 LVPS PCA (Type 4) 104
stack beam sensor 1691 before performing service 212 LVPS PCA (Type 5) 100
stack position sensor 1696 introduction 212
stacker encoder sensor 1677 post service test 213 M
stacker lower limit switch 1684 remove the control-panel 213 machine cleaning for maintenance
stacker motor 1670 remove the control-panel bezel 137
stapler 1651 213 cleaning the flow ADF white bar
stapler position sensor remove the keyboard 214 and CIS 140
assembly 1654 required tools 212 cleaning the flow document feeder
sub paddle shaft sub assembly unpack the replacement white bar and CIS 140
1608 assembly 215 cleaning the paper dust stick 137
top door switch 1776 cleaning the scan glass 139
traverse motor 1665 L machine external view 37
inner front cover 265 laser scanner assembly 61, 283 front view 37
install laser scanning optical path 62 inner view 39
HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) overview 61 rear view 38
solution 147 laser scanner assembly diagram main board 303
interlocks 1172 main controller
defeating 985 LED lamp module 710 hardware configuration 92
LEDs. See lights
1804 Index ENWW

new model (IR/UI) 96 other errors entrance motor (finisher) 894
previous model 92 drive unit 1156 FD stopper unit (finisher) 898
main drive unit 356 electrical circuit 1158 finisher sub 1 924
main tray moving motor (M11) feeding system 1156 finisher sub 7 926
removing and replacing 1487 flow ADF 1153 finisher sub 8 928
maintenance 137 fuser 1151 finisher sub booklet 918
machine cleaning for image system 1148 first cassette 800
maintenance 137 laser scanner assembly 1158 Flow ADF 826
maintenance counts scanner 1153 Flow ADF image scanner 836
part replacement count 1102 output 1 bin full sensor 532 Flow ADF main 834
maintenance parts 20 output bin 231 Flow ADF open cover 828
master system operation key 99 output drive 67 flow ADF pickup roller assembly
menu map 991 output drive unit 374 830
menus, control panel output gate solenoid 544 Flow ADF stacker 832
Calibrate/Cleaning 1080 output unit 503 fold roller (finisher) 900
Copy (MFP only) 1057 duplex 1 sensor 522 front alignment (tamper)
Fax (fax models only) 1071 output 1 bin full sensor 532 (finisher) 910
General Settings 1013 output gate solenoid 544 hb motor (finisher) 890, 908
Manage Trays 1077 return sensor 512 HCI cassette 856
Print 1075 HCI drive 854
Reports 1010 P HCI frame 858
Scan (MFP only) 1062 paper dust brush 259 HCI main 852
Supplies 1076 paper handling specifications 22 HCI main pickup 860
messages paper path High capacity input tray (HCI) 852
types of 1568, 1784 finisher system 1186 High capacity input tray side unit
MP drive unit 408 paper transfer belt 169 (sHCI) 862
MP empty sensor 466 paper transfer belt unit 57 idle fold (finisher) 916
MP paper length sensor 478 cleaning blade 59 idle fold paddle(finisher) 916
MP solenoid 490 overview 57 inner finisher 922
MP unit 455 transfer belt drive 58 IPTU (bridge) 920
MSOK 99 parts and accessories 1197, 1588 jam clear (finisher) 898
multipurpose feeder assembly 47 parts and diagrams 791 low ADF image scanner, lower
alignment (finisher) 894 838
N BKT main blade (finisher) 898 low output (finisher) 890
network and software specifications booklet finisher 874 low paddle (finisher) 894
28 cover 814 main assembly 1 794
network interface 28 cover f bm (finisher) 916 main assembly 2 796
NFC kit 149 curl pawl (finisher) 888 main blade (finisher) 900
install 151 curl pawl motor (finisher) 888 main frame assembly 804
no control panel sound 981 DCF frame 844 main frame pickup 812
notes iii DCF main 842 main frame pickup 1 810
DCF rear frame 846 main frame pickup 2 810
O DCF second pickup 850 main frame registration 806
OPC diagram 1174 div cam (finisher) 908 main output (finisher) 906
OPE diagram 1172 door (finisher) 904 main parts 794
option specifications 33 drive buffer (finisher) 896 mainline finisher 1 876
optional configurations 31 drive system 808 mainline finisher 2 878
options list 32 Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 842 mainline finisher 3 880
ordering 1197, 1588 entrance guide (finisher) 892, mainline finisher 4 882
906 mainline finisher 5 884
ENWW Index 1805

mainline finisher 6 886 MP 178 registration pickup diagram 1173
mid jam (finisher) 906 multipurpose 178 registration sensor assembly 620
MP tray 818 pickup unit 46 registration unit 46
Opt feed drive (DCF) 848 pickup unit 1 577 removal and replacement
output 798 pickup lifting and empty sensor bottom high-capacity input (HCI)
paddle motor (finisher) 894, 908 586 tray 761
PCB bm (finisher) 916 prefeed sensor 1 596 dual cassette feeder (DCF) unit
pickup cover unit (sHCI) 870 pickup unit 2 554 737
PTB transfer 824 pickup lifting and empty sensor replacing the main SVC part 220
rear alignment (tamper) 561 right top cover (finisher) 1202
(finisher) 912 prefeed sensor 2 569 side high capacity input (sHCI)
registration guide (finisher) 904 plastic latches information 134, 775
reservoir 840 1196, 1587 removal and replacement
right door 816 post-service tests 135, 1197, 1587 precautions 133, 1195, 1586
right door guide 820 power subsystem 974 removal and replacement
right door output 822 power supply procedures 142
right door takeaway 822 troubleshooting 974 replacement of maintenance
right jam (finisher) 908 power-on troubleshooting overview parts 156
SCU motor (finisher) 892 974 removal order
second cassette 802 pre-boot menu options 993 removing order 136
sHCI frame 872 precations remove and replace
sHCI main 1 862 information 133, 1195, 1586 inner finisher 1589
sHCI main 3 864 prefeed sensor 1 596 removing and replacing
sHCI main 5 866 prefeed sensor 2 569 blade motor (M19) 1555
sHCI main 6 868 preservice checklist 135, 1196, booklet feed entrance motor
shield (finisher) 914 1587 (M13) 1535
STK motor (finisher) 892 Print menu, control panel 1075 booklet finisher 1500
sub-inner finisher 922 print quality booklet finisher fold stopper unit
three fold blade (finisher) 902 test 135, 1197, 1587 1523
three fold motor (finisher) 888 print quality troubleshooting 1132 booklet finisher front cover 1497
three fold output (finisher) 888 flow ADF skew adjust 1164 booklet finisher PCA 1511
top cover (finisher) 904 image quality 1132 booklet tray 1238
top door (finisher) 904 other errors 1148 buffer motor, gear, and sensor
top frame (finisher) 900 print specifications 13 (M3) 1409
top guide (finisher) 890 Print Test Page 1027 C fold motor (M20) 1560
top jam (finisher) 896 problem-solving caster cover (finisher) 1241
top lower (finisher) 896 messages, types of 1568, 1784 controller PCA (finisher) 1274
transfer buffer (finisher) 908 Process Cleaning Page 1081 dummy feed guide 1292
PCA connection information product overview 10 ejector unit 1322
finisher system 1193 feed entrance motor (M1) 1397
PCA precautions 134, 1195, 1586 R feed exit motor (M2) 1403
pick/feed separation roller 174 rear cover (finisher) folding roller motor (M18) 1549
pickup drive 64 removing and replacing 1216 front cover (finisher) 1221
pickup drive unit 1 399 rear tamper motor (M7) front door (finisher 1209
pickup drive unit 2 404 removing and replacing 1443 front lowercover (finisher) 1229
pickup lifting and empty sensor 561, rear tamper unit front tamper motor (M6) 1417
586 removing and replacing 1372 front tamper unit 1347
pickup roller registration assembly 611 lower shield assembly 1245
ADF 183 registration drive 66 main tray moving motor (M11)
registration drive assembly 416 1487
1806 Index ENWW

rear cover (finisher) 1216 intermediate paper transport right rear cover 251
rear tamper motor (M7) 1443 unit 217 right top cover (finisher)
rear tamper unit 1372 laser scanner assembly 283 removal and replacement 1202
SCU motor (M10) 1469 left cover 238
separate pawl motor (M17) 1546 left rear corner cover 248 S
stapler unit 1280 low voltage power supply (LVPS) scan glass 708
stopper moving motor (M16) cover 279 scan joint board 722
1541 low voltage power supply (LVPS) scan joint PCA 111
TE presser motor (M14) 1538 fans 328 Scan menu (MFP only), control panel
top cover (finisher) 1205 lower rear cover 241 1062
top jam access cover 1298 main board 303 scan specifications 16
top lower feed assembly 1309 main drive unit 356 scanner
top output bin 1200 MP drive unit 408 caution for moving 79
upper shield assembly 1258 output bin 231 imaging unit 718
removing parts output drive unit 374 scan glass 708
checklists 135, 1196, 1587 output unit 503 scan joint board 722
replacement of maintenance parts paper dust brush 259 scanner diagram 1171
156 pickup drive unit 1 399 scanner imaging unit 718
developer unit 162 pickup drive unit 2 404 scanner unit
flow ADF pickup roller assembly pickup unit 1 577 image scanner 696
183 pickup unit 2 554 scanning system
flow ADF separation roller registration assembly 611 components 73
assembly 188 registration drive assembly 416 scanning system components 73
fuser unit 166 registration sensor assembly SCU motor (M10)
imaging drum unit 159 620 removing and replacing 1469
multipurpose (MP) tray pickup/ reservoir unit 428 separate pawl motor (M17)
reverse/feed roller 178 right door 254 removing and replacing 1546
paper transfer belt 169 right door open sensor 382 service and support information
pick/feed separation roller 174 right rear cover 251 133, 792, 793
toner collection unit 157 toner collection unit (TCU) service approach 133, 1195, 1586
replacing the main SVC part 220 sensors 420 service functions
auto closing unit 369 toner supply drive unit 311 capture log 1129
CRUM connector 319 top right cover 234 debug log 1129
developer fan 287 upper rear cover 244 envelope rotate 1130
feed 2 sensor 448 Reports menu, control panel 1010 main memory clear 1129
feed drive unit 408 reservoir unit 428 transfer assembly control 1130
front cover 262 return sensor 512 service mode 1096
front power cover 223 reverse roller diagnostics 1103
front power switch 226 ADF 188 entering service mode 1096
front top inner cover 221 MP 178 information 1101
fuser drive board 345 multipurpose 178 maintenance counts 1102
fuser drive unit 374 right door 254 mode menu tree 1097
fuser fan 349 fuser out sensor 442 service functions 1129
hard disk drive (HDD) 607 MP empty sensor 466 sHCI 122, 775
high voltage power supply (HVPS) MP paper length sensor 478 side high capacity input (sHCI) 775
board 299 MP solenoid 490 feed motor 778
high voltage terminal 631 MP unit 455 lift-up motor 788
inductor unit 364 open switch 390 pickup motor 782
inner front cover 265 right door open sensor 382 rear cover 776
right door open switch 390 sHCI PCA 785
ENWW Index 1807

side high capacity input tray 122 touchscreen has an unresponsive
size sensor 440 zone 980
software and solutions 29 tray selection - use requested tray
specifications 11 1028
copy specifications 17 Trays menu, control panel 1077
general specifications 11 troubleshooting
maintenance parts 20 checklist 988
network interface 28 control panel checks 978
network specifications 28 lights, using 983
options 31 power 974
options list 32 process 974
paper handling specifications 22 trusted platform module
print specifications 13 removing and replacing 143
scan specifications 16 trusted platform module, removing
software and solutions 29 and replacing 143
software specifications 28
supplies 19 U
stapler unit understand lights on the formatter
removing and replacing 1280 formatter lights 983
static, precautions for 7, 1181, 1575 understand the lights on the formatter
status HP Jetdirect LEDs 984
messages, types of 1568, 1784 upper rear cover 244
stopper moving motor (M16) upper shield assembly
removing and replacing 1541 removing and replacing 1258
supplies 1197, 1588 USB diagram 1172
Supplies menu, control panel 1076 Use Requested Tray 1028
T W
TE presser motor (M14) warnings iii
removing and replacing 1538 WLED IF PCA 113
tests WLED PCA 113
post-service 135, 1197, 1587 working table
print-quality 135, 1197, 1587 card reader 151
tips iii NFC kit 151
toner cartridge 56 WTB diagram 1174
toner collection unit 157
toner collection unit (TCU) sensors
420
toner supply drive unit 311
top cover (finisher)
removing and replacing 1205
top jam access cover
top lower feed assembly
top output bin
top right cover 234
touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no
image) 979
1808 Index ENWW

HP-LaserJet E825xx, Service Enww PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP-LaserJet E825xx, Service Enww PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP-LaserJet E825xx, Service Enww PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560

© Copyright 2017 HP Development Company, Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP, and

The only warranties for HP products and

NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

2 Product specifications and description ................................................................................................................................................. 9

3 Removal and replacement ................................................................................................................................................................. 127

4 Parts and diagrams .............................................................................................................................................................................. 791

5 Problem solving ................................................................................................................................................................................... 973

6 Diagrams ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1169

7 3,250-sheet Stapling Finisher/2,250-sheet Booklet Finisher ................................................................................................... 1177

8 Inner finisher ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1571

Appendix A Appendix: Printer specifications .................................................................................................................................... 1787

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1793

Index ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1801

Table 2-1 General specifications .......................................................................................................................................................... 11

Figure 2-1 Options .................................................................................................................................................................................. 31

● Caution for safety

2. Use HP replacement parts.

3. Laser Safety Statement.

– Maximum power of energy output: 12 mW

4. Lithium battery not replaceable by user.

2 Chapter 1 Precautions ENWW

Electric shock and fire safety precautions

6. Use caution when plugging or unplugging the power cable.

ENWW Caution for safety 3

4 Chapter 1 Precautions ENWW

Removal and Replacement precautions

3. Disconnect interface cables and power cables.

7. Be careful when handling the OPC drum:

Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury

ENWW Caution for safety 5

2. Keep fingers, hair, and clothes away from moving parts.

3. Use safe lifting and handling techniques to move the printer.

4. Make sure the printer is installed safely.

6 Chapter 1 Precautions ENWW

ENWW ESD precautions 7

● Machine external view

● Laser scanner assembly

● Flatbed Scanner System

● Flow Automatic Document Feeder (Flow ADF) dn/z bundles (GX)

● Dual cassette feeder (DCF)

● High capacity input tray (HCI)

● Side high capacity input tray (sHCI)

– Quad Core 1.5 GHz

– 8 inch touch screen

10 Chapter 2 Product specifications and description ENWW

Processor CPU 1.5 GHz (Quad Core)

User Interface Operational Panel 8 inch touch screen

Memory Total 7 GB (3 GB Formatter + 4 GB)

Storage Standard 320 GB HDD

Interface USB (Host) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 3.0, 2.0)

USB (Device) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 3.0, 2.0)

USB (EDI) N/A

Wired LAN Standard (Ethernet 10/100/1G Base TX)

Additional Wired LAN Support Yes (optional)

Wireless LAN/NFC ● Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n + NFC

● Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n/ac + BLE +

Warmup Time From Power off (power on to ready) 23 sec